Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual v6 3 0l 2008

Factory Workshop Manual
Make
Ford
Model
Escape 4wd
Engine and year
V6-3.0L (2008)
Please navigate through the PDF using the options

provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar.
This manual was submitted by

Anonymous
Date
1st January 2018
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8
Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES
FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape,
Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their
SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be
able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their
personal device.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation.
2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is
still present, the device is the concern. Continue with
normal WSM Diagnostics.
NOTE
PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY
MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO
SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN
THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Defaults To
'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
personal device.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations
View 151-25
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 25
C4014
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 26
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
PARKING AID MODULE
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Remove the
2 screws and the parking aid module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay
View 151-16
Component Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay > Page 32
View 151-17
Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver
C3250
Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 35
C3251
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver
Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Driver
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 38
Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Passenger
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations
View 151-1
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 43
Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams
C155 (Part 1)
C155 (Part 2)
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module
Material
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. The anti-lock brake system
(ABS) module can be damaged if exposed to these charges.
NOTE: Do not swap ABS modules between vehicles, the ABS module and the hydraulic control
unit (HCU) are calibrated as an assembly.
1. Remove the HCU. 2. Remove the jumper tube assembly bracket nut.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-inch).
3. Disconnect the jumper tubes fittings from the HCU and remove the jumper tube assembly.
^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft).
4. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Configure the ABS module.
7. NOTE: Vehicle must be on level ground and at a complete stand still during calibration.
Calibrate the ABS module. Follow the instructions on the scan tool.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 52
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 53
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 56
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 57
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Relay
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 62
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CLUTCH RELAY (A/CCR)
NOTE: The PCM PIDs WAC and wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff fault (WACF) are used to
monitor the A/CCR output.
The A/CCR is wired normally open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch
or electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module and the A/C clutch. The PCM receives
a signal indicating that A/C is requested. For some applications, this message is sent through the
communications network. When A/C is requested, the PCM checks other A/C related inputs that
are available, such as A/C pressure switch and A/C cycling switch. If these inputs indicate A/C
operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (coolant temperature, engine RPM, throttle
position), the PCM grounds the A/CCR output, closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to
the A/CCR.
Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module
View 151-13
Information > Locations > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module > Page 72
View 151-13
Information > Diagrams > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module
Control Module HVAC: Diagrams Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module
C2356A
Information > Diagrams > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module > Page 75
C2356B
Control Module HVAC: Diagrams Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) Module
C2357A
C2357B
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: >
08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius
Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Temperature Display - Toggles From
Fahrenheit To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08
FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display
in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9
and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal
Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status
Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock
Status
TSB 08-19-2
09/29/08
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER / MESSAGE CENTER - AUTOLOCK / AUTOUNLOCK / AUTOLAMP

DISPLAY INCORRECT STATUS / MISSING
FORD: 2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape
MERCURY: 2008 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 08-15-5 to update the Issue Statement and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 Escape, Mariner and Escape/Mariner Hybrid vehicles built, on or before
6/17/2008 and equipped with a message center instrument cluster may exhibit Autolock /
Autounlock / Autolamp exit delay time features that falsely display "Off" regardless of actual feature
On/Off status. Any one of these features changed individually may cause the remaining untouched
features to default to actual "Off' status. In some vehicles the Autolock / Autounlock feature may
not display at all in the message center.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. If the Autolock or Autounlock feature is not displayed in the message center when toggling
through the setup, it will need to be enabled using the IDS. If the Autolock or Autounlock features
are displayed in the message center skip to Step 2.
a. Connect the Ford Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) service tool to the data link connector
(DLC).
b. ID the vehicle.
c. Select the toolbox.
d. Select Module Programming.
e. Select Programmable Parameters.
f. Select Power Door Locks.
g. Select Enable for each Autolock / Autounlock selection.
2. Reprogram the instrument cluster to the latest calibration using IDS release B56.8 and higher or
IDS release B57.1 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.7 DVD.
Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
081902A 2008 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not
Required. Includes Time To Enable Autolock Display. (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D,
12651D4)
08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status > Page 91
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel
Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Temperature Display - Toggles
From Fahrenheit To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08

082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Control Module: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Incorrect
Autolock/Autounlock Status
TSB 08-19-2
09/29/08

SERVICE PROCEDURE
(DLC).
b. ID the vehicle.
12651D4)
Control Module: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status > Page 101
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 106
Backup Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Parking Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Left Turn Relay
Component Information > Locations > Left Turn Relay > Page 115
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Turn Relay
Turn Signal Relay: Testing and Inspection Left Turn Relay
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Turn Relay > Page 118
Turn Signal Relay: Testing and Inspection Right Turn Relay
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB)
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Removal
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage may result.
NOTE:
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 129
- The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module (GEM).
- Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration
information to the appropriate scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new module
after installation.
- The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB/GEM.
- The steps included in the SJB/GEM removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the
vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB/GEM is
delivered in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs,
successful configuration of the SJB/GEM must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor
training, and a successful self-test, including clearing of the DTCs. The DTCs are as follows: -
B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured)
- B2477 (Module Configuration Failure)
- B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State)
1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB/GEM is being replaced.
Upload the module configuration information from the SJB/GEM.
2. Remove the floor console SJB/GEM cover. 3. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel
from the floor console finish panel. 4. Apply the parking brake. 5. Remove the parking brake lever
boot from the floor console finish panel. 6. Remove the floor console finish panel. 7. Disconnect the
7 electrical connectors. 8. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB/GEM.
Installation
1. Install the SJB/GEM.
- Install the 2 bolts.
- Connect the 7 electrical connectors.
2. Install the floor console finish panel. 3. Install the parking brake lever boot into the floor console
finish panel. 4. Release the parking brake. 5. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the
floor console finish panel.
6. NOTE: If the SJB/GEM was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary.
Install the floor console SJB/GEM cover.
7. NOTE:
- When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB/GEM operation and
clears DTCs B2477 and B106D. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has
been successfully downloaded to the new SJB/GEM.
- When successful, this step also programs the remote transmitter portion of the integrated
keyhead transmitter (IKT) keys into the new SJB. In the event the IKTs (remote transmitter portion
only) do not program to the new SJB, cycle each IKT key to the ON position for a minimum of 6
seconds. This action will program the remote transmitter portion of the IKT key into the new SJB.
Download the SJB/GEM configuration information from the scan tool.
8. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing
of these DTCs indicates the SJB/GEM has
recognized the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure.
Train the tire pressure sensors.
9. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB/GEM. When
successful, this step will clear the DTC C2780.
Carry out the SJB/GEM on-demand self-test by clearing DTCs, and then retrieving DTCs to confirm
all DTCs have been cleared.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box
Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of
the fuse cover to remove.
Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 134
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
C1035A
C1035B
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 139
C1035C
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
C2280A
C2280B (Part 1)
C2280B (Part 2)
C2280C
C2280D
C2280E
C2280F
C2280G
Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box
Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 150
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules -
Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
TORQUE BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC)
Overview
The torque based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque
(via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body, the
powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle
opening and engine torque.
Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and
later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque
during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM
and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver.
It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft
timing (VCT) (deliver same torque during transitions).
Torque based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with
smoother traction control.
Other benefits of ETC are: -
eliminate cruise control actuators
- eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve
- better airflow range
- packaging (no cable)
- more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality
The ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster
when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and
may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL).
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB)
The ETB has the following characteristics: -

The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2-wires).
- There are 2 designs: parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel
to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design has a
separate motor housing.
- An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The
default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle.
- The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore
(approximately 0.75 degree). This hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less
airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle.
- The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate
angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve.
- There is 1 reference voltage and 1 signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The
reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits
and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. There are also 2 TP signal circuits for
redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased monitoring reasons. The first TP
signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal
(TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The TP2 signal reaches a limit of
approximately 4.5 volts at approximately 45 degrees of throttle angle.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy
ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management (Part 1)
Operation > Page 158
ETC System With A 2-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation
The torque based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate
variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver
pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver
demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift
schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque.
The ETC monitor system is distributed across 2 processors within the PCM: the main powertrain
control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function
is carried out by the independent plausibility check (IPC) software, which resides on the main
processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an
estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a
specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken.
APP and TP Sensor Inputs
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check
Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output
Electronic TAC Operation Check

Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Engine Control Module: Locations
View 151-4
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 164
View 151-5
View 151-6
View 151-9
Engine Control Module: Diagrams
C175B (Part 1)
C175B (Part 2)
C175E (Part 1)
C175E (Part 2)
C175E (Part 3)
C175T (Part 1)
C175T (Part 2)
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Engine Control Module: Procedures
FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY (EEPROM)
Description
The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM).
The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle,
and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The
VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID
Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTCs PI635 or
P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware
or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure
properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle
ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID
Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items
used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification
number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the
presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual
shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID
block is displayed on the scan tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this
limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to
reset the VID block.
Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan
tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
A new PCM contains the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However, the
VID block is blank and needs programming. There are 2 procedures available. The first is an
automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, and the second is manual data entry
into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by
using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored
data can then be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed.
Carry out manual data entry if the old module is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove
and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter
programming, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all
parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile
equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF
may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center
for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center
only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury
technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website for
As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the
Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) homepage, use the search
function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data.
For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the
PTS website for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to
accommodate the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production, or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures >
Page 175
Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
Removal
1. NOTE: Any PCM replacement will require that ALL customer keys are available to be
programmed at the time of installation. PCM replacement
DOES NOT require new keys.
Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the
Programmable Module Installation procedure.
2. Remove the 2 PCM stud bolt nuts and position the wiring harness and the manifold absolute
pressure sensor aside. 3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 2 stud bolts
and the PCM.
Installation
1. Install the PCM and the 2 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
2. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 3. Position the manifold absolute pressure (MAP)
sensor and the wiring harness and install the 2 PCM stud bolt nuts.
4. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the
Programmable Module Installation procedure. 5. Reprogram the passive anti-theft system (PATS).
Carry out the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure.
Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 179
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 184
C4033
Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 188
Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection
Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 192
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Air Bag Control Module: Locations
View 151-13
View 151-22
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
C2041A
C2041B (Part 1)
C2041B (Part 2)
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
Removal
WARNING: -
Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control
module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious
personal injury or death.
- If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact
sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the
original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air
bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
- To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
CAUTION: -
Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage
can result.
- When installing a new restraints control module (RCM), it is necessary to carry out programmable
module installation (PMI). Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage
and/or system failure.
NOTE: -
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraint control module (RCM) fuse is removed
and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
- When installing a new RCM, always make sure the correct RCM is being installed. If an incorrect
RCM is installed, erroneous DTCs will result.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
1. If installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to prepare for programmable module
installation (PMI). 2. Depower the SRS.
3. Remove the center console. 4. Remove the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel.
- Remove the pin-type retainer.
- Release the 2 retainer hooks from the instrument panel brace.
5. Position back the carpet on the LH and RH tunnel to access the RCM. 6. Disconnect the small
RCM electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector.
1 Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it
stops.
2 Pull out and disconnect the RCM electrical connector.
8. Remove the 3 bolts and RCM.
Installation
1. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
Install the RCM and 3 bolts. -
Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft).
2. Make sure the connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting
to connect the connector.
3. CAUTION: Putting the large restraints control module (RCM) electrical connector into the RCM
on an angle can cause bad electrical
connections and damage components.
Position the large RCM electrical connector into the RCM.
- CAUTION: Do not push the connector to the point where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light
pressure is needed to get the
connector into position on the restraints control module (RCM) before using the lever to fully seat
the connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system
failure.
With the large RCM electrical connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a subtle
audible click is heard and slight resistance is felt.
4. Connect the RCM electrical connector.
- Pivot the connector position assurance lever toward the RCM, drawing the connector in to the
RCM. -
Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place.
5. Connect the small RCM electrical connector. 6. Position back the carpet on the LH and RH
tunnel to its original position. 7. Install the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel.
- Attach the 2 retainer hooks to the instrument panel brace.
- Install the pin-type retainer.

8. Install the center console. 9. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time.
10. When installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to complete PMI. 11. Prove out the
SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition switch from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition switch back to ON
and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS
fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: -
fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch
has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to
complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a
chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and
any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification
Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification
Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 208
C3285
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules -
Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Steering Control Module: Locations
View 151-1
Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 219
View 151-13
Steering Control Module: Diagrams
C1463A
C1463B
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations
View 151-22
- Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 227
C3184
- Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 228
Control Module: Service and Repair
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Control Module
1. Remove the floor console. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Lift upward on the module to
release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the four wheel drive (4WD) control module. 4.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 233
Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
C4009
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 241
C4011
C4010
C4012
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 244
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair
PARKING AID SENSOR
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2. NOTE: The rear bumper cover removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid
sensors. The inner parking aid sensors do not require
rear bumper cover removal for access.
Remove the rear bumper cover.
3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid sensor.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Assist Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair
PARKING AID SWITCH
1. Remove the lower instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Press the retaining tabs and remove
the parking aid switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Driver Side
View 151-18
Component Information > Locations > Driver Side > Page 253
View 151-19
Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side
C505
Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 256
C605
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 257
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection
Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair
DOOR LOCK CONTROL SWITCH
1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Release the tabs and remove the door lock control switch.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
View 151-18
C527
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair
EXTERIOR MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH
1. Remove the LH sail panel.
2. Remove the exterior mirror control switch.
- Press the 2 retaining tabs.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
View 151-16
C352
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
C4039
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair

SEAT CONTROL SWITCH
Exploded View
Seat Backrest - Front (Part 1)

Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 277
Seat Cushion - Driver (Part 1)

Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger (Part 1)
1. Remove the recliner handle cover. 2. Remove the seat control switch knob. 3. Remove the 3
screws and the outboard front seat side cushion shield.
- Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the seat control switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Locations
View 151-26
> Component Information > Locations > Page 284
C912
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch
View 151-21
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch
C478
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 >
Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Customer Interest Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
TSB 10-5-1
03/29/10
LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN

PARKED - INTERMITTENT
FORD: 2008-2009 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner

ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the
liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This
may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics.
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05.
2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion
and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion
or corrosion present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional
diagnostics.
b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring
Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1.
Parts Block

Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 298
100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13412 12
Disclaimer
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 >
Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
TSB 10-5-1
03/29/10


SERVICE PROCEDURE
diagnostics.
Parts Block

Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 304
100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13412 12
Disclaimer
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 305
View 151-21
C456
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch
LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel
from the liftgate.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
- Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate release switch.

Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch > Page 309
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window
LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH - LIFTGATE WINDOW
from the liftgate.
- Disconnect the liftgate window release switch electrical connector.
- Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate window release switch.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > ABS Sensor
Block > Component Information > Locations
View 151-22
Block > Component Information > Locations > Page 314
C3296
Block > Component Information > Locations > Page 315
ABS Sensor Block: Service and Repair
Stability Control Sensor Cluster
WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with
high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the
appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with
the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for
high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the floor console.
3. NOTE: When installing the sensor cluster the electrical connector must face the passenger seat.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the 2 sensor cluster bolts.
5. Remove the stability control sensor cluster. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 319
C124
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral
Accelerometer > Component Information > Service and Repair
Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-22
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 326
C2015
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 327
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt.
2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and warning
indicator switch.
^ To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-inch).

Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control
Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-13
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 331
C2114
Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair
Stability/Traction Control Switch
1. Remove the lower instrument cluster center finish panel.
^ Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Depress the 4 tabs and remove the stability/traction control switch assembly.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front
View 151-2
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 337
View 151-24
View 151-25
View 151-2
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front
C150
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 342
C440
C160
C426
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
2. NOTE: The electrical connector is located in the engine compartment.

Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 347
3. CAUTION: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the
grommet is damaged, a new sensor may
need to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects.
Remove the grommet from the body. ^
When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a
small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body grommet. These 2 tabs are
located at right angles to the sensor wire.
4. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness from the retainer. 5. Remove the front wheel
speed sensor harness-to-body bolt.
6. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-strut bracket bolt.
7. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle.
8. NOTE: Clean off any foreign material that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the front wheel speed sensor.
9. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.

Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the grommet. These 2 tabs are located at
right angles to the sensor wire.
3. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the rear wheel speed
sensor harness from the harness retainer. 5. Remove the 3 rear wheel speed sensor harness bolts.
6. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the rear wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle. ^
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-inch).
7. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor.

Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front
1. The front wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the front halfshaft and cannot be repaired
separately.
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the rear wheel hub nut.
3. Remove the sensor ring from the wheel hub. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles
5. The rear wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the rear axle halfshaft and cannot be repaired
separately.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
FAN SPEED SENSOR (FSS)
Cooling Fan Clutch With FSS
The FSS is a Hall-effect sensor that measures the cooling fan clutch speed by generating a
waveform with a frequency proportional to the fan speed. If the cooling fan clutch is moving at a
relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the cooling fan clutch
speed increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the
frequency signal generated by the FSS as a feedback for closed loop control of the cooling fan
clutch.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-6
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 363
C1064
Page 364
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a

voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel
control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and
twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage.
Page 365
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor electrical
connector. 3. Remove the ECT sensor.
- Pull upward on the locking tab.
- Rotate the sensor counterclockwise and remove.

Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-9
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 369
C1164
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 370
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR
Typical CHT Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT
sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant
temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a
fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern
such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to
major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy,
the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch
View 151-22
> Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch > Page 376
View 151-22
> Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch
C277
> Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch > Page 379
C278
> Component Information > Diagrams > Page 380
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Typical BPP Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted
on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired
as follows: -
to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied.
- to the antilock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake Deactivator Switch
The BPS, also called the brake deactivator switch, is for vehicle speed control deactivation. A
normally closed switch supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is
not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is
removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed BPS, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used
for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be
disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not
changing states when they were expected to, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM
strategy.
> Component Information > Diagrams > Page 381
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair
SPEED CONTROL DEACTIVATOR SWITCH
CAUTION: Do not service the brake pedal, brake booster, or master cylinder without first removing
the speed control deactivator switch. Do not press or pull on the brake pedal when installing or
removing the speed control deactivator switch otherwise misadjustment or damage to the switch
may occur. Do not install the speed control deactivator switch without the brake pedal arm secured
to the brake booster push rod.
1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Rotate the speed control deactivator switch 45 degrees
counterclockwise to disengage it from the bracket. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control
> Component Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH
Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine
load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Actuator
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Actuator
SPEED CONTROL ACTUATOR
Removal
1. Press the locking tab and rotate the speed control cable cap to remove.
2. Disconnect the speed control cable from the speed control actuator pulley.
1 Gently push the retaining spring.
2 Disconnect the speed control cable slug from the speed control actuator pulley.
Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Actuator > Page 389
3. Remove the 3 speed control actuator screws and the speed control actuator.
Installation
CAUTION: A new speed control cable must be installed.
1. Install the speed control actuator and the 3 speed control actuator screws.
- Connect the electrical connector.
2. Insert the speed control cable slug into the speed control actuator pulley slot.
2 Insert the speed control cable slug completely into the speed control actuator pulley slot.
3. CAUTION:
- It is necessary to squarely seat the speed control cable cap and seal around the speed control
actuator pulley.
- Incorrect wrapping of the speed control cable around the speed control actuator pulley may result
in high idle conditions.
NOTE: Make sure the rubber seal is fully seated onto the speed control cable cap.
Align the speed control cable cap tabs with the slots in the speed control actuator housing.
4. Rotate the speed control cable cap until the locking tab engages.
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Switch
SPEED CONTROL SWITCH
Escape and Mariner Shown, Hybrid Similar
1. Remove the speed control switch by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Oil Pressure Sender: Locations
View 151-6
View 151-8
C103
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair

Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Material
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and
the RH lower splash shield.
^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. NOTE: Lubricate the engine oil filter gasket with clean engine oil prior to installing.
Remove the engine oil filter. ^
To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) and then rotate an additional 180 degrees.
4. Disconnect the engine oil pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector. 5. Remove the EOP
switch.
^ Apply Thread Sealant with PTFE to the EOP switch threads.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch,
Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (EOT) SENSOR
Typical EOT Sensor
The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance

The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the
following:
- On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control
gains and logic for camshaft timing.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil
degradation.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine
damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft
engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time,
the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch
HVAC > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 407
C132
Temperature Sensor - Ambient

Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Detach the ambient air temperature sensor electrical connector from the bumper. 2. Disconnect
and remove the ambient air temperature sensor. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Blower Motor Switch: > 07-26-5 > Dec > 07 > A/C - Blower
Motor Inoperative or Stuck on High
Blower Motor Switch: Customer Interest A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or Stuck on High
TSB 07-26-5
12/24/07
BLOWER MOTOR INOPERATIVE OR STUCK ON HIGH
FORD: 2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape, F-Super Duty
ISSUE Some 2008 F-Super Duty vehicles built before 12/14/2007, Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid
and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built before 12/17/2007 and equipped with electronic automatic
temperature control (EATC) may exhibit an inoperative blower motor or a blower motor that may
also shift to and remain at high, low or off speed. Cycling the ignition may return normal operation.
The concern may also occur when using the electrical power point.
ACTION Replace the Blower Motor Speed Control per Workshop Manual, Section 412-01.
Parts Block
072605A 2008 F-Super 0.3 Hr.
Duty/Escape/Escape Hybrid/Mariner/Mariner Hybrid With EATC: Replace The Blower Motor Speed
Control (Do Not Use With 19700D, 19700D8)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19E624 42
Disclaimer
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Blower Motor Switch: > 07-26-5 > Dec > 07 >
A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or Stuck on High
Blower Motor Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or Stuck on
High
TSB 07-26-5
12/24/07
Parts Block
072605A 2008 F-Super 0.3 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19E624 42
Disclaimer
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 423
View 151-23
C297
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL
1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Disconnect the blower motor speed control electrical
connector. 3. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control screws.
4. Remove the blower motor speed control. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch >
View 151-13
C233
Temperature Sensor - In-Vehicle

Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
IN-VEHICLE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR
1. CAUTION: Only position the instrument cluster finish panel away from the instrument panel
enough to detach the in-vehicle
temperature sensor without stressing the attached components. If the instrument cluster finish
panel is positioned too far away from the instrument panel, damage to the wire harness or
instrument cluster finish panel could result.
Detach the instrument cluster finish panel and position it away from the instrument panel to allow
access to the in-vehicle temperature sensor.
2. Release the 2 clips and detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and
humidity sensor. 3. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and
humidity sensor electrical connector. 4. Detach the aspirator hose from the venturi at the heater
core and evaporator core housing. 5. Detach the aspirator hose from the instrument panel. 6.
Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor.
7. NOTE: The venturi must be aligned correctly with the heater core and evaporator core housing
for installation. When installing the venturi, it
must be pressed into the heater core and evaporator core housing until an audible click is heard to
indicated that it is correctly attached.
Remove the venturi (if needed).

Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
EVAPORATOR DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
NOTE: A second (auxiliary) evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is used for the auxiliary
evaporator core on hybrid vehicles. For information concerning the auxiliary evaporator discharge
air temperature sensor, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor contains a thermistor. The resistance of this
thermistor varies by a specific amount based on the evaporator discharge air temperature. The
dual-zone EATC or EMTC module measures a voltage ratio between the reference voltage it
supplies to the sensor and the sensor return voltage to determine this resistance and the
associated discharge air temperature.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor maintains evaporator core temperature and
prevents icing of the evaporator core. It does this by signaling the HVAC module to switch off the
A/C request signal to the instrument cluster on 2.3L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles, or signaling the PCM to
cycle the A/C compressor off when the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor reading falls
below acceptable levels. The A/C request or A/C compressor will be switched back on when the
evaporator temperature rises above acceptable levels.
On hybrid vehicles, the A/C compressor will continue to run and the passenger zone valve will be
closed by the PCM if the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is reading a temperature
below acceptable levels, but the TBCM is requesting A/C operation for HVTB cooling. This allows
continued refrigerant flow to the auxiliary evaporator core while allowing the front (main) evaporator
core to warm to acceptable levels.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is located on the heater core and evaporator core
housing behind the glove compartment.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor /
View 151-23
C296
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE (ACET) SENSOR
A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance
The ACET sensor measures the evaporator air discharge temperature. The ACET sensor is a
thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a
thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the
temperature decreases. The PCM sources a low current 5 volts on the ACET circuit. With SIG RTN
also connected to the ACET sensor, the varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the
sensor terminals. As A/C evaporator air temperature changes, the varying resistance of the ACET
sensor changes the voltage the PCM detects.
The ACET sensor is used to more accurately control A/C clutch cycling, improve defrost/demist
performance, and reduce A/C clutch cycling.
NOTE: These values can vary 15% due to sensor and VREF variations. Voltage values were
calculated for VREF equals 5.0 volts.
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) EVAPORATOR DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Detach the instrument panel wire harness pin-type retainer and
position the wire harness away from the evaporator discharge air temperature
sensor.
3. Disconnect the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor electrical connector. 4. Gently
pry upward and remove the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor. 5. To install, reverse
the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Dual Pressure Switch
View 151-1
HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Dual Pressure Switch > Page 446
View 151-1
HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Pressure Switch
C1062
HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Pressure Switch > Page 449
C130
HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling
Switch
Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch
The A/C cycling switch may be wired to either the ACCS or ACPSW PCM input. When the A/C
cycling switch opens, the PCM turns off the A/C clutch. For information on the specific function of
the A/C cycling switch, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning, Climate Control System Air
Conditioning System Overview. Also, refer to the applicable Vehicle/Diagrams for vehicle specific
wiring.
If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate.
Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C is
requested. This information is received by the PCM through the communication link.
Air Conditioning (A/C) High Pressure Switch
The A/C high pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. The A/C high
pressure switch is either dual function for multiple speed, relay controlled electric fan applications,
or single function for all others.
For refrigerant containment control, the normally closed high pressure contacts open at a
predetermined A/C pressure. This results in the A/C turning off, preventing the A/C pressure from
rising to a level that would open the A/C high pressure relief valve.
For fan control, the normally open medium pressure contacts close at a predetermined A/C
pressure. This grounds the ACPSW circuit input to the PCM. The PCM then turns on the high
speed fan to help reduce the pressure.
For additional information, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning, Climate Control System, Air
Conditioning System Overview or Vehicle/Diagrams.
Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP) Transducer Sensor
A/C Pressure Transducer Sensor Output Voltage

HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 452
Typical ACP Transducer Sensor
The ACP transducer sensor is located in the high pressure (discharge) side of the A/C system. The
ACP transducer sensor provides a voltage signal to the PCM that is proportional to the A/C
pressure. The PCM uses this information for A/C clutch control, fan control and idle speed control.
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Dual-Function Pressure Switch
Dual-Function Pressure Switch
The dual-function pressure switch is located on the receiver drier and includes 2 separate sets of
contacts that are opened at 2 different pressures.
The first set of contacts in the dual-function pressure switch is used to interrupt A/C compressor
operation in the event of excessively high discharge pressure in the high-pressure side of the
refrigerant system. The PCM monitors the first set of contacts in the dual-function pressure switch
in-series with the low-charge protection switch. When the contacts are open, the PCM will
disengage the A/C compressor clutch.
The second set of contacts in the dual-function pressure switch is used by the PCM to engage the
high-speed cooling fan. The PCM monitors the second set of contacts through the A/C pressure
(ACP) circuit. When the A/C pressure rises above a preset level, the second set of contacts will
close and the high-speed cooling fan will be engaged.
The dual-function pressure switch is installed on a Schrader-type valve core fitting on the
receiver/drier. It is not necessary to recover the refrigerant to remove the dual-function pressure
switch.
Low-Charge Protection Switch

The low-charge protection switch is installed on the evaporator outlet line to cycle the A/C
compressor off in the event of a low refrigerant charge. The PCM monitors the low-charge
protection switch in-series with the dual-function pressure switch. When the low-side pressure
drops below acceptable levels, the low-charge protection switch contacts open. When the
low-charge protection switch contacts are open, the PCM will disengage the A/C compressor
clutch.
The low-charge protection switch is installed on a Schrader-type valve core fitting on the
evaporator outlet line. It is not necessary to recover the refrigerant to remove the low-charge
protection switch.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
View 151-13
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
C286
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component
View 151-21
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component
C479
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation
Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module

Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 467
The FP module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is
located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the
engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a
check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not
energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir
and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill.
Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir
The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check
valve that maintains the system pressure after the key has been turned off to minimize starting
concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low
tank fill levels.
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair
FUEL PUMP MODULE

Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
WARNING:
- Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near
any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
- Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any
type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always
present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
- Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the
fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under
high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
serious personal injury.
- Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing
sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 3. Insert
the special tool into the fuel tank filler pipe until it opens the fuel tank level shutoff valve located at
the inlet of the fuel tank.
4. NOTE: Due to the internal design of the fuel tank components, slow fuel drainage may occur.
Using the special tools, drain as much fuel as possible from the fuel tank and filler pipe, lowering
the fuel level below the fuel pump (FP) mounting flange.
5. Remove the 4 screws and the FP module access cover.
6. NOTE: Clean the FP module connection, couplings, mounting flange and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
7. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spills.
Disconnect the fuel supply tube and fuel vapor recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect
couplings.
8. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm and the filter.
NOTE: -
Carefully remove the FP module lock ring and verify that enough fuel has been drained to avoid
spillage.
- Drain any residual in the FP module into a suitable container.
Using a suitable FP module lock ring remover, rotate the lock ring counterclockwise and remove
the FP module.
9. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank seal contact surfaces. Do not
polish or adjust the seal contact area of the FP
module flange or fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the seal contact area is bent,
scratched or corroded.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
10. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the FP module O-ring seal.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
View 151-22
C2015
indicator switch.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor
View 151-13
Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor > Page 483
View 151-13
Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor
C287
Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor > Page 486
C286
Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair
LIGHT SENSOR
1. Remove the sensor from the instrument panel.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Backup Lamp Switch: Locations Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
View 151-10
Component Information > Locations > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 492
View 151-11
View 151-12
Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
C167
Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 496
C169
Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
REVERSING LAMP SWITCH
1. Disconnect the reversing lamp switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the reversing lamp switch.
- To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).

Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
View 151-22
C278
Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH
Typical BPP Switch
as follows:
- to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied.
Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair
STOPLAMP SWITCH
the stoplamp switch. Do not install the stoplamp switch without the brake pedal arm secured to the
brake booster push rod. Do not press or pull on brake pedal when installing or removing the
stoplamp switch otherwise misadjustment or damage to the stoplamp switch could occur.
1. NOTE: Rotate the stoplamp switch clockwise approximately 1/8 turn to remove.
Remove the stoplamp switch. -

Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch >
View 151-21
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch >
C479
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations
View 151-13
View 151-28
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch
C202
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 514
C2065
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 515
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair

Steering column Multifunction Switch
Steering Column Multifunctional Switch
1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud
screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multi-function
switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multi-function switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
View 151-13
C205
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair
HEADLAMP SWITCH
1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel.
2. NOTE: The headlamp switch is removed by pushing from behind.
Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch. -
Disconnect the electrical connectors.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch >
View 151-28
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Turn Signal Switch: Locations
View 151-13
View 151-28
C202
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair

Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR
The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the
amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or
3-track APP sensor is used.
2-Track APP Sensor
2-Track APP Sensor
There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2
pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern.
The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the
other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2
reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins)
between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal
return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the
electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. The pedal position signal is converted to
pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to
counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy.
3-Track APP Sensor
Typical 3-Track APP Sensor
There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope (increasing
angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope
(increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of
pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct
input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating
where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits
the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary
angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the
torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal
circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The
reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit
and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor.
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
View 151-4
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 542
View 151-5
C128
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation

MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor

Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then
outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM
calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This
input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque
converter clutch scheduling.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an
assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration.
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair

1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and
the MAF sensor.

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
View 151-7
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 550
View 151-8
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
C180
C1180
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
Typical Synchronizer Hall-Effect CMP Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor

The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston
number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing
the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the
second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM.
There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor and the 2-pin
connector variable reluctance type sensor.
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
1. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt
and the CMP.
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil.

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
View 151-6
C1064


Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
View 151-7
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
566
View 151-9
567
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
C101
C1120
568
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has
39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring
the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the
PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order
to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the
crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the
CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
569
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the RH splash
shield.
3. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and
the CKP.
5. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP O-ring seal with clean engine oil.

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-9
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
573
C1164
574
Typical CHT Sensor
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation
FUEL LEVEL INPUT (FLI)
The FLI is a communications network message. Most vehicle applications use a potentiometer type
FLI sensor connected to a float in the FP module to determine fuel level.
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Page 578
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair

FUEL PUMP MODULE
Exploded View
Part 1
Page 579
Part 2
Page 580
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Page 581
WARNING:
injury.
Page 582
couplings.
arm and the filter.
NOTE: -
spillage.
the FP module.

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
586
C435
587
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor

In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure.
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
View 151-4
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
591
View 151-5
592
C128
593
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors
Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into A Drop-in Or Flange-type
MAF Sensor
The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical
resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases
as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor
terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.

The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature
information as a correction factor in the calculation of
594
fuel, spark, and air flow.

The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT
sensor.
Currently there are 2 design types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and a
integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the
mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor.
Supercharged vehicles use 2 IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate
as described above. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard
OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the
intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature
information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC) efficiency.
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor

595
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-8
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 599
C109
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
Knock Sensor (KS)
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations
View 151-6
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 604
View 151-8
Page 605
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams
C1087
Page 606
C1140
Page 607
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR
Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the
MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold.
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation
Typical EOT Sensor

following:
degradation.
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11
Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11
View 151-7
Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 615
View 151-9
View 151-7
View 151-9
View 151-10
View 151-10
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22
C141
C142
C171
C172
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 625
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage
according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in
the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich
air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the
PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during
closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine can enter closed
loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by
providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter
closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty
cycled, to prevent damage to the heater.
Universal HO2S
The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S
combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric
air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a
measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to
detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content
inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping
oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner,
the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the
measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to
pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio.
The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a
signal that comes directly from the sensor.
The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen
differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small
amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal
HO2S does not need access to outside air.
Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used
to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM.
Embedded with the sensing element is the universal H02S heater. The heater allows the engine to
enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of
780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on
and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum
accuracy.
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)

Exploded View
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 7 bolts (5 shown) and the LH
splash shield.

Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 628
3. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the special tool, remove the HO2S. -

To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
5. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S.

Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor
CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR

Exploded View
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
splash shield.

3. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector and detach the wiring retainer(s).
removal.
Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. -

5. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor.

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP
sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the
input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the
idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the
PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased
engine load, for example, during parking maneuvers.
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch
is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate
for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during
parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic
pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking
maneuvers.
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-6
Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator
C1083
Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator > Page 639
C1068
Diagrams > Page 640
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer
that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly.
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as
the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI
and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing
for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering
orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted
Diagrams > Page 641
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger
plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF
hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Diagrams > Page 642
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR

Exploded View
Part 1
Diagrams > Page 643
Part 2
1. Disconnect the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor electrical connector and detach the
wiring harness retainer. 2. Carefully detach the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor from the
EGR valve tube. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Throttle Position Sensor: Locations
View 151-6
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 647
View 151-8
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
C189
C1189
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor
The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant
ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position
sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second
signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position
sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is
1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit
and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits
used by the APP sensor.
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
Typical TP Sensor
The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly
proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical
connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the
terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body.
As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM
from the TP. The operating conditions are: -
closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration)
- part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration)
- wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank)
- throttle angle rate

Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
1. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and
the TP sensor.

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations
View 151-10
Locations > Page 655
View 151-11
C167
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Adjustment
Special Tool(s)
1. Remove the battery and tray.
2. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Loosen the transmission range (TR) sensor bolts.
3. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft).
4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check for correct operation. The engine should start only in PARK
or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position.
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to
Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Remove the transmission
range (TR) sensor.
1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector.
2 Remove the TR sensor retaining bolts.
3 Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
Install the TR sensor and loosely install the bolts.

3. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check the correct operation. The engine should start only in PARK
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-12
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 663
C1088
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft.
The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications,
the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in
different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed
sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is
generated.
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
The VSS is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency
that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity,
the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor
generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the
VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control,
transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
View 151-6
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams >
Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator
C1083
Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator > Page 671
C1068
Page 672
Page 673
Page 674

Exploded View
Part 1
Page 675
Part 2
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
2-Track APP Sensor
2-Track APP Sensor
3-Track APP Sensor
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 683
View 151-5
C128



the MAF sensor.

Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations
View 151-6
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
691
View 151-8
692
C173
693
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR
Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship
between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel
vapor in the fuel rail.
The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The
speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The
dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the
injector pulse width to decrease.
694
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR
WARNING:
1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Disconnect the fuel
rail pressure and temperature sensor electrical connector and vacuum tube. 4. Remove the 2 bolts
and the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor.
5. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.

Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Locations
View 151-6
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 698
View 151-8
C173
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
WARNING:

Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 705
C392
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation
INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH
Typical Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is
to shutoff the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in place by a magnet.
When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and
strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel
pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the
Owner's Literature, Roadside Emergencies for the location of the IFS switch.
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel. 2. Disconnect the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch
electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch.

Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-6
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 711
View 151-8
C189
C1189
Typical TP Sensor

the TP sensor.

Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 720
View 151-8
C180
C1180

and the CMP.

Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 727
View 151-9
C101
C1120
shield.
the CKP.

Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION

ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ign. Cylinder > Page 740
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign.
Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09

SERVICE PROCEDURE
ignition key.
Parts Block
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 746
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER - FUNCTIONAL

1. Remove the passive anti-theft system (PATS) transceiver.
2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position.
Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder.
- Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation.

> Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional > Page 749
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder - Non Functional
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER - NON FUNCTIONAL
1. Remove the passive anti-theft system (PATS) transceiver. 2. Remove the ignition lock cylinder.
- Use a 1/8-inch diameter drill bit to drill out the lock cylinder retaining pin.
- Use a 3/8-inch diameter drill to drill down the middle of the ignition lock key slot until the ignition
lock cylinder breaks loose.
- Remove and discard the ignition lock cylinder and drill shavings from the steering column.
3. Remove the bearing retainer. 4. Remove the steering column lock housing bearing and steering
column lock gear. 5. Thoroughly clean all drill shavings from the steering column and inspect it for
damage. 6. Install a new ignition lock cylinder.

Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-8
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 753
C109
Knock Sensor (KS)
timing.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation
C2286
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor
View 151-2
Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 763
Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor
View 151-24
View 151-24
View 151-25
View 151-25
Component Information > Diagrams > Forward Crash Sensor
C177
Component Information > Diagrams > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 769
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor
C3209
C3210
Component Information > Diagrams > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 770
C3211
C3212
Impact Sensor: Testing and Inspection
SENSORS
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
For this vehicle line, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) uses 5 satellite sensors in addition to
the restraints control module (RCM). The RCM is mounted to the center tunnel beneath the
console. All vehicles have one front impact severity sensor located in the front-center area of the
vehicle, behind the grille mounted on the lower radiator support. The first row impact sensors are
mounted behind the trim panel near the floor on the B-pillar, the second row sensors are located on
each C-pillar. The front and side impact sensor are not interchangeable. Mounting orientation is
critical for correct operation of all impact sensors.
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor
FRONT IMPACT SEVERITY SENSOR
WARNING:
death in a crash.
NOTE:
- The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is
removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a
supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault.
- The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before
releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. 2. Disconnect the front impact severity sensor electrical connector.
NOTE: -
Make sure the radiator support and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free
of foreign material.
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 774
- Note the position of the locator tab on the front impact severity sensor for installation.
Remove the nut and the front impact severity sensor. -
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the SRS.

Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - FIRST ROW, B-PILLAR

WARNING:
death in a crash.
NOTE:
removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a SRS fault.
- RH shown, LH similar.
1. Depower the SRS. 2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 3. Disconnect the side impact sensor
electrical connector.
NOTE: -
Make sure the B-pillar and side impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of
foreign material.
- Note position of the locator tab on the front impact severity sensor for installation.
Remove the bolt and the side impact sensor. -
Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).

Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - SECOND ROW, C-PILLAR
WARNING:
death in a crash.
NOTE:
1. Depower the SRS. 2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel.
NOTE: -
Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign
material.
Remove the side impact sensor bolt. -
4. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the side impact sensor. 5. To install, reverse the
removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger
View 151-17
Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger > Page 783
View 151-16
Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver
C3065
Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 786
C3066
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor
Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Description and Operation
BELT TENSION SENSOR (BTS)
The safety belt tension sensor (BTS) is part of the passenger front outboard safety belt and
retractor assembly. The BTS is located at the safety belt anchor point and is used in conjunction
with the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system. Refer to Air Bag Systems.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
View 151-17
C3042
Seat Occupant Sensor: Description and Operation
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR (OCS)
CAUTION: It is necessary to carry out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset when
a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover is installed or an OCS system
service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in system failure and the incorrect operation of the OCS system.
NOTE:
- Occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components (seat wiring harness, seat cushion
foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and occupant classification system module [OCSM]) are
calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to
be installed separately. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad
are needed, an OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor, seat
wiring harness and OCSM) must be installed as an assembly.
- To identify between a production OCS system and a OCS system service kit, inspect the OCSM
A production OCS system allows the disconnection of the OCSM electrical connector.
An OCS system service kit has the electrical connector glued to the module. It cannot and should
not be disconnected or altered.
The OCS system is standard equipment on all front outboard passenger seats. For information on
diagnosing or servicing the OCS system, refer to Air Bag Systems.
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR - ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 797
Removal
WARNING: -
To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to
- Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly.
Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect
operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
a front passenger seat backrest is separated from the seat cushion, the seat cushion is
disassembled, a new trim cover is installed or an OCS service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to
trigger the active command to carry out the OCS system reset. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure.
NOTE: -
The heated seat element on the front passenger seat cushion is not serviceable separately. If a
new heated seat element is needed on the front passenger seat cushion, a new occupant
classification sensor (OCS) service kit equipped with a heated seat element must be installed.
- Occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components, seat cushion foam pad, bladder with
pressure sensor and electronic control unit (ECU), are calibrated to each other and are serviced as
an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS
system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system
service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor
and ECU) must be installed as an assembly.
- To identify between a production occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and a service OCS
system (OCS service kit), inspect the electronic control unit (ECU) electrical connector. A
production OCS system allows the disconnect of the ECU electrical connector. A service OCS
system (OCS service kit) has the ECU electrical connector glued to the ECU. It cannot and should
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Depower the SRS. 2. Remove the front passenger seat. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors
and detach the wiring clips.
1 Disconnect the occupant classification sensor (OCS) electronic control unit (ECU) electrical
connector.
2 Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3 Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan.
4 If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector, release the
wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 seat cushion
element electrical connectors.
4. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track.
5. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS
system and may cause system failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. -
To aid in removal, recline the seat.
6. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat upholstery from the hook-and-loop strip, or the
hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the
seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
7. Remove the seat cushion foam pad. 8. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor,
then slide the pressure sensor off the bracket.
9. CAUTION: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the
rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and the OCS ECU.
10. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan. 11. Feed the
OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion pan opening and remove as an assembly
with the bladder.
Installation
NOTE: If installing an OCS service kit, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit.
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
2. CAUTION:
- Inspect the occupant classification sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and support
assembly for any foreign objects before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign
objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect
operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure.
- Route the seat occupant classification sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat
cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage
- While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor (OCS) assembly, be
careful not to damage any of the components.
Feed the OCS components (pressure sensor and hose) through the seat cushion pan opening.
3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion pan. 4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS
bladder and seat cushion pan.
5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged. -
When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
6. Slide the OCS ECU into the seat cushion pan bracket and install the rivets.
- The OCS ECU must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can
set a DTC in the RCM.
7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion pan.
8. CAUTION: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign material,
before installing the seat cushion trim
cover to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure.
Install the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion foam pad and attach the J-clips.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. -
To aid in installation, recline the seat.
10. Install the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track.
- Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft).
11. Connect the electrical connectors and wiring clips.
1 Connect the OCS ECU electrical connector.
2 Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3 Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan.
4 If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat relay electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan, and connect the 2 seat cushion element
electrical connectors.
12. Install the front passenger seat into the vehicle. 13. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the
system at this time.
14. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
CAUTION: -
Make sure the seat is completely assembled before carrying out the occupant classification sensor
(OCS) System Reset active command. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect
- The following precautions must be taken before carrying out the occupant classification sensor
(OCS) System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
OCS system and may cause system failure. -
Make sure the OCS system components are connected and no faults are present.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 0°C (32°F) or above 45°C (113°F)
when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or
hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 0°C to
45°C (32°F to 113°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
NOTE: -
For best results in carrying out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset process, the
OCS system should be at or near room temperature, 10°C to 29°C (50°F to 85°F).
- If the first attempt to carry out the OCS system reset is unsuccessful and DTC C1941 is reported,
a second attempt must be made. If on the second attempt to carry out the OCS system reset is
unsuccessful and DTC C1941 is reported a second time, a new OCS system service kit must be
installed.
Carry out the OCS system reset. -
With the front passenger seat empty, use a scan tool to trigger the active command.
15. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset is successful.
Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn
the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules
installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then
turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: -
fail to light.

Clear all RCM and OCS module DTCs using a scan tool.
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR - SERVICE KIT
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Removal
WARNING: -
trigger the active command to carry out rezeroing of the OCS system. Failure to follow these
NOTE: -
- OCS system components (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and electronic
control unit) are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS system
components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or
seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder
with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) must be installed as an assembly.
system (OCS service kit) inspect the electronic control unit (ECU) electrical connector. A
- If removing an original equipment manufacturer (OEM) occupant classification sensor (OCS),

refer to the appropriate procedure.
- The seat wiring harness will be reused. The OCS service kit connector connects to the seat wiring
harness electronic control unit ECU connector. The pressure sensor seat wiring harness connector
will be left unplugged and secured by a tie strap.
1. Depower the SRS. 2. Remove the passenger seat.
3. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused.

Disconnect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips. 1
Disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical
connector.
3 If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release
the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 seat cushion
trim cover.
7. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
rivets. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in component damage and/or system failure.
Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCS ECU from the seat cushion pan.
9. Remove the OCS.
- Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, ECU and connectors) through
the seat cushion pan opening.
Installation
2. CAUTION:
- Inspect the occupant classification sensor (OCS) assembly, seat cushion pan and support
assembly for any foreign material before installing the OCS assembly to the seat cushion pan. If
any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to do so may result in personal injury, in the event
of an air bag deployment.
careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
component damage and/or system failure.
Feed the OCS service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, ECU, wire harness and connectors)
through the seat cushion pan opening.
3. NOTE:
- When installing a service part OCS, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector is
not used.
- Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the OCS components to the seat cushion pan. 1
2 Slide the ECU into the seat cushion pan bracket. -
The ECU must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the restraints control module (RCM).
3 Install the rivets.

4. Attach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips to the seat cushion pan.
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or
system failure.

7. NOTE:
- Do not tie strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose.
- The seat wiring harness will be reused.
Connect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips. 1
Connect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector to the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2 Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan.
3 If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion pan, and connect the 2 cushion element electrical
connectors.
4 Tie strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside.
5 Tie strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safely aside.
death in a crash.
CAUTION: -
NOTE: -
For best results in carrying out the OCS system reset process, the OCS system should be at or
near room temperature, 10°C to 29°C (50°F to 85°F).
installed.
11. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
fail to light.

complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning
indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
12. NOTE: When installing a new OCS, a prepaid return postcard is provided with the new OCS.
The serial number for the new part and the vehicle
identification number (VIN) must be recorded and sent to Ford Motor Company.
Fill out the necessary information on the OCS traceability card and return it along with the complete
inoperative OCS to Ford Motor Company. -
When returning the inoperative OCS, include the following: seat cushion foam pad, bladder,
electronic control unit, pressure sensor (transducer), hose, electrical connectors and wire harness
(service part OCS only).
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor >
View 151-16
C356
Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair
SEAT POSITION SENSOR
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
1. Raise the driver seat and position it in the middle of the track. 2. Depower the SRS. 3. Remove
the driver seat. 4. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector. 5. Push apart the 2
tabs, then push inward to release the seat position sensor locking clip.
6. Slide the seat position sensor forward to release the 2 hooks from the bracket. Then remove the
seat position sensor. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 8. Repower the SRS.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch
View 151-3
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 822
View 151-3
Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch
C2072
Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 825
C2070
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch
Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09

SERVICE PROCEDURE
ignition key.
Parts Block
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 835
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09

SERVICE PROCEDURE
ignition key.
Parts Block
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 841
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional


Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional > Page
844

Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch
Neutral Safety Switch: Locations
View 151-10
View 151-11
C167
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
maneuvers.
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Special Tool(s)
NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep
mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the
latest tire pressure information to the smart junction box (SJB). For additional information, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation.
NOTE: The tire pressure sensor training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area
without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and
appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable
entertainment equipment.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the activation tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with
the activation tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at
least 1/4 of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again.
NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not
recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and
the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire
procedure must be repeated.
NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain
F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the
sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for
front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the
ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3.
Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the
ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position.
^ The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered
successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE.
6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the
activation tool must remain in place 180 degrees from
the valve stem.
Place the activation tool on the LF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem. Press
and release the test button on the special tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire
pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB.
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 860
7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the activation tool on the RF tire sidewall opposite
(180 degrees) from the valve stem and press and
release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor.
8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out
and the entire procedure must be repeated.
Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires.

The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is
complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE.
For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure
will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the
horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not
successful.
9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor IDs trained to the SJB and document them
on the applicable warranty claim.
10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing
mode and to make sure there are no other concerns
with a newly programmed SJB.
If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and perform
the SJB on-demand self test.
Activation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation
Special Tool(s)
NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a 14 sleep mode" after 30 minutes of inactivity to
conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode, it will be
necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the tire pressure monitor activation tool
against the LF tire sidewall 180 degrees from the tire valve stem.
3. NOTE: The activation tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep
sound for each successful response from a tire
pressure sensor.
Press the test button on the activation tool to activate the sensor, activate the sensor at least 2
times.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom
Chart
in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring
System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Disassembly
WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor battery may release hazardous
chemicals if exposed to extreme mechanical damage. If these chemicals contact the skin or eyes,
flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If any
part of the battery is swallowed, contact a physician immediately. When disposing of TPMS
sensors, follow the correct procedures for hazardous material disposal. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of
accordingly.
NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When
installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the
sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable.
NOTE: The sensor can be removed and installed without removing the strap or the cradle.
1. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or
dismounting. Dismount the tire only as
instructed.
Remove the tire from the wheel.
2. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to
the sensor locking clip may occur.
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 864
Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, remove the sensor locking clip.
the sensor may occur.
Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, detach the sensor from the cradle.
Assembly
1. CAUTION: Damage to the sensor may occur if excessive force is applied during sensor
installation.
NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise
when correctly seated.
Position the sensor into the cradle by inserting the fringe end of the sensor into the hook end of the
cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle.
2. NOTE: The locking clip can only be fully seated when installed in the correct orientation. If the
sensor locking clip cannot be fully inserted, then
the sensor may not be fully seated on the cradle or the locking clip may be inserted backward.
Insert a new locking clip into the sensor.

dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed.
Install the tire onto the wheel.
4. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must
be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the
sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation
pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure.
Train the tire pressure sensor(s). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Sensor Training.
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and
Cradle
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle

Material
Disassembly
accordingly.
NOTE: The sensor is available separately, the cradle and strap are available as a strap kit. There
are several different strap kits available based on wheel diameter but all strap kits share the same
base part number.
1. Remove the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor. For additional information, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor.
2. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have pointed or sharp
edges. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
Remove a factory installed strap in the following sequence: 1
Locate the strap buckle and secure the strap to the wheel using duct tape or a similar item, on both
sides of the buckle approximately 25 mm (0.98 in) from the buckle.
2 Using a large screwdriver and a twisting motion, unbuckle the strap.
3 Discard the strap.
3. To remove a dealer installed strap, turn the worm gear screw until the strap is fully released from
the worm gear.
^ Discard the strap.
4. NOTE: To aid assembly, mark the location of the cradle prior to disassembly.
Using a screwdriver, or similar tool, remove the cradle by inserting the screwdriver under the cradle
and prying up.
Assembly
1. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the new cradle. The sensor will make a "click"
noise when fully seated.
Position the sensor into the new cradle by inserting the fringe end of the sensor into the hook end
of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle.
2. CAUTION: Metal scrapers may damage the wheel. Use only plastic or non-metallic scrapers to
remove the cradle adhesive strip residue.
NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be installed in the drop well of the wheel, 180 degrees from the
valve stem.
Clean the area where the sensor and cradle are to be installed.
3. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be positioned with the hinge side of the sensor on the RH
side when viewed from the curb side (beauty side)
of the wheel.
NOTE: The sensor has raised markings indicating how to position the sensor.
Remove the adhesive tape liner from the cradle and position the sensor and cradle into the wheel
drop well 180 degrees from the valve stem.
4. Install the tapered end of the strap through the opening of the cradle on the hinge side of the
sensor. This will position the worm gear on the
locking clip side of the sensor.
5. CAUTION: Steel wheels have a "high spot" along their circumference. Make sure the strap and
sensor are mounted at the lowest spot
possible to avoid damaging the sensor during wheel and tire disassembly and assembly.
NOTE: Keep the strap parallel with the wheel flange while tightening the worm gear.
Position the worm gear 13-26 mm (0.5-1.0 in) away from the sensor and tighten the worm gear. ^
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation
Typical BPP Switch
as follows:
Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH (TCS)
Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature,
the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage
overdrive.
Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 878
Transmission Mode Switch: Testing and Inspection
Electrical Connectors
Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (vehicle harness side) (Part 1)

Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 879
Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (component side) (Part 1)

Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
View 151-10
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 883
View 151-11
C167
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Removal
range (TR) sensor.
Installation

Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
View 151-10
Sensor > Page 892
View 151-11
Sensor > Page 893
Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
View 151-10
Sensor > Page 894
View 151-11
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor
C193
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor > Page 897
C143
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed
(TSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Material
Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor
1 Disconnect the TSS electrical connector.
2 Remove the TSS sensor bolt.
3 Remove the TSS sensor. ^

(TSS) Sensor > Page 900
4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid.
Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary.

Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Material
3. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor
1 Disconnect the OSS electrical connector.
2 Remove the OSS sensor bolt.
3 Remove the OSS sensor. ^


Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Maintenance/Service and Repair.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top
of the transaxle.
Remove the VSS bolt.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch
Power Window Switch: Locations Window Adjust Switch
View 151-20
Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch > Page 912
View 151-20
View 151-19
View 151-18
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Master Window Adjust Switch
C504A
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 917
C504B
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Adjust Switch
C604
C701
C801
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Adjust Switch
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 922
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switch
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 925
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair
WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
NOTE:
- LH front window control switch shown, all others similar.
- The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar.
1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel. 2. Release the window control
switch bezel from the door trim panel. 3. Release the locking tabs and remove the window control
switch from the bezel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
Windshield Washer Switch: Locations
View 151-13
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 930
View 151-28
C202
Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Wiper Switch: Locations
View 151-13
View 151-28
C202
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications
Alignment: Specifications Alignment Specifications
Alignment Specifications
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications >
Page 944
Alignment: Specifications General Specifications

General Specifications
General Specifications (Part 1)

Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications >
Page 945
Alignment: Specifications Torque Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 946
Alignment: Description and Operation
Wheel Alignment Angles
Camber
Negative And Positive Camber
Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or
negative and has a direct effect on tire wear.
Caster Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top
of strut and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the
vehicle the best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is
not related to tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable.
A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a
separate procedure on this vehicle. Front caster should fall within specification when the front
camber is adjusted.
Toe
Positive Toe (Toe In)
Positive Toe (Toe Out)
The vehicle toe setting:
^ affects tire wear and directional stability.
Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not
square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking.
Wander Wander is the tendency of the vehicle to require frequent, random left and right steering
wheel corrections to maintain a straight path down a level road.
Shimmy Shimmy, as experienced by the driver, is large, consistent, rotational oscillations of the
steering wheel resulting from large, side-to-side (lateral) tire/wheel movements.
Shimmy is usually experienced near 64 km/h (40 mph), and can begin or be amplified when the tire
contacts pot holes or irregularities in the road surface.
Nibble Sometimes confused with shimmy, nibble is a condition resulting from tire interaction with
various road surfaces and experienced by the driver as small rotational oscillations of the steering
wheel.
Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering Poor returnability and sticky steering are used to describe the
poor return of the steering wheel to center after a turn or steering correction.
Drift/Pull Pull is a tugging sensation felt by the hands on the steering wheel that must be overcome
to keep the vehicle going straight.
Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with the hands off the steering wheel.
^ A vehicle-related drift/pull on a flat road causes a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead
path and requires constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect.
^ Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (wind or road crown).
Poor Groove Feel Poor groove feel is characterized by little or no buildup of turning effort felt in the
steering wheel as the wheel is rocked slowly left and right within very small turns around center or
straight-ahead (under 20 degrees of steering wheel turn). Effort may be said to be "flat on-center."
^ Under 20 degrees of turn, most of the turning effort that builds up comes from the mesh of the
gear teeth in the steering gear. In this range, the steering wheel is not yet turned enough to feel the
effort from the self-aligning forces at the road wheel or tire patch.
^ In the diagnosis of a driveability problem, it is important to understand the difference between

wander and poor groove feel.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment
Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment
Camber and Caster Adjustment
Front Camber and Caster Adjustment
Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts.
3. Push the front strut mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired position to set the
camber and caster. Both camber and caster for the
front suspension are adjustable. For additional information, refer to Steps 4 and 5.
4. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position.
Use the following table for LH side camber and or caster adjustment.
Adjustment > Page 951
Difference From Standard Position (LH Side)
Use the following table for the RH side camber and or caster adjustment.
Difference From Standard Position (RH Side) (Part 1)
6. Install the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts.

7. Recalibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Diagnosis and
Testing for steering wheel position sensor
calibration. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Testing and Inspection/Programming and

Relearning/Steering Wheel Position Sensor Calibration
Alignment: Service and Repair Front Toe Adjustment
Front Toe Adjustment
1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel. 2. Turn the engine off. Hold the steering wheel in
the straight-ahead position using a suitable holding device. 3. Check the toe settings following the
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
4. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the front wheel spindle tie rod is
rotated.
Remove the steering gear bellows clamp(s).
5. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut(s).
^ Clean and lubricate the nut(s) and front wheel spindle tie-rod threads.
6. Rotate the front wheel spindle tie rods to increase or decrease the front toe.
7. CAUTION: Hold the tie-rod end stationary with a wrench while tightening the nut, or damage to
the boot can occur.
NOTE: Do not disturb the toe settings while tightening the nut(s).
Tighten the tie-rod end jam nut(s) to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).

8. Install the steering gear bellows clamp(s).
9. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
10. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Steering Wheel
Position Sensor Calibration in Diagnosis and
Testing. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Testing and Inspection/Programming and

Alignment: Service and Repair Ride Height Measurement
Ride Height Measurement
Front Ride Height Measurement
NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to
the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel.
1. Position a suitable surface gauge (such as Starrett 57D Surface Gauge), on a flat, level surface
and adjust the gauge's arm until the scriber point is
located in the center of the lower ball joint bolt. ^
Lock the surface gauge in this position.
2. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the
surface gauge position (measurement A).
3. Position the surface gauge on the same flat, level surface as used in Step 1, adjust the gauge's
arm until the scriber point is located in the center of
the forward lower arm bolt. ^
surface gauge position (measurement B).
5. Subtract measurement A from measurement B to obtain the front ride height (C).
^ Refer to Specifications.
Rear Ride Height Measurement

1. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the shock absorber lower
bolt (measurement A). 2. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the
lower arm inner bolt (measurement B). 3. Subtract measurement B from measurement A to obtain
the rear ride height (C).
Alignment: Service and Repair Rear Toe Adjustment
Rear Toe Adjustment
1. CAUTION: The cam nut and cam bolt area must be free of foreign material to make sure of
correct clamping.
NOTE: Clean the general area of the joint to prevent foreign material from entering the joint. Clean
the area using only mild liquids.
NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal, at-rest position.
Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment.
2. NOTE: Do not remove the rear knuckle cam nut and wheel knuckle bolts. If removed, clean the
serrations in the bushing sleeve with a wire brush
and install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut.
Loosen the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts.
3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification.
4. Tighten the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts.
^ Using a suitable tool, hold the adjustment cam nut stationary while tightening the rear wheel
knuckle bolt.

Testing. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Testing and Inspection/Programming and

Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information
> Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................Specification
Engine idling.........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................269 kPa (39 psi) Fuel pump output volume per 10 seconds......
.................................................................................................................................................125 cc
(4.32 oz) Key on, engine off.................................................................................................................
..........................................................................269 kPa (39 psi)
> Specifications > Page 964
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
WARNING:
injury.
All vehicles
1. Release the fuel system pressure.
Vehicles with 2.3L engine
2. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. 3. Install the special tool between the
fuel tube and the fuel rail.
4. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. 5. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect
coupling.
6. NOTE: Use a commercially available fuel test adapter (such as OTC 18527).
Install the special tool and fuel test adapter between the fuel tube and the fuel rail.
7. NOTE: The air cleaner outlet pipe must be installed prior to completing the fuel system pressure
test.
Install the air cleaner outlet pipe.
All vehicles
8. NOTE: The fuel pump (FP) driver module electrical connector that was disconnected to release
the fuel system pressure must be reconnected to
test the fuel system pressure.
Connect the FP driver module electrical connector.
9. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system.
Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before
starting the engine.
10. NOTE: Upon completion of the fuel system pressure test, open the drain valve on the special
tool and release fuel system pressure and drain any
residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool
Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information >
Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Measured/PID Values
Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................

........................................................ 705-820 RPM
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner
Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE
Exploded View
1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Remove the bolt and the air cleaner intake pipe.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE
WARNING:
injury.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the fuel pump (FP) driver
module electrical connector.
3. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for
approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been
released. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 6. When fuel system service is complete,
connect the FP driver module electrical connector.
8. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component
Information > Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................Specification
Firing order...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................1-4-2-5-3-6
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > General Specifications
Spark Plug: Specifications General Specifications
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................Specification
Spark plug gap.....................................................................................................................................

....................................1.32-1.42 mm (0.052-0.056 in)
Information > Specifications > General Specifications > Page 984
Information > Specifications > Page 985
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................Specification
Spark plug............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................AGSF-32N
Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap.
^ Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or
carbon fouling.
^ Clean the spark plug.
2. Check for oil fouling.
^ Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil
entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide
clearance or worn or loose bearings.
^ Correct the oil leak concern.
^ Install a new spark plug.
3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips,
exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a
spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling.
^
Install new spark plugs.
4. Inspect for normal burning.
^ Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip.

5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator.
Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine
damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized
installation of a Heli-Coil(R) insert in place of the spark plug threads. ^
Install a new spark plug.
6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and with a bluish-burnt appearance
of electrodes. This is caused by engine
overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low
fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. ^
7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters.
These are caused by sudden acceleration.
^ Install new spark plugs.

Spark Plug: Service and Repair
SPARK PLUGS
Exploded View
Engine Ignition - RH
Engine Ignition - LH
Removal
RH side
1. NOTE: The upper intake manifold must be removed to access the RH spark plugs only.
Remove the upper intake manifold.
Both sides 2. Disconnect the ignition coil electrical connectors.
3. NOTE: When removing the ignition coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and
ease removal.
Remove the bolts and the ignition coils.

4. CAUTION: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can
occur to the cylinder head or spark plug.
NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well before removing
the spark plugs.
Remove the spark plugs.
Installation
Both sides 1. Inspect the spark plugs.

2. Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary.
Install the spark plugs. -
4. NOTE: Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coil boots before
attaching to the spark plugs.
Install the ignition coils and bolts. -

5. Connect the ignition coil electrical connectors.
RH side 6. Install the upper intake manifold.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Test - Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart

Compression Pressure Limit Chart (Part 1)

Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Compression Test
Compression Test - All Vehicles Except Hybrid
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the
battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle
until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position,
then remove all the spark plugs.
2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge such as the
Compression Tester in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit.
With the ignition switch in the OFF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank
the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the
approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading.
5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 998
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Compression Test - Test Results

If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford
specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure
check on these cylinders.
Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged. 2. If compression does
not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. 3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low
compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase compression, the head
gasket may be
leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition.
Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 999
Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so that the lowest
reading is within 75% of the highest reading.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System
Valve Clearance: Specifications
Valve Clearance
This engine is equipped with hydraulic lash adjusters. No adjustment is required.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Drive Belt: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise
Drive Belt: Customer Interest Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise
TSB 09-21-2
11/02/09
3.0L FRONT END ACCESSORY DRIVE RIGHT HAND IDLER PULLEY BEARING NOISE
FORD: 2008 Escape
MERCURY: 2008 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-14-6 to update the Service Procedure and Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with 3.0L engine may exhibit front end
accessory drive (FEAD) whining/bearing type noise. The noise may be coming from the right hand
(RH) FEAD idler pulley that is in front of the right bank cylinder head.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using a stethoscope, place end on the bolt that holds the right hand idler pulley on.
a. If the noise is coming from the bolt/pulley, then go to Step 2 and replace the idler pulley.
b. If the noise is not coming from the bolt/pulley, follow Work Shop Manual (WSM), Section
303-05B to diagnose.
2. Remove bolt that holds the pulley and bearing assembly on to the bracket. Refer to WSM
Section 303-05B.
3. Remove pulley.
4. Install new pulley and torque pulley bolt to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m).
5. Loosen the pulley and bracket assembly. Torque bolts to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m) following the torque
sequence. (Figure 1)
NOTE
IF BOLTS ARE NOT TORQUED IN SEQUENCE AS ILLUSTRATED, THEN PREMATURE

BEARING FAILURE MAY OCCUR.
Parts Block
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Drive Belt: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise > Page 1011
092102A 2008 Escape, Mariner 0.6 Hr.
3.0L: Replace The Idler Pulley And Bracket Assembly Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19A216 69
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise
Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise
TSB 09-21-2
11/02/09
FORD: 2008 Escape
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Section 303-05B.
3. Remove pulley.
NOTE

Parts Block
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise > Page 1017
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19A216 69
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views
Drive Belt: Exploded Views

Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View (Part 1)

Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 1020

Drive Belt: Mechanical Diagrams
Accessory Drive Belt
Accessory Drive Belt (Part 1)
Coolant Pump Drive Belt

Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview
Drive Belt: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Inspection and Verification
CAUTION: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys have any
fluids or belt dressing applied to them as damage to the belt material and tensioner damping
mechanism may occur.
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of
mechanical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
Belt Tensioner With Belt Length Indicator
NOTE: Modular engine (without A/C) belt tensioner shown, others similar.
NOTE: Belt tensioner is shown in the free-state position against the arm travel stops.
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1025
3. Check that the belt length indicator, if equipped, on the belt tensioner is in the acceptable belt
installation and wear range. If the indicator is in the
belt replacement range, either an incorrect belt is installed or the belt is worn beyond the service
limit. Install a new belt as necessary.
4. Eliminate all other non-belt related noises that could cause belt misdiagnosis, such as A/C
compressor engagement chirp, A/C slugging noise,
power steering cavitations at low temperatures, variable camshaft timing (VCT) tick or generator
whine.
5. If a concern is found, correct the condition before proceeding to the next step.
V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Cracks Across Ribs

6. Check the belt for cracks. Up to 15 cracks in a rib over a distance of 100 mm (4.0 in) can be
considered acceptable. If cracks exceed this standard,
install a new belt.
V-Ribbed Serpentine Belt With Piling
NOTE: Piling is an excessive buildup in the V-grooves of the belt.
7. The condition of the V-ribbed drive belt should be compared against the illustration and
appropriate action taken.
1. Small scattered deposits of rubber material. This is not a concern, therefore, installation of a new
belt is not required. 2. Longer deposit areas building up to 50% of the rib height. This is not
considered a concern but it can result in excessive noise. If noise is
apparent, install a new belt.
3. Heavy deposits building up along the grooves resulting in a possible noise and belt stability
concern. If heavy deposits are apparent, install a
new belt.
V-Ribbed Serpentine Belt With Chunks of Rib Missing
8. There should be no chunks missing from the belt ribs. If the belt shows any evidence of this,
install a new accessory drive belt. 9. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and
GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Drive Belt: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart (Part 1)


Drive Belt: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter
Drive belt chirp occurs due to pulley misalignment or excessive pulley runout. It can be the result of
a damaged or incorrectly aligned grooved pulley.
To correct, determine the area where the noise comes from. Check each of the pulleys in that area
with a straightedge to the crankshaft pulley. Look for accessory pulleys out of position in the fore/aft
direction or at an angle to the straightedge.
Drive belt squeal may be an intermittent or constant noise that occurs when the drive belt slips on
an accessory pulley under certain conditions.
A short intermittent squeal may occur during engine start-up and shut down or during very rapid
engine acceleration and decelerations, such as: ^
wide open throttle (WOT) 1-2 and 2-3 shifts or 2-3 and 3-4 back out shifts on automatic
transmissions.
^ WOT 1-2 and 2-3 shifts and any combination of rapid downshifting on manual transmissions.
These special short-term transient events are expected, and are due to the higher system inertias
required to meet the electrical and cooling demands on today's vehicle systems. Constant or
reoccurring drive belt squeal can occur: ^
if the A/C discharge pressure goes above specifications: -
the A/C system is overcharged.

- the A/C condenser core airflow is blocked.
^ if the A/C off equalized pressure (the common discharged and suction pressure that occurs after
several minutes) exceeds specifications.
^ if any of the accessories or idler pulley(s) are damaged or have a worn or damaged bearing. All
accessories should be rotatable by hand in the unloaded condition. If not, inspect the accessory.
^ if there is evidence of fluid contamination on the accessory drive belt. When the drive belt has
been exposed to fluid contamination during vehicle operation, such as leaks from the power
steering system, A/C system or cooling system, clean all pulleys with soap and water, rinse with
clean water and install a new accessory drive belt. If the drive belt has been exposed to fluids in a
localized area during routine vehicle service, such as replacement of hoses or fluids, the drive belt
and pulleys should be washed with soap and water immediately (prior to starting the engine), and
rinsed with clean water.
^ if the accessory drive belt is too long. A drive belt that is too long will allow the accessory drive
belt tensioner arm to go all the way to the arm travel stop under certain load conditions, which will
release tension to the drive belt. If the accessory drive belt tensioner indicator is outside the normal
installation wear range window, install a new accessory drive belt.
^ NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner arm should rotate freely without binding.
Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner if the drive belt tensioner is worn or damaged.
Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation
CAUTION: Incorrect accessory drive belt installation will cause excessive drive belt wear and may
cause the drive belt to come off the pulleys.
Non-standard accessory drive belts can track differently or incorrectly. If an accessory drive belt
tracks incorrectly, install a new accessory drive belt to avoid performance failure or loss of the drive
belt.
Incorrect Installation
Correct Installation
With the engine running, check accessory drive belt tracking on all pulleys. If the edge of the
accessory drive belt rides beyond the edge of the pulleys, noise and premature wear will occur.
Make sure the accessory drive belt rides correctly on the pulley. If an accessory drive belt tracking
condition exists, proceed with the following: ^
Visually check the accessory drive belt tensioner for damage and wear, especially the mounting
pad surface and arm alignment. If the accessory drive belt tensioner is not installed correctly, the
mounting surface pad will be out of position. If the tensioner arm is worn, the arm will be out of
alignment. Either of these conditions will result in chirp and squeal noises.
^ With the engine running, visually observe the grooves in the pulleys (not the pulley flanges or the
pulley forward faces) for excessive wobble. Install new components as necessary.
^ Check all accessories, mounting brackets and the accessory drive belt tensioner for any
interference that would prevent the component from mounting correctly. Correct any interference
condition and recheck the accessory drive belt tracking.
^ Tighten all accessories, mounting brackets and accessory drive belt tensioner retaining hardware
to specification. Recheck the accessory drive belt tracking.
Belt Tensioner - Mechanical
The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick, grab or bind. 1.
With the engine off, check routing of the accessory drive belt. Refer to the illustrations under
Description and Operation.
2. NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner spring is very strong and requires substantial force to
release.
Using a suitable, commercially available serpentine belt tensioner release tool, release the tension
on the belt and detach the accessory drive belt from the tensioner. Carry out the following tests: ^
Using the release tool, move the tensioner from its relaxed position, through its full stroke and back
to the relaxed position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind, and to make sure that there is
tension on the tensioner spring.
^ Rotate the tensioner pulley by hand and check for a binding, contaminated or seized condition.
^ Inspect the area surrounding the accessory drive belt tensioner for oil leaks or contamination and
repair any leaks.
3. If the accessory drive belt tensioner does not meet the criteria in the previous step, install a new
tensioner. If the accessory drive belt tensioner
meets the criteria in the previous step, proceed to testing the tensioner dynamically.
Belt Tensioner - Dynamics
The accessory drive belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows: 1. With the engine
running, observe the accessory drive belt tensioner movement. The accessory drive tensioner
should move (respond) when the
A/C clutch cycles (if equipped), or when the engine is accelerated rapidly. If the accessory drive
belt tensioner movement is excessive without A/C clutch cycling or engine acceleration, check belt
rideout. Excessive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in the belt) can cause excessive
accessory drive belt tensioner movement. Check rideout condition by installing a new belt. If
excessive accessory drive belt tensioner movement still exists, install a new accessory drive belt
tensioner.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt


> Page 1034
3. Using a suitable belt tensioner release tool, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner
counterclockwise and remove the accessory drive belt.
4. NOTE: Refer to the illustration for correct drive belt routing.

> Page 1035
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Coolant Pump Belt

Coolant Pump Belt
Coolant Pump Belt
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Cut and remove the coolant pump belt.
^ Discard the belt.

> Page 1036
Installation
1. Install the coolant pump belt on the coolant pump pulley and position it on the camshaft pulley.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH lower splash shield.
3. CAUTION: Do not use any screwdrivers, pliers or other metal objects that could cause damage
to the belt or camshaft pulley while
installing the belt.
Rotate the crankshaft clockwise to seat the coolant pump belt on the camshaft pulley.
4. Install the RH lower splash shield, pin-type retainer and 5 bolts.
^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).

Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Exploded View

Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations
Cabin Air Filter: Locations
CABIN AIR FILTER
1. Remove the RH cowl panel grille. 2. Remove the 2 water shield screws and the water shield. 3.
Remove the cabin air filter. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page 1045
Cabin Air Filter: Description and Operation

Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page 1046
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
CABIN AIR FILTER
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair
DUST SEPARATOR
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe vent
tube from the dust separator. 3. Depress the retainer tab and remove the dust separator from the
fuel vapor tube and the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister bracket 4. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and
Repair
WARNING:
injury.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line
COMPRESSOR TO CONDENSER DISCHARGE LINE
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the air conditioning system
except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage
to the receiver/drier.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover refrigerant. 3. Remove the RH
lower engine splash shield.
4. Remove the front bumper cover.

Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1059
5. Remove the condenser inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
6. Remove the A/C compressor discharge fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
7. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line. 8. To install, reverse the removal

procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
9. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.

Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Condenser to Receiver Drier Line
CONDENSER TO RECEIVER DRIER LINE
Part 1
Part 2
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the air conditioning
system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or
damage to the receiver/drier.
1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the DC/DC converter. 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4.
Remove the compressor manifold and tube bracket nut.
5. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal.
6. Remove the evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
7. Remove the auxiliary evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seals.

8. Remove the receiver/drier inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
9. Remove the condenser-to-receiver/drier line.
- Install new gasket seal and O-ring seal.

Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Inlet Line
EVAPORATOR INLET LINE
1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the evaporator inlet line bracket nut.

3. Remove the receiver/drier outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
4. Remove the thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the gasket seals.
5. Remove the evaporator inlet line. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Outlet Line
EVAPORATOR OUTLET LINE
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the refrigerant. 3. Remove the
RH lower engine splash shield.
4. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
5. Detach the wire harness clip from the evaporator outlet line. 6. Remove the thermostatic
expansion valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
7. Disconnect the low-charge protection switch electrical connector. 8. Detach the evaporator outlet
line from the receiver/drier bracket. 9. Remove the evaporator outlet line.
- Install new gasket seals and a new O-ring seal.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
BRAKE FLUID
Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
Ford P/N ..............................................................................................................................................

.................................................................. PM-1-C Ford Specification ...............................................
.....................................................................................................................................
WSS-M6C62-A
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications
Clutch Fluid: Specifications
HYDRAULIC CLUTCH FLUID
Ford P/N ..............................................................................................................................................

...................................................................... PM-1 Ford Specification
......................................................................................................................................................
ESA-M6C25-A or WSS-M6C62-A
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Engine Coolant Capacity
Coolant ................................................................................................................................................
........................................... 10.6 Quarts ( 10.0 L )
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1077
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
ENGINE COOLANT AND M/E COOLANT
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored)
Ford P/N ..............................................................................................................................................

.................................................................. VC-7-B
Ford Specification ................................................................................................................................

................................................ WSS-M97B51-A1
NOTE: Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Fluid Capacity.......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................9.5L (10 quarts)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name - Mercon V Automatic Transmission Fluid
Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM - XT-5-QMC (US) - CXT-5-LM12 (Canada)
Ford Specification - MERCON V
Note: Using any transmission fluid other than those that meet the recommended specification may
cause internal transmission damage.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Material
Draining
2. NOTE: If an internal problem is suspected, drain the fluid through a paper filter. A small amount
of metal or friction particles may be found from
normal wear. If an excessive amount of metal or friction material is present the transaxle will need
to be overhauled.
Remove the transaxle drain plug.
Refill
1. Using a small amount of thread sealant on the threads, install the transaxle drain plug.
2. Fill the transaxle with clean automatic transmission fluid. 3. Start the engine and run through all
the gears and check fluid level.
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 1085
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning
Transmission Fluid Cooler
Backflushing and Cleaning
Transmission Fluid Combo Cooler Without Cooler Bypass Valve

Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 1086
Transmission Fluid Combo Cooler With Cooler Bypass Valve
1. Remove the radiator grille.
2. CAUTION: Do not exceed 276 kPa (40 psi) of air pressure when flushing the cooler or damage
to the internal cooler fins will occur.
CAUTION: Flush with clean transmission fluid only. Do not use solvents, mineral spirits or
water-based cleaners.
NOTE: Rubber hoses must be attached to the ends of the fluid cooler tubes, to aid in connecting
them to the cleaner.
Backflush any contaminants from the oil-to-air cooler by connecting the flushing machine pressure
line to the transmission fluid cooler outlet tube and the return line to the transmission fluid cooler
inlet tube.
After 5 minutes, stop the machine, reverse the hoses and repeat the flushing.
3. CAUTION: Do not exceed 276 kPa (40 psi) of air pressure when flushing the cooler. Damage to
the cooler will occur.
NOTE: Some vehicles are equipped with a cold weather bypass valve which cannot by cleaned or
flushed. A new valve should be installed as part of an overhaul or prior to the installation of a
remanufactured transaxle.
Using compressed air, blow through the coolers until all fluid is removed.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Manual Transmission
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
............................................... 2.4 Quarts (2.3 liters)
Note: Approximate refill. Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the
bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Manual Transmission Fluid Type
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
.................. Motorcraft SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil GL-4
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1092
Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair
Transaxle Draining and Filling
Material
Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain the fluid.
Manual Transaxle Drain Plug
3. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the drain plug.
Install the drain plug. ^
Fill Level Inspection Plug
4. Remove the fill level inspection plug.

Manual Transaxle Fill Level Inspection Plug
5. Remove the transaxle fill plug.
Manual Transaxle Fill Plug
6. Fill the transmission with gear oil until level with the fill level inspection plug hole.
7. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill plug.
Install the transaxle fill plug. ^
8. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill level inspection plug.
Install the fill level inspection plug. ^

Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications
Differential Oil Capacity
Rear Axle .............................................................................................................................................

................................................... 2.4 Pints ( 1.15 L )
Note: Fill to 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch ( 6 mm to 14 mm ) below of fill hole.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications
Differential Fluid Type
REAR AXLE
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant Ford P/N

..................................................................................................................................................
XY-80W90-QL(US) / CXY-80W90-1L (Canada) Ford Specification ....................................................
.................................................................................................................................. WSP-M2C197-A
NOTE: Vehicles exposed for prolonged periods to temperatures less than 40 Celsius (-40
Fahrenheit) should change out the rear axle fluid to Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 High Performance
Rear Axle Lubricant, Ford part number XY-75W140-QL meeting Ford specification
WSL-M2C192-A.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent
Fluid - Transfer Case: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent
TSB 09-4-4
03/09/09
PTU VENT BOLT LEAK - MISDIAGNOSED AS PTU SHAFT SEAL LEAK
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2005-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles
may exhibit a leak from the power transfer unit (PTU) vent tube bolt. This may be misdiagnosed as
a PTU link shaft seal leak. Please verify leak origin and tighten PTU vent tube bolt, before replacing
parts.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the PTU fill plug and check fluid level per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-07B.
NOTE
THE FLUID LEVEL MUST BE EVEN WITH THE BOTTOM OF THE FILLER HOLE WITH THE
VEHICLE ON FLAT, LEVEL GROUND.
2. Inspect PTU vent tube bolt for leak. (Figure 1)
a. If PTU vent tube bolt leaking - clean bolt contact sur[aces and torque bolt to 120 +/- 19 lb-in
(13.5 +/- 2.1 N.m).
b. If PTU vent tube bolt not leaking - continue with normal WSM, Section 308-07B diagnosis.
NOTE
THIS BOLT DOES NOT REQUIRE A WASHER FOR THIS APPLICATION.
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent > Page
1108
090404A 2005-2009 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Clean Bolt Contact Surfaces, Includes Time
To Check And Adjust PTU Fluid Level
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7034 24
Disclaimer
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU
Vent
Fluid - Transfer Case: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent
TSB 09-4-4
03/09/09
parts.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE

(13.5 +/- 2.1 N.m).
NOTE
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU
Vent > Page 1114
090404A 2005-2009 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7034 24
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications
Transfer Case Capacity
Power Transfer Unit .............................................................................................................................

............................................ 12.0 ounces (0.35 liters)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 1117
Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications
Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
Type...............................................................................................................................................Mot
orcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
Part Number.........................................................................................................................................
..XY-75W140-QL(US) / CXY-75W140-1L (Canada)
Specification.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................WSL-M2C192-A
Type..................................................................................................................................................M
otorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
Part Number.........................................................................................................................................
......XY80W90-QL(US) / CXY-80W190-1L (Canada)
Specification.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................WSP-M2C197-A
NOTE: The PTU on an AUTOMATIC transaxle uses Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic lubricant.
The PTU on a MANUAL transaxle uses Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 lubricant.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Draining and Filling - Automatic Transaxle
Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Draining and Filling -
Automatic Transaxle
Material
CAUTION: New power transfer unit (PTU) lubricant must be added any time the PTU has been
submerged in water.
NOTE: The power transfer unit (PTU) is lubricated for life and is not to be checked unless a leak is
suspected or a repair is necessary.
Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain the fluid. 3. Apply silicone
sealant to the drain plug threads and install the drain plug.
4. NOTE: The fluid level must be even with the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on flat, level
ground.
Remove the fill plug and fill the PTU with specified lubricant.
5. Apply silicone sealant to the fill plug and install the plug.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Draining and Filling - Automatic Transaxle > Page 1120
Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Draining and Filling - Manual
Transaxle
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Draining and Filling - Manual Transaxle
Material
CAUTION: New power transfer unit (PTU) lubricant must be installed any time the PTU has been
submerged in water.
suspected.
ground.
Remove the fill plug and fill the PTU with rear axle lubricant.
3. Install the fill plug and gasket.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil
With Filter ............................................................................................................................................

............................................................ 5.7L (6.0 Qt)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Oil
Ford Part Name

....................................................................................................................................... Motorcraft
SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Ford Part Number ...................................................................
...................................................................................................................... XO-5W20-QSP Ford
Specification
.........................................................................................................................................
WSS-M2C930-A with API Certification Mark
Note: Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
Power Steering Fluid
This vehicle is equipped with an Electric Power-Assisted Steering (EPAS) System. There is no fluid
reservoir to check or fill.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications

Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) WSH-M17B19-A (Specification)

Non-hybrid ...........................................................................................................................................
........................................... 0.71kg (25 oz) (1.57 lb) Hybrid ................................................................
............................................................................................................................ 1.08 kg (38 oz)
(2.38 lb)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications
PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D WSH-M1C231-B (Specification)

Non-hybrid ...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................ 148 ml (5 fl oz) Hybrid ................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ 325 ml (11 fl
oz)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications

Non-hybrid ...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................ 148 ml (5 fl oz) Hybrid ................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ 325 ml (11 fl
oz)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Component Bleeding
Component Bleeding
Material
Master Cylinder Priming
injury.
CAUTION: Bleeding the master cylinder on Hybrid vehicles requires a full system pressure bleed.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never
reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system or damage to the brake
system components may occur.
NOTE: When the brake master cylinder has been replaced or the system has been emptied, or
partially emptied, it should be primed to prevent air from entering the system.
1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder. 2. Install short brake tubes with the ends
submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with
clean,
specified brake fluid.
3. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes, without air
bubbles. 4. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes. 5. Bleed each brake
tube at the brake master cylinder as follows:
1. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal. 2. Loosen the rearmost brake tube fitting until a stream of brake fluid comes out.
While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal,
tighten the brake tube fitting.
3. Repeat this operation until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. 4. Refill the brake master cylinder
reservoir as necessary. Repeat the bleeding operation at the front brake tube. 5. Tighten the brake
tube fittings to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
6. Bleed the brake system.
Brake Caliper
CAUTION: Bleeding the brake caliper on Hybrid vehicles requires a full system pressure bleed.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box end wrench on the brake caliper bleeder screw.
Attach a rubber drain hose to the brake caliper
bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean,
brake pedal. 3. Loosen the brake caliper bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out.
While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten
the bleeder screw. ^
Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw and install the bleeder screw cap.

Bleeding > Page 1143
Wheel Cylinder
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box end wrench on the wheel cylinder bleeder
screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the disc brake
caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with
clean, specified brake fluid.
brake pedal. 3. Loosen the wheel cylinder bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out.
^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-inch).

Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding
Brake System Bleeding
Special Tool(s)
Material
Material
Manual Bleeding Method
injury.
reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. Damage to the brake
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air
can enter the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic
system after the repair is finished or after the new component is installed. The hydraulic system
can be bled manually or with pressure bleeding equipment.
1. Clean all dirt from and remove the brake master cylinder filler cap and fill the brake master
cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a
box end wrench on the RH rear bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RH rear bleeder
screw
and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake
fluid.
brake pedal. 4. Loosen the RH rear bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While
the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the
RH rear bleeder screw. ^
5. Tighten the RH rear bleeder screw and install the bleeder screw cap.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the LH rear, RH front and LH front bleeder screws in this order.
Pressure Bleeding Method
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that
has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination,
brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury.
system components may occur
cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers
of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the
instructions of the equipment manufacturer when installing the adapter.
Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir and attach the bleeder tank hose
to the fitting on the adapter.
3. NOTE: Bleed the longest line first. Make sure the bleeder tank contains enough clean, specified
brake fluid to complete the bleeding operation.
Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box end wrench on the RH rear bleeder screw. Attach
a rubber drain hose to the RH rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a
container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
4. Open the valve on the bleeder tank. 5. Loosen the RH rear bleeder screw. Leave open until
clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then tighten the RH rear bleeder screw and remove the
rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. ^
6. Continue bleeding the system, going in order from the LH rear bleeder screw to the RH front disc
brake caliper bleeder screw ending with the LH
front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
7. Close the bleeder tank valve. Remove the tank hose from the adapter and remove the adapter
from the brake fluid reservoir.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Bleeding
injury.
NOTE: Bleeding the hydraulic control unit (HCU) is required only when removing or installing the
HCU, master cylinder, or opening the tubes and hoses to the HCU.
1. NOTE: Carrying out the System Bleed function drives trapped air from the HCU. Subsequent
bleeding removes the air from the brake hydraulic
system through the bleeder screws.
NOTE: Adequate battery voltage is required during the anti-lock control portion of the system
bleed.
Connect the scan tool.
2. Access the SYSTEM BLEED FUNCTION and follow the directions on the scan tool. 3. Manually
bleed the brake hydraulic system. 4. Repeat the procedure carrying out a total of 2 scan tool cycles
and 2 manual bleed cycles.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEPOWERING AND REPOWERING
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: -
Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death.
- Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control
NOTE: -
The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power
distribution junction box (SPDJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and the restraints control
module (RCM) fuse 32 (10A) from the SPDJB.

4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds.
The air bag warning indicator will remain lit
continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning
indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB and install
the cover.
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1151
4. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will
light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present,
the air bag indicator will: -
fail to light.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound
in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault
discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) from the restraints control module using a
scan tool.
Deactivation and Reactivation
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Deactivation
WARNING: -
NOTE: -
and the RCM fuse 32 (10A)
from the SPDJB.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
latches.
impact sensor(s).
7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole
on the underside of the steering wheel.
8. CAUTION: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks
are released from the steering wheel
wire clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering
wheel.
NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity.
Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging
the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks.
9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical
connectors and remove the driver air bag module.
10. Open and lower the glove compartment door.

11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
12. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel (I/P).
The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module
rear bracket can scratch the front of the I/P.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the I/P.
13. Remove the passenger air bag module.
1 Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2 Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air
bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Separate the weatherstrip.
2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.
19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB. 21. Connect the battery ground cable.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SPDJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at
least one minute. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide
and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector.

5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2 Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3 Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. CAUTION:
- During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire
harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in wiring harness damage.
- The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when
connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in
the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag
module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage.
Install the passenger air bag module. 1
Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2 Attach the wire harness routing clip.
NOTE: -
During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully
seated into the instrument panel.
- Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel (I/P). The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the I/P.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the I/P.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.

12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. CAUTION: The driver air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the driver air bag
module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the driver air bag module. Do not force
the electrical connectors into the driver air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in component damage and/or connector damage.
Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then
connect the horn electrical connector.
14. NOTE:
- Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the driver air
bag module hooks during installation.
- Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module hooks.
Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3
driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip. -
When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of
the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an
even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air
bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn.
15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB and
install the cover.
17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front
of any air bag module when the battery is
18. Prove out the SRS as follows:
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS
fail to light.
- flash.
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime
will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any
SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Smart Junction Box
Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box
Smart Junction Box > Page 1165
Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Smart Junction Box
Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box
ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 1170
Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Smart Junction Box
Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box
> Smart Junction Box > Page 1177
Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1182
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)

Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified. Fuse and Relay Numbering and Naming. Fuse and relay numbering and
naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin
positions are added to illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
C904
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were
disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when
available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the
connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring
harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of
the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.

- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Symbols (Part 2)
Symbols (Part 3)
Symbols (Part 4)
Symbols (Part 5)
Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
6 = Male half
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: -
Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Fuse Block: Connector Views
C1035A
C1035B
C1035C
C2280A
C2280B (Part 1)
C2280B (Part 2)
C2280C
C2280D
C2280E
C2280F
C2280G
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application
and ID > Smart Junction Box
Fuse Block: Application and ID Smart Junction Box
and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 1207
Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Smart Junction Box
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB)
C1035A
C1035B
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1219
C1035C
C2280A
C2280B (Part 1)
C2280B (Part 2)
C2280C
C2280D
C2280E
C2280F
C2280G
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Smart Junction Box
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Testing and Inspection
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator and Message Center Messages The TPMS
indicator and vehicle message center (if equipped) sometimes displays faults that cannot be
resolved by the customer. Treat these messages as TPMS faults that must be serviced.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Illuminates Continuously
NOTE: If the spare tire is in use, the damaged road tire must be repaired and installed on the
vehicle to restore complete TPMS functionality before carrying out any diagnosis.
NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as E-Series and certain
sensors will result in a false low tire pressure event, which will cause the TPMS indicator to
illuminate.
1. The TPMS indicator remains on continuously for the following condition:
^ Low Tire Pressure - The TPMS indicator is illuminated solid and the message center displays
LOW TIRE PRESSURE (if equipped). This is displayed when any of the tire pressures are low.
When this condition exists, the tire pressure must be adjusted to the recommended cold pressure
as indicated on the vehicle certification label.
2. NOTE: The TPMS sensors do not transmit when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle has been
stationary for more than 30 minutes, it will be
necessary to wake up the sensors so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the
SJB.
If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, carry out the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Sensor Activation procedure.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Flashes
The TPMS indicator flashes for 70 seconds, then remains ON solid when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, for the following conditions:
1. Tire Pressure Sensor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE PRESSURE
SENSOR FAULT when a tire pressure sensor is
malfunctioning. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and
Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
2. No communication with the SJB (TPMS is integral to the SJB) - The TPMS indicator is
illuminated when the instrument cluster has not received
any signals from the SJB for more than 5 seconds. If equipped, the message center displays TIRE
PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring
System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
3. Tire Pressure Monitor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE PRESSURE
MONITOR FAULT when the tire pressure
monitoring system is malfunctioning or communication with the instrument cluster has been lost.
GO to Symptom Chart. See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Message Center Configuration
Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Message Center Configuration
MESSAGE CENTER CONFIGURATION
Oil Life Reset
NOTE: -
The oil life calculation is set at a maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 180 days.
- The XXX's in the steps below represent a numeric value and will display the correct number in
percent. For example; OIL LIFE = XXX% may display OIL LIFE = 45%.
1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to reset the
oil life to 100%. 3. The message center displays OIL LIFE SET TO 100%.
Oil Life Start Value
NOTE: The oil life start value is used to reset the oil life value back to the maximum of
approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by
10% increments down to 10%.
HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to adjust
new oil life %.
3. NOTE: Once the percent has been lowered to 10%, the next button press starts the sequence
over again beginning at 100%.
Press and release the RESET button to lower the start value percent until the message center
displays the newly desired percent.
4. Press and release the SETUP button to return to the setup menu.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL)
Check Engine, Service Engine Soon, Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol
The MIL notifies the driver that the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an on board
diagnostic (OBD) emission-related component or system concern. When this occurs, an OBD
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets.
- The MIL is located in the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE
SOON or the international standards organization (ISO) standard engine symbol.
- The MIL is illuminated during the instrument cluster prove out for approximately 4 seconds.
- The MIL remains illuminated after instrument cluster prove out if: -
an emission-related concern and DTC exists.
- the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster (applications with the MIL
controlled through the communication link).
- the PCM is operating in the hardware limited operation strategy (HLOS).
- The MIL remains off during the instrument cluster prove out if an indicator or instrument cluster
concern is present.
- To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the scan tool must be sent, or 3
consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a concern.
- For all MIL concerns, go to Symptom Charts. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
- If the MIL flashes at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition may exist.
- If the MIL flashes erratically, the PCM can reset while cranking if the battery voltage is low.
- The MIL flashes after a period of time with the key in the RUN position (engine not running) if
DTC P1000 is set.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component
Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
Oil Life
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center. USE ONLY
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change ( approximately 7,500 miles (
12,000 km ) or 12 months ) perform the following:
1. Press and release the SETUP control to display "OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW".
2. Press and hold the RESET control for 2 seconds and release. Oil life is set to 100% and "OIL
LIFE SET TO 100%" is displayed. 3. While "OIL LIFE SET TO 100%" is displayed, if a lower oil life
is start value is desired , press and release the RESET control to reduce the start
value. Each press of the RESET control reduces the value by 10 percent.
Note: Oil life start value of 100% equals 7,500 miles ( 12,000 km ) or 12 months. For example,
setting oil life start value to 60% sets the oil life start value to 4,500 miles ( 7,200 km ) and 108
days.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation
JACKING AND LIFTING
WARNING:
- When jacking or lifting the vehicle, block all wheels remaining on the ground. Set the parking
brake if the rear wheels will remain on the ground. These actions help prevent unintended vehicle
movement. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
- Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack. The jack could unintentionally
lower. Always support vehicle with floor stands. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
- Only raise the vehicle when positioned on a hard, level surface. Attempting to raise the vehicle on
an uneven or soft surface may result in vehicle slipping or falling from the jack or jackstand. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
- Vehicle may have multiple drive wheels. Do not use engine to power the driveline unless all drive
wheels are elevated off the ground. Drive wheels in contact with ground could cause unexpected
vehicle movement. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
CAUTION:
- The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated
tire. To avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to hoist the vehicle for any other purpose.
- Under no circumstances should the vehicle ever be lifted by the front or rear control arms,
halfshafts or front wheel constant velocity (CV) joints. Severe damage to the vehicle could result.
- To prevent possible damage to the underbody, do not drive the vehicle onto the drive-on lift
without first checking for possible interference.
- Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if care is not
exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle.
Front and Rear - Jacking and Lifting Points

Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Training
Special Tool(s)
the valve stem.
Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training >
Page 1256

successful.
Page 1257
Activation
Special Tool(s)
pressure sensor.
times.
Chart
in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Disassembly
accordingly.
instructed.
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1260
Assembly
installation.

Cradle
Material
Disassembly
accordingly.
base part number.
the worm gear.
and prying up.
Assembly
valve stem.
of the wheel.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator >
illuminate.
SJB.
malfunctioning. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic

Procedures
PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom
Related Diagnostic Procedures
GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Training
Special Tool(s)
the valve stem.
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1274

successful.
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1275
Activation
Special Tool(s)
pressure sensor.
times.
Chart
in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Disassembly
accordingly.
instructed.
Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1278
Assembly
installation.

Cradle
Material
Disassembly
accordingly.
base part number.
the worm gear.
and prying up.
Assembly
valve stem.
of the wheel.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises
Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises
TSB 09-5-8
03/23/09
ROTATIONAL CLICKING NOISE FROM 17 INCH CHROME WHEEL CLADDING - BUILT

BEFORE 211/2009 - EXCLUDES HYBRID
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid), built before 2/01/2009
and equipped with 17 inch chrome clad wheels, may exhibit rotational clicking noise from the
chrome cladding (attached to rim) during slow speed parking lot type maneuvers.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FRONT WHEELS MAY EXHIBIT NOISE MORE THAN REAR WHEELS DUE TO WEIGHT OF
THE POWERTRAIN.
1. Verify noise is coming from the chrome cladding on wheel(s) by driving slow parking lot type
maneuvers at speeds less than 10 MPH (16 km/h).
2. Mark wheel(s) exhibiting noise, rotate rear wheels to the front, evaluate unmarked wheels for
noise, and mark any additional wheel(s) exhibiting
noise.
3. Replace marked wheel(s) exhibiting noise with updated service parts per Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 204-04.
Parts Block
090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr.

4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace One (1) Wheel. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer Tire
Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS) And Balance Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1,
1015D)
090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Two (2) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 1292
Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs.
4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
1007 07
Disclaimer
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises
TSB 09-5-8
03/23/09

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE POWERTRAIN.
noise.
Parts Block
090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr.

1015D)
090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs.
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page
1298
Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs.
090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
1007 07
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams
Wheel Bearing: Diagrams
Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - Exploded View
Wheel Bearing And Wheel Hub - Exploded View

Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front
Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Special Tool(s) (Part 1)

Repair > Front > Page 1304
Removal
NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed.
1. Remove the wheel knuckle. 2. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel
bearing.
3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
4. Remove the snap ring. 5. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the
wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise.
2. NOTE: Special tool 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring. 4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
5. Install the wheel knuckle.

Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear
Wheel Bearing

Removal
NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
1. Remove the wheel knuckle.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles 2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the ABS
wheel speed sensor ring.
All vehicles 4. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub.
6. Remove the wheel bearing snap ring from the wheel knuckle.
FWD vehicles 7. Using the special tools, remove the wheel bearing from the wheel knuckle.
AWD vehicles 8. Using the special tools, press the wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
All vehicles 1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the wheel bearing snap ring. 3. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub into the
wheel bearing.
FWD vehicles 4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring. 5. Install the wheel hub nut.
AWD vehicles 6. Install the wheel knuckle.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information >
Specifications > Front
Axle Nut: Specifications Front
Front wheel hub nut .............................................................................................................................

.................................................... 300 Nm (222 lb-ft)
Install a new front wheel hub nut.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information >
Specifications > Front > Page 1315
Axle Nut: Specifications Rear
Rear wheel hub nut .............................................................................................................................

..................................................... 290 Nm (214 lb-ft)
Install a new rear wheel hub nut.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Wheel lug nuts .....................................................................................................................................

...................................................... 133 Nm (98 lb-ft)
Tighten the wheel nuts in a star pattern

Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front
Wheel Studs
1. Remove the wheel bearing and hub. 2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel stud from the
wheel hub. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear
Wheel Studs
1. Remove the wheel bearing and hub. 2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel studs from the
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation
JACKING AND LIFTING
WARNING:
CAUTION:

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT) SYSTEM
Overview
The VCT enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function of
engine operating conditions. There are 4 types of VCT systems.
- Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded.
- Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced.
- Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and
equally advanced or retarded.
- Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are
shifted independently.
All systems have 4 operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default
mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM)
determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant
temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine
RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine
power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque.
In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the
overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS
and DEPS systems are used.
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System

VCT System
The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position
(CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of equally spaced teeth
equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1). Four cylinder and V8
engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1 tooth trigger wheel. The
extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP signal for that bank. A
crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10
degree increments.
1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor, engine coolant
temperature (ECT) sensor, engine oil temperature
(EOT) sensor, CMP, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, and CKP to
determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed
throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part
and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle
position. The VCT system does not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal
is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the
VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly.
As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the
cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a
fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle.
The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT
solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired and
actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1331
disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related
DTC is also set when the concern is detected.
5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly
which advances or retards the camshaft timing.
One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the
timing chain. Oil chambers between the 2 halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When
the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil
pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil
flow.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information >
Specifications


Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > System
Diagnosis > Compression Test
Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1337

gasket may be
Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1338
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing
> Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft Bearing: Specifications
Camshaft Bearing Cap Bolts ...............................................................................................................

.................................................... 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH
Camshaft: Diagrams Valve Train Components - LH
Valve Train Components - Exploded View

Valve Train Components - LH (Part 1)
> Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH > Page 1347

> Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH > Page 1348
Camshaft: Diagrams Valve Train Components - RH
Valve Train Components - RH

> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Camshaft: Procedures
Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Specifications.
1. Measure each camshaft journal diameter in 2 directions.
Camshaft Journal to Bearing Clearance - OHC Engines
1. NOTE: The camshaft journals must meet specifications before checking camshaft journal
clearance.
Measure each camshaft bearing in 2 directions. ^
Subtract the camshaft journal diameter from the camshaft bearing diameter.
Camshaft End Play - OHC Engines
Special Tool(s)
1. Using the special tool, measure the camshaft end play. 2. Position the camshaft to the rear of
the cylinder head. 3. Zero the indicator. 4. Move the camshaft to the front of the cylinder head. Note
and record the camshaft end play.
^ If camshaft end play exceeds specifications, install a new camshaft and recheck end play.
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1351
^ If camshaft end play exceeds specification after camshaft installation, install a new cylinder head.
Camshaft Surface Inspection
1. Inspect camshaft lobes for pitting or damage in the contact area. Minor pitting is acceptable
outside the contact area.
Camshaft Lobe Lift
Special Tool(s)
1. Use an indicator gauge to measure camshaft intake/exhaust lobe lift.
^ Rotate the camshaft and subtract the lowest indicator reading from the highest indicator reading
to figure the camshaft lobe lift.
Camshaft Runout
Special Tool(s)
1. NOTE: Camshaft journals must be within specifications before checking runout.

Using the special tool, measure the camshaft runout. ^
Rotate the camshaft and subtract the lowest indicator reading from the highest indicator reading.
Camshaft: Removal and Replacement
Camshafts - LH
Camshafts - LH


Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
1. Remove the coolant pump belt. 2. Remove the timing drive components.
3. NOTE: The OEM pulley is pressed on flush to the end of the camshaft. The service pulley is
pressed on flush to the end of the camshaft.
Using the special tools, remove and discard the coolant pump pulley.
4. CAUTION: Do not scratch the camshaft sealing surface while removing the camshaft oil seal. If
scratched, camshaft oil seal leakage may
occur.
Using the special tools, remove and discard the camshaft oil seal.
5. Remove the 2 bolts and the camshaft oil seal retainer.
^ Discard the press-in-place gasket.
6. CAUTION: Cylinder head camshaft bearing caps must be assembled in their original positions.
Some engines have factory markings on
the camshaft bearing caps (as shown in illustration). Engines that do not have the factory markings
must be marked for correct position and orientation prior to removal. Failure to install the camshaft
bearing caps in their original position may result in severe engine damage.
If necessary, mark the camshaft bearing cap position and orientation as shown in the illustration.
7. CAUTION: After loosening all of the camshaft bearing cap bolts, remove the camshaft bearing
thrust caps (1L and 6L) first, or damage
to the thrust caps may occur.
NOTE: Make sure the camshaft bearing caps are marked as instructed in the previous step.
Loosen the bolts evenly in the sequence shown. 1. Remove the camshaft bearing thrust caps (1L
and 6L). 2. Remove the remaining camshaft bearing caps. 3. Remove the camshafts from the
cylinder head.
Installation
1. Lubricate the camshafts with clean engine oil and carefully position the camshafts into the
cylinder head.
^ Align the camshafts as shown.
2. CAUTION: The camshaft caps must be installed in their original positions or damage to the
engine may occur.
CAUTION: Do not install the camshaft journal thrust caps until all of the camshaft bearing caps
have been installed, or damage to the thrust caps may occur.
Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the camshaft bearing caps with clean engine oil and install the
bearing caps. ^
Loosely install the bolts.

3. Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the camshaft bearing thrust caps with clean engine oil and
install the bearing thrust caps.
^ Loosely install the bolts.
4. Install the bolts.
^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).

5. NOTE: Clean the sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner before installing a new
press-in-place gasket.
Install the camshaft oil seal retainer and the 2 bolts. ^
6. NOTE: Lubricate the camshaft oil seal with clean engine oil.
Using the special tools, install the camshaft oil seal.

7. NOTE: The OEM pulley is pressed on flush to the end of the camshaft. The service pulley is
pressed on flush to the end of the camshaft.
Using the special tools, install a new service coolant pump pulley.
8. Install the timing drive components. 9. Install the coolant pump belt.
Camshafts - RH
Camshafts - RH
Material
Removal
1. Remove the timing drive components.
2. CAUTION: Cylinder head camshaft bearing caps must be assembled in their original positions.
Some engines have factory markings on
the camshaft bearing caps (as shown in illustration). Engines that do not have the factory markings
must be marked for correct position and orientation prior to removal. Failure to install the camshaft
bearing caps in their original position may result in severe engine damage.
If necessary, mark the camshaft bearing cap position and orientation as shown in the illustration.
3. CAUTION: After loosening all of the camshaft bearing cap bolts, remove the camshaft bearing
thrust caps (5R and 1R) first, or damage
to the thrust caps may occur.
NOTE: Make sure the camshaft bearing caps are marked as instructed in the previous step.
Loosen the bolts evenly in the sequence shown. 1. Remove the camshaft bearing thrust caps (5R
and 1R). 2. Remove the remaining camshaft bearing caps. 3. Remove the camshafts from the
cylinder head.
Installation
1. Lubricate the camshafts with clean engine oil and carefully position the camshafts into the
cylinder head.
^ Align the camshafts as shown.
2. CAUTION: The camshaft caps must be installed in their original positions or damage to the
engine may occur.
CAUTION: Do not install the camshaft bearing thrust caps until all of the camshaft bearing caps
have been installed, or damage to the thrust caps may occur.
Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the camshaft bearing caps with clean engine oil and install the
bearing caps. ^
3. Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the camshaft bearing thrust caps with clean engine oil and
install the bearing thrust caps.
^ Loosely install the bolts.
4. Install the bolts.

5. Install the timing drive components.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Diagrams Valve Train Components - LH

Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH > Page 1370

Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH > Page 1371
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Diagrams Valve Train Components - RH

Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Hydraulic Lash Adjuster Inspection
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Testing and Inspection Hydraulic Lash Adjuster Inspection
Hydraulic Lash Adjuster Inspection
1. Inspect the hydraulic lash adjuster and roller follower for damage. If any damage is found,
inspect the camshaft lobes and valves for damage.
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Hydraulic Lash Adjuster Inspection > Page 1374
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Testing and Inspection Valve Tappet Inspection
Valve Tappet Inspection
1. Inspect the valve tappet for damage, especially in the indicated areas. If any damage is evident,
inspect the camshaft lobes and valves for damage.
Install new components as necessary.

Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1375
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair
Hydraulic Lash Adjuster


Material
1. Remove the camshaft roller followers.
2. NOTE: Mark the positions of the hydraulic lash adjusters to make sure they are assembled in
their original positions.
Remove the hydraulic lash adjusters.
3. NOTE: Inspect the hydraulic lash adjusters for scoring marks and uneven wear in the bore.
Install new lash adjusters if necessary.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^
Lubricate the hydraulic lash adjusters with clean engine oil.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm
Assembly > Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH
Rocker Arm Assembly: Diagrams Valve Train Components - LH

Assembly > Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH > Page 1383

Assembly > Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH > Page 1384
Rocker Arm Assembly: Diagrams Valve Train Components - RH

Assembly > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1385
Rocker Arm Assembly: Testing and Inspection
Roller Follower Inspection
1. Inspect the roller follower for flat spots or scoring. If any damage is found, inspect the camshaft
lobes and hydraulic lash adjuster for damage.
Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair
Camshaft Roller Follower


Special Tool(s)
Material
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the LH and RH valve covers.
3. CAUTION: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs or damage may
Remove the 6 spark plugs. ^
4. Remove the RH splash shield.
5. Rotate the crankshaft until the camshaft lobe is pointing directly away from the roller follower. 6.
Using the special tool, remove the roller followers.
7. NOTE: Lubricate the camshaft followers with clean engine oil.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation
Overview

VCT System
degree increments.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1393
flow.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing >
Component Information > Specifications
Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications
Connecting Rod
Bearing bore diameter

...........................................................................................................................................
53.015-53.035 mm (2.0872-2.0879 in) Bearing-to-crankshaft clearance
.................................................................................................................................. 0.028-0.066 mm
(0.001-0.0025 in) Side clearance
.............................................................................................................................................................
0.100-0.30 mm (0.0039-0.0118 in) Clearance-to-pin
Service limit .........................................................................................................................................

..................................... 0.035 mm (0.0013 in) Standard .....................................................................
........................................................................................... 0.004-0.02 mm (0.0001-0.0007 in)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine >
Connecting Rod: Specifications
Connecting Rod
Bearing bore diameter

...........................................................................................................................................
53.015-53.035 mm (2.0872-2.0879 in) Bearing-to-crankshaft clearance
.................................................................................................................................. 0.028-0.066 mm
(0.001-0.0025 in) Length (center-to-center)
............................................................................................................................................
138.06-138.14 mm (5.435-5.38 in) Maximum allowed bend
....................................................................................................................................... 0.038 mm
per 25 (0.0014 per 0.984 in) Maximum allowed twist
....................................................................................................................................... 0.050 mm
per 25 (0.0019 per 0.984 in) Pin bore diameter
......................................................................................................................................................
21.017-21.031 mm (0.827-0.828 in) Side clearance
.............................................................................................................................................................
0.100-0.30 mm (0.0039-0.0118 in) Clearance-to-pin
Service limit .........................................................................................................................................

..................................... 0.035 mm (0.0013 in) Standard .....................................................................
........................................................................................... 0.004-0.02 mm (0.0001-0.0007 in)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket >
Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Crankshaft Pulley Bolt
First pass .............................................................................................................................................

.................................................. 120 Nm (89 lb-ft). Second pass ........................................................
..................................................................................................................... Loosen one full turn
(360°) Third pass .................................................................................................................................
.............................................................. 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). Final pass ..................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. 90 Nm
(66 lb-ft).
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing >
Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications
Crankshaft
Connecting rod journal
Diameter
.............................................................................................................................................................
49.969-49.991 mm (1.967-1.968 in) Maximum out-of-round
.............................................................................................................................................................
0.006 mm (0.0002 in) Maximum taper .................................................................................................
........................................................................ 0.008 mm (0.0003 in)
Maximum end play

.......................................................................................................................................................
0.135-0.255 mm (0.005-0.010 in) Main bearing journal
Diameter
.............................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................ 0.008 mm (0.0003 in) Clearance-to-cylinder block
................................................................................................................................. 0.024-0.072 mm
(0.0009-0.003 in)
Main bearing bore inside diameter

.......................................................................................................................... 67.998-68.022 mm
(2.677-2.6780 in)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine >
Crankshaft: Specifications
Crankshaft
Connecting rod journal
Diameter
.............................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................ 0.008 mm (0.0003 in)
Maximum end play

.......................................................................................................................................................
0.135-0.255 mm (0.005-0.010 in) Main bearing journal
Diameter
.............................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................ 0.008 mm (0.0003 in) Clearance-to-cylinder block
................................................................................................................................. 0.024-0.072 mm
(0.0009-0.003 in)
Main bearing bore inside diameter

.......................................................................................................................... 67.998-68.022 mm
(2.677-2.6780 in)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1410
Crankshaft: Service and Repair
Crankshaft End Play
Special Tool(s)

1. Using the Dial Indicator Gauge, measure the crankshaft end play. 2. Position the crankshaft to
the rear of the cylinder block. 3. Zero the indicator. 4. Move the crankshaft to the front of the
cylinder block. Note and record the crankshaft end play.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater >
Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair
Block Heater
Block Heater
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system.
3. CAUTION: Make sure that the block heater wiring is routed and secured away from rotating or
hot components, or damage to the
wiring can occur.
Disconnect the block heater electrical connector.
4. Remove the block heater.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Fill and bleed the cooling system.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer -
Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications
First pass .............................................................................................................................................

(360°) Third pass .................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. 90 Nm
(66 lb-ft).
Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1417
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Pulley
Crankshaft Pulley and Front Seal

Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the accessory drive belt. 3. Use
the special tool to hold the crankshaft pulley and remove the crankshaft pulley bolt.
4. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft pulley.
Installation
1. Lubricate the crankshaft front seal inner lip with clean engine oil.
2. NOTE: Clean the keyway and slot using metal surface cleaner before applying silicone gasket
and sealer.
NOTE: The crankshaft pulley must be installed and the bolt tightened within 4 minutes of applying
the silicone gasket and sealer.
Apply silicone gasket and sealant to the end of the keyway slot.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the outside diameter sealing surface with clean engine oil.
Using the special tool, install the crankshaft pulley.

4. Install the bolt and washer. Using the special tool to hold the crankshaft pulley, tighten the bolt in
4 stages:
^ Stage 1: Tighten to 120 Nm (89 lb-ft).

^ Stage 2: Loosen one full turn.
^ Stage 4: Tighten an additional 90 degrees.
5. Install the accessory drive belt.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine >
Piston: Specifications
Piston
Diameter
Coated
Grade 1
.....................................................................................................................................................
88.990-89.010 mm (3.5035-3.5043 in) Grade 2
.....................................................................................................................................................
88.998-89.022 mm (3.5039-3.5048 in) Grade 3
.....................................................................................................................................................
89.010-89.030 mm (3.5043-3.5051 in)
Uncoated
Grade 1
.................................................................................................................................................
88.970-88.980 mm (3.50275-3.50314 in) Grade 2
.................................................................................................................................................
88.978-88.992 mm (3.50306-3.50362 in) Grade 3
.................................................................................................................................................
89.010-89.030 mm (3.50432-3.50511 in)
Pin bore diameter

..................................................................................................................................................
21.008-21.012 mm (0.8270-0.8272 in) Pin
Diameter
.........................................................................................................................................................
21.011-21.013 mm (0.8271-0.8273 in) Length ....................................................................................
................................................................................. 60.51-60.08 mm (2.382-2.365 in)
Ring end gap
Compression
Bottom (gauge diameter)

.................................................................................................................................. 0.27-0.42 mm
(0.0106-0.0165 in) Bottom (service limit)
.................................................................................................................................................... 0.65
mm (0.0255 in) max Top (gauge diameter) (a)
.............................................................................................................................. 0.100-0.250 mm
(0.0039-0.0098 in) Top (service limit)
.........................................................................................................................................................
0.50 mm (0.0196 in) max
Oil ring
(Steel rail, gauge diameter)

............................................................................................................................... 0.15-0.65 mm
(0.0059-0.0255 in) (Steel rail, service limit)
................................................................................................................................................. 0.90
mm (0.0354 in) max
Ring groove width

Compression
Bottom
..........................................................................................................................................................
1.530-1.545 mm (0.0602-0.0608 in) Top .............................................................................................
................................................................... 1.230-1.245 mm (0.0484-0.0490 in) Oil ring
..........................................................................................................................................................
3.030-3.055 mm (0.1192-0.0120 in)
Pin-to-piston fit
................................................................................................................................................... 0.002
to 0.009 mm (0.00007-0.0003 in) Clearance-to-cylinder bore
.................................................................................................................................... 0.012 to 0.022
mm (0.0005-0.0009 in)
(a) Specification 82.4 mm (3.2441 in) diameter gauge

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine >
Piston Ring: Specifications
Piston Rings
Ring end gap
Compression
Bottom (gauge diameter)

.................................................................................................................................. 0.27-0.42 mm
(0.0106-0.0165 in) Bottom (service limit)
.................................................................................................................................................... 0.65
mm (0.0255 in) max Top (gauge diameter) (a)
.............................................................................................................................. 0.100-0.250 mm
(0.0039-0.0098 in) Top (service limit)
.........................................................................................................................................................
0.50 mm (0.0196 in) max
Oil ring
(Steel rail, gauge diameter)

............................................................................................................................... 0.15-0.65 mm
(0.0059-0.0255 in) (Steel rail, service limit)
................................................................................................................................................. 0.90
mm (0.0354 in) max
Ring groove width
Compression
Bottom
..........................................................................................................................................................
1.530-1.545 mm (0.0602-0.0608 in) Top .............................................................................................
................................................................... 1.230-1.245 mm (0.0484-0.0490 in) Oil ring
..........................................................................................................................................................
3.030-3.055 mm (0.1192-0.0120 in)
(a) Specification 82.4 mm (3.2441 in) diameter gauge

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System
Valve Clearance

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release >
System Information > Service and Repair
WARNING:
injury.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly >
Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH
Rocker Arm Assembly: Diagrams Valve Train Components - LH

Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH > Page 1438

Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH > Page 1439
Rocker Arm Assembly: Diagrams Valve Train Components - RH

Rocker Arm Assembly: Testing and Inspection
Roller Follower Inspection
1. Inspect the roller follower for flat spots or scoring. If any damage is found, inspect the camshaft
lobes and hydraulic lash adjuster for damage.
Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair
Camshaft Roller Follower


Special Tool(s)
Material
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the LH and RH valve covers.
3. CAUTION: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs or damage may
Remove the 6 spark plugs. ^
4. Remove the RH splash shield.
5. Rotate the crankshaft until the camshaft lobe is pointing directly away from the roller follower. 6.
Using the special tool, remove the roller followers.
7. NOTE: Lubricate the camshaft followers with clean engine oil.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH
Valve Cover: Service and Repair Valve Cover - LH
Valve Cover - LH
Material
Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 1449
Removal
CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign
material (including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil
passages, coolant passages or the oil pan may cause engine failure.
1. Remove the LH ignition coil-on-plugs. 2. If equipped, remove the bolt and the engine lift bracket.
3. Remove the 2 bolts and the accelerator cable snow shield.
4. CAUTION: Do not disconnect the crankcase ventilation tube from the valve cover or damage to
the ventilation tube may occur.
Disconnect the crankcase ventilation tube from the air cleaner outlet pipe.
5. Detach the upper radiator hose from the 2 retainers on the cooling fan shroud and position the
hose aside. 6. Detach the 4 wiring retainers from the valve cover stud bolts. 7. Detach the 3 wiring
retainers from the valve cover stud bolts and position the B+ cable aside.
8. NOTE: Inspect the crankcase ventilation tube and valve cover sealing area. If either a new valve
cover or crankcase ventilation tube is required,
both components must be installed new.
Remove the 5 bolts, 8 stud bolts and the valve cover. ^
Remove and discard the gasket.
Installation
1. Clean the valve cover, cylinder head and front cover sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner
and install a new valve cover gasket.
2. NOTE: The valve cover must be installed and the bolts and stud bolts tightened within 4 minutes
of sealant application.
Apply a 5 mm (0.19 in) dot of silicone gasket sealant to the front cover-to-cylinder head joints.
3. Position the valve cover and install the bolts and stud bolts.
4. Attach the 3 wiring (B+ cable) retainers onto the valve cover stud bolts. 5. Attach the 4 wiring
retainers to the valve cover stud bolts. 6. Attach the upper radiator hose to the 2 retainers on the
cooling fan shroud. 7. Attach the crankcase ventilation tube to the air cleaner outlet pipe. 8. Install
the accelerator cable snow shield and the 2 bolts.
9. If equipped, install the engine lift bracket and the bolt.
10. Install the LH ignition coil-on-plugs.

Valve Cover: Service and Repair Valve Cover - RH
Valve Cover - RH
Material
Removal
1. Remove the RH ignition coil-on-plugs. 2. Remove the PCV tube. 3. Disconnect the radio ignition
interference capacitor electrical connector and detach the 5 wiring retainers from the stud bolts. 4.
Remove the nut and the radio ignition interference capacitor. 5. Remove the 2 nuts and position the
engine control wiring harness shield aside. 6. Remove the 3 bolts, 10 stud bolts and the valve
cover.
^ Remove and discard the gasket.
Installation
1. Clean the valve cover, cylinder head and front cover sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner
and install a new valve cover gasket.
2. NOTE: The valve cover must be installed and the bolts and stud bolts tightened within 4 minutes
of sealant application.
Apply a 5 mm (0.19 in) dot of silicone gasket sealant to the front cover-to-cylinder head joints.
3. Position the valve cover and install the 3 bolts and 10 stud bolts.
4. Position the engine control wiring harness shield and install the 2 nuts.
5. Install the radio ignition interference capacitor and the nut.
6. Attach the wiring retainers to the stud bolts and connect the radio ignition interference capacitor
electrical connector. 7. Install the PCV tube. 8. Install the RH ignition coil-on-plugs.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component
Valve Guide: Service and Repair
Valve Guide Inner Diameter
1. NOTE: Valve guides tend to wear in an hourglass pattern. The ball gauge can be inserted into
the combustion chamber side of the valve guide if
necessary.
Use a ball gauge to determine the inner diameter of the valve guides in 2 directions at the top,
middle and bottom of the valve guide.
2. Measure the ball gauge with a micrometer.
3. If the valve guide is not within specifications, install a new cylinder head assembly.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component
Valve Seat: Service and Repair
Valve Seat Inspection
Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements
NOTE: After grinding valves or valve seats, check valve clearance.
1. Check the valve head and seat.
^ Check valve angles.
^ Check margin width.
^ Be sure margin width is within specification.
2. Inspect for abnormalities on the valve face and seat. Install a new cylinder head assembly if
abnormalities are found.
Valve Seat Width
1. Measure the valve seat width. If necessary, grind the valve seat to specification.
^ Measure the intake valve seat width.
^ Measure the exhaust valve seat width.
^ Recheck the valve spring installed length after the seats have been ground, and shim the valve
springs as necessary to achieve the correct installed spring length.
Valve Seat Runout
1. Use a valve seat runout gauge to check valve seat runout.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 1460
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH
Valve Spring: Diagrams Valve Train Components - LH

Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH > Page 1465

Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH > Page 1466
Valve Spring: Diagrams Valve Train Components - RH

Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Valve Spring: Procedures
Valve Spring Installed Length
1. Measure the installed length of each valve spring.
Valve Spring Free Length
1. Measure the free length of each valve spring.
Valve Spring Squareness
1. Measure the out-of-square on each valve spring.
^ Turn the valve spring and observe the space between the top of the valve spring and the square.
Valve Spring Strength

Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1469
Special Tool(s)
1. Use the special tool to check the valve spring for correct strength at the specified valve spring
length.
Valve Spring: Removal and Replacement
Valve Spring, Retainer, and Seal


Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
1. Remove the camshaft roller followers.
2. NOTE: If air pressure has forced the piston to the bottom of the cylinder, any loss of air pressure
will allow the valve(s) to fall into the cylinder. A
rubber band, tape or string wrapped around the end of the valve stem will prevent this from
happening.
Pressurize the cylinder using compressed air.
3. Using the special tool, remove the key, retainer and the valve spring.
4. NOTE: Camshaft removed for clarity.
Remove the valve seal.

Installation
1. NOTE: Lubricate the valve guide with clean engine oil.
Using the special tool, install the valve seal.
2. Using the special tool, install the valve spring, retainer and key.
3. Install the camshaft roller followers.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Diameter
Valve: Service and Repair Valve Stem Diameter
Valve Stem Diameter
1. Measure the diameter of each intake and exhaust valve stem at the points shown. Verify the
diameter is within specification.
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Diameter > Page 1479
Valve: Service and Repair Valve Inspection
Valve Inspection
1. Inspect the following valve areas:
1. The end of the stem for grooves or scoring. 2. The valve face and the edge for pits, grooves or
scores. 3. The valve head for signs of burning, erosion, warpage and cracking. 4. The valve margin
for wear.
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Diameter > Page 1480
Valve: Service and Repair Valve Stem to Valve Guide Clearance
Valve Stem to Valve Guide Clearance
Special Tool(s)
NOTE: The valve stem diameter must be within specifications before checking valve stem-to-valve
guide clearance.
1. NOTE: If necessary, use a magnetic base.
Install a Valve Guide Clearance Gauge on the valve stem and install a Dial Indicator Gauge with
Holding Fixture. Lower the valve until the clearance gauge contacts the upper surface of the valve
guide.
2. Move the clearance gauge toward the indicator and zero the indicator. Move the clearance
gauge away from the indicator and note the reading.
The reading will be DOUBLE the valve stem-to-valve guide clearance.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Belt: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 >
Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise
Drive Belt: Customer Interest Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise
TSB 09-21-2
11/02/09
FORD: 2008 Escape
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Section 303-05B.
3. Remove pulley.
NOTE

Parts Block
Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Belt: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 >
Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise > Page 1490
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19A216 69
Disclaimer
Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 09-21-2 > Nov
> 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise
TSB 09-21-2
11/02/09
FORD: 2008 Escape
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Section 303-05B.
3. Remove pulley.
NOTE

Parts Block
Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 09-21-2 > Nov
> 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise > Page 1496
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19A216 69
Disclaimer
Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views
Drive Belt: Exploded Views

Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 1499

Drive Belt: Mechanical Diagrams

Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Drive Belt: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of
mechanical damage.
NOTE: Modular engine (without A/C) belt tensioner shown, others similar.
NOTE: Belt tensioner is shown in the free-state position against the arm travel stops.
Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1504
3. Check that the belt length indicator, if equipped, on the belt tensioner is in the acceptable belt
installation and wear range. If the indicator is in the
belt replacement range, either an incorrect belt is installed or the belt is worn beyond the service
limit. Install a new belt as necessary.
4. Eliminate all other non-belt related noises that could cause belt misdiagnosis, such as A/C
compressor engagement chirp, A/C slugging noise,
power steering cavitations at low temperatures, variable camshaft timing (VCT) tick or generator
whine.
5. If a concern is found, correct the condition before proceeding to the next step.

6. Check the belt for cracks. Up to 15 cracks in a rib over a distance of 100 mm (4.0 in) can be
considered acceptable. If cracks exceed this standard,
install a new belt.
NOTE: Piling is an excessive buildup in the V-grooves of the belt.
7. The condition of the V-ribbed drive belt should be compared against the illustration and
appropriate action taken.
1. Small scattered deposits of rubber material. This is not a concern, therefore, installation of a new
belt is not required. 2. Longer deposit areas building up to 50% of the rib height. This is not
considered a concern but it can result in excessive noise. If noise is
apparent, install a new belt.
3. Heavy deposits building up along the grooves resulting in a possible noise and belt stability
concern. If heavy deposits are apparent, install a
new belt.
8. There should be no chunks missing from the belt ribs. If the belt shows any evidence of this,
install a new accessory drive belt. 9. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and
GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Drive Belt: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Symptom Chart


Drive Belt: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter
Drive belt chirp occurs due to pulley misalignment or excessive pulley runout. It can be the result of
a damaged or incorrectly aligned grooved pulley.
To correct, determine the area where the noise comes from. Check each of the pulleys in that area
with a straightedge to the crankshaft pulley. Look for accessory pulleys out of position in the fore/aft
direction or at an angle to the straightedge.
Drive belt squeal may be an intermittent or constant noise that occurs when the drive belt slips on
an accessory pulley under certain conditions.
A short intermittent squeal may occur during engine start-up and shut down or during very rapid
engine acceleration and decelerations, such as: ^
wide open throttle (WOT) 1-2 and 2-3 shifts or 2-3 and 3-4 back out shifts on automatic
transmissions.
^ WOT 1-2 and 2-3 shifts and any combination of rapid downshifting on manual transmissions.
These special short-term transient events are expected, and are due to the higher system inertias
required to meet the electrical and cooling demands on today's vehicle systems. Constant or
reoccurring drive belt squeal can occur: ^
if the A/C discharge pressure goes above specifications: -
the A/C system is overcharged.

- the A/C condenser core airflow is blocked.
^ if the A/C off equalized pressure (the common discharged and suction pressure that occurs after
several minutes) exceeds specifications.
^ if any of the accessories or idler pulley(s) are damaged or have a worn or damaged bearing. All
accessories should be rotatable by hand in the unloaded condition. If not, inspect the accessory.
^ if there is evidence of fluid contamination on the accessory drive belt. When the drive belt has
been exposed to fluid contamination during vehicle operation, such as leaks from the power
steering system, A/C system or cooling system, clean all pulleys with soap and water, rinse with
clean water and install a new accessory drive belt. If the drive belt has been exposed to fluids in a
localized area during routine vehicle service, such as replacement of hoses or fluids, the drive belt
and pulleys should be washed with soap and water immediately (prior to starting the engine), and
rinsed with clean water.
^ if the accessory drive belt is too long. A drive belt that is too long will allow the accessory drive
belt tensioner arm to go all the way to the arm travel stop under certain load conditions, which will
release tension to the drive belt. If the accessory drive belt tensioner indicator is outside the normal
installation wear range window, install a new accessory drive belt.
^ NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner arm should rotate freely without binding.
Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner if the drive belt tensioner is worn or damaged.
Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation
CAUTION: Incorrect accessory drive belt installation will cause excessive drive belt wear and may
cause the drive belt to come off the pulleys.
Non-standard accessory drive belts can track differently or incorrectly. If an accessory drive belt
tracks incorrectly, install a new accessory drive belt to avoid performance failure or loss of the drive
belt.
With the engine running, check accessory drive belt tracking on all pulleys. If the edge of the
accessory drive belt rides beyond the edge of the pulleys, noise and premature wear will occur.
Make sure the accessory drive belt rides correctly on the pulley. If an accessory drive belt tracking
condition exists, proceed with the following: ^
Visually check the accessory drive belt tensioner for damage and wear, especially the mounting
pad surface and arm alignment. If the accessory drive belt tensioner is not installed correctly, the
mounting surface pad will be out of position. If the tensioner arm is worn, the arm will be out of
alignment. Either of these conditions will result in chirp and squeal noises.
^ With the engine running, visually observe the grooves in the pulleys (not the pulley flanges or the
pulley forward faces) for excessive wobble. Install new components as necessary.
^ Check all accessories, mounting brackets and the accessory drive belt tensioner for any
interference that would prevent the component from mounting correctly. Correct any interference
condition and recheck the accessory drive belt tracking.
^ Tighten all accessories, mounting brackets and accessory drive belt tensioner retaining hardware
to specification. Recheck the accessory drive belt tracking.
Belt Tensioner - Mechanical
The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick, grab or bind. 1.
With the engine off, check routing of the accessory drive belt. Refer to the illustrations under
Description and Operation.
2. NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner spring is very strong and requires substantial force to
release.
Using a suitable, commercially available serpentine belt tensioner release tool, release the tension
on the belt and detach the accessory drive belt from the tensioner. Carry out the following tests: ^
Using the release tool, move the tensioner from its relaxed position, through its full stroke and back
to the relaxed position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind, and to make sure that there is
tension on the tensioner spring.
^ Rotate the tensioner pulley by hand and check for a binding, contaminated or seized condition.
^ Inspect the area surrounding the accessory drive belt tensioner for oil leaks or contamination and
repair any leaks.
3. If the accessory drive belt tensioner does not meet the criteria in the previous step, install a new
tensioner. If the accessory drive belt tensioner
meets the criteria in the previous step, proceed to testing the tensioner dynamically.
Belt Tensioner - Dynamics
The accessory drive belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows: 1. With the engine
running, observe the accessory drive belt tensioner movement. The accessory drive tensioner
should move (respond) when the
A/C clutch cycles (if equipped), or when the engine is accelerated rapidly. If the accessory drive
belt tensioner movement is excessive without A/C clutch cycling or engine acceleration, check belt
rideout. Excessive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in the belt) can cause excessive
accessory drive belt tensioner movement. Check rideout condition by installing a new belt. If
excessive accessory drive belt tensioner movement still exists, install a new accessory drive belt
tensioner.
Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt

Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt > Page 1513

Drive Belt: Service and Repair Coolant Pump Belt

Coolant Pump Belt
Coolant Pump Belt
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Cut and remove the coolant pump belt.
^ Discard the belt.

Installation
1. Install the coolant pump belt on the coolant pump pulley and position it on the camshaft pulley.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH lower splash shield.
3. CAUTION: Do not use any screwdrivers, pliers or other metal objects that could cause damage
to the belt or camshaft pulley while
installing the belt.
Rotate the crankshaft clockwise to seat the coolant pump belt on the camshaft pulley.
4. Install the RH lower splash shield, pin-type retainer and 5 bolts.

Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair
Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair
Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner

Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1519
counterclockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 4. Remove the bolt and the accessory drive
belt tensioner.


Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Engine Mount: Procedures
Powertrain/Drivetrain Mount Neutralizing
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate procedure for special instructions on loosening and tightening
mount fasteners.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Loosen, but do not remove, the
powertrain/drivetrain mount fasteners. 3. Lower the vehicle.
4. CAUTION: Do not twist or strain the powertrain/drivetrain mounts or damage to the mounts may
occur.
Move the vehicle in forward and reverse 0.6-1.2 m (2-4 ft).
5. Raise and support the vehicle. 6. Tighten the powertrain/drivetrain mount fasteners. 7. Lower the
vehicle. 8. Test the system for normal operation.
Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1524
Engine Mount: Removal and Replacement
Engine Support Insulators
Special Tool(s)
1. Remove the lower intake manifold. 2. Remove the engine support insulator bracket bolt.
3. Install the special tools.
1. Position the 2 universal adapter brackets on top of the cylinder block. 2. Install 2 M8 x 1.25 x 36
mm (1.41 in) bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Position the universal lifting bracket onto the 2
universal adapter brackets. 4. Fasten the universal lifting bracket to the 2 universal adapter
brackets with a suitable nut and bolt.
4. Using the special tools, lift the engine 12 mm (0.47 in).
5. Remove the nut and ground wire eyelet from the engine support insulator bracket stud.
6. Remove the 3 nuts and the engine support insulator bracket.
7. Remove the 3 bolts and the engine support insulator.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler
Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Idler Pulley: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 >
Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise
Idler Pulley: Customer Interest Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise
TSB 09-21-2
11/02/09
FORD: 2008 Escape
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Section 303-05B.
3. Remove pulley.
NOTE

Parts Block
Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Idler Pulley: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 >
Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise > Page 1536
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19A216 69
Disclaimer
Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Idler Pulley: > 09-21-2 >
Nov > 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise
Idler Pulley: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise
TSB 09-21-2
11/02/09
FORD: 2008 Escape
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Section 303-05B.
3. Remove pulley.
NOTE

Parts Block
Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Idler Pulley: > 09-21-2 >
Nov > 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise > Page 1542
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19A216 69
Disclaimer
Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1543
Idler Pulley: Diagrams


Idler Pulley: Service and Repair
Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley

All accessory drive belt idler pulleys
LH accessory drive belt idler pulley
4. Remove the bolt and the LH accessory drive belt idler pulley.
Center accessory drive belt idler pulley
5. Remove the bolt and the center accessory drive belt idler pulley.
RH accessory drive belt idler pulley and bracket
6. Remove the 3 RH accessory drive belt idler pulley and bracket bolts. Then detach the wiring
harness retainer and remove the idler pulley and
bracket assembly. ^
All accessory drive belt idler pulleys

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure >
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications
Oil Pressure (Minimum at 1,500 rpm with engine warmed up after 10 minutes of idling)
........................................................................... 76 kPa (11 psi)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure >
Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Oil Pressure Test
1. Disconnect and remove the oil pressure sensor from the engine. 2. Connect the Engine Oil
Pressure Gauge to the oil pressure sender oil galley port. 3. Run the engine until normal operating
temperature is reached. 4. Run the engine at the specified rpm and record the gauge reading. 5.
The oil pressure should be within specifications. 6. If the pressure is not within specification, check
the following possible sources:
^ Insufficient oil
^ Oil leakage
^ Worn or damaged oil pump
^ Oil pump screen cover and tube
^ Excessive main bearing clearance
^ Excessive connecting rod bearing clearance
^ Chain tensioner leak

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick
Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube:
> 08-2-2 > Feb > 08 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Dipstick Tube/Crank Seals
Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Customer Interest Engine - Oil Leaks From Dipstick
Tube/Crank Seals
TSB 08-2-2
02/04/08
3.0L DURATEC ENGINE - OIL LEAK (LOW AMBIENT TEMPERATURE) - DIPSTICK OR

CRANKSHAFT SEAL
FORD: 2008 Escape
ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit engine oil leaking from the dipstick
tube or the front or rear crankshaft seals. This condition is likely due to positive crankcase
ventilation (PCV) freezing when the ambient temperature is below -30 °C (-20 °F), allowing engine
crankcase pressure to build up.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Perform oil leak diagnostics as outlined in Workshop Manual, Section 303-00. With a blacklight,
inspect for leaks at the oil dipstick tube and at the front and rear crank seals.
2. If leaks are verified, order and install heated PCV kit. Replace PCV components as directed per
the instruction sheet included in the kit.
Parts Block
080202A 2008 Escape/Mariner 3.0L: 0.8 Hr.
Install Heated PCV Kit, Includes Time To Diagnose (Do Not Use With 6007D, 6666A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6A666 42
Disclaimer
Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip
Stick Tube: > 08-2-2 > Feb > 08 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Dipstick Tube/Crank Seals
Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Leaks From
Dipstick Tube/Crank Seals
TSB 08-2-2
02/04/08
3.0L DURATEC ENGINE - OIL LEAK (LOW AMBIENT TEMPERATURE) - DIPSTICK OR

CRANKSHAFT SEAL
FORD: 2008 Escape
ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit engine oil leaking from the dipstick
tube or the front or rear crankshaft seals. This condition is likely due to positive crankcase
ventilation (PCV) freezing when the ambient temperature is below -30 °C (-20 °F), allowing engine
crankcase pressure to build up.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Perform oil leak diagnostics as outlined in Workshop Manual, Section 303-00. With a blacklight,
inspect for leaks at the oil dipstick tube and at the front and rear crank seals.
2. If leaks are verified, order and install heated PCV kit. Replace PCV components as directed per
the instruction sheet included in the kit.
Parts Block
080202A 2008 Escape/Mariner 3.0L: 0.8 Hr.
Install Heated PCV Kit, Includes Time To Diagnose (Do Not Use With 6007D, 6666A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6A666 42
Disclaimer
Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1565
Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Service and Repair
Oil Level Indicator and Tube

Material
Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1566
1. Detach the upper radiator hose from the 2 retaining clips on the cooling fan shroud.
^ Position the hose aside.
2. Remove the 4 upper radiator support bracket bolts.
3. Remove the oil level indicator. 4. Remove the stud bolt and then remove the oil level indicator
tube by guiding it between the radiator support and the cooling fan.
^ Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
5. NOTE: Install a new O-ring seal and lubricate with clean engine oil.
NOTE: Installation of the oil level indicator may require the assistance of a second technician to
align the tube with the orifice.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil
With Filter ............................................................................................................................................

............................................................ 5.7L (6.0 Qt)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1571
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Oil
Ford Part Name

....................................................................................................................................... Motorcraft
SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Ford Part Number ...................................................................
...................................................................................................................... XO-5W20-QSP Ford
Specification
.........................................................................................................................................
WSS-M2C930-A with API Certification Mark
Note: Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Oil Pan: Specifications
Oil Pan Bolts ........................................................................................................................................

...................................................... 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Oil Pan: Diagrams
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube and Oil Pan Baffle (Part 1)
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan
Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan
Oil Pan
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan > Page 1579
Material
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the exhaust Y-pipe. 3. Drain the
engine oil and install the drain plug.
4. Remove and discard the oil filter. 5. Remove the 2 oil pan-to-transaxle bolts.
6. NOTE: For reference during installation, mark the location of the stud bolts.
Remove the 10 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the oil pan. ^
Remove and discard the oil pan gasket.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive
means to clean the sealing surfaces. These
tools cause scratches and gouges which make leak paths.
Use a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces of the oil pan gasket. ^
Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner and install a new oil pan gasket.
2. NOTE: The oil pan must be installed and the bolts tightened within 4 minutes of sealant
application.
Apply a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter dot of silicone sealant to the areas indicated.
3. Position the oil pan and loosely install the bolts and stud bolts. 4. Install the 2 oil pan-to-transaxle
bolts.

5. Tighten the oil pan-to-engine bolts and stud bolts in the sequence shown to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Install a new oil filter. ^
Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) and then rotate an additional 180 degrees.
7. Install the exhaust Y-pipe. 8. Fill the engine with clean engine oil.
Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan Baffle
Oil Pan Baffle

material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces that enters the oil
passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, may cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the oil pump screen and pickup
tube. 3. Remove the 7 nuts and the oil pan baffle.
^ To install tighten the oil pan baffle nuts in 2 stages. -
Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Stage 2: Tighten an additional 45 degrees.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
View 151-6
View 151-8
C103

Material
switch.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Diagrams
Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Diagrams
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Information > Diagrams > Page 1593
Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair
Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Material
Removal
material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces that enters the oil
passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, may cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the oil pan. 3. Remove the bolts,
nut and the oil pump screen and pickup tube.
^ Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
Installation
1. Install a new O-ring seal on the oil pump screen and pickup tube.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
2. Install the oil pump screen and pickup tube.
1. Position the oil pump screen and pickup tube. 2. Install the bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. Install the nut and tighten in 2 stages.
- Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Stage 2: Tighten 45 degrees.
3. Install the oil pan.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil
Pressure > Component Information > Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications
Oil Pressure (Minimum at 1,500 rpm with engine warmed up after 10 minutes of idling)
........................................................................... 76 kPa (11 psi)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil
Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1600
Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Oil Pressure Test
1. Disconnect and remove the oil pressure sensor from the engine. 2. Connect the Engine Oil
Pressure Gauge to the oil pressure sender oil galley port. 3. Run the engine until normal operating
temperature is reached. 4. Run the engine at the specified rpm and record the gauge reading. 5.
The oil pressure should be within specifications. 6. If the pressure is not within specification, check
the following possible sources:
^ Insufficient oil
^ Oil leakage
^ Worn or damaged oil pump
^ Oil pump screen cover and tube
^ Excessive main bearing clearance
^ Excessive connecting rod bearing clearance
^ Chain tensioner leak

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch,
Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation
Typical EOT Sensor

following:
degradation.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications
Intake Manifold: Specifications
Lower Intake Manifold Bolts ................................................................................................................

.................................................. 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Upper Intake Manifold Bolts ................................................................................................................

.................................................. 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Throttle body bolts and stud bolt..........................................................................................................
.......................................................10 Nm, 89 lb-in
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Upper Intake Manifold
Upper Intake Manifold
Upper Intake Manifold

and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 1609
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. 3.
Remove the 2 bolts and the accelerator cable snow shield. 4. Detach the speed control and
accelerator cables from the throttle body. 5. Remove the 3 accelerator/speed control cable bracket
bolts.
^ Position the cables and brackets aside.
6. Remove the EGR tube fitting from the EGR valve. 7. Detach the transaxle vent tube pin-type
retainer from the throttle body. 8. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical connector
and detach the wiring retainer. 9. Disconnect the vacuum harness tube fittings from the EGR valve
and the EGR vacuum regulator.
10. Disconnect the evaporative emissions (EVAP) tube from the upper intake manifold. 11.
Disconnect the idle air control (IAC) valve electrical connector. 12. Disconnect the EGR vacuum
regulator electrical connector. 13. Remove the nut from the EGR vacuum regulator stud bolt and
detach the wiring retainer. 14. Disconnect the PCV, brake booster and vacuum harness tubes from
the upper intake manifold. 15. Detach the 2 main engine control wiring harness electrical
connectors from the upper intake manifold. 16. Disconnect and plug the 2 throttle body coolant
hoses. 17. Remove the 8 bolts and the upper intake manifold.
^ Remove and discard the gaskets.
Installation
1. NOTE: Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces. Install new gaskets.
Position the upper intake manifold and install the bolts.

2. Connect the 2 throttle body coolant hoses. 3. Attach the 2 main engine control wiring harness
electrical connectors to the upper intake manifold. 4. Connect the PCV, brake booster and vacuum
harness tubes to the upper intake manifold. 5. Attach the wiring retainer to the EGR vacuum
regulator stud bolt and install the nut.
6. Connect the EGR vacuum regulator electrical connector. 7. Connect the IAC valve electrical
connector and wiring harness retainer. 8. Connect the EVAP tube to the upper intake manifold. 9.
Connect the vacuum harness tube fittings to the EGR valve and the EGR vacuum regulator.
10. Connect the TP sensor electrical connector and attach the wiring retainer. 11. Attach the
transaxle vent tube pin-type retainer to the throttle body. 12. Install the EGR tube fitting to the EGR
valve.
13. Position the accelerator/speed control cables and brackets and install the 3 bolts.
14. Attach the speed control and accelerator cables to the throttle body. 15. Install the accelerator
cable snow shield and the 2 bolts.
16. Install the air cleaner outlet pipe.

Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Lower Intake Manifold

Lower Intake Manifold
Lower Intake Manifold (Part 1)

Lower Intake Manifold (Part 2)
Removal
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Remove the upper
intake manifold. 4. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor electrical connector.
5. Disconnect the fuel supply tube quick connect coupling at the fuel rail. 6. Disconnect the fuel rail
pressure and temperature sensor electrical connector and vacuum tube. 7. Disconnect the 6 fuel
injector electrical connectors and the 2 wire shield pin-type retainers. 8. Remove the 8 lower intake
manifold bolts and the lower intake manifold.
Installation
1. NOTE: Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces. Install new gaskets.
Position the lower intake manifold and install the bolts. ^
Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Connect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors and the 2 wire shield pin-type retainers. 3.
Connect the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor electrical connector and vacuum tube. 4.
Connect the fuel supply tube quick connect coupling at the fuel rail. 5. Connect the ECT sensor
electrical connector. 6. Install the upper intake manifold. 7. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing
Seal > Component Information > Diagrams
Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Diagrams
Lower End Components - Exploded View
Flexplate and Rear Seal

Seal > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1618
Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Rear Seal

Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the flexplate. 3. Using the special
tools, remove and discard the crankshaft rear oil seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner.
NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the seal lip and seal bore before installing the seal.
Using the special tools, install the crankshaft rear oil seal.
2. Install the flexplate.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Exhaust Manifold Gasket
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Exhaust Manifold Gasket: > 10-24-13 > Dec
> 10 > Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors
Exhaust Manifold Gasket: Customer Interest Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust
odors
TSB 10-24-13
3.0L ENGINE - EXCESSIVE ENGINE/EXHAUST NOISE OR EXHAUST ODOR DUE TO

EXHAUST FLANGE LEAK
ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit
excessive engine and/or exhaust noise, or exhaust odor due to an exhaust leak at the joint
between the catalytic converter manifold flange and cylinder head joint. The malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) will not be illuminated, and no related diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) will be present.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This procedure only applies if no related DTCs are present.
1. Remove affected catalytic converter manifold assembly. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 309-00.
2. Clean both engine and manifold sur[aces. Refer to WSM, Section 303-00 for Exhaust Manifold
Cleaning and Inspection procedures.
3. Replace exhaust manifold gasket, exhaust manifold studs and nuts, and reinstall the original
catalytic converter manifold. Refer to WSM, Section
309-00.
a. It is very important the two stage manifold nut torque sequence is followed.
Parts Block

102413A 2007 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs.
DOHC: Replace The Left Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove
And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With
Any Other Labor Operations)
DOHC: Replace The Left Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Exhaust Manifold Gasket: > 10-24-13 > Dec
> 10 > Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors > Page 1629
Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
102413B 2008 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs.
DOHC: Replace The Right Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove
And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With
102413C 2007 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 3.7 Hrs.
DOHC: Replace Both Left And Right Exhaust Manifold Gaskets, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To
Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 24
Disclaimer
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Exhaust Manifold Gasket: >
10-24-13 > Dec > 10 > Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors
Exhaust Manifold Gasket: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust
Noise/Exhaust odors
TSB 10-24-13

EXHAUST FLANGE LEAK
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Section 309-00.
309-00.
Parts Block

> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Exhaust Manifold Gasket: >
10-24-13 > Dec > 10 > Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors > Page 1635
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 24
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal >
Component Information > Diagrams
Front Crankshaft Seal: Diagrams

Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Front Seal
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 3. Using
the special tool, remove and discard the crankshaft front seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner.
Apply clean engine oil to the seal lip and seal bore before installing the seal.
2. Using the special tools, install a new crankshaft front seal.
3. Install the crankshaft pulley.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
View 151-6
View 151-8
C103

Material
switch.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature
Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation
Typical EOT Sensor

following:
degradation.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket >
Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
First pass .............................................................................................................................................

(360°) Third pass .................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. 90 Nm
(66 lb-ft).
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications
Timing Chain Tensioner Bolts .............................................................................................................

.................................................... 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Timing Cover: Specifications
Timing Cover Fasteners ......................................................................................................................

..................................................... 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Timing Cover: Service and Repair
Engine Front Cover
Material
Removal
passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Release the fuel system pressure. 3.
Disconnect the battery ground cable. 4. Remove the crankshaft front seal. 5. Remove the
generator bolt and the 2 nuts.
6. Remove the stud and position the generator away from the engine.
7. Remove the bolt and the accessory drive belt tensioner. 8. Remove the bolt and the LH
accessory drive belt idler pulley. 9. Remove the bolt and the center accessory drive belt idler
pulley.
10. Remove the 3 RH accessory drive belt idler pulley and bracket bolts.
^ Detach the wiring harness retainer and remove the idler pulley assembly.
11. Detach the wiring harness retainer, remove the nut and the catalyst monitor sensor electrical
connector bracket. 12. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 13.
Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 14. Remove the LH and RH
valve covers. 15. Remove the engine support insulator. 16. Disconnect the A/C pressure switch
electrical connector. 17. Detach the 2 wire harness retainers from the speed control actuator
mounting studs. 18. Remove the 3 nuts and position the speed control actuator aside. 19. Remove
the 2 oil pan-to-front cover bolts. 20. Remove the 14 bolts, 2 stud bolts and the engine front cover.
Installation
tools cause scratches and gouges which make leak paths.
CAUTION: Do not damage the oil pan gasket while cleaning the sealant from the lower cylinder
block-to-oil pan joint.
Use a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces of sealant. ^
Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner and install new gaskets.
2. NOTE: The engine front cover must be installed and the bolts tightened within 4 minutes of
applying sealant.
Apply a 6 mm (0.23 in) diameter dot of silicone gasket and sealer to the cylinder block, lower
cylinder block, cylinder head and oil pan mating surfaces.
3. Position the engine front cover and install the bolts. Tighten in the sequence shown to 25 Nm (18
lb-ft).
4. Install the 2 oil pan-to-front cover bolts.
5. Remove the oil pan drain plug and drain the engine oil.
^ Install the plug and tighten to 26 Nm (19 lb-ft).
6. Install the speed control actuator and 3 nuts.
7. Attach the 2 wire harness retainers to the speed control actuator mounting studs. 8. Connect the
A/C pressure switch electrical connector. 9. Install the engine support insulator.
10. Install the LH and RH valve covers. 11. Connect the CMP electrical connector. 12. Connect the
CKP electrical connector. 13. Install the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector bracket and
the nut.
^ Attach the wiring harness retainer.
14. Position the RH accessory drive belt idler pulley and bracket and attach the wiring harness
retainer.
^ Install the 3 bolts and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
15. Install the center accessory drive belt idler pulley.
16. Install the LH accessory drive belt idler pulley.
17. Install the accessory drive belt tensioner and the bolt.
18. Position the generator and install the stud.
19. Install the generator bolt and 2 nuts.
20. Install the crankshaft front seal. 21. Fill the engine with clean engine oil. 22. Connect the battery
ground cable.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation
Overview

VCT System
degree increments.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1676
flow.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > System Information > Specifications
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................Specification
Engine idling.........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................125 cc
..........................................................................269 kPa (39 psi)
Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1681
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
WARNING:
injury.
All vehicles
coupling.
Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1682
test.
All vehicles
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle
Speed > System Information > Specifications
Measured/PID Values
Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................

........................................................ 705-820 RPM
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air
Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Exploded View

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter
> Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair
WARNING:
injury.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing
Order > Component Information > Specifications
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................Specification
Firing order...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................1-4-2-5-3-6
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................Specification
Spark plug gap.....................................................................................................................................

....................................1.32-1.42 mm (0.052-0.056 in)
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications > Page 1701
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1702
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................Specification
Spark plug............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................AGSF-32N
carbon fouling.
^


SPARK PLUGS
Exploded View
Removal
RH side
ease removal.

the spark plugs.
Installation



Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Compression Check > System Information > Specifications


Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test
Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1715

gasket may be
Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1716
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve
Clearance > System Information > Specifications
Valve Clearance

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications
Water Pump: Specifications
Coolant Pump Bolts
First pass .............................................................................................................................................

................................................... 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Final pass ............................................................
....................................................................................................................... Tighten an additional
90°
> Page 1723
Water Pump: Service and Repair
Coolant Pump - 3.0L (4V)
Special Tool(s)
> Page 1724
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. 3. Disconnect
the crankcase vent tube and position it aside.
> Page 1725
4. Remove the coolant pump belt. 5. Using the special tool, remove the coolant pump drive pulley.
6. Disconnect the heater hose from the coolant pump. 7. Disconnect the coolant pump-to-engine
hose and position aside. 8. Remove the 3 bolts from the coolant pump assembly.
9. Reposition the coolant pump-to-thermostat housing hose clamp and remove the coolant pump
and hose as an assembly.
Installation
1. Connect the coolant pump-to-thermostat housing hose and reposition the clamp. 2. Position the
coolant pump assembly and install the 3 bolts.
^ Tighten the 3 bolts an additional 90 degrees.
3. Connect the coolant pump-to-engine hose and the heater hose.
4. NOTE: Install the coolant pump drive pulley flush with the end of the camshaft.
Using the special tool, install the coolant pump drive pulley.
> Page 1726
5. Install the coolant pump belt. 6. Connect the crankcase vent tube.
7. Fill and bleed the cooling system.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component
Auxiliary Water Pump: Service and Repair
AUXILIARY COOLANT FLOW PUMP
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the engine coolant. 3. Remove the
LH lower engine splash shield.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component
4. Release the clamp and disconnect the auxiliary coolant pump-to-thermostat hose. 5. Release
the clamp and disconnect the heater outlet hose. 6. Disconnect the auxiliary coolant flow pump
electrical connector. 7. Remove the 2 auxiliary coolant flow pump bolts.
8. Remove the auxiliary coolant flow pump and rubber bracket assembly.
9. NOTE: Lubricate the coolant hoses with plain water only if needed. Do not use soap or other
detergents.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. -
Fill the engine cooling system.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Bypass Hose > Component
Thermostat Bypass Hose: Service and Repair

Bypass Tube - 3.0L (4V)
Material
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. 3. Remove the
thermostat housing. 4. Remove the bypass tube-to-thermostat housing hose. 5. Disconnect the
engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor electrical connector. 6. Remove the bolt, stud bolt and
bypass tube.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Bypass Hose > Component
7. Remove and inspect the O-ring seals, install new seals if necessary. 8. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with clean engine coolant.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Engine Coolant Capacity
Coolant ................................................................................................................................................
........................................... 10.6 Quarts ( 10.0 L )
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1740
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
ENGINE COOLANT AND M/E COOLANT
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored)
Ford P/N ..............................................................................................................................................

.................................................................. VC-7-B
Ford Specification ................................................................................................................................

................................................ WSS-M97B51-A1
NOTE: Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair
Degas Bottle
Degas Bottle
1. WARNING: Always allow the engine to cool before opening the cooling system. Do not unscrew
the coolant pressure relief cap when the
engine is operating or the cooling system is hot. The cooling system is under pressure; steam and
hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly. Failure to follow these
Release the pressure in the cooling system by slowly turning the pressure relief cap one half turn
counterclockwise. When the pressure is released, remove the pressure relief cap.
2. Using hose clamp pliers, clamp the degas bottle-to-radiator hose. 3. Using a suitable suction
device, siphon the coolant from the degas bottle. 4. Disconnect the radiator-to-degas bottle hose
from the degas bottle. 5. Remove the 2 degas bottle nuts.
6. Lift the degas bottle up and disconnect the degas bottle-to-radiator hose.
^ Remove the degas bottle.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 8. Fill the degas bottle. Refer to Cooling System
Draining, Filling and Bleeding for the recommended coolant mixture and fill level.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Engine Cooling Fan Motor 1
View 151-1
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Engine Cooling Fan Motor 1 > Page 1749
View 151-1
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
been simplified.
Current Flow (1)
Diagrams.
Splices (3)
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1752
Component Names (5)

the wire color.
"Symbols".
Power Distribution
Ground Distribution
C904
on the vehicle.
WARNINGS

the procedure.
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Symbols (Part 2)
Symbols (Part 3)
Symbols (Part 4)
Symbols (Part 5)
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagnostic Aids
terminal.
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
7 = Seal
1 = Proper crimp
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
6 = Male half
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
signal.
4 = Grounding foil
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
NOTE: -
splice.
wire size
harness.
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Connector Views
C1074
C1077
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1767
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Description and Operation
FAN CONTROL
The PCM monitors certain parameters (such as engine coolant temperature, vehicle speed, A/C
on/off status, A/C pressure) to determine engine cooling fan needs.
For variable speed electric fan(s):
Edge/MKX, Taurus/Taurus X/Sable, Fusion/Milan/MKZ, Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis, Town Car:

FCV Duty Cycle Output From PCM (Negative Duty Cycle)
The PCM controls the fan speed and operation using a duty cycle output on the fan control variable
(FCV) circuit. The fan controller (located at or integral to the engine cooling fan assembly) receives
the FCV command and operates the cooling fan at the speed requested (by varying the power
applied to the fan motor).
For relay controlled fans:
2.0L Focus (With A/C): PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds
2.3L Escape: PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds
The PCM controls the fan operation through the fan control (FC) (single speed fan applications),
low fan control (LFC), medium fan control (MFC), and high fan control (HFC) outputs. Some
applications will have the xFC circuit wired-to 2 separate-relays.
For 3-speed fans, although the PCM output circuits are called low, medium, and high fan control
(FC), cooling fan speed is controlled by a combination of these outputs. Refer to the table.
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Service and Repair
Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud
Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud (Part 1)

All vehicles
1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2.3L vehicles only
2. Drain the cooling system.
All vehicles
3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Remove the front impact severity sensor. 5. Remove the 2
pin-type retainers. 6. Remove the 4 bolts and the 2 radiator brackets.
7. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the bolts.
Loosen the nut, remove the 2 bolts and position aside the hood latch. ^
To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. Remove the 2 wiring harness retainers from the front bumper bracket.
9. Remove the center support bolt.
2.3L vehicles only
10. Disconnect the cooling fan resistor electrical connector. 11. Disconnect the coolant recovery
hose from the radiator and position it aside.
3.0L vehicles only
12. Detach the lower degas bottle hose from the cooling fan motor and shroud.
All vehicles
13. Disconnect the cooling fan electrical connectors. 14. Remove the 2 cooling fan bolts and the
cooling fan motor and shroud.
2.3L vehicles only

Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 1775
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 1776
Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 1779
Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 1780
Resistor > Component Information > Diagrams
C1027
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
clutch.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch >
Fan Clutch: Description and Operation
COOLING FAN CLUTCH
Cooling Fan Clutch With Fan Speed Sensor (FSS)
The cooling fan clutch is an electrically actuated viscous clutch that consists of 3 main elements:
- a working chamber
- a reservoir chamber
- a cooling fan clutch actuator valve and a fan speed sensor (FSS)
The cooling fan clutch actuator valve controls the fluid flow from the reservoir into the working
chamber. Once viscous fluid is in the working chamber, shearing of the fluid results in fan rotation.
The cooling fan clutch actuator valve is activated with a pulse width modulated (PWM) output
signal from the PCM. By opening and closing the fluid port valve, the PCM can control the cooling
fan clutch speed. The cooling fan clutch speed is measured by a Hall-effect sensor and is
monitored by the PCM during closed loop operation.
The PCM optimizes fan speed based on engine coolant temperature (ECT), engine oil temperature
(EOT), transmission fluid temperature (TFT), intake air temperature (IAT), or air conditioning
requirements. When an increased demand for fan speed is requested for vehicle cooling, the PCM
monitors the fan speed through the Hall-effect sensor. If a fan speed increase is required, the PCM
outputs the PWM signal to the fluid port, providing the required fan speed increase.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch >
Fan Clutch: Tools and Equipment
Fan Clutch Holding Tool AST tool# 8005
Allows the technician to hold the water pump pulleuy in place while loosening the radiator fan.
2009 Suggested user price: $41.20
Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1 800 525 2943

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-6
> Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1795
C1064


> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-9
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1801
C1164
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1802
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Fan Shroud: Service and Repair
Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud

Service and Repair > Page 1806
All vehicles
1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
2.3L vehicles only
2. Drain the cooling system.
All vehicles
3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Remove the front impact severity sensor. 5. Remove the 2
pin-type retainers. 6. Remove the 4 bolts and the 2 radiator brackets.
7. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the bolts.
Loosen the nut, remove the 2 bolts and position aside the hood latch. ^
8. Remove the 2 wiring harness retainers from the front bumper bracket.
9. Remove the center support bolt.
2.3L vehicles only
10. Disconnect the cooling fan resistor electrical connector. 11. Disconnect the coolant recovery
hose from the radiator and position it aside.
3.0L vehicles only
12. Detach the lower degas bottle hose from the cooling fan motor and shroud.
All vehicles
13. Disconnect the cooling fan electrical connectors. 14. Remove the 2 cooling fan bolts and the
cooling fan motor and shroud.
2.3L vehicles only

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection
HEATER CORE
1. NOTE: Testing of returned heater cores reveals that a large percentage of heater cores are good
and did not require the installation of a new
heater core. If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be tested by following the
plugged heater core component test before the heater core pressure test. Carry out a system
inspection by checking the heater system thoroughly as follows:
Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater hose to heater core attachments. A coolant
leak in the heater hose could follow the heater core tube to the heater core and appear as a leak in
the heater core.
2. NOTE: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening of
non-specified clamps can cause leakage at the
heater hose connection and damage the heater core.
Check the integrity of the heater hose clamps.
Heater Core - Plugged
1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level. 2. Start the engine and turn on the
heater. 3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, check the heater core inlet and
outlet hoses to see if they are hot. 4. If the outlet only is not hot:
- the heater core may have an air pocket.
- the heater core may be plugged.
5. If the inlet only is not hot, the thermostat may not be working correctly.
Heater Core - Pressure Test
Use the Pressure Test Kit to carry out the pressure test.
1. NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing.
Drain the coolant from the cooling system.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Install a short piece of heater hose,
approximately 101 mm (4 in) long on each heater core tube. 4. Fill the heater core and heater
hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter BT-7422-A from the Pressure Test Kit.
Secure the heater
hoses, plug and adapter with hose clamps.
5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter. 6. Close the
bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure into the heater core. 7.
Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of 3 minutes. 8. If the pressure drops, check the heater
hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the heater hoses do not leak, remove the heater
core from the
vehicle.
9. Carry out the bench test.
Heater Core - Bench Test
1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle. 2. Drain all of the coolant from the heater core. 3.
Connect the 101 mm (4 in) test heater hoses with plug and adapter to the core tubes. Then
connect the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter. 4. Apply 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure to the heater
core. Submerge the heater core in water. 5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core.
Testing and Inspection > Page 1811
Heater Core: Service and Repair

HEATER CORE
NOTE:
- If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater core is
removed.
- Use only the approved coolant for this vehicle.
1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. 2. Remove the dash panel seal. 3.
Remove the heater core bracket screw and the heater core bracket.
4. Remove the heater core. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Radiator: Service and Repair
Radiator - 3.0L
Radiator - 3.0L
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Page 1816
1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. 3. Remove the
cooling fan motor and shroud. 4. Disconnect the radiator-to-degas bottle hose and upper radiator
hose from the radiator. 5. Disconnect the lower degas bottle-to-radiator hose from the radiator. 6.
Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 7. Remove the 2 A/C condenser-to-radiator
bolts and position aside the A/C condenser from the radiator.
8. Remove the radiator. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 1822
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 1823
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay >
Page 1826
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay >
Page 1827
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
clutch.
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
View 151-6
C1064


Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-9
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1842
C1164
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1843
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component
Thermostat: Specifications
Thermostat Opening Temperatures
Starts to open ......................................................................................................................................

........................................... 84-88° C (183-190° F) Fully open ...........................................................
..................................................................................................................................... 98.9° C (210°
F)
Thermostat: Service and Repair
Thermostat - 3.0L (4V)
Material
air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing.
5. NOTE: To install, lubricate the thermostat housing O-ring seal with clean engine coolant.
Remove the 3 bolts, thermostat housing cover, O-ring seal and thermostat. ^
^ Clean and inspect the O-ring seal. Install a new seal if necessary.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling >
Thermostat Housing: Service and Repair
Thermostat Housing - 3.0L (4V)
Thermostat Housing - 3.0L (4V)
air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the thermostat housing. 5.
Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing. 6. Disconnect the heater hose
from the thermostat housing. 7. Reposition the 2 thermostat housing-to-engine clamps.
^ Remove the thermostat housing.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 9. Fill and bleed the cooling system.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications
Water Pump: Specifications
Coolant Pump Bolts
First pass .............................................................................................................................................

................................................... 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Final pass ............................................................
....................................................................................................................... Tighten an additional
90°
Water Pump: Service and Repair
Coolant Pump - 3.0L (4V)
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. 3. Disconnect
the crankcase vent tube and position it aside.
4. Remove the coolant pump belt. 5. Using the special tool, remove the coolant pump drive pulley.
6. Disconnect the heater hose from the coolant pump. 7. Disconnect the coolant pump-to-engine
hose and position aside. 8. Remove the 3 bolts from the coolant pump assembly.
9. Reposition the coolant pump-to-thermostat housing hose clamp and remove the coolant pump
and hose as an assembly.
Installation
1. Connect the coolant pump-to-thermostat housing hose and reposition the clamp. 2. Position the
coolant pump assembly and install the 3 bolts.
^ Tighten the 3 bolts an additional 90 degrees.
3. Connect the coolant pump-to-engine hose and the heater hose.
4. NOTE: Install the coolant pump drive pulley flush with the end of the camshaft.
Using the special tool, install the coolant pump drive pulley.
5. Install the coolant pump belt. 6. Connect the crankcase vent tube.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Specifications
Catalytic Converter: Specifications
Exhaust Manifold Studs .......................................................................................................................

...................................................... 11 Nm (8 lb-ft).
Discard the studs.
Exhaust Manifold Nuts
Discard the nuts.

First pass .............................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Final pass ............................................................
.................................................................................................................................... 25 Nm (18
lb-ft).
Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation
CATALYST AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
Overview
V-Engines
In-Line Engines
The catalytic converter and exhaust systems work together to control the release of harmful engine
exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of nitrogen (N),
carbon dioxide (CO2) and water vapor (H2O). However, it also contains carbon monoxide (CO),
oxides of nitrogen (NOx), hydrogen (H), and various unburned hydrocarbons (HCs). The major air
pollutants of CO, NOx,and HCs, and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled.
The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, front heated
oxygen sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, catalyst HO2S, a muffler, and an exhaust tailpipe. The
catalytic converter is typically installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. On some vehicle
applications, more than one catalyst is used between the front and rear exhaust pipes. Catalytic
converter efficiency is monitored by the on board diagnostic (OBD) system strategy in the
powertrain control module (PCM). For information on the OBD catalyst monitor, refer to the
description for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness
Codes/Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
For most vehicles, only 2 HO2Ss are used in an exhaust stream. The front sensors
(HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst are used for primary fuel control while the ones after the
catalyst (HO2S12/HO2S22) are used to monitor catalyst efficiency. However, some partial zero
emission vehicles (PZEV) use 3 HO2Ss for each engine bank. The stream 1 sensors
(HO2S11/HO2S21) located before the catalyst are used for primary fuel control, the stream 2
sensors (HO2S12/HO2S22) are used to monitor the light-off catalyst, and the stream 3 sensors
(HO2S13/HO2S23) located after the catalyst are used for long term fuel trim control to optimize
catalyst efficiency (fore aft oxygen sensor control).
Catalytic Converter
A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a
chemical reaction. A catalyst also enables a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature. The
concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The
catalytic
converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated ceramic
honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust gases
come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The catalyst
initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components so they
are used up as much as possible.
Light Off Catalyst
As the catalyst heats up, converter efficiency rises rapidly. The point at which conversion efficiency
exceeds 50% is called catalyst light off. For most catalysts this point occurs at 246°C to 302°C
(475°F to 575°F). A fast light catalyst is a 3-way catalyst (TWC) that is located as close to the
exhaust manifold as possible. Because the light off catalyst is located close to the exhaust manifold
it lights off faster and reduces emissions more quickly than the catalyst located under the body.
Once the catalyst lights off, the catalyst quickly reaches the maximum conversion efficiency for that
catalyst.
Three-Way Catalyst (TWC) Conversion Efficiency
TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart
A TWC requires a stoichiometric fuel ratio, 14.7 pounds of air to 1 pound of fuel (14.7:1), for high
conversion efficiency. In order to achieve these high efficiencies, the air/fuel ratio must be tightly
controlled with a narrow window of stoichiometry. Deviations outside of this window greatly
decrease the conversion efficiency. For example a rich mixture decreases the HC and CO
conversion efficiency while a lean mixture decreases the NOx conversion efficiency.
Exhaust System
Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 2 HO2S Configuration

The purpose of the exhaust system is to convey engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the
atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the
catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. A HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe
before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of CO, unburned HCs, and
NOx in the exhaust emissions to an acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed
from the catalytic converter past another HO2S mounted in the rear exhaust pipe and then on into
the muffler. Finally, the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust
tailpipe.
On some PZEV, there is a total of 3 HO2S in the exhaust stream. One near the exhaust manifold
(stream 1), one in the middle of the light-off catalyst (stream 2), and the third (stream 3) is mounted
after the light-off catalyst.
Underbody Catalyst
The underbody catalyst is located after the light off catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in line
with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be common to 2 light off catalysts, forming
a Y pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the catalyst and exhaust system for a specific
vehicle, refer to Exhaust System for the exhaust system-exploded view.
Three-Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter

The TWC converter contains either platinum (Pt) and rhodium (Rh) or palladium (Pd) and rhodium
(Rh). The TWC converter catalyzes the oxidation reactions of unburned HCs and CO and the
reduction reaction of NOx. The 3-way conversion can be best accomplished by always operating
the engine air fuel/ratio at or close to stoichiometry.
Exhaust Manifold Runners
The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust
manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of
cylinders.
Exhaust Pipes
Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to
increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the
engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler.
The HO2Ss provide the PCM with information related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas.
Muffler
Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase
the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and also
reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the
atmosphere.
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter
Catalytic Converter
CAUTION: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause
deterioration of the rubber.
CAUTION: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger
insulator to separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove and discard the 2 exhaust
catalytic converter nuts.
3. Remove and discard the U-bolt clamp assembly from the muffler.
4. Remove and discard the 2 resonator nuts.
5. Remove and discard the catalytic converter exhaust hanger. 6. Remove the exhaust catalytic
converter and the muffler from the vehicle as an assembly.
^ Discard the catalytic converter gasket.
7. Separate the converter from the muffler. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install new gaskets and nuts.

> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter > Page 1868
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold
Catalytic Converter - 3.0L LH Manifold
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the passenger
side splash shield.
3. Disconnect the LH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) and the LH catalyst monitor sensor electrical
connectors. 4. Using the special tool, remove the H02S.
5. CAUTION: Do not allow the exhaust Y-pipe to hang from the flexible end. Support the exhaust
Y-pipe or damage to the exhaust system
may occur.
Remove and discard the 4 exhaust Y-pipe nuts and position the exhaust Y-pipe aside. ^
Discard the gasket.
6. Remove and discard the 6 LH catalytic converter manifold nuts. 7. Remove the LH catalytic
converter from the vehicle.
^ Discard the LH catalytic converter manifold gasket.
8. Remove and discard the 6 LH catalytic converter manifold studs. 9. Clean and inspect the LH
catalytic converter manifold.
Installation
1. Install the 6 new LH catalytic converter manifold studs.
2. Position a new LH catalytic converter manifold gasket.
3. CAUTION: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification before installing the
converter bracket bolts will cause the
converter to develop an exhaust leak.
CAUTION: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification a second time will cause
the converter to develop an exhaust leak.
NOTE: Make sure to tighten the nuts in the sequence in 2 stages.
Position the LH catalytic converter and tighten the 6 exhaust manifold nuts in 2 stages in the
sequence shown. ^
Stage 1: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).

4. Position the exhaust Y-pipe gasket. 5. Position the exhaust Y-pipe and install the 4 new exhaust
Y-pipe nuts.
^ Tighten the nuts to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
6. NOTE: Make sure to apply anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S before installation
Using the special tool, install the HO2S. ^
7. Install the passenger side splash shield and the 5 bolts.
8. Connect the LH HO2S and catalyst monitor sensor electrical connectors.

Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - RH Manifold
Catalytic Converter - 3.0L RH Manifold
Removal
1. Remove the exhaust Y-pipe. 2. Disconnect the RH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical
connector. 3. Disconnect the EGR tube nut from the RH catalytic converter.
4. Remove and discard the 6 RH catalytic converter manifold nuts and remove the converter.
^ Discard the RH catalytic converter manifold gasket.
5. Remove and discard the 6 RH catalytic converter studs. 6. Clean and inspect the RH catalytic
converter manifold.
Installation
1. Install the 6 new RH catalytic converter manifold studs.
2. Position a new RH catalytic converter manifold gasket.
Position the RH catalytic converter and tighten the 6 exhaust manifold nuts in 2 stages in the
sequence shown. ^
4. Connect the EGR tube nut to the RH catalytic converter.

5. Connect the HO2S electrical connector. 6. Install the exhaust Y-pipe.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Exhaust Manifold: > 10-24-13 > Dec > 10 > Exhaust System - Excessive
Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors
Exhaust Manifold: Customer Interest Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors
TSB 10-24-13

EXHAUST FLANGE LEAK
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Section 309-00.
309-00.
Parts Block

Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Exhaust Manifold: > 10-24-13 > Dec > 10 > Exhaust System - Excessive
Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors > Page 1882
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 24
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Exhaust Manifold: > 10-24-13 > Dec > 10 > Exhaust System
- Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors
Exhaust Manifold: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust
Noise/Exhaust odors
TSB 10-24-13

EXHAUST FLANGE LEAK
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Section 309-00.
309-00.
Parts Block

Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Exhaust Manifold: > 10-24-13 > Dec > 10 > Exhaust System
- Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors > Page 1888
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 24
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1889
Exhaust Manifold: Specifications

...................................................... 11 Nm (8 lb-ft).
Discard the studs.
Discard the nuts.

First pass .............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... 25 Nm (18
lb-ft).
Exhaust Manifold: Testing and Inspection
Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection
Special Tool(s)
1. Clean the exhaust manifold using a suitable solvent. Use a plastic scraping tool to clean the
gasket sealing surfaces.
2. NOTE: New exhaust manifold gaskets, studs, nuts and/or bolts must be installed when an
exhaust manifold is serviced.
NOTE: Use a straightedge that is calibrated by the manufacturer to be flat within 0.005 mm (0.0002
inch) per running foot of length, such as Snap-On GA438A or equivalent. For example, if the
straightedge is 61 cm (24 inch) long, the machined edge must be flat within 0.010 mm (0.0004
inch) from end to end.
Using the precision straight edge and a feeler gauge, check the exhaust manifold sealing surface
for warpage. If the warpage is greater than 0.76 mm (0.0299 inch), install a new exhaust manifold.
Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold
Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold
Special Tool(s)
Material
Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 1893
Removal
side splash shield.
may occur.
Discard the gasket.
Installation
sequence shown. ^

Y-pipe nuts.

Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - RH Manifold
Removal
converter manifold.
Installation
sequence shown. ^


Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Flexible Pipe
Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Flexible Pipe
Exhaust Flexible Pipe
Exhaust Flexible Pipe
3. Remove and discard the 3 exhaust flexible pipe nuts.
4. Remove and discard the exhaust hanger and remove the exhaust flexible pipe. 5. To install,
reverse the removal procedure.

Service and Repair > Exhaust Flexible Pipe > Page 1902
Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Y-Pipe
Exhaust Y-Pipe - 3.0L
Exhaust Y-Pipe - 3.0L

1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the RH catalyst monitor
sensor electrical connector.
^ Detach the 2 wiring harness retainers.
Service and Repair > Exhaust Flexible Pipe > Page 1903
may occur.
Remove and discard the 2 exhaust catalytic converter nuts. ^
4. Remove and discard the exhaust hanger from the Y-pipe. 5. Remove and discard the 4 exhaust
Y-pipe nuts and remove the Y-pipe.
^ Install new exhaust Y-pipe gaskets and nuts.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Muffler: Service and Repair
Muffler
7. Separate the muffler from the catalytic converter. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Resonator > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Exhaust Resonator: Service and Repair
Resonator
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove and discard the 2 resonator nuts.
3. Remove and discard the resonator exhaust hanger and remove the resonator.
^ Discard the gasket.
^ Install a new resonator gasket and nuts.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Seals and Gaskets, Exhaust > Exhaust
Manifold Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Exhaust
Manifold Gasket: > 10-24-13 > Dec > 10 > Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors
Exhaust Manifold Gasket: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust
Noise/Exhaust odors
TSB 10-24-13

EXHAUST FLANGE LEAK
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Section 309-00.
309-00.
Parts Block

Manifold Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Exhaust
Manifold Gasket: > 10-24-13 > Dec > 10 > Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors > Page 1919
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 24
Disclaimer
Manifold Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Exhaust Manifold Gasket:
> 10-24-13 > Dec > 10 > Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors
Exhaust Manifold Gasket: Customer Interest Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust
odors
TSB 10-24-13

EXHAUST FLANGE LEAK
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Section 309-00.
309-00.
Parts Block

Manifold Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Exhaust Manifold Gasket:
> 10-24-13 > Dec > 10 > Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors > Page 1925
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5G232 24
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Overview

and Operation > Page 1932

Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1938
View 151-5
View 151-6
View 151-9
C175B (Part 1)
C175B (Part 2)
C175E (Part 1)
C175E (Part 2)
C175E (Part 3)
C175T (Part 1)
C175T (Part 2)
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures
Description
into the new PCM.

Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 1949
Removal
and the PCM.
Installation
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 1953
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 1958
C4033
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1962
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 1966
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description
and Operation
2-Track APP Sensor
2-Track APP Sensor
3-Track APP Sensor
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
View 151-5
C128



the MAF sensor.

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1983
View 151-8
1984
C180
C1180
1985

1986
and the CMP.

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation
View 151-6
C1064


Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7
1999
View 151-9
2000
C101
C1120
2001
2002
shield.
the CKP.

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-9
2006
C1164
2007
Typical CHT Sensor
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Page 2011

FUEL PUMP MODULE
Exploded View
Part 1
Page 2012
Part 2
Page 2013
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Page 2014
WARNING:
injury.
Page 2015
couplings.
arm and the filter.
NOTE: -
spillage.
the FP module.

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
2019
C435
2020

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
2024
View 151-5
2025
C128
2026
MAF Sensor

2027

sensor.

2028
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-8
C109
Knock Sensor (KS)
timing.
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-6
Page 2037
View 151-8
Page 2038
C1087
Page 2039
C1140
Page 2040
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Typical EOT Sensor

following:
degradation.
Sensor (HO2S) #11
View 151-7
View 151-9
View 151-7
View 151-9
View 151-10
View 151-10
Sensor (HO2S) #22
C141
C142
C171
C172
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2058
Universal HO2S
accuracy.
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)

Exploded View
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
splash shield.

removal.



Exploded View
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
splash shield.

removal.


Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation
maneuvers.
Locations
View 151-6
Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator
C1083
Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator > Page 2072
C1068
Diagrams > Page 2073

Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-6
View 151-8
C189
C1189
Typical TP Sensor

the TP sensor.

Locations
View 151-10
View 151-11
C167
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Removal
range (TR) sensor.
Installation

Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-12
C1088
generated.
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
View 151-6
C1083
C1068
Page 2105
Page 2106
Page 2107

Exploded View
Part 1
Page 2108
Part 2
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
2-Track APP Sensor
2-Track APP Sensor
3-Track APP Sensor
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
View 151-5
C128



the MAF sensor.

Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-6
2124
View 151-8
2125
C173
2126
2127
WARNING:

Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-6
View 151-8
C173
WARNING:

Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
C392

Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-6
View 151-8
C189
C1189
Typical TP Sensor

the TP sensor.

Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7
View 151-8
C180
C1180

and the CMP.

Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7
View 151-9
C101
C1120
shield.
the CKP.

Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09

SERVICE PROCEDURE
ignition key.
Parts Block
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Ign. Cylinder > Page 2173
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09

SERVICE PROCEDURE
ignition key.
Parts Block
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
> Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional


> Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional > Page 2182

Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-8
C109
Knock Sensor (KS)
timing.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................Specification
Engine idling.........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................125 cc
..........................................................................269 kPa (39 psi)
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
WARNING:
injury.
All vehicles
coupling.
test.
All vehicles
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System
Measured/PID Values
Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................

........................................................ 705-820 RPM
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing >
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Exploded View

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel
Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair
WARNING:
injury.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order >
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................Specification
Firing order...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................1-4-2-5-3-6
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................Specification
Spark plug gap.....................................................................................................................................

....................................1.32-1.42 mm (0.052-0.056 in)
Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications > Page 2212
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................Specification
Spark plug............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................AGSF-32N
carbon fouling.
^


SPARK PLUGS
Exploded View
Removal
RH side
ease removal.

the spark plugs.
Installation



Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check >
System Information > Specifications


System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test
System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 2226

gasket may be
System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 2227
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance >
Valve Clearance

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
2-Track APP Sensor
2-Track APP Sensor
3-Track APP Sensor
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
View 151-4
View 151-5
C128



the MAF sensor.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor >
View 151-4
View 151-5
C128
MAF Sensor


sensor.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component
View 151-22
C278
Brake Signal: Description and Operation
Typical BPP Switch
as follows: -
strategy.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
View 151-7
View 151-8
C180
C1180

and the CMP.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-6
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2269
C1064


Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
View 151-7
View 151-9
C101
C1120
shield.
the CKP.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
View 151-13
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
C251
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Description and Operation
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL (TAC)
Typical In-line TAC Design

Typical Parallel TAC Design
The electronic TAC is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2 wires). There are 2 designs
for the TAC, parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the
plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design has a
separate motor housing. An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a
default position. The default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop
angle. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
Overview

> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2289


Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
View 151-4
View 151-5
View 151-6
View 151-9
C175B (Part 1)
C175B (Part 2)
C175E (Part 1)
C175E (Part 2)
C175E (Part 3)
C175T (Part 1)
C175T (Part 2)
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Description
into the new PCM.
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2306
Removal
and the PCM.
Installation
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
View 151-9
C1164
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 2315
FUEL PUMP MODULE

Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
WARNING:
injury.
couplings.
arm and the filter.
NOTE: -
spillage.
the FP module.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
View 151-27
C435

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator -
Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams
C1066
Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2328
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation
IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE
NOTE: The IAC valve assembly is not adjustable and cannot be cleaned, also some IAC valves are
normally open and others are normally closed. Some IAC valves require engine vacuum to
operate.
The IAC valve assembly controls the engine idle speed and provides a dashpot function. The IAC
valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle plate through a bypass within the IAC valve
assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the desired idle speed or bypass air and signals
the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle. The IAC valve responds by positioning the
IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The PCM monitors engine RPM and increases or
decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the desired RPM.
The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control:
- no touch start
- cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up
- idle (corrects for engine load)
- stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function)
- over-temperature idle boost

Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair
1. Disconnect the idle air control (IAC) valve electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 bolts and the
IAC valve and discard the gasket.
- Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces. Install new gasket.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
been simplified.
Current Flow (1)
Diagrams.
Splices (3)
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2334
Component Names (5)

the wire color.
"Symbols".
Power Distribution
Ground Distribution
C904
on the vehicle.
WARNINGS

the procedure.
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Symbols (Part 2)
Symbols (Part 3)
Symbols (Part 4)
Symbols (Part 5)
Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids
terminal.
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
7 = Seal
1 = Proper crimp
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
6 = Male half
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
signal.
4 = Grounding foil
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
NOTE: -
splice.
wire size
harness.
Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
14-1
14-2
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Information Bus: Description and Operation
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
Vehicle communication utilizes both International Standards Organization (ISO) 9141 and controller
area network (CAN) communications. ISO 9141 is used for diagnostic use only while CAN allows
many modules to communicate with each other on a common network. CAN in-vehicle networking
is a method for transferring data among distributed electronic modules via a serial data bus.
Without serial networking, intermodule communication requires dedicated, point to point wiring
resulting in bulky, expensive, complex, and difficult to install wiring harnesses. Applying a serial
data network reduces the number of wires, combining the signals on a single network. Information
is sent to the individual control modules that control each function.
The vehicle has 3 module communication networks:
- ISO 9141
- Medium speed (MS) CAN

- High speed (HS) CAN
All 3 networks are connected to the data link connector (DLC). This makes diagnosis and testing of
these systems easier by allowing one scan tool to be able to diagnose and control any module on
the 3 networks from one connector. The DLC can be found under the instrument panel between the
steering column and the audio unit.
Network Topology (Part 1)

ISO 9141 Network Operation
The ISO 9141 communications network is a single wire network, used for diagnostic purposes only.
The ISO 9141 communications network is used for the following module: -
Parking aid module (PAM)
MS-CAN Network Operation
The MS-CAN network communicates using bussed messages. The MS-CAN has an unshielded
twisted pair cable, data bus (+) and data bus (-) circuits. In addition to scan tool communication,
this network allows sharing of information between all modules on the network.
The MS-CAN is a medium speed communication network used for the following modules: -
Audio unit
- Electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) or electronic manual temperature control

(EMTC) module
- Front control interface module (FCIM)
- Front display interface module (FDIM)
- Instrument cluster
- Satellite radio receiver (SDARS)
- Smart junction box (SJB)
HS-CAN Network Operation

The HS-CAN network communicates using bussed messages. The HS-CAN network uses an
unshielded twisted pair cable, data bus (+) and data bus (-) circuits. In addition to scan tool
communication, this network allows sharing of information between all modules on the network.
The HS-CAN is a high speed communication network used for the following modules: -
ABS module
- Four wheel drive (4WD) control module
- Occupant classification sensor (OCS) module
- Power steering control (PSC) module
- PCM
- Restraints control module (RCM)
Network Termination
The CAN network uses a network termination circuit to improve communication reliability. The
network termination of the CAN bus takes place inside the termination modules by termination
resistors. Termination modules are located at either end of the bus network. As network messages
are broadcast, in the form of voltage signals, the network voltage signals are stabilized by the
termination resistors. Each termination module has a 120 ohm resistor across the positive and
negative bus connection in the termination module. With 2 termination modules on each network,
and the 120 ohm resistors located in a parallel circuit configuration, the total network impedance, or
total resistance, is 60 ohms.
Network termination improves bus message reliability by: -
stabilizing bus voltage.
- eliminating electrical interference.

Gateway Module
The instrument cluster is the gateway module, translating HS-CAN to MS-CAN and vice versa. This
information allows a message to be distributed throughout both networks. The instrument cluster is
the only module on this vehicle that has this ability.
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - HYBRID
area network (CAN) communications. ISO 9141 is used for diagnostic use only while CAN allows
many modules to communicate with each other on a common network. CAN in-vehicle networking
is a method for transferring data among distributed electronic modules via a serial data bus.
Without serial networking, intermodule communication requires dedicated, point to point wiring
resulting in bulky, expensive, complex, and difficult to install wiring harnesses. Applying a serial
data network reduces the number of wires, combining the signals on a single network. Information
is sent to the individual control modules that control each function.
The vehicle has 3 module communication networks:

- ISO 9141
All 3 networks are connected to the data link connector (DLC). This makes diagnosis and testing of
these systems easier by allowing one scan tool to be able to diagnose and control any module on
the 3 networks from one connector. The DLC can be found under the instrument panel between the
steering column and the audio unit.

ISO 9141 Network Operation
The ISO 9141 communications network is a single wire network, used for diagnostic purposes only.
The ISO 9141 communications network is used for the following module: -
Parking aid module
MS-CAN Network Operation
The MS-CAN network communicates using bussed messages. The MS-CAN has an unshielded
twisted pair cable, data bus (+) and data bus (-) circuits. In addition to scan tool communication,
this network allows sharing of information between all modules on the network.
The MS-CAN is a medium speed communication network used for the following modules: -
Audio unit
- Electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module
- Front control interface module (FCIM)
- Front display interface module (FDIM)
- Satellite radio receiver (SDARS)
- Smart junction box (SJB)

HS-CAN Network Operation
The HS-CAN network communicates using bussed messages. The HS-CAN network uses an
unshielded twisted pair cable, data bus (+) and data bus (-) circuits. In addition to scan tool
communication, this network allows sharing of information between all modules on the network.
The HS-CAN is a high speed communication network used for the following modules: -
ABS module
- Four wheel drive (4WD) control module
- Occupant classification sensor (OCS) module
- Power steering control (PSC) module
- PCM
- Restraints control module (RCM)
- Traction battery control module (TBCM)
- Transmission control module (TCM)
Network Termination
The CAN network uses a network termination circuit to improve communication reliability. The
network termination of the CAN bus takes place inside the termination modules by termination
resistors. Termination modules are located at either end of the bus network. As network messages
are broadcast, in the form of voltage signals, the network voltage signals are stabilized by the
termination resistors. Each termination module has a 120 ohm resistor across the positive and
negative bus connection in the termination module. With 2 termination modules on each network,
and the 120 ohm resistors located in a parallel circuit configuration, the total network impedance, or
total resistance, is 60 ohms.
Network termination improves bus message reliability by: -
stabilizing bus voltage.
- eliminating electrical interference.
Gateway Module
The instrument cluster is the gateway module, translating HS-CAN to MS-CAN and vice versa. This
information allows a message to be distributed throughout both networks. The instrument cluster is
the only module on this vehicle that has this ability.
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Information Bus: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical -
Battery junction box (BJB) fuse(s): -
MIDI 80A (no communication with power steering control module)
- 5 (10A) (no communication with PCM, traction battery control module [TBCM] [Hybrid only])
- 6 (5A) (no communication with ABS module [Hybrid only])
- 8 (5A) (no communication with transmission control module [TCM] [Hybrid only])
- 15 (50A) (no communication with TBCM [Hybrid only])
- 18 (20A) (no communication with ABS module [Escape and Mariner only])
- 27 (10A) (no communication with TCM [Hybrid only])
- 29 (15A) (no communication with PCM)
- Smart junction box (SJB) fuse(s): -
5 (10A) (no communication with the SJB)
- 11 (10A) (no communication with four wheel [4WD] control module)
- 14 (10A) (no communication with front control interface module [FCIM], front display interface
module [FDIM], satellite radio receiver)
- 15 (10A) (no communication with electronic automatic temperature control [EATC] or electronic
manual temperature control [EMTC] module)
- 20 (15A) (no power to scan tool)
- 27 (10A) (no communication with TCM [Hybrid only])
- 29 (5A) (no communication with instrument cluster)
- 32 (10A) (no communication with restraints control module [RCM])
- 34 (5A) (no communication with ABS module [Escape and Mariner only])
- 35 (10A) (no communication with parking aid module, 4WD control module)
- 37 (10A) (no communication with EATC or EMTC module)
- 39 (20A) (no communication with audio unit)
- 43 (10A) (no communication with the instrument cluster)
- Data link connector (DLC)
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the DLC.
NOTE: The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground from
the DLC are provided to the VCM.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: -
Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
- Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
- GO to Pinpoint Test R, to diagnose no power to the scan tool. See: Pinpoint Tests/Test R: No
Power To The Scan Tool
5. NOTE: During the network test, the scan tool will first attempt to communicate with the PCM,
after establishing communication with the PCM,
the scan tool will then attempt to communicate with all other modules on the vehicle.
Carry out the network test. -
If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) and proceed to Step 6.
- If the network test fails, GO to Symptom Chart to identify the module not communicating. See:
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2356
6. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. Follow the non-network DTC
diagnostics (B-codes, C-codes, P-codes) prior to
the network DTC diagnostics (U-codes). For all other DTCs, refer to Body Control Systems
(Multifunction Electronic Control Module). See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Module
Communications Network
7. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related
Principles of Operation
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
area network (CAN) communications. ISO 9141 is used for diagnostic use only, and CAN is a
method for transferring data among distributed electronic modules via a serial data bus.
The vehicle is equipped with 3 module communication networks:
- ISO 9141
ISO 9141 Communications Network
The ISO 9141 communications network is a single wire network. The ISO communications network
does not permit intermodule communication and is only used for the parking aid module. When the
scan tool communicates with the parking aid module, the scan tool must request all information, the
module cannot initiate communications.
The ISO network operates at a maximum data transfer speed of 10 Kbps for bus messages and is
designed for scan tool to module diagnostic use only.
The following fault chart describes the specific ISO 9141 network failures and their resulting
symptom:
ISO 9141 Network Communication Fault Chart
MS-CAN
The MS-CAN network uses an unshielded twisted pair cable of data (+) and data (-) circuits. The
data (+) and the data (-) circuits are each regulated to approximately 2.5 volts during neutral or
rested network traffic. As bus messages are sent on the data (+) circuit, voltage is increased by
approximately 1.0 volt. Inversely, the data (-) circuit is reduced by approximately 1.0 volt when a
bus message is sent. Multiple bus messages can be sent over the CAN circuits allowing multiple
modules to communicate with each other. The MS-CAN is used for the instrument cluster, the front
control interface module (FCIM), the front display interface module (FDIM), electronic automatic
temperature control (EATC) or electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) module, the audio
unit, the satellite radio receiver and the smart junction box (SJB) communications, and is designed
for general information transfer. The MS-CAN network will not communicate while certain faults are
present, but will operate with diminished performance with other faults present. The MS-CAN bus
may remain operational when 1 of the 2 termination resistors are not present.
The MS-CAN network operates at a maximum data transfer speed of 125 Kbps for bus messages
and is designed for general information transfer. The network will remain operational, but at a
degraded level when certain circuit faults are present.
The following fault chart describes the specific MS-CAN network failures and their resulting
symptom:
MS-CAN Network Communication Fault Chart
HS-CAN
The HS-CAN network uses an unshielded twisted pair cable of data (+) and data (-) circuits. The
data (+) and the data (-) circuits are each regulated to approximately 2.5 volts during neutral or
rested network traffic. As bus messages are sent on the data (+) circuit, voltage is increased by
approximately 1.0 volt. Inversely, the data (-) circuit is reduced by approximately 1.0 volt when a
bus message is sent. Multiple bus messages can be sent over the CAN circuits allowing multiple
modules to communicate with each other. The HS-CAN is a high speed communication network
used for the instrument cluster, the PCM, the ABS module, the occupant classification sensor
(OCS), restraint control module (RCM), the traction battery control module (TBCM), the
transmission control module (TCM), the power steering control module and the four wheel drive
(4WD) control module communications, and designed for real time information transfer and control.
The HS-CAN network will not communicate while certain faults are present, but will operate with
diminished performance with other faults present.The HS-CAN bus may remain operational when 1
of the 2 termination resistors are not present.
The HS-CAN network operates at a maximum data transfer speed of 500 Kbps and is designed for
real time information transfer and control. The network will remain operational, but at a degraded
level when certain circuit faults are present.
The following fault chart describes the specific HS-CAN network failures and their resulting
symptom:
HS-CAN Network Communication Fault Chart
The following chart describes the specific CAN network messages broadcast by each module, and
the module(s) that receive the message:
CAN Network Module Communication Message Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 1)
CAN Network Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 1)

This provides step-by-step module configuration procedures. Carry out the programmable module
installation (PMI) procedures when another Vehicle System directs to carry out configuration or
when DTCs from the given list are present. See: Programming and Relearning
Configurable modules accommodate a variety of vehicle options, eliminating the need for many
unique modules for one vehicle line. These modules must be configured when replaced as part of a
repair procedure.
Configurable modules should not be exchanged between vehicles since the settings are unique to
each vehicle. Failure to configure a new module may result in improper operation and/or any of the
following DTCs setting:
- B2477 and/or B2141 - sets when a body/chassis module is not configured or is configured
incorrectly.
- P0602, P0605 and/or P1639 - sets when the powertrain control module (PCM) vehicle
identification (VID) block is not configured.
- B2900 - sets when there is a VIN mismatch between the module with the B2900 and the PCM.
The stored VIN in either module may be incorrect.
- U0300 and/or U0301 - sets when the configuration between 2 or more modules do not match.
- U2050 and/or U2051 - sets when a valid strategy/calibration is not present.
The following are the 3 different methods of configuration:
- Programmable module installation (PMI)
- Module reprogramming ("flashing")
- Programmable parameters
Some modules do not support all 3 methods.

Definition of Terms
The following are definitions of configuration terms:
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) PMI is a scan tool process which configures settings in a
new module. Data used for the PMI process is automatically downloaded from the original module
and stored when a scan tool session is started. If this data cannot be retrieved from the module
being replaced, the scan tool may prompt for As-Built data entry or display a list of parameter
values that need to be manually selected. Some modules are reprogrammed during PMI when a
strategy/ calibration update is available.
NOTE: It is important that the scan tool identifies the vehicle and obtains configuration data prior to
removing any modules. The new module must be able to communicate with the scan tool in order
to carry out PMI. See: Programming and Relearning
To carry out PMI, refer to Programmable Module Installation. See: Programming and Relearning
Module Reprogramming Module reprogramming (also referred to as "flashing") is a scan tool

process which updates the strategy/calibration in a module. Module reprogramming is
automatically carried out during PMI when a later strategy/calibration is available.
Reprogramming a module with the same level of software will not improve module operation or
repair a hardware failure.
NOTE: -
Module reprogramming should be limited to circumstances where a published Technical Service

Bulletin (TSB) procedure recommends doing so.
- A module cannot communicate with other modules on the communication network while being
reprogrammed. Clear any network communication DTCs which may have been set in other
modules during reprogramming.
Programmable Parameters Programmable parameters are customer preference items that may be
modified by the dealer via scan tool or in some cases modified by the customer following a
procedure listed in the vehicle Owner's Literature. While many configuration options may exist for a
module, only a few of these options are programmable parameters.
Adaptive Learning and Calibration
Some modules require a separate learning procedure to be carried out if replaced as part of a
repair procedure. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module
removal and installation procedures.
Vehicle Identification (VID) Block
Some PCMs contain a memory area called a vehicle identification (VID) block. The PCM VID block
commonly stores powertrain configuration items such as VIN, tire size, axle ratio, and whether or
not the vehicle is equipped with speed control.
As-Built Data
As-Built data is a VIN specific module configuration record. During vehicle build, the configuration
from all modules is downloaded and stored in the As-Built database. As-Built data will not reflect
customer preference items that have been changed from the default state. These items will need to
be changed using programmable parameters after the module is configured.
NOTE: It is not necessary to obtain As-Built data unless directed to do so by the scan tool. This
data may be accessed from the technician service publication website.
The following chart lists module As-Built data addresses:
Module Addresses for As-Built Entry
The following chart describes specific module programming information:

Module Configuration and Parameter Index - Escape and Mariner (Part 1)
Module Configuration and Parameter Index - Escape and Mariner (Part 2)
Module Configuration and Parameter Index - Hybrid (Part 1)

Module Configuration and Parameter Index - Hybrid (Part 2)

Information Bus: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions

U0001-U0114
U0121-U0155
U0155-U0238
U0249-U2023
U261A-U2527
B2477-B2900 / P0602-P1639 / U0300

U2050-U2051
Information Bus: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures

Information Bus: Pinpoint Tests
Test A: The PCM Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Or No High Speed Controller Area
Network (HS-CAN) Communication
PINPOINT TEST A: THE PCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL OR NO HIGH
SPEED CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (HS-CAN) COMMUNICATION
Normal Operation - Escape and Mariner
The PCM communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network
(HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the
network connection to the PCM. The PCM shares the HS-CAN network with the ABS module, the
four wheel drive (4WD) control module, restraints control module (RCM), occupant classification
sensor module, power steering control module and the instrument cluster. Voltage for the PCM is
provided by circuits CBB28 (GY/VT) and SBB05 (GY/RD). Circuit GD122 (BK) provides ground.
Normal Operation - Hybrid
The PCM communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network
network connection to the PCM. The PCM shares the HS-CAN network with the ABS module,
restraints control module (RCM), occupant classification sensor module, power steering control
module, transmission control module, traction battery control module (TBCM) and the instrument
cluster. Voltage for the PCM is provided by circuits CBB29 (WH/VT) and SBB05 (GY/RD). Circuit
GD122 (BK) provides ground.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- ABS module
- 4WD control module (if equipped)
- PCM
- RCM
- Power steering control module
- Occupant classification sensor module
- TCM (Hybrid only)
- TBCM (Hybrid only)
A1
A1-A2
A3-A4
A5-A7
A7-A9
A9-A11
A11-A14
A14-A16
A16-A19
A19-A20
A20-A22
A22-A25
A25-A27
A27-A30
A30-A31
A31-A33
A34-A37
A38-A40
Test B: The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
PINPOINT TEST B: THE ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND
TO THE SCAN TOOL
Normal Operation - Escape and Mariner
The ABS module communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network
network connection to the ABS module. The ABS module shares the HS-CAN network with the
PCM, the four wheel drive (4WD) control module, the instrument cluster, the restraints control
module (RCM), the power steering control module and the occupant classification sensor module.
Voltage for the ABS module is provided by circuits CBP34 (VT/BN), SBB09 (RD) and SBB18
(YE/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD120 (BK/GN).
Normal Operation - Hybrid
The ABS module communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network
network connection to the ABS module. The ABS module shares the HS-CAN network with the
PCM, the instrument cluster, the restraints control module (RCM), the power steering control
module, the transmission control module, the traction battery control module (TBCM) and the
occupant classification sensor module. Voltage for the ABS module is provided by circuits CBP34
(VT/BN), SBB06 (BN/RD), SBB09 (RD) and SBB18 (YE/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD113
(BK/YE) and GD179 (BK/VT).
- Fuse
- ABS module
B1-B2
B2-B3
B4-B5
Test C: The Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Control Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
PINPOINT TEST C: THE FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) CONTROL MODULE DOES NOT
RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
Normal Operation
The four wheel drive (4WD) control module communicates with the scan tool through the high
speed controller area network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH)
(HS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the 4WD control module. The 4WD control module
shares the HS-CAN network with the PCM, the ABS module, the instrument cluster, the restraints
control module (RCM), the power steering control module and the occupant classification sensor
module. Voltage for the 4WD control module is provided by circuits CBP35 (YE/GY) and SBP11
(BU/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD182 (BK/GY).
- Fuse
- 4WD control module

C1-C2
C3-C4
Test D: The Instrument Cluster Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
PINPOINT TEST D: THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
Normal Operation
The instrument cluster communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area
network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide
the HS-CAN network connection to the instrument cluster and circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN
+) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN)
connection to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster shares the HS-CAN network with the
PCM, the ABS module, the four wheel drive (4WD) control module, the restraints control module
(RCM), the power steering control module and the occupant classification sensor module. For
Hybrid vehicles, the instrument cluster also shares the HS-CAN network with the transmission
control module (TCM) and traction battery control module (TBCM).
The instrument cluster shares the MS-CAN network with the smart junction box (SJB), the
electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) or electronic manual temperature control (EMTC)
module, the audio unit, the satellite radio receiver, the front control interface module (FCIM) and
front display interface module. Voltage for the instrument cluster is provided by circuits CBP29
(WH/VT), and SBP26 (YE/RD). Circuits GD112 (BK/GN) and GD114 (BK/BU) provide ground.
- Fuse
D1-D3
D3-D4
D5
Test E: The Restraints Control Module (RCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
PINPOINT TEST E: THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO
THE SCAN TOOL
Normal Operation
The RCM communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network
HS-CAN network connection to the RCM. The RCM shares the HS-CAN network with the PCM, the
ABS module, the four wheel drive (4WD) control module, the instrument cluster, the power steering
control module and the occupant classification sensor module. For Hybrid vehicles, the instrument
cluster also shares the HS-CAN network with the transmission control module (TCM) and traction
battery control module (TBCM). Voltage for the RCM is provided by circuits CBP32 (GN/VT) and
the RCM is case grounded.
- Fuse
- RCM
E1-E3
E4-E5
Test F: The Occupant Classification Sensor Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
PINPOINT TEST F: THE OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR MODULE DOES NOT

Normal Operation
The occupant classification sensor module communicates with the scan tool through the high
speed controller area network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH)
(HS-CAN -) provide the HS-CAN network connection to the occupant classification sensor module.
The occupant classification sensor module shares the HS-CAN network with the PCM, the ABS
module, the four wheel drive (4WD) control module, the instrument cluster, the power steering
control module and the restraints control module (RCM). For Hybrid vehicles, the instrument cluster
also shares the HS-CAN network with the transmission control module (TCM) and TBCM. Voltage
for the occupant classification sensor module is provided by circuit CBP46 (WH/BU) and circuit
GD183 (BK/WH) provides ground.
- Fuse
- Occupant classification sensor module

F1-F2
F2-F3
F4
Test G: The Power Steering Control Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
PINPOINT TEST G: THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO
THE SCAN TOOL
Normal Operation
The power steering control module communicates with the scan tool through the high speed
controller area network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH)
(HS-CAN -) provide the HS-CAN network connection to the occupant classification sensor module.
The occupant classification sensor module shares the HS-CAN network with the PCM, the ABS
module, the four wheel drive (4WD) control module, the instrument cluster, the occupant
classification sensor module and the restraints control module (RCM). For Hybrid vehicles, the
instrument cluster also shares the HS-CAN network with the transmission control module (TCM)
and traction battery control module (TBCM). Voltage for the power steering control module is
provided by circuit CBP35 (YE/GY) and circuit GD116 (BK/VT) provides ground
- Fuse
- Power steering control module
G1
G1-G2
G3-G4
Test H: The Transmission Control Module (TCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
PINPOINT TEST H: THE TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) DOES NOT RESPOND
TO THE SCAN TOOL
Normal Operation
The transmission control module (TCM) is present on Hybrid vehicles only. The TCM
communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN).
Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the network
connection to the TCM. The TCM shares the HS-CAN network with the PCM, the traction battery
control module (TBCM), the ABS module, the power steering control module, restraints control
module (RCM), occupant classification sensor module and the instrument cluster. Voltage for the
TCM is provided by circuits CBB27 (GN/BN) and SBB08 (VT/RD). Ground is provided by circuit
GD121 (BK/YE).

- Fuse
- TCM
H1-H3
H4
Test I: The Traction Battery Control Module (TBCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
PINPOINT TEST I: THE TRACTION BATTERY CONTROL MODULE (TBCM) DOES NOT
Normal Operation
The TBCM is present on Hybrid vehicles only. The TBCM communicates with the scan tool through
the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and
VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the TBCM. The TBCM shares the
HS-CAN network with the PCM, the transmission control module (TCM), the ABS module, the
power steering control module, restraints control module (RCM), occupant classification sensor
module, and the instrument cluster. Voltage for the TBCM is provided by circuits CBB23 (BN/YE),
SBB05 (GY/RD) and SBB15 (WH/RD). Ground is provided by circuits GD182 (BK/GY) and GD149
(BK/GY).
- Fuse
- TBCM
I1-I2
I3-I4
Test J: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
PINPOINT TEST J: THE SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN
TOOL
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) communicates with the scan tool through the medium speed
controller area network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG)
(MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the SJB. The SJB shares the MS-CAN network with
the instrument cluster, audio unit, electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) or electronic
manual temperature control (EMTC) module, satellite radio receiver, front control interface module
(FCIM) and front display interface module (FDIM). Voltage for the SJB is provided directly from the
internal SJB busbar through SJB fuse 5 (10A). Ground is provided by circuit GD182 (BK/GY).
- Fuse
- SJB
J1-J2
J3-J4
Test K: The Audio Unit Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
PINPOINT TEST K: THE AUDIO UNIT DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
Normal Operation
The audio unit communicates with the scan tool through the medium speed controller area network
(MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the
network connection to the audio unit. The audio unit shares the MS-CAN network with the
instrument cluster, smart junction box (SJB), electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) or
electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) module, satellite radio receiver, front control
interface module (FCIM) and front display interface module (FDIM). Voltage for the audio unit is
provided by circuit SBP39 (WH/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD115 (BK/GY).
- Fuse
- Audio unit
K1-K2
K2-K4
Test L: The Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module Does Not Respond To The
Scan Tool
PINPOINT TEST L: THE ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (EATC)

MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
Normal Operation
The electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module communicates with the scan tool
through the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN
+) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the EATC module. The
EATC module shares the MS-CAN network with the instrument cluster, smart junction box (SJB),
audio unit, satellite radio receiver, front control interface module (FCIM) and front display interface
module (FDIM). Voltage to the EATC module is provided by circuit SBP15 (WH/RD) and circuit
CBP37 (WH). Ground is provided by circuit GD114 (BK/BU).
NOTE: The electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) module does not communicate with the
scan tool.
- Fuse
- EATC module
L1
L2-L3
L4
Test M: The Satellite Radio Receiver Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
PINPOINT TEST M: THE SATELLITE RADIO RECEIVER DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN
TOOL
Normal Operation
The satellite radio receiver communicates with the scan tool through the medium speed controller
area network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -)
provide the network connection to the satellite radio receiver. The satellite radio receiver shares the
MS-CAN network with the instrument cluster, smart junction box (SJB), electronic automatic
temperature control (EATC) module, audio unit, front control interface module (FCIM) and front
display interface module (FDIM). Voltage to the satellite radio receiver is provided by circuit SBP14
(BN/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD115 (BK/GY).
- Fuse
- Satellite radio receiver
M1
M1-M2
M3-M4
Test N: The Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
PINPOINT TEST N: THE FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) DOES NOT
Normal Operation
The front display interface module (FDIM) communicates with the scan tool through the medium
speed controller area network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07
(VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the front display interface module. The
FDIM shares the MS-CAN network with the instrument cluster, smart junction box (SJB), electronic
automatic temperature control (EATC) or electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) module,
audio unit, front control interface module (FCIM) and satellite radio receiver. Voltage to the front
display interface module is provided by circuit SBP14 (BN/RD). Ground is provided by circuit
GD114 (BK/BU).
- Fuse
- FDIM
N1-N2
N2-N4
Test O: The Front Control Interface Module (FCIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
PINPOINT TEST O: THE FRONT CONTROL INTERFACE MODULE (FCIM) DOES NOT
Normal Operation
The front control interface module (FCIM) communicates with the scan tool through the medium
speed controller area network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07
(VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the FCIM. The FCIM shares the MS-CAN
network with the instrument cluster, smart junction box (SJB), electronic automatic temperature
control (EATC) or electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) module, audio unit, front display
interface module (FDIM) and satellite radio receiver. Voltage to the FCIM is provided by circuit
SBP14 (BN/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD115 (BK/GY).
- Fuse
- FCIM
O1-O2
O2-O4
Test P: The Parking Aid Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Or No International
Standards Organization (ISO) 9141 Network
PINPOINT TEST P: THE PARKING AID MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
OR NO INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS ORGANIZATION (ISO) 9141 NETWORK
COMMUNICATION
Normal Operation
The parking aid module communicates with the scan tool through the ISO 9141 communications
network, circuit VDB10 (GY). The parking aid module is the only module which communicates on
the ISO 9141. Voltage for the parking aid module is provided by circuit CBP35 (YE/GY). Ground is
provided by circuit GD182 (BK/GY).
- Fuse

- Parking aid module
P1-P2
P2-P4
P5-P7
Test Q: No Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Communication, All Modules Are
Not Responding
PINPOINT TEST Q: NO MEDIUM SPEED CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (MS-CAN)
COMMUNICATION, ALL MODULES ARE NOT RESPONDING
Normal Operation
The medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN) uses an unshielded twisted pair cable,
circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) and VDB07 (VT/OG). The smart junction box (SJB), audio unit, electronic
automatic temperature control (EATC) or electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) module,
satellite radio receiver, front display interface module (FDIM) and front control interface module
(FCIM) communicate with the scan tool using the MS-CAN network. The instrument cluster, while
on the MS-CAN network, communicates with the scan tool only on the HS-CAN network.

- SJB
- Audio unit
- FCIM (if equipped)
- Electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module (if equipped)
- Electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) module (if equipped)
- Satellite radio receiver (if equipped)
- FDIM
Q1-Q2
Q2-Q4
Q5-Q7
Q7-Q8
Q9-Q11
Q11-Q14
Q14-Q16
Q16-Q18
Q18-Q21
Q21-Q23
Q23-Q26
Q27-Q30
Test R: No Power To The Scan Tool
PINPOINT TEST R: NO POWER TO THE SCAN TOOL

Normal Operation
The scan tool is connected to the data link connector (DLC) to communicate with the high speed
controller area network (HS-CAN), medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN), and
International Standards Organization (ISO) 9141 communications network. Voltage for the scan
tool is provided by circuit SBP20 (GN/RD). Ground is provided by circuits GD112 (BK/GN) and
GD114 (BK/BU).
- Fuse
- DLC
R1-R2
R3
Information Bus: Programming and Relearning
PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using The Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When The
Original Module Is Available
NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be
carried out. For instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures.
1. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 2. From the Toolbox icon, select Module
Programming and press the check mark. 3. Select Programmable Module Installation. 4. Select the
module that is being replaced. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF
position, and press the check mark. 6. Install the new module and press the check mark. 7. Follow
the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8.
The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 9.
Test module for correct operation.
Original Module Is Not Available
carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal
and installation procedures.
1. Install the new module. 2. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 3. From the
Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 4. Select Programmable
Module Installation. 5. Select the module that was replaced. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions,
turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen
instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. If the data is not
available, the IDS displays a screen stating to contact the As-Built Data Center. Retrieve the data
from the technician service
publication website at this time and press the check mark.
9. Enter the module data and press the check mark.

10. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration
Complete. 11. Test module for correct operation.
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2449
Information Bus: Service and Repair
PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Original Module Is Available
carried out. For instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures.
1. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 2. From the Toolbox icon, select Module
Programming and press the check mark. 3. Select Programmable Module Installation. 4. Select the
module that is being replaced. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF
position, and press the check mark. 6. Install the new module and press the check mark. 7. Follow
the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8.
The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 9.
Test module for correct operation.
Original Module Is Not Available
carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal
and installation procedures.
1. Install the new module. 2. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 3. From the
Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 4. Select Programmable
Module Installation. 5. Select the module that was replaced. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions,
turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen
instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. If the data is not
available, the IDS displays a screen stating to contact the As-Built Data Center. Retrieve the data
from the technician service
publication website at this time and press the check mark.
9. Enter the module data and press the check mark.

10. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration
Complete. 11. Test module for correct operation.
Information > Tools and Equipment > Module Communications Network
Special Tool(s)
Information > Tools and Equipment > Module Communications Network > Page 2452
Special Tool(s)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
View 151-8
C109
Knock Sensor (KS)
timing.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2461
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp >
concern is present.
- For all MIL concerns, go to Symptom Charts. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related
DTC P1000 is set.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum
Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-6
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2468
View 151-8
C1087
C1140
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM
Typical EOT Sensor

following:
degradation.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11
View 151-7
Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2479
View 151-9
View 151-7
View 151-9
View 151-10
View 151-10
Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22
C141
Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2486
C142
C171
C172
Universal HO2S
accuracy.
Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)

Exploded View
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
splash shield.

Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2492
removal.



Exploded View
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
splash shield.

removal.


Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
maneuvers.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
View 151-6
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator
C1083
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator > Page 2503
C1068
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2504

Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation
Overview

and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
2512
2513
2514

and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2518
View 151-5
View 151-6
View 151-9
C175B (Part 1)
C175B (Part 2)
C175E (Part 1)
C175E (Part 2)
C175E (Part 3)
C175T (Part 1)
C175T (Part 2)
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Description
into the new PCM.
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2529
Removal
and the PCM.
Installation
and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2533
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches -
Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
2-Track APP Sensor
2-Track APP Sensor
3-Track APP Sensor
Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2541
View 151-5
C128



the MAF sensor.

Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7
Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2549
View 151-8
C180
C1180

and the CMP.

Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation
Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-6
C1064


Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7
Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2565
View 151-9
C101
C1120
shield.
the CKP.

Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-9
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2572
C1164
Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2573
Typical CHT Sensor
Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2577
FUEL PUMP MODULE

Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
WARNING:
injury.
couplings.
arm and the filter.
NOTE: -
spillage.
the FP module.

Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2585
C435
Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2586

Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2590
View 151-5
C128
MAF Sensor


sensor.

Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-8
Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2598
C109
Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2599
Knock Sensor (KS)
timing.
Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-6
Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2603
View 151-8
C1087
C1140
Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation
Typical EOT Sensor

following:
degradation.
Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#11
View 151-7
#11 > Page 2614
View 151-9
#11 > Page 2615
View 151-7
#11 > Page 2616
View 151-9
#11 > Page 2617
View 151-10
#11 > Page 2618
View 151-10
Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#22
C141
#22 > Page 2621
C142
#22 > Page 2622
C171
#22 > Page 2623
C172
Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2624
Universal HO2S
accuracy.
Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S)

Exploded View
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
splash shield.

Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2627
removal.



Exploded View
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
splash shield.

removal.


Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
maneuvers.
Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
View 151-6
Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams >
C1083
Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams >
C1068
Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
2639
2640
2641

Exploded View
Part 1
2642
Part 2
Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-6
Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2646
View 151-8
C189
C1189
Typical TP Sensor

the TP sensor.

Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
View 151-10
Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page
2654
View 151-11
2655
C167
2656
Special Tool(s)
2657
Special Tool(s)
Removal
range (TR) sensor.
Installation

2658
Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-12
Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2662
C1088
Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2663
generated.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
View 151-6
View 151-8
C189
C1189
Typical TP Sensor

the TP sensor.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
View 151-10
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2675
View 151-11
C167
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Removal
range (TR) sensor.
Installation

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Overview

VCT System
degree increments.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
flow.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
View 151-12
C1088
generated.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Diverter Solenoid >
Air Diverter Solenoid: Description and Operation
SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) BYPASS SOLENOID
Secondary AIR Bypass Solenoid
The secondary AIR bypass solenoid is used by the PCM to control vacuum to the secondary air
injection diverter (AIR diverter) valve. The secondary AIR bypass solenoid is a normally closed
solenoid. The secondary AIR bypass solenoid also has a filtered vent feature to permit vacuum
release.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Diverter Valve >
Air Diverter Valve: Description and Operation
SECONDARY AIR DIVERTER VALVE
Secondary AIR Diverter Valve
The secondary AIR diverter valve is used with the secondary AIR pump to provide on/off control of
air to the exhaust manifold and catalytic converter. When the secondary AIR pump is on and
vacuum is supplied to the AIR diverter valve, air passes the integral check valve disk. When the
secondary AIR pump is off, and vacuum is removed from the AIR diverter valve, the integral check
valve disk is held on the seat and stops air from being drawn into the exhaust system and prevents
the back flow of the exhaust into the secondary AIR system.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Pump >
Air Injection Pump: Description and Operation
SECONDARY AIR PUMP
Secondary Air Pump
The secondary AIR pump provides pressurized air to the secondary AIR system. The secondary
AIR pump functions independently of RPM and is controlled by the PCM. The secondary AIR pump
is only used for short periods of time. Delivery of air is dependent on the amount of system
backpressure and system voltage. The secondary AIR pump draws dry filtered air from the intake
air system downstream of the MAF/IAT sensor.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Catalytic Converter: Specifications

...................................................... 11 Nm (8 lb-ft).
Discard the studs.
Discard the nuts.

First pass .............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... 25 Nm (18
lb-ft).
Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation
CATALYST AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
Overview
V-Engines
In-Line Engines
The catalytic converter and exhaust systems work together to control the release of harmful engine
exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of nitrogen (N),
carbon dioxide (CO2) and water vapor (H2O). However, it also contains carbon monoxide (CO),
oxides of nitrogen (NOx), hydrogen (H), and various unburned hydrocarbons (HCs). The major air
pollutants of CO, NOx,and HCs, and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled.
The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, front heated
oxygen sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, catalyst HO2S, a muffler, and an exhaust tailpipe. The
catalytic converter is typically installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. On some vehicle
applications, more than one catalyst is used between the front and rear exhaust pipes. Catalytic
converter efficiency is monitored by the on board diagnostic (OBD) system strategy in the
powertrain control module (PCM). For information on the OBD catalyst monitor, refer to the
description for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
For most vehicles, only 2 HO2Ss are used in an exhaust stream. The front sensors
(HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst are used for primary fuel control while the ones after the
catalyst (HO2S12/HO2S22) are used to monitor catalyst efficiency. However, some partial zero
emission vehicles (PZEV) use 3 HO2Ss for each engine bank. The stream 1 sensors
(HO2S11/HO2S21) located before the catalyst are used for primary fuel control, the stream 2
sensors (HO2S12/HO2S22) are used to monitor the light-off catalyst, and the stream 3 sensors
(HO2S13/HO2S23) located after the catalyst are used for long term fuel trim control to optimize
catalyst efficiency (fore aft oxygen sensor control).
Catalytic Converter
A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a
chemical reaction. A catalyst also enables a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature. The
concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The
catalytic
converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated ceramic
honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust gases
come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The catalyst
initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components so they
are used up as much as possible.
Light Off Catalyst
As the catalyst heats up, converter efficiency rises rapidly. The point at which conversion efficiency
exceeds 50% is called catalyst light off. For most catalysts this point occurs at 246°C to 302°C
(475°F to 575°F). A fast light catalyst is a 3-way catalyst (TWC) that is located as close to the
exhaust manifold as possible. Because the light off catalyst is located close to the exhaust manifold
it lights off faster and reduces emissions more quickly than the catalyst located under the body.
Once the catalyst lights off, the catalyst quickly reaches the maximum conversion efficiency for that
catalyst.
Three-Way Catalyst (TWC) Conversion Efficiency
TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart
A TWC requires a stoichiometric fuel ratio, 14.7 pounds of air to 1 pound of fuel (14.7:1), for high
conversion efficiency. In order to achieve these high efficiencies, the air/fuel ratio must be tightly
controlled with a narrow window of stoichiometry. Deviations outside of this window greatly
decrease the conversion efficiency. For example a rich mixture decreases the HC and CO
conversion efficiency while a lean mixture decreases the NOx conversion efficiency.
Exhaust System

The purpose of the exhaust system is to convey engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the
atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the
catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. A HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe
before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of CO, unburned HCs, and
NOx in the exhaust emissions to an acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed
from the catalytic converter past another HO2S mounted in the rear exhaust pipe and then on into
the muffler. Finally, the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust
tailpipe.
On some PZEV, there is a total of 3 HO2S in the exhaust stream. One near the exhaust manifold
(stream 1), one in the middle of the light-off catalyst (stream 2), and the third (stream 3) is mounted
after the light-off catalyst.
Underbody Catalyst
The underbody catalyst is located after the light off catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in line
with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be common to 2 light off catalysts, forming
a Y pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the catalyst and exhaust system for a specific
vehicle, refer to Exhaust System for the exhaust system-exploded view.
Three-Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter

The TWC converter contains either platinum (Pt) and rhodium (Rh) or palladium (Pd) and rhodium
(Rh). The TWC converter catalyzes the oxidation reactions of unburned HCs and CO and the
reduction reaction of NOx. The 3-way conversion can be best accomplished by always operating
the engine air fuel/ratio at or close to stoichiometry.
Exhaust Manifold Runners
The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust
manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of
cylinders.
Exhaust Pipes
Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to
increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the
engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler.
The HO2Ss provide the PCM with information related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas.
Muffler
Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase
the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and also
reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the
atmosphere.
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter
Catalytic Converter
7. Separate the converter from the muffler. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter > Page 2708
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
side splash shield.
may occur.
Discard the gasket.
Installation
sequence shown. ^

Y-pipe nuts.

Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - RH Manifold
Removal
converter manifold.
Installation
sequence shown. ^


Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams
C123
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2718
Canister Purge Control Valve: Description and Operation
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER PURGE VALVE
Typical EVAP Canister Purge Valve
NOTE: The EVAP canister purge valve may also be referred to as a vapor management valve
(VMV).
The EVAP canister purge valve is part of the enhanced EVAP system that is controlled by the
PCM. This valve controls the flow of vapors (purging) from the EVAP canister to the intake manifold
during various engine operating modes. The EVAP canister purge valve is a normally closed valve.
The EVAP canister purge valve controls the flow of vapors by way of a solenoid, eliminating the
need for an electronic vacuum regulator and vacuum diaphragm. The PCM outputs a signal
between 0 mA and 1,000 mA to control the EVAP canister purge valve.
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2719
Canister Purge Control Valve: Service and Repair
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER PURGE VALVE
1. Disconnect the evaporative emissions (EVAP) canister purge valve electrical connector. 2.
Disconnect the 2 fuel vapor tube-to-EVAP canister purge valve quick connect couplings. 3.
Depress the tab and remove the EVAP canister purge valve from the bracket. 4. To install, reverse
- Carry out the evaporative emission system leak test. See: Testing and Inspection
- Carry out the evaporative emissions repair verification drive cycle.

Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair
Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair
DUST SEPARATOR
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe vent
tube from the dust separator. 3. Depress the retainer tab and remove the dust separator from the
fuel vapor tube and the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister bracket 4. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service and Repair
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER
Part 1
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2726
Part 2
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the evaporative emission
(EVAP) canister vent solenoid electrical connector. 3. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe vent tube
from the dust separator. 4. Release the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-EVAP canister quick connect
coupling. 5. Remove the 2 nuts, 3 bolts and the EVAP canister assembly.
- Carry out evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle.

Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service and Repair

FUEL VAPOR TUBE ASSEMBLY
Part 1
Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2730
Part 2
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Position a suitable lifting device under the
fuel tank.
3. Remove the LH fuel tank bolt and position aside the strap.
4. Partially lower the LH side of the fuel tank enough to access the fuel vapor tube assembly. 5.
Disconnect the fuel pump (FP) module and fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor electrical connectors 6.
Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-fuel tank quick connect coupling. 7. Disconnect the fuel
vapor tube assembly-to-evaporative emission (EVAP) canister quick connect coupling. 8.
Disconnect the fuel vapor tube-to-fuel vapor tube assembly nipple quick connect coupling. 9.
Release the retainer clip and remove the fuel vapor tube assembly.
- Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Solenoid, Evaporative System > Component Information > Description and Operation
Leak Detection Solenoid: Description and Operation
CANISTER VENT (CV) SOLENOID
Typical Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid
During the evaporative emissions (EVAP) leak check monitor, the CV solenoid seals the EVAP
canister from the atmospheric pressure. This allows the EVAP canister purge valve to obtain the
target vacuum in the fuel tank during the EVAP leak check monitor.
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 2737
C377
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 2738
Leak Detection Valve: Service and Repair

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER VENT SOLENOID
1. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister assembly. 2. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube
from the EVAP canister vent solenoid. 3. Remove the EVAP canister vent solenoid from the EVAP
canister carbon canister.
- Apply clean oil to the EVAP canister vent solenoid O-ring seal prior to installation.
- Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR
Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation
EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid: Description and Operation
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VACUUM REGULATOR SOLENOID

EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid
Vacuum Output (IN-HG)
EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid Data
The EGR vacuum regulator solenoid is an electromagnetic device used to regulate the vacuum
supply to the EGR valve. The solenoid contains a coil which magnetically controls the position of a
disc to regulate the vacuum. As the duty cycle to the coil increases, the vacuum signal passed
through the solenoid to the EGR valve also increases. Vacuum not directed to the EGR valve is
vented through the solenoid vent to atmosphere. Note that at 0% duty cycle (no electrical signal
applied), the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid allows some vacuum to pass, but not enough to open
the EGR valve.
Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2743
EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid: Service and Repair
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VACUUM REGULATOR VALVE

Exploded View
Part 1
Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2744
Part 2
1. Disconnect the EGR vacuum regulator valve electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the EGR
vacuum regulator valve vacuum tube fitting. 3. Remove the EGR vacuum regulator valve stud nut
and detach the engine wiring harness bracket.
4. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the EGR vacuum regulator valve stud. 5. Remove the 2
EGR vacuum regulator valve studs and the EGR vacuum regulator valve.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube
EGR Tube: Description and Operation
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) ORIFICE TUBE ASSEMBLY
EGR Orifice Tube Assembly
The orifice tube assembly is a section of tubing connecting the exhaust system to the intake
manifold. The assembly provides the flow path for the EGR to the intake manifold and also
contains the metering orifice and 2 pressure pick-up tubes. The internal metering orifice creates a
measurable pressure drop across it as the EGR valve opens and closes. This pressure differential
across the orifice is picked up by the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor which provides
feedback to the PCM.
EGR Tube: Service and Repair
EXHAUST MANIFOLD TO EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE TUBE

Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
1. Carefully detach the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor from the EGR valve tube and
position aside. 2. Disconnect the exhaust manifold-to-EGR valve tube fitting from the EGR valve.
3. Disconnect the exhaust manifold-to-EGR valve tube fitting from the RH catalytic convertor.
4. Remove the EGR valve tube. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
View 151-8
C1160
EGR Valve: Description and Operation
Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve
EEGR Motor/Valve Assembly
Depending on the application, the EEGR valve is a water cooled or an air cooled motor/valve
assembly. The motor is commanded to move in 52 discrete steps as it acts directly on the EEGR
valve. The position of the valve determines the rate of EGR. The built-in spring works to close the
valve (against the motor opening force).
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Module (ESM)
ESM
The ESM is an integrated differential pressure feedback EGR system that functions in the same
manner as a conventional differential pressure feedback EGR system. The various system
components have been integrated into a single component called the ESM. The flange of the valve
portion of the ESM bolts directly to the intake manifold with a metal gasket that forms the metering
orifice. This arrangement increases system reliability, response time, and system precision. By
relocating the EGR orifice from the exhaust to the intake side of the EGR valve, the downstream
pressure signal measures manifold absolute pressure (MAP). This MAP signal is used for EGR
correction and inferred barometric pressure (BARO) at key on. The system provides the powertrain
control module (PCM) with a differential pressure feedback EGR signal, identical to a traditional
differential pressure feedback EGR system.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve
Typical EGR Valve
EGR Flowrate
The EGR valve in the differential pressure feedback EGR system is a conventional,
vacuum-actuated. The valve increases or decreases the flow of EGR. As vacuum applied to the
EGR valve diaphragm overcomes the spring force, the valve begins to open. As the vacuum signal
weakens, at 5.4 kPa (1.6 in-Hg) or less, the spring force closes the valve. The EGR valve is fully
open at about 15 kPa (4.5 in-Hg).
Since EGR flow requirement varies greatly, providing repair specifications on flow rate is
impractical. The on board diagnostic (OBD) system monitors the EGR valve function and triggers a
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) if the test criteria is not met. The EGR valve flow rate is not
measured directly as part of the diagnostic procedures.
EGR Valve: Service and Repair
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE

Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
1. Disconnect the EGR valve tube-to-EGR valve upper fitting.
2. Disconnect the vacuum tube fitting from the EGR valve. 3. Remove the 2 bolts and the EGR
valve.
tools cause scratches and gouges that make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove all
traces of the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve gasket.
NOTE: -
If there is no residual gasket material present, metal surface prep can be used to clean and
prepare the surfaces
- Do not reuse the EGR valve gasket.
Remove and discard the EGR valve gasket.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
View 151-6
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator
C1083
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator >
Page 2763
C1068
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2764

Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation >
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Service and Repair
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) VALVE
1. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation tube-to-PCV valve quick connect coupling.
2. CAUTION: A new positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve must be installed if removed from
the valve cover. Damage will occur to
the locking mechanism on the PCV valve upon removal.

Rotate the PCV valve counterclockwise and remove it from the valve cover. -
Discard the PCV valve.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
View 151-6
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Differential Pressure
EGR Vacuum Regulator
C1083
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Differential Pressure
EGR Vacuum Regulator > Page 2778
C1068
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2779

Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information
> Specifications
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................Specification
Engine idling.........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................125 cc
..........................................................................269 kPa (39 psi)
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
WARNING:
injury.
All vehicles
coupling.
test.
All vehicles
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System
WARNING:
injury.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information >
Specifications
Measured/PID Values
Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................

........................................................ 705-820 RPM
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Throttle Cable To Pedal Connector Kit
Accelerator Pedal: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Throttle Cable To Pedal Connector
Kit
TSB 09-21-9
11/02/09
NEW SERVICE KIT AVAILABLE FOR ACCELERATOR CABLE TO PEDAL CONNECTION
ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Escape and Mariner (excluding Hybrid) may require the accelerator cable
to accelerator pedal connection repaired. A new service clip has been released for use, in lieu of
replacing the cable and/or pedal assemblies.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Position clip on top part of pedal. (Figure 1)
2. Snap bottom of clip onto pedal by pushing forward. (Figure 2)
3. Check to make sure clip is completely snapped in place. Move accelerator pedal from idle to
wide open throttle and check that surrounding
components do not come in contact with the pedal.

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Throttle Cable To Pedal Connector Kit > Page 2799
Parts Block
092109A 2007-2008 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner (Excludes Hybrid): Install Accelerator Cable To Pedal Service Kit
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9825 33
Disclaimer
Accelerator Pedal: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Verify the condition by operating the accelerator pedal and shaft from idle to wide open-throttle and
back again. Check for any resistance in forward travel of the accelerator pedal and shaft or
hesitation on return.
If a concern exists, visually inspect all components of the accelerator pedal and shaft. Look for
damage or binding of the accelerator cable. Look for obstructions at the throttle body and
accelerator pedal and shaft.
For vehicles equipped with speed control, examine the speed control cable. Refer to Cruise
Control.
Symptom Chart
Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair

ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND SHAFT
WARNING: Keep the sliding inner cable of the accelerator cable, the accelerator pedal and the
pedal shaft free of contact with surrounding components such as wiring, hoses, sound insulation
and floor carpeting. Contact in these areas may prevent movement of the accelerator cable,
reducing the ability to decelerate the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury to the vehicle occupant(s).
NOTE: The accelerator pedal and shaft should travel smoothly from idle to wide-open throttle
positions. Hesitation on return or prevention of return to the idle position must not occur.
1. Remove the accelerator cable from the accelerator pedal. 2. Remove the 2 bolts and the
accelerator pedal and shaft assembly.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor >
2-Track APP Sensor
2-Track APP Sensor
3-Track APP Sensor
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner
Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Exploded View

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
View 151-4
View 151-5
C128



the MAF sensor.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator >
Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation
CHECK FUEL CAP INDICATOR
The check fuel cap indicator is a communications network message sent by the PCM. The PCM
sends the message to illuminate the lamp when the strategy determines there is a concern in the
EVAP system due to the fuel filler cap or capless fuel tank filler pipe not being sealed correctly.
This would be detected by the inability to pull vacuum in the fuel tank, after a fueling event.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
WARNING:
injury.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component
Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications
Fuel Injector: Electrical Specifications
Fuel Injector Resistance ......................................................................................................................

............................................................. 11 - 18 Ohms
Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 2831
Fuel Injector: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Fuel Injector Flow and Leakage ............................................................... Refer to Pinpoint Test

HC12 through HC14 at Computers and Control Systems.
Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1
C181
Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 > Page 2834
C182
C183
C184
Fuel Injector: Diagrams
C181
C182
C183
C184
C185
C186
Fuel Injector: Description and Operation
FUEL INJECTORS
Typical Fuel Injector
CAUTION: Do not apply battery positive voltage (B+) directly to the fuel injector electrical connector
terminals. The solenoids may be damaged internally in a matter of seconds.
The fuel injector is a solenoid-operated valve that meters fuel flow to the engine. The fuel injector is
opened and closed a constant number of times per crankshaft revolution. The amount of fuel is
controlled by the length of time the fuel injector is held open.
The fuel injector is normally closed, and is operated by a 12-volt source from either the electronic
engine control (EEC) power relay or fuel pump relay. The ground signal is controlled by the PCM.
The injector is the deposit resistant injector (DRI) type and does not have to be cleaned. However,
it can be flow checked and, if found outside of specification, a new fuel injector should be installed.
Fuel Injector: Service and Repair
FUEL RAIL
Exploded View
Removal
WARNING: -
Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near
intake manifold. 4. Disconnect the fuel supply tube quick connect coupling at the fuel rail. 5.
Disconnect the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor vacuum tube and electrical connector. 6.
Disconnect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors. 7. Remove the 4 fuel rail bolts. 8. Detach the
fuel charging wiring harness retainers from the fuel rail and remove the fuel rail and injectors as an
assembly. 9. Remove the 6 fuel injectors.
- Remove and discard the 12 fuel injector O-ring seals.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Use O-ring seals that are made of special fuel-resistant material. Use of ordinary
O-rings can cause the fuel system to leak.
Do not reuse the O-ring seals.
NOTE: Install new fuel injector O-ring seals and lubricate them with clean engine oil.
Install the fuel injectors.
2. Position the fuel rail and install the bolts.
3. Attach the fuel charging wiring harness retainers to the fuel rail. 4. Connect the 6 fuel injector
electrical connectors. 5. Connect the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor vacuum tube and
electrical connector. 6. Connect the fuel supply tube quick connect coupling at the fuel rail. 7. Install
the upper intake manifold. 8. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings
Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Spring Lock Couplings
SPRING LOCK COUPLINGS
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Disconnect
WARNING:
injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Remove the safety clip from the spring lock coupling.
3. Insert the special tool onto the fuel tube and into the spring lock coupling.
4. Separate the spring lock coupling from the fuel tube.

Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 2850
Connect
1. Clean and inspect the fuel tube and spring lock coupling.
- Lubricate the end of the fuel tube with clean engine oil.
2. Install the spring lock coupling onto the fuel tube until fully seated.
3. Pull on the spring lock coupling to make sure it is correctly locked onto the fuel tube. 4. Install the
safety clip onto the spring lock coupling.
Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Quick Connect Coupling
QUICK CONNECT COUPLING

Disconnect - Type I
WARNING:
injury.
1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure.
2. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector
retaining clip area before separating from the tube.
Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the tube. -
Press the quick connect coupling release button and separate the quick connect coupling from the
tube.
Connect - Type I
1. NOTE:
- Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals.
- Make sure the tube clicks into place when installing into the quick connect coupling. To make sure
that the tube is fully seated, pull on the tube.
Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until fully seated.
Disconnect - Type II
WARNING:
type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
1. Rotate the lock tab on the quick connect coupling.
Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the fitting. -
Pull on the quick connect coupling and separate from the fitting.
Connect - Type II
1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals.
Rotate the lock tab and install the quick connect coupling onto the fitting.
2. NOTE: Make sure the fuel tube clicks into place when installing the tube. To make sure that the
fuel tube is fully seated, pull on the tube.
Release the lock tab into the latched position.

Disconnect - Type III
WARNING:
injury.
1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure.
2. NOTE: Carefully release the lock tab to avoid breakage.
Release the quick connect coupling primary lock tab.
3. Rotate the primary lock tab to the fully un-locked position and squeeze the secondary lock tabs
to release the locking mechanism.
Push the locking mechanism outward and separate the quick connect coupling from the tube.
Connect - Type III
1. NOTE:
- Make sure the tube clicks into place when installing it into the quick connect coupling. To make
sure the tube is fully seated, pull on the tube.
Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until fully seated.
2. NOTE: Make sure the retainer clip clicks into place when installing.
Depress the retainer clip until it is flush with the quick connect coupling housing.
3. NOTE: To make sure the tube is fully seated, pull on the quick connect coupling.
Rotate the primary locking tab to the closed position.
Disconnect - Type IV
WARNING:
injury.
high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this
1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. 2.
Squeeze the quick connect coupling retainer clip tabs to release the locking mechanism.
Push the locking mechanism outward to release the quick connect coupling.
- Pull on the quick connect coupling and separate it from the tube.
Connect - Type IV
1. NOTE:
- Make sure the tube clicks into place when installing into the quick connect coupling. To make sure
that the tube is fully seated, pull on the tube.
Connect the quick connect coupling to the tube. 1
Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until it is fully seated.
2 Depress the locking tab until it is flush with the quick connect coupling housing.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
View 151-6
View 151-8
C173
WARNING:

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper >
Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper: Description and Operation
FUEL RAIL PULSE DAMPER
Typical Fuel Rail Pulse Damper
The fuel rail pulse damper is located on the fuel rail and reduces the fuel system noise caused by
the pulsing of the fuel injectors. The vacuum port located on the damper is connected to manifold
vacuum to avoid fuel spillage if the pulse damper diaphragm ruptures. The fuel rail pulse damper
should not be confused with a fuel pressure regulator; it does not regulate the fuel rail pressure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure >
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................Specification
Engine idling.........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................125 cc
..........................................................................269 kPa (39 psi)
System Information > Specifications > Page 2870
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
WARNING:
injury.
All vehicles
coupling.
System Information > Specifications > Page 2871
test.
All vehicles
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Control
Unit > Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Control
Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 2875
C4033
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay >
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay >
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
Fuel Rail: Service and Repair
FUEL RAIL
Exploded View
Removal
WARNING: -
Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near
intake manifold. 4. Disconnect the fuel supply tube quick connect coupling at the fuel rail. 5.
Disconnect the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor vacuum tube and electrical connector. 6.
Disconnect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors. 7. Remove the 4 fuel rail bolts. 8. Detach the
fuel charging wiring harness retainers from the fuel rail and remove the fuel rail and injectors as an
assembly. 9. Remove the 6 fuel injectors.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Page 2883
- Remove and discard the 12 fuel injector O-ring seals.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Use O-ring seals that are made of special fuel-resistant material. Use of ordinary
O-rings can cause the fuel system to leak.
Do not reuse the O-ring seals.
NOTE: Install new fuel injector O-ring seals and lubricate them with clean engine oil.
Install the fuel injectors.
2. Position the fuel rail and install the bolts.
3. Attach the fuel charging wiring harness retainers to the fuel rail. 4. Connect the 6 fuel injector
electrical connectors. 5. Connect the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor vacuum tube and
electrical connector. 6. Connect the fuel supply tube quick connect coupling at the fuel rail. 7. Install
the upper intake manifold. 8. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair
FUEL LINES
Exploded View
WARNING:
injury.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
3. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the fuel tubes after releasing the fuel system pressure.
Upon disconnecting or removing any fuel tubes,
carefully drain any residual fuel into a suitable container.
Disconnect the fuel supply tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling.
4. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube-to-evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge valve quick
connect coupling. 5. Disconnect the fuel supply tube-to-fuel filter outlet spring lock coupling. 6.
Disconnect the fuel vapor tube-to-fuel vapor tube assembly quick connect coupling. 7. Detach the
fuel tube and the fuel vapor tube from the retainer clips and remove the tubes. 8. To install, reverse
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair
FUEL TANK FILLER PIPE

Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
WARNING:
injury.
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel
filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Release the fuel system pressure. 3.
Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 4. Insert the special tool into the fuel tank filler
pipe until it opens the fuel tank level shutoff valve located at the inlet of the fuel tank.
the fuel level below the inlet of the fuel tank.
6. Remove the 4 screws and the fuel pump (FP) module access cover.
Disconnect the fuel supply tube and fuel vapor tube-to-FP module quick connect couplings.
9. NOTE: Carefully remove the FP module lock ring and verify that enough fuel has been drained
to avoid spillage.
Using a suitable FP lock ring remover, rotate the lock ring counterclockwise and remove.
10. NOTE: A partial fuel tank drain is required to lower the fuel level below the fuel tank inlet and
avoid fuel spillage upon removal of the fuel tank
filler pipe hose and clamp.
Position the FP module aside and, using the fuel storage tanker, drain enough fuel so the fuel level
in the fuel tank is below the fuel tank inlet.
11. Remove the 2 fuel tank filler pipe flange screws and the dust cover.
12. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. 13. Remove the 3 rivets and the fuel tank filler pipe shield.
14. Remove the fuel tank filler pipe bracket bolt.
15. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube-to-fuel tank filler pipe quick connect coupling.
16. Detach the 2 fuel vapor tube retaining clips. 17. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe vent tube
from the dust separator. 18. Release the clamp and remove the fuel tank filler pipe hose from the
fuel tank.
19. Remove the fuel tank filler pipe. 20. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >

tank fill levels.
FUEL PUMP MODULE

Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
WARNING:
injury.
couplings.
arm and the filter.
NOTE: -
spillage.
the FP module.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Tank Vent: > 08-5-5 > Mar > 08 > Fuel
System - Slow Fuel Fill/MIL ON/DTC P0451
Fuel Tank Vent: Customer Interest Fuel System - Slow Fuel Fill/MIL ON/DTC P0451
TSB 08-5-5
03/17/08
SLOW FUEL FILL AND/OR DTC P0451
2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 07-25-7 to update the Title and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2005-2008 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid vehicles
may exhibit a slow fuel fill concern or a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble
code (DTC) P0451 present. The condition may be caused by water/moisture or other
contamination entering the fuel filler vent line and then freezing and/or causing a blockage.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition by relocating the fuel filler
vent line.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
When performing this procedure it is not necessary to:
^ Drain any fuel from the tank
^ Remove the stone shield from the filler pipe
^ Disconnect the filler pipe from the fuel tank
NOTE
ANY WATER/MOISTURE OR OBSTRUCTIONS IN THE EVAPORATIVE VENT SYSTEM MUST

BE REMOVED.
1. With the vehicle in neutral, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the left rear wheel.
3. Remove the fuel filler cap.
4. Remove the two (2) upper filler pipe mounting screws.
5. Remove the single lower filler pipe mounting screw.
6. Carefully pull the upper end of the filler pipe away from the inner wheel well to gain access to the
vent line.
7. Cut any tape or plastic straps holding the black plastic convoluted vent line to the filler pipe or
underbody.
8. Pull the black plastic convoluted vent line underneath the vehicle.
9. Remove the vent line from the dust separator attached to the canister assembly and clear out
the line using compressed air.
10. Inspect the dust separator for water/moisture or any obstruction. If water/moisture or
obstructions are present follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 310-00 pinpoint test A. If no
water/moisture or obstructions are present reattach vent line to dust separator and continue to next
step.
11. Remove but do not discard the spider screen (vent cap) from the end of the vent line.
12. Measuring from the open end of the vent line, cut off and discard the last 13" (35 cm).
13. Reinstall the spider screen (vent cap) in the vent line.
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Tank Vent: > 08-5-5 > Mar > 08 > Fuel
System - Slow Fuel Fill/MIL ON/DTC P0451 > Page 2913
14. Route the shortened vent line and spider screen (vent cap) as shown in Figure 1.
15. Push the spider screen (vent cap) at least 2" (50 mm) into the open subframe and body section
alignment hole.
16. Secure the vent line to the fuel tank strap with a plastic tie strap.
17. Reposition the filler pipe into its original position.
18. Install the lower filler pipe mounting screw and tighten to 89 lb-in (10 N.m).
19. Install the two (2) upper filler pipe mounting screws and tighten to 27 lb-in (3 N.m).
20. Install the fuel filler cap.
21. Reinstall the wheel and tighten to 98 lb-ft (133 N.m).
22. Lower the vehicle from the hoist.
080505A 2005-2008 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Escape Hybrid And Mariner, 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid: Relocate Fuel Filler Vent Hose. Includes
Time to Remove Left Rear Wheel, Fuel Cap And Partially Remove The Fuel Filler Pipe And Shield
(Do Not Use With 9030A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9A089 55
Disclaimer
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Tank Vent: > 08-5-5 > Mar >
08 > Fuel System - Slow Fuel Fill/MIL ON/DTC P0451
Fuel Tank Vent: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Slow Fuel Fill/MIL ON/DTC P0451
TSB 08-5-5
03/17/08
SLOW FUEL FILL AND/OR DTC P0451
2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 07-25-7 to update the Title and Service Procedure.
may exhibit a slow fuel fill concern or a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble
code (DTC) P0451 present. The condition may be caused by water/moisture or other
contamination entering the fuel filler vent line and then freezing and/or causing a blockage.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition by relocating the fuel filler
vent line.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
When performing this procedure it is not necessary to:
^ Drain any fuel from the tank
^ Remove the stone shield from the filler pipe
^ Disconnect the filler pipe from the fuel tank
NOTE
ANY WATER/MOISTURE OR OBSTRUCTIONS IN THE EVAPORATIVE VENT SYSTEM MUST

BE REMOVED.
1. With the vehicle in neutral, position it on a hoist.
2. Remove the left rear wheel.
3. Remove the fuel filler cap.
4. Remove the two (2) upper filler pipe mounting screws.
5. Remove the single lower filler pipe mounting screw.
6. Carefully pull the upper end of the filler pipe away from the inner wheel well to gain access to the
vent line.
7. Cut any tape or plastic straps holding the black plastic convoluted vent line to the filler pipe or
underbody.
8. Pull the black plastic convoluted vent line underneath the vehicle.
9. Remove the vent line from the dust separator attached to the canister assembly and clear out
the line using compressed air.
10. Inspect the dust separator for water/moisture or any obstruction. If water/moisture or
obstructions are present follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 310-00 pinpoint test A. If no
water/moisture or obstructions are present reattach vent line to dust separator and continue to next
step.
11. Remove but do not discard the spider screen (vent cap) from the end of the vent line.
12. Measuring from the open end of the vent line, cut off and discard the last 13" (35 cm).
13. Reinstall the spider screen (vent cap) in the vent line.
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Tank Vent: > 08-5-5 > Mar >
08 > Fuel System - Slow Fuel Fill/MIL ON/DTC P0451 > Page 2919
14. Route the shortened vent line and spider screen (vent cap) as shown in Figure 1.
15. Push the spider screen (vent cap) at least 2" (50 mm) into the open subframe and body section
alignment hole.
16. Secure the vent line to the fuel tank strap with a plastic tie strap.
17. Reposition the filler pipe into its original position.
18. Install the lower filler pipe mounting screw and tighten to 89 lb-in (10 N.m).
19. Install the two (2) upper filler pipe mounting screws and tighten to 27 lb-in (3 N.m).
20. Install the fuel filler cap.
21. Reinstall the wheel and tighten to 98 lb-ft (133 N.m).
22. Lower the vehicle from the hoist.
080505A 2005-2008 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Escape Hybrid And Mariner, 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid: Relocate Fuel Filler Vent Hose. Includes
Time to Remove Left Rear Wheel, Fuel Cap And Partially Remove The Fuel Filler Pipe And Shield
(Do Not Use With 9030A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9A089 55
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component
C433
Fuel Tank Unit: Description and Operation

tank fill levels.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor >
View 151-6
View 151-8
C173
WARNING:

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator -
Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams
C1066
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation
NOTE: The IAC valve assembly is not adjustable and cannot be cleaned, also some IAC valves are
normally open and others are normally closed. Some IAC valves require engine vacuum to
operate.
The IAC valve assembly controls the engine idle speed and provides a dashpot function. The IAC
valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle plate through a bypass within the IAC valve
assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the desired idle speed or bypass air and signals
the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle. The IAC valve responds by positioning the
IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The PCM monitors engine RPM and increases or
decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the desired RPM.
The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control:
- no touch start
- cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up
- idle (corrects for engine load)
- stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function)
- over-temperature idle boost

Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair
1. Disconnect the idle air control (IAC) valve electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 bolts and the
IAC valve and discard the gasket.
- Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces. Install new gasket.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
View 151-23
C392

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component
Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER OUTLET PIPE
Exploded View
1. Disconnect the crankcase vent tube from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 2. Loosen the 2 clamps and
remove the air cleaner outlet pipe.
3. NOTE: The air cleaner outlet pipe should be securely sealed to prevent unmetered air from
entering the engine.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2949
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 2954
C4033
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2958
and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2962
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
2-Track APP Sensor
2-Track APP Sensor
3-Track APP Sensor
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2970
View 151-5
C128



the MAF sensor.

Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-6
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2978
View 151-8
C173
WARNING:

Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-6
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2985
View 151-8
C173
WARNING:

Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2992
C392

Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-6
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2998
View 151-8
C189
C1189
Typical TP Sensor

the TP sensor.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Throttle Body: Service and Repair
THROTTLE BODY
CAUTION: Throttle body bore and plate area have a special coating and cannot be cleaned, or
possible damage to the throttle body can occur.
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. 2. Remove the 2 bolts and the accelerator cable snow shield.
3. Disconnect the speed control and accelerator cables from the throttle body.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
4. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical connector and detach the wiring retainer
from the stud bolt. 5. Detach the transaxle vent tube pin-type retainer from the throttle body. 6.
Disconnect and plug the 2 throttle body coolant hoses.
7. NOTE: Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces.
Remove the 3 bolts, the stud bolt and the throttle body. -
Discard the gasket.
- Install a new throttle body gasket.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Throttle Cable To Pedal Connector Kit
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Throttle Cable To Pedal
Connector Kit
TSB 09-21-9
11/02/09
NEW SERVICE KIT AVAILABLE FOR ACCELERATOR CABLE TO PEDAL CONNECTION
ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Escape and Mariner (excluding Hybrid) may require the accelerator cable
to accelerator pedal connection repaired. A new service clip has been released for use, in lieu of
replacing the cable and/or pedal assemblies.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Position clip on top part of pedal. (Figure 1)
2. Snap bottom of clip onto pedal by pushing forward. (Figure 2)
3. Check to make sure clip is completely snapped in place. Move accelerator pedal from idle to
wide open throttle and check that surrounding
components do not come in contact with the pedal.

Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Throttle Cable To Pedal Connector Kit > Page 3011
Parts Block
092109A 2007-2008 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner (Excludes Hybrid): Install Accelerator Cable To Pedal Service Kit
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9825 33
Disclaimer
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Verify the condition by operating the accelerator pedal and shaft from idle to wide open-throttle and
back again. Check for any resistance in forward travel of the accelerator pedal and shaft or
hesitation on return.
If a concern exists, visually inspect all components of the accelerator pedal and shaft. Look for
damage or binding of the accelerator cable. Look for obstructions at the throttle body and
accelerator pedal and shaft.
For vehicles equipped with speed control, examine the speed control cable. Refer to Cruise
Control.
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3014
Symptom Chart
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Service and Repair

ACCELERATOR CABLE
Part 1
Part 2
WARNING: Keep the sliding inner cable of the accelerator cable, the accelerator pedal and the
pedal shaft free of contact with surrounding components such as wiring, hoses, sound insulation
and floor carpeting. Contact in these areas may prevent movement of the accelerator cable,
reducing the ability to decelerate the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury to the vehicle occupant(s).
NOTE:
- The accelerator pedal and shaft should travel smoothly from idle to wide-open throttle positions.
Hesitation on return or prevention of return to the idle position must not occur.
- The sliding inner member of the accelerator cable should not be lubricated and is not repairable.
1. Remove the cable from the accelerator pedal. 2. Remove the accelerator cable grommet from
the dash panel. 3. Remove the bolt and the accelerator cable bracket.
- Detach the speed control cable pin-type retainer from the accelerator cable bracket.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and the accelerator control cover shield.

5. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the throttle body. 6. Squeeze the tabs and remove the
accelerator cable from the bracket. 7. Detach the accelerator cable retainer. 8. Remove the
accelerator cable. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
View 151-6
View 151-8
C189
C1189
Typical TP Sensor

the TP sensor.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System >
Variable Induction Control Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams
C191
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System >
Variable Induction Control Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3029
Variable Induction Control Actuator: Description and Operation
INTAKE MANIFOLD TUNING VALVE (IMTV)
WARNING: Substantial opening and closing torque is applied by this system. To prevent injury, be
careful to keep fingers away from lever mechanisms when actuated.
The IMTV is a motorized actuated unit mounted directly to the intake manifold. The IMTV actuator
controls a shutter device attached to the actuator shaft. There is no monitor input to the PCM with
this system to indicate shutter position.
The motorized IMTV unit is not energized below approximately 2,600 RPM. The shutter is in the
closed position not allowing airflow blend to occur in the intake manifold. The motorized unit is
energized above approximately 2,600 RPM. The motorized unit is commanded on by the PCM
initially at a 100 percent duty cycle to move the shutter to the open position, and then falling to
approximately 50 percent to continue to hold the shutter open.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information >
Specifications
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................Specification
Firing order...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................1-4-2-5-3-6
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
View 151-7
View 151-8
C180
C1180

and the CMP.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
View 151-7
View 151-9
C101
C1120
shield.
the CKP.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Specifications
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1
C111
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3053
C112
C113
C114
Ignition Coil: Diagrams
C111
C112
C113
C114
C115
C116
C174
> Page 3063
Ignition Coil: Description and Operation
Coil On Plug (COP)
Typical Coil On Plug (COP)
The COP ignition operates similar to a standard coil pack ignition except each plug has one coil per
plug. The COP has 3 different modes of operation: engine crank, engine running, and CMP failure
mode effects management (FMEM).
Coil Pack
Typical Four-Tower Coil Pack

> Page 3064
Typical Six-Tower Coil Pack
The PCM provides a grounding switch for the coil primary circuit. When the switch is closed,
voltage is applied to the coil primary circuit. This creates a magnetic field around the primary coil.
The PCM opens the switch, causing the magnetic field to collapse, inducing the high voltage in the
secondary coil windings and firing the spark plug. The spark plugs are paired so that as one spark
plug fires on the compression stroke, the other spark plug fires on the exhaust stroke. The next
time the coil is fired the order is reversed. The next pair of spark plugs fire according to the engine
firing order.
Coil packs come in 4-tower, 6-tower horizontal and series 5 6-tower models. Two adjacent coil
towers share a common coil and are called a matched pair. For 6-tower coil pack (6 cylinder)
applications, the matched pairs are 1 and 5, 2 and 6, and 3 and 4. For 4-tower coil pack (4 cylinder)
applications, the matched pairs are 1 and 4, and 2 and 3.
When the coil is fired by the PCM, spark is delivered through the matched pair towers to their
respective spark plugs. The spark plugs are fired simultaneously and are paired so that as one fires
on the compression stroke, the other spark plug fires on the exhaust stroke. The next time the coil
is fired, the situation is reversed. The next pair of spark plugs fire according to the engine firing
order.
> Page 3065
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair
IGNITION COIL-ON-PLUG
Exploded View
> Page 3066
RH side
1. NOTE: The upper intake manifold must be removed to access the RH ignition coils only.
Both sides
2. Disconnect the ignition coil electrical connectors.
ease removal.
Remove the bolts and the ignition coils. -
- Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coil boots before attaching to
the spark plugs.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-8
C109
Knock Sensor (KS)
timing.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3076
View 151-8
C180
C1180

and the CMP.

Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-7
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3083
View 151-9
C101
C1120
shield.
the CKP.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition
Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09

SERVICE PROCEDURE
ignition key.
Parts Block
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09

SERVICE PROCEDURE
ignition key.
Parts Block
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page
3102
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional


Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional
> Page 3105

Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-8
C109
Knock Sensor (KS)
timing.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > General Specifications
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................Specification
Spark plug gap.....................................................................................................................................

....................................1.32-1.42 mm (0.052-0.056 in)
Specifications > General Specifications > Page 3115
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................Specification
Spark plug............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................AGSF-32N
carbon fouling.
^


SPARK PLUGS
Exploded View
Removal
RH side
ease removal.

the spark plugs.
Installation



Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids -
Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
Pinpoint Tests - Non OSC Equipped Vehicle
Special Tool(s)
Solenoid Operation Chart
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always OFF" Failed OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring
concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck off, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck off.
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always ON" Failed ON due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring
concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck on, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck on.
Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams
C199
Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 3135
Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
Special Tool(s)
Page 3136
Page 3137
Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
Special Tool(s)
Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information
> Locations
View 151-27
> Locations > Page 3147
C4347
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators -
Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Adjustments
Shift Indicator: Adjustments
Selector Lever Cable Adjustment
1. Place the floor shift selector lever in the (D) position.
2. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual lever.
3. Place the manual lever in the (D) position.
1 Rotate the manual lever counterclockwise to the PARK position.
2 Rotate the manual lever clockwise 3 detents to the (D) position.
4. Release the selector lever cable adjuster lock.
1 Pull out on the adjuster lock tabs.
2 Slide the lock over to unlock the selector lever cable.

Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Adjustments > Page
3153
5. Align the selector lever cable end to the manual lever ball stud and install it with the adjuster
unlocked.
6. Slide the adjuster tab in place to lock the selector lever cable.
Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP (TCIL)
The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the
engagement or disengagement of overdrive.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-22
C3184
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches -
Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Typical BPP Switch
as follows:
Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information >
overdrive.
Description and Operation > Page 3172

Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
View 151-10
View 151-11
C167
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Removal
range (TR) sensor.
Installation

Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
View 151-10
Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3186
View 151-11
View 151-10
View 151-11
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
C193
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3191
C143
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Material

Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3194

Material


Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair
of the transaxle.
procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection

Special Tool(s)
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Page 3207
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Page 3208
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams
C199
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3212

Special Tool(s)
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection

Special Tool(s)
> Page 3218
> Page 3219
Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3224
C4347
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids -
A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection

Special Tool(s)
A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3230
A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3231
A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams
C199
A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3235

Special Tool(s)
A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection

Special Tool(s)
A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3241
A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3242
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band, A/T > Component
Information > Application and ID > Band and Clutch Application Chart A
Band: Application and ID Band and Clutch Application Chart A
Band and Clutch Application Chart A
Band And Clutch Application Chart A

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band, A/T > Component
Information > Application and ID > Band and Clutch Application Chart A > Page 3247
Band: Application and ID Band and Clutch Application Chart B
Band and Clutch Application Chart B
Band And Clutch Application Chart B (Part 1)

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC >
Typical BPP Switch
as follows:
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component
Information > Application and ID > Band and Clutch Application Chart A
Clutch: Application and ID Band and Clutch Application Chart A
Band and Clutch Application Chart A
Band And Clutch Application Chart A

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component
Information > Application and ID > Band and Clutch Application Chart A > Page 3255
Clutch: Application and ID Band and Clutch Application Chart B
Band and Clutch Application Chart B

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Fluid Capacity.......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................9.5L (10 quarts)
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name - Mercon V Automatic Transmission Fluid
Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM - XT-5-QMC (US) - CXT-5-LM12 (Canada)
Ford Specification - MERCON V
Note: Using any transmission fluid other than those that meet the recommended specification may
cause internal transmission damage.
Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Material
Draining
2. NOTE: If an internal problem is suspected, drain the fluid through a paper filter. A small amount
of metal or friction particles may be found from
normal wear. If an excessive amount of metal or friction material is present the transaxle will need
to be overhauled.
Remove the transaxle drain plug.
Refill
1. Using a small amount of thread sealant on the threads, install the transaxle drain plug.
Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 3263
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning

Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 3264
inlet tube.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T >
Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Material
Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the radiator grille. 3. Disconnect the transmission fluid
cooler hoses from the transmission fluid combo cooler.
4. Remove the retainer, the 5 bolts and the LH splash shield.
5. Disconnect the front transmission fluid cooler hose from the transaxle case.
6. Disconnect and remove the rear cooler tube fitting from the transaxle case.
7. Disconnect and remove the fluid cooler tube bracket and bolt from the transaxle case.
8. Remove the fluid cooler tubes from under the vehicle and install new as necessary. 9. To install,
10. Start the vehicle and check the transmission fluid level.
^ Fill the transaxle with clean automatic transmission fluid.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component
Fluid Pan: Specifications
Main control cover bolts .......................................................................................................................

....................................................... 13 Nm (10 lb-ft)
Install studs in locations 3 and 11

Fluid Pan: Service and Repair
Main Control Cover
Material
Removal
All vehicles
3.0L engines 2. Drain the engine coolant.
All vehicles 3. Remove the battery tray. 4. Disconnect the wiring harness from the battery tray
bracket.
5. Remove the battery tray bracket.
6. Disconnect the vent hose from the main control cover.

3.0L engines 7. Remove the lower radiator hose and position aside.
8. Remove the wire harness retainer from the front engine mount.
All vehicles 9. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket bolt.
10. Remove the main control cover bolts, transmission fluid cooler bypass studs and the cover.
11. NOTE: Do not discard the gasket. It is a reusable type. Inspect the gasket for damage. Install a
new gasket as necessary.
Remove the main control cover gasket.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: The main control cover gasket is a reusable type. Inspect the gasket for damage. Install
a new gasket as necessary.
Install the main control cover gasket.
2. NOTE: Install studs in locations 3 and 11.
Install the main control cover. Tighten to 13 Nm (10 lb-ft), in the sequence shown.
3. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt.
3.0L engines 4. Install the wire harness retainer to the front engine mount. 5. Install the lower
radiator hose.
All vehicles 6. Connect the vent hose to the main control cover.
7. Install the battery tray bracket.
8. Connect the wiring harness to the battery tray bracket.
9. Install the battery tray.
10. Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid.
3.0L engines 11. Fill the engine cooling system.
All vehicles 12. Start the engine, run through all of the gears and check the transmission fluid level.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators - A/T
> Shift Indicator > Component Information > Adjustments

> Shift Indicator > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 3282
unlocked.
> Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection

Special Tool(s)
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3289
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Seals - LH
Differential Seals - LH
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain the fluid.
3. Remove the LH halfshaft. 4. Using the special tools, remove and discard the LH differential seal.
System Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 3295
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install the LH differential seal.
2. Install the LH halfshaft. 3. Using a small amount of thread sealant on the threads, install the
transaxle drain plug.
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Seals - RH
Differential Seals - RH
Material
Material
Removal
Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain the transmission
fluid.
3. Remove the RH halfshaft and intermediate shaft. 4. If equipped, remove the power transfer unit
(PTU). 5. If the vehicle is equipped with a PTU, use the special tools to remove the RH differential
seal.
6. If the vehicle is not equipped with a PTU, use the special tools to remove the RH differential
seal.
Installation
1. If the vehicle is equipped with a PTU, use the special tools to install the RH differential seal.
2. If the vehicle is not equipped with a PTU, use the special tools to install the RH differential seal.
3. If equipped, install the PTU. 4. Install the RH halfshaft. 5. Using a small amount of thread sealant
on the threads, install the transaxle drain plug.
the gears and check the fluid level.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation
Typical BPP Switch
as follows:
> Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
overdrive.
> Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3306

> Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3307

> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
View 151-10
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3311
View 151-11
C167
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Removal
range (TR) sensor.
Installation

> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
View 151-10
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page
3320
View 151-11
3321
View 151-10
3322
View 151-11
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
C193
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page
3325
C143
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Material

> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor >
Page 3328

Page 3329
Material

Page 3330

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Interlock: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
been simplified.
Current Flow (1)
Diagrams.
Splices (3)
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3335
Component Names (5)

the wire color.
"Symbols".
Power Distribution
Ground Distribution
C904
on the vehicle.
WARNINGS

the procedure.
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Symbols (Part 2)
Symbols (Part 3)
Symbols (Part 4)
Symbols (Part 5)
Shift Interlock: Diagnostic Aids
terminal.
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
7 = Seal
1 = Proper crimp
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
6 = Male half
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
signal.
4 = Grounding foil
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
NOTE: -
splice.
wire size
harness.
Shift Interlock: Electrical Diagrams
37-1
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Shift Interlock: Service and Repair
Brake Shift Interlock Override
NOTE: If it is necessary to use the override procedure to move the selector lever out of the PARK
position, it is possible that a fuse has blown and the brake lights are not operational. Before driving
the vehicle, verify that the brake lights are working.
This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock feature that prevents the selector lever from
being moved out of PARK when the ignition is in the ON position unless the brake pedal is
depressed.
If the selector lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position when the ignition is in the ON
position and the brake pedal is depressed:
1. Apply the parking brake and remove the ignition key.
2. NOTE: Relief located at the front of the access panel.
Remove the access panel.
3. Using an suitable tool, depress the brake shift interlock override mechanism on the selector
lever, apply the brake, depress the button on the
selector lever and move the selector lever into NEUTRAL.
4. Start the vehicle. 5. To install, reverse the procedure.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
C199

Special Tool(s)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
C2096
Shifter A/T: Service and Repair

Selector Lever
Selector Lever (Part 1)

Removal
All vehicles
1. Place the selector lever in the (D) position.
2. Gently pry up to remove the upper selector lever trim ring.
3. Lift the center console lid and remove the center console compartment tray.
4. Remove the top finish panel.

5. Remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever assembly.
1 Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the selector lever.
2 Remove the selector lever cable from the bracket.
6. Disconnect the wiring harness retainers from the selector lever.
7. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the selector lever.
1 Disconnect the selector lever electrical connector.

2 Remove the vehicle harness connector from the selector lever.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 8. Pull the all wheel drive (AWD) module straight back and remove
it from the back of the selector lever.
All vehicles 9. Remove the 2 screws from the center console.

10. Remove the 4 bolts and remove the selector lever assembly.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Install the selector lever assembly and the 4 bolts.

2. Install the 2 center console screws.
AWD vehicles 3. Install the AWD module on to the back of the selector lever.
All vehicles 4. Connect the electrical connectors to the selector lever.
1 Install the vehicle harness connector on the selector lever.
2 Connect the selector lever electrical connector.
5. Connect the wiring harness retainers to the selector lever.
6. Install the selector lever cable on the selector lever assembly.
1 Install the selector lever cable on the bracket.
2 Connect the selector lever cable end.

7. Install the top finish panel.
8. Install the center console compartment tray.
9. Install the upper selector lever trim ring.

10. Adjust the shift cable. For additional information, refer to Selector Lever Cable Adjustment.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Shift Cable: Service and Repair

Selector Lever Cable
Selector Lever Cable
Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Place the floor shift selector level in the (D) position.
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3373
3. Gently pry up to remove the upper shift lever trim ring.
6. Remove the selector lever cable from the gearshift assembly.
1 Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the gearshift lever.
7. Remove the 2 grommet nuts for the selector lever cable.
8. Remove the selector lever cable retainer from the transmission fluid filler tube.
10. Release the 2 tabs and remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever cable bracket.
^ Adjust the selector lever cable after installation. For additional information, refer to Selector Lever
Cable Adjustment.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Torque Converter: > 07-5-6 > Mar > 07 > A/T
- Engine Stall Upon Gear Engagement
Torque Converter: Customer Interest A/T - Engine Stall Upon Gear Engagement
TSB 07-5-6
03/19/07
CD4E - ENGINE STALLING ON ENGAGEMENT/STOPPING
ISSUE Some 2005-2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a CD4E automatic transaxle
and built from 8/1/2004 through 2/15/2007 may exhibit an engine stall when coming to a stop or
when engaging the transmission into drive or reverse. This condition may be intermittent and often
occurs after extended drives. There may be no diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) stored. This may
be caused by internal wear in the torque converter which prevents it from unlocking.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Inspect and repair all non transaxle codes per Workshop Manual (WSM) and Powertrain
Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manuals.
2. Use the Integrated Diagnostic System equipment to monitor the PIDs (Parameter Identification)
for TC_SLIPACT as the stall is occurring.
a. If the slip is greater than 20 RPM, the stalling is not transaxle related. Repair following PC/ED
procedures for engine stalling condition.
b. If TC_SLIPACT is less than 20 RPM with the transmission in park or neutral, torque converter
internal failure is the most likely cause, proceed to Step 3.
3. Remove the transaxle assembly and check the rotation of the torque converter in the bell
housing. A failed converter will be difficult to rotate.
4. Remove the torque converter, drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) and refill the CD4E
transmission assembly using MERCON(R) V ATF.
5. Install a new torque converter and reinstall the transaxle assembly.
6. Back flush the transmission cooler system as described in the WSM, Section 307-01A.
Parts Block
070506A 2005-2008 Escape/Mariner 5.2 Hrs.
4X2 2.3L: Diagnose And Replace The Torque Converter, Includes Time To Remove And Install
Transmission, Backflush The Cooler System (Do Not Use With 7000A, 7000A11, 7000A12,
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Torque Converter: > 07-5-6 > Mar > 07 > A/T
- Engine Stall Upon Gear Engagement > Page 3384
12650D)
12650D)
12650D)
12650D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7902 30
Disclaimer
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter: > 07-5-6 > Mar
> 07 > A/T - Engine Stall Upon Gear Engagement
Torque Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Engine Stall Upon Gear Engagement
TSB 07-5-6
03/19/07
CD4E - ENGINE STALLING ON ENGAGEMENT/STOPPING
ISSUE Some 2005-2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a CD4E automatic transaxle
and built from 8/1/2004 through 2/15/2007 may exhibit an engine stall when coming to a stop or
when engaging the transmission into drive or reverse. This condition may be intermittent and often
occurs after extended drives. There may be no diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) stored. This may
be caused by internal wear in the torque converter which prevents it from unlocking.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Inspect and repair all non transaxle codes per Workshop Manual (WSM) and Powertrain
Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manuals.
2. Use the Integrated Diagnostic System equipment to monitor the PIDs (Parameter Identification)
for TC_SLIPACT as the stall is occurring.
a. If the slip is greater than 20 RPM, the stalling is not transaxle related. Repair following PC/ED
procedures for engine stalling condition.
b. If TC_SLIPACT is less than 20 RPM with the transmission in park or neutral, torque converter
internal failure is the most likely cause, proceed to Step 3.
3. Remove the transaxle assembly and check the rotation of the torque converter in the bell
housing. A failed converter will be difficult to rotate.
4. Remove the torque converter, drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) and refill the CD4E
transmission assembly using MERCON(R) V ATF.
5. Install a new torque converter and reinstall the transaxle assembly.
6. Back flush the transmission cooler system as described in the WSM, Section 307-01A.
Parts Block
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter: > 07-5-6 > Mar
> 07 > A/T - Engine Stall Upon Gear Engagement > Page 3390
12650D)
12650D)
12650D)
12650D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7902 30
Disclaimer
Torque Converter: Description and Operation
Torque Converter The torque converter is a 4 element assembly. The torque converter contains an
impeller, a turbine, a reactor and a torque converter clutch (TCC) for increased fuel economy. It
couples the engine to the turbine shaft assembly, provides torque multiplication and absorbs
engine shock of gear shifting.
The lock-up temperature for the torque converter is based upon initial transmission fluid
temperature (TFT) at key on. If the TFT reads below 16°C (60° F), the converter will lock-up at
16°C (60°F). If the initial TFT reads 16°C (61°F), the converter will lock-up at 21°C (70°F). This
warm-up phase continues until approximately 32°C (90°F), at which temperature the converter
lock-up is available immediately.
At high temperatures, the converter lock-up is delayed to avoid conditions which might cause
shudder. Delayed converter lock-up begins at 80°C (175° F).
Impeller and Cover The impeller and cover assembly drives the impeller blades and pump
assembly. The impeller is primarily responsible for driving the turbine with hydraulic fluid by means
of centrifugal force. The cover provides a mating surface for the torque converter clutch piston plate
and dampener assembly.
Turbine The turbine is driven by centrifugal fluid force from the impeller. The turbine transmits input
torque to the drive chain and driven sprocket through the turbine shaft.
Reactor The reactor redirects fluid flow from the turbine back to the impeller so that fluid rotates in
the same direction as the impeller. This action also assists in torque multiplication.
Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) The TCC provides a mechanical link or direct drive between the
engine crankshaft and turbine shaft when applied. The application of the TCC is controlled by the
PCM. Under certain conditions, the PCM sends the appropriate signal to the TCC solenoid, which
allows fluid pressure within the torque converter to force the TCC piston plate and dampener
assembly against the cover creating a mechanical link between the engine and transaxle called
torque converter lock-up.
Lock-up temperature for the torque converter is based on initial TFT with the key in the ON
position. If the TFT reads below 16°C (60°F), the torque converter will lock at 16°C (60°F). If initial
TFT is 17°C (63°F) the torque converter will lock at 21°C (70°F). This "warm-up" phase continues
until the TFT is approximately 32°C (90°F), at which temperature converter lock-up is available
immediately.
At high temperatures, torque converter lock-up is delayed to avoid conditions which might cause a
shudder. Delayed torque converter lock-up begins at 79°C (175°F).
Turbine Shaft The turbine shaft connects the torque converter stator with the forward/coast/direct
clutch cylinder. When applied, the forward/coast/direct clutch cylinder transmits input torque to the
reverse/overdrive ring gear assembly, which also acts as the drive sprocket. This allows input
torque to be transmitted from the torque converter to the drive chain and driven sprocket.
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Torque Converter Diagnosis
Torque Converter: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Diagnosis
Torque Converter Diagnosis
Prior to installing a new or remanufactured torque converter, all diagnostic procedures must be
followed. This is to prevent the unnecessary installation of new or remanufactured torque
converters. Only after a complete diagnostic evaluation can the decision be made to install a new
or remanufactured torque converter.
Begin with the normal diagnostic procedures as follows: 1. Preliminary Inspection. 2. Know and
Understand the Customers Concern. 3. Verify the Concern - Carry out the Torque Converter
Operation Test. 4. Carry out Diagnostic Procedures.
^ Carry out On-Board Diagnostics. Refer to Computers and Control Systems. -
Repair all non-transmission related DTCs first.
- Repair all transmission DTCs.
- Rerun on-board diagnostics to verify repair.
^ Carry out Line Pressure Test. Refer to Special Testing Procedures. See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Line Pressure Test
See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Special Testing Procedures
^ Carry out Stall Speed Test. Refer to Special Testing Procedures. See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics See: Transmission
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Special
Testing Procedures
^ Carry out Diagnosis by Symptom Routines. Refer to Diagnosis By Symptom. See: Transmission
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnostic
Routines See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic
Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom -
Use the index to locate the appropriate routine that best describes the symptom(s). The routine will
list all possible components that may cause or contribute to the symptom. Check each component
listed, diagnose and repair as required, before repairing the torque converter.
Torque Converter Clutch Operation Test
This test verifies that the torque converter clutch control system and the torque converter are
operating correctly. Carry out the test as follows: 1. Carry out On-Board Diagnostic Test. Refer to
Computers and Control Systems. 2. Connect a tachometer to the engine. 3. Bring engine to normal
operating temperature by driving the vehicle at highway speeds for approximately 15 minutes in (D)
position. 4. After normal operating temperatures are reached, maintain a constant vehicle speed of
about 80 km/h (50 mph) and tap the brake pedal with the
left foot.
5. Engine rpm should increase when the brake pedal is tapped, and should decrease about 5
seconds after the brake pedal is released. If this does not
occur, see Torque Converter Operation Concerns. Refer to Diagnosis By Symptom. If the vehicle is
at a stop and stalls in (D) at idle, move the transaxle range selector lever to the manual 1 position,
see Torque Converter Operation Concerns. Refer to Diagnosis By Symptom. Repair as required. If
the vehicle does not stall in manual 1, refer to Diagnosis By Symptom. See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnostic
Routines/Torque Converter Concerns 240/340-242/342 See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Torque Converter Diagnosis > Page 3395
Torque Converter: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter
Torque Converter
1. A new or remanufactured torque converter must be installed if one or more of the following
statements is true:
^ A torque converter malfunction has been determined based on complete diagnostic procedures.
^ Converter stud or studs, impeller hub or bushing are damaged.
^ Discoloration (due to overheating).
^ Evidence of transmission assembly or fluid contamination due to the following transmission or

converter failure modes: -
Major metallic failure.
- Multiple clutches or clutch plate failures.
- Sufficient component wear which results in metallic contamination.
- Internal torque converter contamination present. For additional information refer to Torque
Converter Contamination Inspection. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Torque Converter Contamination Inspection
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Torque Converter Diagnosis > Page 3396
Torque Converter: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Contamination Inspection
Torque Converter Contamination Inspection
CAUTION: Do not use water-based cleaners or mineral spirits to clean or flush the torque converter
or transmission damage will occur. Use only clean automatic transmission fluid designated for the
transmission and converter being serviced.
1. If a new or remanufactured torque converter is not being installed, the following steps must be
completed. 2. With the torque converter on a bench, pour a small amount of transmission fluid from
the torque converter onto an absorbent white tissue or
through a paper filter and examine the fluid.
3. Observe the color and odor of the fluid. The fluid should be red, not brown or black. Odor may
indicate an overheating condition such as clutch
disc or band failure.
4. Examine the stain on the tissue for evidence of particles (spec of any kind). Examine the fluid
level indicator for signs of antifreeze (gum or
varnish). If particles are present in the fluid or there is evidence of engine coolant or water, a new
torque converter must be installed.
5. If there are no particles or contamination present, drain the remainder of the transmission fluid
from the torque converter. 6. Add 1.9L (2 qt) of clean automatic transmission fluid into the converter
and agitate by hand. 7. Thoroughly drain the fluid.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection

Special Tool(s)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler
Inspection/Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 09B10S2 Date: 100830

Inspection/Replacement > Page 3410
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes, OASIS will be activated on March 5, 2010.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website by March 31, 2010. Owner names and
addresses will be available by March 31, 2010.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Inspect / repair all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for inspection / repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but
are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a
copy of the Owner Notification Letter and schedule a service date.
^ Inspect / repair other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this program.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not
had this service action performed on a timely basis.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the inspection / repair, call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor.
Requests for approval after completion of the inspection / repair will not be granted.
^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the
inspection / repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs covered by this program if the repair
was performed before the date of the Owner Notification Letter (or after the date of the letter if an
emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Non-covered repairs, or those judged
by Ford to be excessive, will not be reimbursed.
^ Refunds will only be provided for the cost associated with the diagnosis and repair of a concern
caused by a cracked transmission fluid cooler.
^ Multiple refunds should be submitted on one repair line and the invoice details for each repair
should be detailed in the comments section of the claim. If a repair is performed on the same visit,
the repair and refunds should be submitted on separate repair lines.
^ The refund period for repairs performed prior to the date of the Owner Notification Letter will
expire on August 31, 2010.
^ Refund Claiming Information. (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 09B10 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Refunds or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line
on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service
Support Center.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
"MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center.
^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through . There is no mileage limit for this
program.
^ Claiming information for PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil - applies to Labor Operation 09B10C or
09B10F only (Submit on same repair line as repair.)
- Program Code: 09B10
- Misc. Expense: OTHER
- Misc. Expense: $5.76
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information

LABOR ALLOWANCES
NEW!
Parts Requirements / Ordering Information

DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN
Affected transmission fluid coolers are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty
Parts Analysis Center (WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System)
register for part disposition and return instructions.
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures."
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
In some of the affected vehicles, the transmission fluid cooler may develop a crack in the tube
below the right hand (RH) mounting bracket from thermal and vibration fatigue. This may lead to a
small transmission fluid leak and possible rough / harsh shifts
Dealers are to inspect the transmission fluid cooler for a grommet and possible fluid leak below the
RH mounting bracket Based on the results of the inspection, dealers will perform one of the
following service actions:
INSPECTION
1. Using a suitable light, look through the radiator grille and inspect the transmission fluid cooler
mounting bracket for a grommet behind the mounting
bolt. See Figure 1 and Figure 2.
2. If the grommet IS present NO further action is required and this procedure is complete See
Figure 2.
ESCAPE
3. If the grommet is NOT present remove the radiator grille. See Figure 3.
^ Remove the two upper grille bolts
^ Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two lower inside grille bolts
^ Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two lower grille speed nuts that attach the grille to
the front bumper cover
^ Release the three lower grille retainers from the front bumper cover
^ Remove the radiator grille
MARINER
4. If the grommet is NOT present remove the front bumper cover For additional information, refer to
the Workshop Manual (WSM) Section 501-19.
ESCAPE AND MARINER
5. Using a clean white paper towel wipe the transmission fluid cooler tube below the RH mounting
bracket and check for a fluid leak. See Figure 4.
^ If there is NO fluid leak proceed to SERVICE PROCEDURE 1.
^ If a fluid leak IS present proceed to SERVICE PROCEDURE 2.
SERVICE PROCEDURE 1 - GROMMET NOT PRESENT AND TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER

NOT LEAKING
ESCAPE AND MARINER
If during the inspection there was NO fluid leak detected remove the existing RH transmission fluid
cooler mounting bracket and install a new bracket
1. NOTE: It is NOT necessary to evacuate the A/C system or to drain any of the transmission fluid
in the following Service Procedure steps
Remove the RH and LH transmission fluid cooler mounting bracket bolts

2. NOTE: When using a wood spacer use NO larger than a 1 X 3, piece of wood for radiator
protection Using a larger piece of wood may damage the
radiator and/or the cooler.
Place a wood spacer no larger than 1 X 3 between the cooler RH mounting bracket and the
radiator at the bracket location.
3. NOTE: It is recommended to use a die grinder equipped with a small cutting wheel. Do not use a
body reciprocating saw or a Sawzall(R) to remove
the bracket. Using this type of cutting tool may cause damage to the radiator and/or the cooler.
NOTE:
Place a protective cover overthe front bumper cover to prevent any damage when removing the RH
mounting bracket.
Using a suitable tool, cut the existing RH mounting bracket off of the transmission fluid cooler tube
and smooth any sharp edges using a Scotch-Brite(TM) pad or equivalent. See Figure 5.
4. Install the new mounting bracket. See Figure 6.
^ Install the new mounting bracket onto the A/C line upper block with the longer piece of the
bracket flush with the radiator support.
^ Tighten the clamping bolt to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
^ Using the same RH mounting location install and tighten the iso-mount bolt to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
^ Reinstall and tighten the LH transmission fluid cooler mounting bracket bolt to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
ESCAPE
5. Install the radiator grille. See Figure 3.
^ Attach the three lower grille retainers to the front bumper cover by pushing the grille into the
bumper cover. Make sure that all three grille
retainers make an audible click when attaching to the bumper cover.
^ Hand-Tighten the two lower grille speed nuts until the speed nuts are snug.
^ Hand-tighten the two lower inside grille bolts until the bolts are snug.
^ Tighten the two upper grille bolts to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
MARINER
6. Install the front bumper cover. For additional information refer to the WSM Section 501-19.
SERVICE PROCEDURE 2 - GROMMET NOT PRESENT AND TRANSMISSION
FLUID COOLER LEAKING
ESCAPE AND MARINER
1. NOTE: On Escape it will be necessary to remove the remaining front bumper cover for the
transmission fluid cooler replacement.
If during the inspection there WAS a fluid leak replace the transmission fluid cooler. For additional
information refer to the WSM Section 307-02A
ESCAPE
2. Install the radiator grille onto the bumper cover. See Figure 3.
bumper cover Make sure that all three grille retainers make an audible click when attaching to the
bumper cover
^ Hand-tighten the two lower grille speed nuts until the speed nuts are snug
^ Hand-tighten the two lower inside grille bolts until the bolts are snug
MARINER
4. Install the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to the WSM, Section 501-19.
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-9-4 > May > 09 > A/T - CD4E Transmission
Cooler Fluid Leak
Transmission Cooler: Customer Interest A/T - CD4E Transmission Cooler Fluid Leak
TSB 09-9-4
05/18/09
CD4E TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER (EXCLUDES

HYBRIDS)-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/9/2008
FORD: 2008 Escape
This article supersedes TSB 08-16-12 to change the production fix date.
ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excluding Hybrids) built on or before 5/9/2008
and equipped with a CD4E transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the transmission cooler.

SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace the transmission / A/C cooler with a new updated part following Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 412-01.
Parts Block
090904A 2008 Escape/Mariner 1.1 Hrs.
CD4E Transmission: Replace The Transmission Fluid Cooler, Includes Time To Remove And
Install Bumper Cover, Evacuate And Charge Air Conditioning System, Top Off Transmission Fluid
(Do Not Use With 19700A, 19700A7)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19712 07
Disclaimer
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09B10S2
> Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement

> Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3429
OASIS ACTIVATED?
NOTE:
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
SOLD VEHICLES
RELATED DAMAGE
OWNER REFUNDS
RENTAL VEHICLES
Support Center.
program.

LABOR ALLOWANCES
NEW!

DEALER PRICE
Procedures."
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
OVERVIEW
INSPECTION
Figure 2.
ESCAPE
MARINER
ESCAPE AND MARINER

NOT LEAKING
ESCAPE AND MARINER

NOTE:
mounting bracket.
ESCAPE
MARINER
ESCAPE AND MARINER
ESCAPE
bumper cover
MARINER
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09-25-4 >
Dec > 09 > A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure
Transmission Cooler: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission
Failure
TSB 09-25-4
12/28/09
CD4E TRANSMISSION FAILURE - REPLACE OR INSTALL TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER

COLD WEATHER BYPASS KIT
This article supersedes TSB 4-14-1 to update the model year coverage, Part List and Service
Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a CD4E transmission may
experience a transmission failure due to inadequate lube flow during warm up in cold weather.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Follow the Workshop Manual, Section 307-01 service procedure to repair the transmission. When
overhauling or replacing a CD4E transmission, always install a new cold weather transmission fluid
bypass kit, even if not previously equipped. Do not flush or back flush existing transmission cooler
bypass valve system or cooler tube system. Follow instruction sheets included in the new Cold
Weather Transmission Fluid Cooler Bypass Kit.
MT092504 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7K177 55
Disclaimer
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09-9-4 >
May > 09 > A/T - CD4E Transmission Cooler Fluid Leak
Transmission Cooler: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - CD4E Transmission Cooler Fluid Leak
TSB 09-9-4
05/18/09

FORD: 2008 Escape

SERVICE PROCEDURE
Section 412-01.
Parts Block
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19712 07
Disclaimer
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09-25-4 > Dec
> 09 > A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure
Transmission Cooler: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission
Failure
TSB 09-25-4
12/28/09
CD4E TRANSMISSION FAILURE - REPLACE OR INSTALL TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER

COLD WEATHER BYPASS KIT
This article supersedes TSB 4-14-1 to update the model year coverage, Part List and Service
Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a CD4E transmission may
experience a transmission failure due to inadequate lube flow during warm up in cold weather.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Follow the Workshop Manual, Section 307-01 service procedure to repair the transmission. When
overhauling or replacing a CD4E transmission, always install a new cold weather transmission fluid
bypass kit, even if not previously equipped. Do not flush or back flush existing transmission cooler
bypass valve system or cooler tube system. Follow instruction sheets included in the new Cold
Weather Transmission Fluid Cooler Bypass Kit.
MT092504 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7K177 55
Disclaimer
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09-9-4 > May
> 09 > A/T - CD4E Transmission Cooler Fluid Leak
Transmission Cooler: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - CD4E Transmission Cooler Fluid Leak
TSB 09-9-4
05/18/09

FORD: 2008 Escape

SERVICE PROCEDURE
Section 412-01.
Parts Block
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19712 07
Disclaimer
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09B10S2 >
Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement

Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3460
OASIS ACTIVATED?
NOTE:
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
SOLD VEHICLES
RELATED DAMAGE
OWNER REFUNDS
RENTAL VEHICLES
Support Center.
program.

LABOR ALLOWANCES
NEW!

DEALER PRICE
Procedures."
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
OVERVIEW
INSPECTION
Figure 2.
ESCAPE
MARINER
ESCAPE AND MARINER

NOT LEAKING
ESCAPE AND MARINER

NOTE:
mounting bracket.
ESCAPE
MARINER
ESCAPE AND MARINER
ESCAPE
bumper cover
MARINER
Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications
Transmission Cooler: Mechanical Specifications
Torque Specifications (Part 1)

Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 3475
Transmission Cooler: Capacity Specifications
Specifications
Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 3476
Transmission Cooler: Fluid Type Specifications
Specifications
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Transmission Cooler: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Symptom Chart - Transaxle Cooling
Symptom Chart - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Symptom Chart - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)

Symptom Chart - Noise/Vibration And Harshness (NVH) (Part 1)
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures > Page 3479
Transmission Cooler: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Material
CAUTION: Whenever a transaxle has been disassembled to install new parts or because the valve
body sticks from foreign material, the torque converter and transmission fluid cooler must be
cleaned by using a suitable cleaner. Under no circumstances should an attempt be made to clean
converters by hand agitation with solvent.
When internal wear or damage has occurred in the transaxle, metal particles, clutch plate material
or band material can be carried into the torque converter and transmission fluid cooler. These
contaminants are a major cause of recurring transaxle concerns and must be removed from the
system before the transaxle is returned for repair.
Transmission Fluid Cooler Flow Test
NOTE: The transaxle selector lever linkage adjustment, fluid level and line pressure must be within
specification before carrying out this test. Refer to transaxle selector lever linkage adjustment
procedure. For transmission fluid level checking procedures, refer to Preliminary Inspection. For
transaxle line pressure testing, refer to Line Pressure Test. See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Initial
Inspection/Preliminary Inspection See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Line Pressure Test
1. Check the transmission fluid level and fill as necessary. 2. Remove the transmission fluid level
indicator from fluid filler tube and install a funnel in the fluid filler tube. 3. With the vehicle in
NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. Inspect the
transmission fluid cooler lines for
damage. Install new transmission fluid cooler lines as needed.
4. Disconnect cooler return line (rear line) by separating the tubing from the cooler line rubber
hose. 5. Plug the cooler line to avoid transmission fluid loss. 6. Connect one end of a hose to the
cooler return line hose and route the other end of the hose up to a point where it can be inserted
into the funnel at
the fluid filler tube.
7. Start the engine and run at idle with transaxle in NEUTRAL range until the automatic
transmission fluid is warm. Temperature is important to the
flow rate measurement. ^
Option 1: Once fluid flow no longer has air bubbles in it, remove the rubber hose from the funnel
and insert it into liter container. After 15 seconds, install the hose into the funnel and measure the
amount of automatic transmission fluid in the container. The rate of flow should be approximately
0.83-1.0L (28-34 oz) in 15 seconds.
^ Option 2: Once fluid flow no longer has air bubbles in it, remove the rubber hose from the funnel
and insert it into a liter container. As soon as 1L (1.06 qt) is dispensed into the container, install the
hose into the funnel. One liter of automatic transmission fluid should flow through the cooling
system in approximately 15-17 seconds.
8. Once adequate flow is determined, shut off the engine, remove the extension hose and
reassemble the cooler line with the constant tension clamp. 9. If flow is not adequate, stop the
engine. Disconnect the hose from the cooler return line and connect it to the converter-out line. If
flow is now
liberal, carry out backflushing and cleaning procedure. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler
Backflushing and Cleaning. If flow is still not liberal, repair the pump or converter.
10. Check the transmission fluid level and adjust as required.
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Replacement When fluid leakage is found at the transmission fluid
cooler tubes or installation of new cooler tubes is necessary, refer to Transmission Cooler.
Transmission Cooler: Procedures

inlet tube.
Transmission Cooler: Removal and Replacement

Cooler Bypass Valve
Cooler Bypass Valve
Material
Removal
Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the retainer, the 5 bolts and the LH splash shield.
3. Disconnect and remove the rear cooler tube fitting from the transaxle case.
4. Disconnect and remove the fluid cooler tube bracket and bolt from the transaxle case.
6. NOTE: Do not remove the steel tube from the converter housing.
Disconnect the front transmission fluid cooler hose from the transaxle case.
7. Disconnect the transmission fluid cooler hoses from the transmission fluid combo cooler and
discard the transmission fluid cooler tubes.
8. Remove the 2 bolts from the lower LH side of the main control cover.
Installation
CAUTION: The transmission fluid cooler bypass valve (CBV) is flow directional. The CBV must be
installed with the end cap facing up. If not installed correctly, internal damage to the transaxle will
result.
NOTE: The transmission fluid cooler bypass valve (CBV) cannot be successfully cleaned by back
flushing, flushing or disassembly. For vehicles that are equipped with this cold weather bypass
valve, a new valve should be installed whenever the transaxle is being overhauled.
1. Install the 2 studs to the lower LH side of the main control cover.
2. Position the cooler bypass valve (CBV) onto the studs and loosely install the 2 nuts.
3. Install the transmission fluid cooler tube into the case fitting near the pump.
4. Tighten the 2 CBV retaining nuts.
5. Install the fluid cooler tube bracket onto the pump and install the bolt.
6. Install the transmission fluid cooler hose onto the converter housing tube. Pull the red clip off the
constant tension clamp to activate the clamp. 7. Install the fluid cooler hose on the CBV and install
the clamp. 8. Install the transmission fluid cooler hose onto the combo fluid cooler lower fitting. Pull
the red clip off the constant tension clamp to activate the
clamp.
9. Install the transmission fluid cooler hose onto the upper fitting of the CBV. Install the other end of
the hose to the upper combo cooler tube. Pull
the red clip off the constant tension clamps to activate the clamp.
10. Start the vehicle and check the transmission fluid level.
^ Fill the transaxle with clean automatic transmission fluid.
1. NOTE: The transmission fluid cooler is part of the A/C condenser assembly and cannot be
serviced separately.
If installation of a new fluid cooler is required, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode
Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch,
A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
overdrive.
A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3493

A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3494

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - LH
Transaxle Support Insulator - LH
Special Tool(s)
1. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
2. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.

Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 3499
3. Remove the air cleaner as an assembly.
6. Remove the upper transaxle mount through bolt.

7. Remove the 4 upper transaxle mount bolts and remove the mount.

Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Front
Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Front
Removal
Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield.

4. Remove the 4 bolts and the cross brace.
5. Remove the bolt for the mount and the 2 bolts for the brace.
6. Remove the rear bolt and remove the brace.

7. Remove the 2 bolts from the mount and remove the mount.
Installation
1. Install a new mount onto the cross brace and install the bolts.
2. Position the cross brace in place and install the nut.
3. Install the 2 bolts for the cross brace.
4. Install the through bolt for the mount.
5. Install the cross brace and the 4 bolts.

6. Install the LH splash shield and the 7 retainers.
7. Install the LH splash shield.

Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Rear, DOHC
Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Rear, 3.0L DOHC
Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Rear, 3.0L DOHC
Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
3. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.

4. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
5. Remove the mount through bolt.
6. Remove the retaining bolt and the 2 nuts for the mount and remove the mount.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
View 151-10
View 151-11
C167
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Removal
range (TR) sensor.
Installation

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Pressure Test
Port, A/T > Component Information > Locations
Transmission Pressure Test Port: Locations
Air Pressure Test Port Locations

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
View 151-10
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3522
View 151-11
View 151-10
View 151-11
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
C193
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3527
C143
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Material

Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3530

Material


Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Valve Body: Diagrams
Transaxle Case
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement
Valve Body: Removal and Replacement
Main Control Valve Body
Material
Removal
All vehicles
maintenance/Service and Repair.
3.0L engine 2. Drain the engine coolant. For additional information, refer to Cooling System.
All vehicles 3. Remove the battery and tray. 4. Disconnect the wiring harness from the battery tray
bracket.
5. Remove the battery tray bracket.
6. Disconnect the transaxle wiring harness electrical connector and the transmission range (TR)
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 3539
7. Disconnect the selector lever cable.
8. Remove the selector lever cable and bracket and position it aside.
9. Remove the vent tube hose from the main control cover.
3.0L engine 10. Remove the lower radiator hose and position aside.
11. Remove the wire harness retainer from the front engine mount.
All vehicles 12. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket bolt.
13. Remove the main control cover bolts, studs and the cover.
14. NOTE: Do not discard the gasket. It is a reusable type. Inspect the gasket for damage. Install a
new gasket as necessary.
Remove the main control cover gasket.

15. Remove the main control valve body bolts.
16. NOTE: Do not damage the manual valve.
Lift the main control valve body while disconnecting the manual valve link.
17. Depress the retaining tabs and push the solenoid valve body electrical connector down through
the transaxle case.
18. Make sure the manual valve does not fall out of the main control valve body while removing
from the vehicle.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Install the manual control lever in the main control valve body.
2. NOTE: Inspect the solenoid valve body harness connector O-ring seal for damage. If damaged,
install a new O-ring seal, before installing the
connector into the case.
Depress the retaining tabs and push the solenoid valve body electrical connector up through the
transaxle case.
3. Position the main control valve body in place while connecting the manual valve link.
4. Install the main control valve body assembly. Tighten the bolts in the sequence indicated.
5. NOTE: The main control cover gasket is a reusable type. Inspect the gasket for damage. Install
a new gasket as necessary.
Install the main control cover gasket.
6. NOTE: Install the cooler bypass valve studs in locations 3 and 11.
Install the main control cover. Tighten the bolts and studs in the indicated sequence. ^

7. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt.
3.0L engine 8. Install the wire harness retainer to the front engine mount. 9. Install the lower
radiator hose.
All vehicles
10. Install the selector lever cable and bracket.
11. Connect the selector lever cable end.
12. Connect the vent hose to the main control cover.
13. Connect the transaxle wiring harness electrical connector and the transmission range (TR)
14. Install the battery tray bracket.
15. Connect the wiring harness to the battery tray bracket.
16. Install the battery tray. 17. Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid.
3.0L engine 18. Fill the engine coolant. For additional information, refer to Cooling System.
All vehicles 19. Start the engine and run through all the gears and check transmission fluid level.
Valve Body: Overhaul
Main Control Valve Body
Special Tool(s)
Disassembly
1. Remove the manual valve.

2. CAUTION: Do not attempt to remove the solenoid valve body wiring cover.
Remove the 2 solenoid valve body bolts and the solenoid valve body.
3. Remove and discard the solenoid valve body gasket.
4. Remove the 3 pressure tap plate bolts and the pressure tap plate.
5. Remove and discard the pressure plate tap gasket.
6. Remove the control valve body to transfer plate bolts, and remove the manual valve detent
spring assembly.
7. Remove the accumulator body-to-transfer plate bolts.
8. Separate the accumulator body from the main control valve body.
1 Remove the accumulator body assembly.

2 Remove and discard the accumulator body separator gasket.
3 Remove the accumulator body separator plate.
4 Remove and discard the accumulator body separator gasket.
5 Remove the main control valve body.
9. Separate the transfer plate from the main control valve body.
1 Remove the main control valve body.
2 Remove and discard the valve body separator plate gasket.
3 Remove the valve body separator plate.
4 Remove and discard the valve body separator plate gasket.
5 Remove the transfer plate.
10. Remove the intermediate and overdrive accumulator valve plug retaining plate from the
accumulator body assembly.
11. Remove the intermediate and overdrive accumulator valve plug.
12. Remove and discard the intermediate and overdrive accumulator plug seal.
13. CAUTION: Remove, note location and clean one valve at a time to avoid incorrect installation.
As necessary, disassemble the parts of the accumulator body and main control valve body
assemblies. ^
Lubricate and reassemble the parts as soon as possible to avoid accidental damage or incorrect
installation.
Assembly
1. WARNING: When using compressed air, never let air pressure exceed 172 kPa (25 psi) and
always wear safety glasses. Compressed air
may cause foreign material or parts to become airborne. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in serious personal injury.
CAUTION: If the valve sticks in its bore and cannot be freed, install a new main control valve body.
NOTE: Clean the main control valve body and accumulator body assembly of the main control in
cleaning solvent. Blow dry with moisture-free regulated compressed air. The solenoid valve body
should not be cleaned in cleaning solvent. It may be blown clean with compressed air or wiped
clean with a lint-free cloth.
Install a new intermediate and overdrive accumulator plug seal and coat with petroleum jelly.
2. CAUTION: Do not install the intermediate and overdrive accumulator valve plug and seal too far
into the bore and damage the seal.
Only push the intermediate and overdrive accumulator valve plug until it is flush with the
accumulator body assembly.
Install the intermediate and overdrive accumulator valve plug.
3. Install the intermediate and overdrive accumulator valve plug retaining plate.
4. Install the special tool.

5. Using the special tool, install the valve body separator plate gaskets and valve body separator
plate.
1 Install a new valve body separator plate gasket.
2 Install the valve body separator plate.
3 Install a new valve body separator plate gasket.
6. Using the special tool, install the main control valve body.
7. Using the special tool, install the accumulator body separator plate and gaskets.
1 Install a new accumulator body separator plate gasket.
2 Install the accumulator body separator plate.
3 Install a new accumulator body separator plate gasket.

8. Using the special tool, install the accumulator body assembly.
9. Starting with the bolts in the middle and working outward, install the accumulator body transfer
plate.
10. Starting with the bolts in the middle and working outward, install the main control valve body to
transfer plate and install the detent spring.
11. Install a new pressure tap plate gasket.
12. Install the pressure tap plate and bolts.
13. NOTE: Match the solenoid valve body gasket to passages.
Install the solenoid valve body. 1
Install the solenoid valve body gasket.
2 Install the solenoid valve body.
3 Install the 2 solenoid valve body bolts. ^
14. Install the manual valve.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Clutch Disc Check
Clutch Disc: Testing and Inspection Clutch Disc Check
Clutch Disc Check
Special Tool(s)
1. Check the clutch disc lining surface for hardening or the presence of oil. 2. Check for a worn
clutch disc lining. Measure the minimum allowable depth to the rivet heads with a slide caliper.
3. Check for loose clutch disc lining rivets. 4. Using the special tool, check the maximum allowable
runout of the clutch disc.
Testing and Inspection > Clutch Disc Check > Page 3564
5. Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface. 6. Check for
wear or rust on the splines. If necessary, clean them with an emery cloth. 7. Check the clutch disc
for cracking, scoring, discoloration or other surface marks. Install a new clutch disc if necessary.
Testing and Inspection > Clutch Disc Check > Page 3565
Clutch Disc: Testing and Inspection Clutch Pressure Plate Check
Clutch Pressure Plate Check
1. Check the clutch pressure plate surface for scoring, cracks or discoloration. Minor scratches or
discoloration should be removed with a fine emery
cloth.
2. Measure the flatness of the clutch pressure plate surface with a straightedge and a feeler gauge.
3. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for discoloration, scoring and bent or broken segments. 4.
Measure the wear of the diaphragm spring fingers.
Clutch Disc: Service and Repair
Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the transaxle. 2. Using the special tool, lock the flywheel to the engine.
3. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for discoloration, scoring, bent or broken segments and
spring ends that are higher or lower than the rest.
4. WARNING: The clutch disc and clutch pressure plate are heavy and may fall if not held when the
bolts are removed. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
CAUTION: Loosen the bolts evenly to prevent pressure plate damage.

Remove the bolts, clutch pressure plate and clutch disc.
5. CAUTION: Do not use cleaners with a petroleum base and do not immerse the clutch pressure
plate in solvent.
Using a suitable commercial alcohol based solvent, clean the clutch pressure plate.
6. Inspect the clutch pressure plate surface for burn marks, scores, flatness or ridges.
7. CAUTION: If the clutch disc is saturated with oil, inspect the rear engine crankshaft seal for
leakage. If leakage is found, install a new
seal prior to clutch disc installation.
NOTE: Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface.
NOTE: Install a new clutch disc if any of the following conditions are present.
Inspect the clutch disc for: ^
oil or grease saturation
^ worn or loose facings
^ warpage or loose rivets at the hub
^ wear or rust on the splines
8. Check the clutch disc runout and wear.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, position the clutch disc on the flywheel.
2. Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel and install the clutch pressure plate bolts.
^ Tighten to 29 Nm (21 lb-ft) in sequence.
3. Install the transaxle.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid >
Clutch Fluid: Specifications
HYDRAULIC CLUTCH FLUID
Ford P/N ..............................................................................................................................................

...................................................................... PM-1 Ford Specification
......................................................................................................................................................
ESA-M6C25-A or WSS-M6C62-A
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair
Clutch Master Cylinder
Material
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call. For
additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure
painted or plastic surface, wash it immediately with cold water.
1. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder hose from the brake master cylinder.
^ Plug the brake master cylinder.
^ Plug the clutch master cylinder hose.
2. Remove the 2 clutch master cylinder nuts.
3. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder push rod. 4. Disconnect the clutch hydraulic fluid tube
fitting.
^ Plug the clutch hydraulic fluid tube.
5. Remove the clutch master cylinder. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the air from the system.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder >
Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair
Clutch Slave Cylinder
Material
1. Remove the transaxle. 2. Disconnect the clutch slave cylinder-to-clutch hydraulic fluid tube
adapter. 3. Remove the 3 clutch slave cylinder bolts and the clutch slave cylinder.
^ Bleed the air from the system.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch
> Component Information > Service and Repair
Hydraulic Hose: Service and Repair
Clutch Hydraulic Fluid Tubes
Material
1. Remove the engine air cleaner. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction. 2. Disconnect the clutch hydraulic fluid tube fitting from the clutch master cylinder.
^ Plug the clutch master cylinder.
^ Plug the clutch hydraulic fluid tube.
3. Disconnect the clutch hydraulic fluid tube fitting from the clutch slave cylinder-to-clutch hydraulic
fluid tube adapter.
4. Remove the clutch hydraulic fluid tube. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the air from the system. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Clutch Pedal Assembly: Service and Repair

Clutch Pedal
Clutch Pedal
1. Disconnect the master cylinder push rod. 2. Remove the 2 clutch master cylinder nuts.
3. Remove the clutch pedal and bracket assembly nut.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information >
4. Remove the clutch pedal and bracket assembly. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch
View 151-3
Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 3591
View 151-3
Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch
C2072
Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 3594
C2070
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information >
Specifications
Pressure Plate: Specifications
Clutch pressure plate bolts ..................................................................................................................

......................................................... 29 Nm (21 lb-ft)
Pressure Plate: Service and Repair
Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the transaxle. 2. Using the special tool, lock the flywheel to the engine.
3. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for discoloration, scoring, bent or broken segments and
spring ends that are higher or lower than the rest.
4. WARNING: The clutch disc and clutch pressure plate are heavy and may fall if not held when the
bolts are removed. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
CAUTION: Loosen the bolts evenly to prevent pressure plate damage.

Remove the bolts, clutch pressure plate and clutch disc.
5. CAUTION: Do not use cleaners with a petroleum base and do not immerse the clutch pressure
plate in solvent.
Using a suitable commercial alcohol based solvent, clean the clutch pressure plate.
6. Inspect the clutch pressure plate surface for burn marks, scores, flatness or ridges.
7. CAUTION: If the clutch disc is saturated with oil, inspect the rear engine crankshaft seal for
leakage. If leakage is found, install a new
seal prior to clutch disc installation.
NOTE: Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface.
NOTE: Install a new clutch disc if any of the following conditions are present.
Inspect the clutch disc for: ^
oil or grease saturation
^ worn or loose facings
^ warpage or loose rivets at the hub
^ wear or rust on the splines
8. Check the clutch disc runout and wear.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, position the clutch disc on the flywheel.
2. Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel and install the clutch pressure plate bolts.
^ Tighten to 29 Nm (21 lb-ft) in sequence.
3. Install the transaxle.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Interlock: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
been simplified.
Current Flow (1)
Diagrams.
Splices (3)
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3607
Component Names (5)

the wire color.
"Symbols".
Power Distribution
Ground Distribution
C904
on the vehicle.
WARNINGS

the procedure.
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Symbols (Part 2)
Symbols (Part 3)
Symbols (Part 4)
Symbols (Part 5)
Shift Interlock: Diagnostic Aids
terminal.
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
7 = Seal
1 = Proper crimp
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
6 = Male half
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
signal.
4 = Grounding foil
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
NOTE: -
splice.
wire size
harness.
Shift Interlock: Electrical Diagrams
37-1
Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3622
Shift Interlock: Service and Repair
Brake Shift Interlock Override
NOTE: If it is necessary to use the override procedure to move the selector lever out of the PARK
position, it is possible that a fuse has blown and the brake lights are not operational. Before driving
the vehicle, verify that the brake lights are working.
This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock feature that prevents the selector lever from
being moved out of PARK when the ignition is in the ON position unless the brake pedal is
depressed.
If the selector lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position when the ignition is in the ON
position and the brake pedal is depressed:
1. Apply the parking brake and remove the ignition key.
2. NOTE: Relief located at the front of the access panel.
Remove the access panel.
3. Using an suitable tool, depress the brake shift interlock override mechanism on the selector
lever, apply the brake, depress the button on the
selector lever and move the selector lever into NEUTRAL.
4. Start the vehicle. 5. To install, reverse the procedure.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter
CVT > Component Information > Diagrams
C2096
CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3626
Shifter CVT: Service and Repair

Selector Lever

Removal
All vehicles
1. Place the selector lever in the (D) position.
2. Gently pry up to remove the upper selector lever trim ring.

5. Remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever assembly.
1 Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the selector lever.
6. Disconnect the wiring harness retainers from the selector lever.
7. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the selector lever.
1 Disconnect the selector lever electrical connector.

2 Remove the vehicle harness connector from the selector lever.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 8. Pull the all wheel drive (AWD) module straight back and remove
it from the back of the selector lever.
All vehicles 9. Remove the 2 screws from the center console.

10. Remove the 4 bolts and remove the selector lever assembly.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Install the selector lever assembly and the 4 bolts.

2. Install the 2 center console screws.
AWD vehicles 3. Install the AWD module on to the back of the selector lever.
All vehicles 4. Connect the electrical connectors to the selector lever.
1 Install the vehicle harness connector on the selector lever.
2 Connect the selector lever electrical connector.
5. Connect the wiring harness retainers to the selector lever.
6. Install the selector lever cable on the selector lever assembly.
1 Install the selector lever cable on the bracket.
2 Connect the selector lever cable end.

7. Install the top finish panel.
8. Install the center console compartment tray.
9. Install the upper selector lever trim ring.

10. Adjust the shift cable. For additional information, refer to Selector Lever Cable Adjustment.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component
Differential Cover: Service and Repair
Differential Housing Cover
Material
Removal
Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the 10 bolts and the rear differential cover.
^ Drain the differential fluid from the housing.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the machined surfaces on the rear axle housing and the differential housing
cover are clean and free of oil before installing the
new silicone sealant. The inside of the rear axle must be covered when cleaning the machined
surface to prevent contamination.
Clean the gasket mating surfaces of the differential housing and the differential housing cover.
2. NOTE: The differential housing cover must be installed within 15 minutes of application of the
silicone, or new sealant must be applied. If
possible, allow one hour before filling with lubricant to make sure the silicone sealant has correctly
cured.
Apply a new continuous bead of clear silicone rubber as shown in the illustration.
3. Install the differential housing cover and the 10 bolts.
4. Fill the rear axle with 1.15L (2.43 pt) of rear axle lubricant, 3-5 mm (0.118-0.196 in) below the
bottom of the filler hole and install the filler plug.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component
Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications
Differential Oil Capacity
Rear Axle .............................................................................................................................................

................................................... 2.4 Pints ( 1.15 L )
Note: Fill to 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch ( 6 mm to 14 mm ) below of fill hole.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component
Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications
Differential Fluid Type
REAR AXLE
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant Ford P/N

..................................................................................................................................................
XY-80W90-QL(US) / CXY-80W90-1L (Canada) Ford Specification ....................................................
.................................................................................................................................. WSP-M2C197-A
NOTE: Vehicles exposed for prolonged periods to temperatures less than 40 Celsius (-40
Fahrenheit) should change out the rear axle fluid to Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 High Performance
Rear Axle Lubricant, Ford part number XY-75W140-QL meeting Ford specification
WSL-M2C192-A.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Output Shaft, Differential > Component
Output Shaft: Service and Repair
Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
1. NOTE: There is no bearing for the stud shaft. There is a seal only.
Remove the halfshaft assembly.
2. Use the special tool to remove the stub shaft seal.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Output Shaft, Differential > Component
Installation
1. NOTE: Lubricate the new stub shaft seal with grease.

Using the special tools, install the stub shaft seal.
2. NOTE: Inspect the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint seal journal for rust or nicks/scratches
prior to installing the halfshaft. If necessary, polish
the seal journal with fine crocus cloth.
Install the halfshaft assembly.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component
Pinion Flange: Service and Repair
Drive Pinion Seal
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Index-mark the driveshaft flange and the pinion flange.
3. NOTE: Support the driveshaft.
Disconnect the rear driveshaft universal joint flange. ^
Remove and discard the 4 bolts.
^ Position aside the driveshaft and flange.

4. Using the special tool, hold the pinion flange while removing the nut.
^ Remove and discard the pinion flange nut.
5. Index-mark the location of the pinion to the flange.
6. Using the special tool, remove the pinion flange.

7. Using the special tool, remove the pinion seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that the mating surface is clean before installing the new seal.
Using the special tool, install the pinion seal.
2. NOTE: Lubricate the pinion flange with Premium Long-Life Grease.
Line up the index marks and position the pinion flange.

3. Using the special tool, install a new pinion nut.
4. Line up the index marks and position the rear driveshaft and universal joint flange.
^ Install the 4 new bolts.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System
Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal
Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
1. NOTE: There is no bearing for the stud shaft. There is a seal only.
Remove the halfshaft assembly.
2. Use the special tool to remove the stub shaft seal.

Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal > Page 3658
Installation
1. NOTE: Lubricate the new stub shaft seal with grease.

Using the special tools, install the stub shaft seal.
2. NOTE: Inspect the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint seal journal for rust or nicks/scratches
prior to installing the halfshaft. If necessary, polish
the seal journal with fine crocus cloth.
Install the halfshaft assembly.

Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Drive Pinion Seal
Drive Pinion Seal
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Index-mark the driveshaft flange and the pinion flange.
3. NOTE: Support the driveshaft.
Disconnect the rear driveshaft universal joint flange. ^
Remove and discard the 4 bolts.

^ Position aside the driveshaft and flange.
4. Using the special tool, hold the pinion flange while removing the nut.
^ Remove and discard the pinion flange nut.
5. Index-mark the location of the pinion to the flange.
6. Using the special tool, remove the pinion flange.

7. Using the special tool, remove the pinion seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that the mating surface is clean before installing the new seal.
Using the special tool, install the pinion seal.
2. NOTE: Lubricate the pinion flange with Premium Long-Life Grease.
Line up the index marks and position the pinion flange.

3. Using the special tool, install a new pinion nut.
4. Line up the index marks and position the rear driveshaft and universal joint flange.
^ Install the 4 new bolts.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Axle Shaft Assembly: Specifications

Axle Shaft Assembly: Description and Operation
Rear Drive Halfshafts
The rear drive halfshafts are driven by the differential side gears in the rear drive axle. The splined
inner constant velocity (CV) joint housing transfers the torque to the connecting shaft through the
flexible joint consisting of caged balls or 3 roller trunnion. This allows the connecting shaft to
change both length and angle while the joint housing remains fixed. The CV joints are lubricated
with a special high temperature grease that is contained by flexible rubber boots sealed to the joint
housing and connecting shafts by clamps. The outer CV joint receives the rotational force from the
connecting shaft and in turn, drives the rear wheel hub. ^
The inner and outer CV joints connect to a splined shaft. A circlip stopper holds the cross groove
inner race assembly (inner CV joint) together.
^ The RH and LH halfshafts are the same length.
^ An axle circlip retains the splined inner CV joint to the differential side gear.
^ A rear axle wheel hub nut secures the side shaft assembly (interconnecting shaft and outer CV
joint) to the rear hub.
^ The rear halfshafts are serviced as assemblies only.

Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Front Drive Halfshafts
Halfshafts
Halfshaft
Special Tool(s)
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 3670
Front Drive Halfshaft
Removal
Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the front tire and wheel. 3. Remove and discard the
front wheel hub nut. 4. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor bolt and position the sensor aside. 5.
Remove the lower arm pinch bolt and nut from the lower arm. 6. Separate the lower arm from the
front wheel knuckle. 7. Using the special tool, separate the front drive halfshaft from the front wheel
hub.
8. Using the special tools, remove the front drive halfshaft from the differential.
Installation
1. Position the special tool over the halfshaft oil seal.
2. NOTE: When seated correctly, the front drive halfshaft bearing retainer circlip can be felt as it
snaps into the differential side gear groove.
Position the front drive halfshaft so the splines line up with the differential side gear splines. Push
the front drive halfshaft into the differential side gear.
3. Using the special tool, install the front drive halfshaft into the front wheel hub.
4. Position the lower arm into the front wheel knuckle. 5. Install the lower arm pinch bolt and nut.
6. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor and bolt.
7. CAUTION: Do not tighten the front wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must
be tightened to specification before the
vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded
with the weight of the vehicle applied.
NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
Install a new front wheel hub nut. ^
8. Install the front tire and wheel. 9. Check and fill the transaxle fluid as necessary.
Intermediate Shaft
Intermediate Shaft
Special Tool(s)
Intermediate Shaft
1. NOTE: If removing the intermediate shaft in order to repair a separate component, it should only
be removed as an assembly with the RH front
drive halfshaft.
Remove the RH front drive halfshaft.
2. Remove the 2 intermediate shaft bearing retainer nuts.
3. Remove the intermediate shaft.
4. CAUTION: Make sure to use the special tool when installing the intermediate shaft. Failure to
use the special tool may result in
transmission oil leaks.
Apply a thin coat of grease to the splines of the intermediate shaft.
5. Check and fill the transaxle fluid as necessary.

Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Rear Drive Halfshafts
Halfshaft
Special Tool(s)
Halfshaft
Removal
CAUTION: Never pick up or hold the halfshaft by only the inner or outer constant velocity (CV)
joint. Damage to the CV joint will occur.
CAUTION: Never use a hammer to remove or install the halfshafts. Damage to the halfshaft may
occur.
CAUTION: Never use the halfshaft assembly as a lever to position other components. Damage to
the halfshaft or constant velocity (CV) joints may occur.
CAUTION: Do not allow the boots to contact sharp edges or hot exhaust components. Damage to
the halfshaft boots will occur.
CAUTION: Do not drop assembled halfshafts. The impact may cut the boots from the inside without
evidence of external damage.
1. Remove the rear coil spring. 2. Remove and discard the rear wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the
anti-lock brake sensor harness-to-body retainer bolt.
4. NOTE: Support the wheel knuckle.
Remove the nut and separate the lower ball joint.
5. CAUTION: Do not damage the oil seal when removing the axle halfshaft from the differential.
NOTE: Support the halfshaft inner joint.
Using the special tool, remove the halfshaft from the differential.
6. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the rear axle hub assembly.
^ Remove the halfshaft.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install the outer halfshaft end into the hub assembly.
2. CAUTION: Make sure that the oil seal protector is correctly aligned with the differential oil seal
during installation.
Using the special tool, install the halfshaft into the differential.
3. If the axle is equipped with the oil seal protector, make sure the oil seal lip and seal protector are
correctly aligned.
4. Position the lower ball joint and install the lower ball joint nut.
5. Install the rear coil spring. 6. Install the anti-lock brake sensor harness-to-body bolt.

7. CAUTION: Do not tighten the rear wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must
Install the rear wheel hub nut. ^

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component

Information > Service and Repair > Front

Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 3683
Removal
bearing.
wheel knuckle.
Installation

Wheel Bearing

Removal
Installation
wheel bearing.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut >
Component Information > Specifications > Front

.................................................... 300 Nm (222 lb-ft)

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut >
Component Information > Specifications > Front > Page 3694

..................................................... 290 Nm (214 lb-ft)

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support >
Center Support: Testing and Inspection
Driveshaft Center Bearing With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to
Maintenance/Service and Repair. Rotate the driveshaft by hand. If the bearing shows signs of
roughness or is noisy, install a new driveshaft assembly.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair
Driveshaft
Driveshaft
NOTE: The Escape Hybrid driveshaft is longer than the driveshaft in the Escape/Mariner and is not
interchangeable.
Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the ground strap bolt.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3702
3. CAUTION: Do not reuse the CV joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and washers or
damage to the vehicle may occur.
Remove and discard the 6 front driveshaft-to-transfer case bolts and washers. ^
4. Index-mark the front driveshaft to the center bearing.
5. CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and cap straps for the center U-joint. Install new bolts and cap
straps or damage to the vehicle may
occur.
NOTE: There is a difference in the length of the head of the replacement cap strap bolts from the
production bolts. The longer head pinion bolts can be used in either location.
Remove and discard the 4 universal joint cap strap bolts and 2 cap straps and remove the front
driveshaft. ^
6. Index-mark the pinion and yoke to the driveshaft.
7. NOTE: Do not reuse the bolts for the rear U-joint flange. Install new bolts.
Remove and discard the 4 rear driveshaft-to-pinion flange bolts. ^
8. With the help of an assistant, remove the center bearing support nuts and the driveshaft.
9. NOTE: If a driveshaft is installed and driveshaft vibration is encountered after installation, index
the driveshaft.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications
Flex Plate: Specifications
Flexplate Bolts .....................................................................................................................................

...................................................... 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page
3706
Flex Plate: Diagrams

3707
Flex Plate: Testing and Inspection
Flexplate Inspection
1. Inspect the flexplate for:
1. Any cracks. 2. Worn ring gear teeth. 3. Chipped or cracked ring gear teeth.
3708
Flex Plate: Service and Repair
Flexplate
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the transmission. 3. Remove the
bolts and the flexplate.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Flywheel Runout Check
Flywheel: Testing and Inspection Flywheel Runout Check
Flywheel Runout Check
Special Tool(s)
1. Mount the special tool so that the indicator contact point rides on the straightedge which spans
the clutch disc contact surface. 2. Rotate the flywheel and check the runout. If the runout exceeds
the maximum allowance, install a new flywheel.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Flywheel Runout Check > Page 3713
Flywheel: Testing and Inspection Flywheel Inspection
Flywheel Inspection
1. NOTE: The flywheel cannot be resurfaced, it must be replaced.
Inspect the flywheel for: 1. Any cracks. 2. Worn ring gear teeth. 3. Chipped or cracked ring gear
teeth. 4. Scratches, nicks and discoloration.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and
Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Adjustments

Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 3719
unlocked.
Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component
Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Manual Transmission
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
............................................... 2.4 Quarts (2.3 liters)
Note: Approximate refill. Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the
bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface.
Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Manual Transmission Fluid Type
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
.................. Motorcraft SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil GL-4
Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair
Transaxle Draining and Filling
Material
Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain the fluid.
Manual Transaxle Drain Plug
3. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the drain plug.
Install the drain plug. ^
Fill Level Inspection Plug
4. Remove the fill level inspection plug.

Manual Transaxle Fill Level Inspection Plug
5. Remove the transaxle fill plug.
Manual Transaxle Fill Plug
6. Fill the transmission with gear oil until level with the fill level inspection plug hole.
7. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill plug.
Install the transaxle fill plug. ^
8. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill level inspection plug.
Install the fill level inspection plug. ^

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T >
System Information > Service and Repair
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair
Halfshaft Seal
Special Tool(s)
CAUTION: New halfshaft oil seals should be installed anytime the halfshafts are removed. Failure
to install new halfshafts seals may result
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Page 3735
in transmission oil leak(s).
NOTE: RH intermediate shaft oil seal shown, LH halfshaft oil seal similar.
1. Remove the RH intermediate shaft or LH halfshaft. 2. Using the special tools, remove the RH
intermediate shaft oil seal or the LH halfshaft oil seal.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install the halfshaft oil seal.
2. CAUTION: Make sure to use the seal protector when installing the RH intermediate shaft and the
LH halfshaft. Failure to use the seal
protector may result in transmission oil leaks.
Install the RH intermediate shaft or LH halfshaft.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T >
Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
of the transaxle.
procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component
Shifter M/T: Service and Repair
Gearshift Lever
Gearshift Lever
Removal
1. Remove the gearshift lever knob and boot assembly. 2. Remove the floor console finish panel. 3.
Remove the 2 gearshift cable clips.
4. Carefully disconnect the gearshift cables from the gearshift lever. 5. Remove the 4 gearshift
lever nuts. 6. Remove the gearshift lever.
Installation
1. Position the gearshift lever. 2. Connect the gearshift cables to the gearshift lever.
3. CAUTION: Make sure the clips are set completely within the cable adapter groove and fully
seated.
Install the 2 gearshift cable clips.

4. Install the 4 gearshift lever nuts.
5. Adjust the gearshift cables. 6. Install the floor console finish panel. 7. Install the gearshift lever
knob and boot assembly.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Boot,
M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Shift Boot: Service and Repair
Gearshift Lever Boot
Gearshift Lever Boot
1. NOTE: The gearshift lever boot and gearshift lever knob are one assembly.
Separate the gearshift lever boot from the floor console finish panel.
2. Rotate the gearshift lever knob counterclockwise. Remove the gearshift lever knob and gearshift
lever boot assembly. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift
Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments
Shift Cable: Adjustments
Gearshift Cable Adjustment
1. Separate the shift boot from the floor console finish panel. Rotate the gearshift knob
counterclockwise and remove the knob and boot as an
assembly.
2. Carefully pry the floor console finish panel from the floor console. 3. Disengage the secondary
shift cable lock by sliding it away from the shifter ball stud.
4. NOTE: If the primary shift cable lock is difficult to slide out, disconnect the shift cable from the
ball stud, push the primary lock from the rear,
and reattach the shift cable to the ball stud.
Disengage the primary shift cable lock by sliding it out away from the shift cable.
5. With the shifter and the transmission in NEUTRAL, engage the primary shift cable lock.
6. Engage the secondary shift cable lock by sliding it over the primary shift cable lock.
Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 3752
7. Install the floor console finish panel. 8. Install the gearshift knob and the gearshift lever boot.
Shift Cable: Service and Repair

Gearshift Cables
Gearshift Cables (Part 1)

Gearshift Cables (Part 2)
Removal
1. NOTE: Carefully disconnect the spring clip from the cable end. It can become unfastened from
the cable.
Disconnect the gearshift cables from the transaxle gearshift control assembly. ^
Pull the spring clip out of the groove, lift upward and rotate the clip 90 degrees.
2. NOTE: Carefully pry the gearshift cables from the transaxle bracket.
Disconnect the gearshift cables from the transaxle bracket.
3. Remove the floor console. 4. Remove the restraints control module (RCM). For additional
information, refer to Air Bag Systems. 5. Disconnect the smart junction box (SJB) electrical
connector and the 2 harness electrical connectors.
6. Disconnect the gearshift cables from the gearshift lever assembly. 7. Remove the 2 gearshift
cable grommet nuts. 8. Remove the gearshift cables.
^ Pull the gearshift cables into the vehicle. Using an assistant, carefully lift the LH floor duct, pull
the cables under the duct and remove from the vehicle.
Installation
1. CAUTION: When inserting the gearshift cables through the dash panel, make sure the arrow on
the grommet is pointing down.
Insert the gearshift cables through the dash panel.
2. Connect the selector cable.
3. Connect the shift cable.
4. Install the 2 gearshift cable grommet nuts.
5. CAUTION: Make sure the clips are set completely within the cable adapter groove and fully
seated.
Install the 2 gearshift cable clips.

6. Connect the gearshift cables to the transaxle gearshift control assembly. 7. Connect the SJB
electrical connector and the 2 harness electrical connectors. 8. Adjust the gearshift cables. 9.
Install the floor console.
10. Install the RCM. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - LH

Transaxle Support Insulator - LH
Special Tool(s)
Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the air cleaner. For additional information, refer to
Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 3. Using the special tool, support the engine.
4. Remove the 4 LH transaxle support insulator bolts.
5. Remove the through bolt and the LH transaxle support insulator.
6. Remove the 3 nuts and the LH transaxle support insulator bracket.

Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Front Support Insulator

Transaxle Front Support Insulator
Special Tool(s)
Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Using the special tool, support the engine.
3. Remove the front-to-aft crossmember.
1 Remove the 2 transaxle front support insulator bolts. ^
2 Remove the splash shield screw.
3 Remove the 2 front-to-aft crossmember bolts and the nut. ^
To install, tighten bolts to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
^ To install, tighten nut to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
4 Remove the crossmember.
4. Remove the through bolt and the transaxle front support insulator.
5. If necessary, remove the 3 bolts and the transaxle front support insulator bracket.

Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Rear Support Insulator
Transaxle Rear Support Insulator
Transaxle Rear Support Insulator

Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the transaxle rear support insulator bolt.
3. Remove the 2 transaxle rear support insulator nuts.
4. Remove the transaxle rear support insulator through-bolt and washer.
5. Remove the transaxle rear support insulator. 6. If necessary, remove the 3 bolts and the
transaxle rear support insulator bracket.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor,
M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
of the transaxle.
procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations
View 151-22
Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 3773
C3184
Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 3774
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation
Typical BPP Switch
as follows:
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
overdrive.
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3783

and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3784

and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
View 151-10
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3788
View 151-11
C167
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Removal
range (TR) sensor.
Installation

and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor
View 151-10
Sensor > Page 3797
View 151-11
Sensor > Page 3798
View 151-10
Sensor > Page 3799
View 151-11
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor
C193
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor > Page 3802
C143
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft
Speed (TSS) Sensor
Material

Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3805

Material


and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
of the transaxle.
procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case >
Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case >
Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3817
C4347
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Case, Transfer Case > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent
Case: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent
TSB 09-4-4
03/09/09
parts.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
(13.5 +/- 2.1 N.m).
NOTE
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent >
Page 3826
090404A 2005-2009 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7034 24
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From
PTU Vent
Case: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent
TSB 09-4-4
03/09/09
parts.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE

(13.5 +/- 2.1 N.m).
NOTE
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From
PTU Vent > Page 3832
090404A 2005-2009 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7034 24
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component
View 151-22
C3184
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak
From PTU Vent
Fluid - Transfer Case: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent
TSB 09-4-4
03/09/09
parts.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE

(13.5 +/- 2.1 N.m).
NOTE
> Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak
From PTU Vent > Page 3846
090404A 2005-2009 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7034 24
Disclaimer
> Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain -
Fluid leak From PTU Vent
Fluid - Transfer Case: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent
TSB 09-4-4
03/09/09
parts.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE

(13.5 +/- 2.1 N.m).
NOTE
> Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain -
Fluid leak From PTU Vent > Page 3852
090404A 2005-2009 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7034 24
Disclaimer
> Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications
Transfer Case Capacity
Power Transfer Unit .............................................................................................................................

............................................ 12.0 ounces (0.35 liters)
> Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 3855
Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications
Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
Type...............................................................................................................................................Mot
orcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
Part Number.........................................................................................................................................
..XY-75W140-QL(US) / CXY-75W140-1L (Canada)
Specification.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................WSL-M2C192-A
Type..................................................................................................................................................M
otorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
Part Number.........................................................................................................................................
......XY80W90-QL(US) / CXY-80W190-1L (Canada)
Specification.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................WSP-M2C197-A
NOTE: The PTU on an AUTOMATIC transaxle uses Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic lubricant.
The PTU on a MANUAL transaxle uses Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 lubricant.
> Service and Repair > Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Draining and Filling - Automatic Transaxle
Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Draining and Filling -
Automatic Transaxle
Material
CAUTION: New power transfer unit (PTU) lubricant must be added any time the PTU has been
submerged in water.
suspected or a repair is necessary.
Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain the fluid. 3. Apply silicone
sealant to the drain plug threads and install the drain plug.
ground.
Remove the fill plug and fill the PTU with specified lubricant.
5. Apply silicone sealant to the fill plug and install the plug.

> Service and Repair > Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Draining and Filling - Automatic Transaxle > Page 3858
Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Draining and Filling - Manual
Transaxle
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Draining and Filling - Manual Transaxle
Material
CAUTION: New power transfer unit (PTU) lubricant must be installed any time the PTU has been
submerged in water.
suspected.
ground.
Remove the fill plug and fill the PTU with rear axle lubricant.
3. Install the fill plug and gasket.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Output Yoke/Flange, Transfer Case >
Output Yoke/Flange: Service and Repair
Output Flange
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: This procedure applies to vehicles equipped with automatic transaxles.
1. Remove the driveshaft.
2. CAUTION: Rotational torque of the power transfer unit (PTU) rear output shaft flange must be
measured and recorded using a Nm
(lb-in) torque wrench for correct pinion bearing preload when reassembled.
Using the special tool to hold the flange, remove the pinion nut.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Output Yoke/Flange, Transfer Case >
3. NOTE: Index-mark the power transfer unit (PTU) rear output shaft flange relative to the pinion
spline.
Using the special tool, remove the PTU rear output shaft flange.
Installation
1. Install the PTU rear output shaft flange to engage the spline as previously marked. Install the
PTU rear output shaft flange.
2. CAUTION: Do not overtighten the pinion nut. Refer to the rotational torque previously recorded
with a Nm (in-lb) torque wrench.
Overtightening the pinion nut will damage the collapsible spacer.
CAUTION: If the rotational torque is less than specification, tighten the drive pinion nut in small
increments until it is within specification. Do not tighten the drive pinion nut more than 3 Nm (27
lb-in) or the collapsible spacer will be damaged. If the rotation torque is higher than specification,
the collapsible spacer has been compressed too far and a new collapsible spacer must be
installed.
Using the special tool, install the pinion nut.
3. Install the driveshaft.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control
Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations
View 151-22
Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 3867
C3184
Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 3868
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Seal
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Output Shaft Seal
Output Shaft Seal
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: This procedure applies to vehicles equipped with automatic transaxles.
1. Remove the power transfer unit (PTU) rear output shaft flange. 2. Remove the deflector. 3.
Remove the PTU rear output shaft oil (pinion) seal.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install the PTU rear output shaft oil (pinion) seal.
Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Seal > Page 3873
2. Install the deflector. 3. Install the PTU rear output shaft flange.
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Removal
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Seal

Special Tool(s)
1. Remove the output flange. 2. Remove the power transfer unit (PTU) from the vehicle. For
additional information, refer to Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Automatic Transaxle. 3. Using the
special tools, remove the intermediate shaft seal.
4. Remove the dust cover and the pinion seal. 5. Remove the PTU vent tube.
6. Remove the 11 PTU cover bolts and the PTU cover, then remove the helical gears.
7. Remove the input seal. 8. Clean the PTU sealing surface.

Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Installation
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Seal
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Material
1. Using the special tools, install the inner input seal.
2. CAUTION: Make sure not to roll the inner input seal sealing lip when installing the drive gear.
Install the gears. 1
Install the drive gear. Use a slight rotation to prevent damaging the inner input seal.
2 Install the idler gear.

3 Install the driven gear.
3. CAUTION: The power transfer unit (PTU) cover and case sealing surfaces must be free of oil
before applying new sealant.
Apply a 3 mm (0.11 in) bead of silicone sealant to the sealing surface of the power transfer unit
(PTU) cover. Install the PTU cover and tighten the 11 PTU cover bolts in a star pattern.
4. Install the PTU vent tube and the 2 PTU vent tube bolts.
5. Using the special tools, install the halfshaft seal. The seal is correctly installed if it is flush with
the PTU case cover.
6. Install the halfshaft seal dust cover.
^ Press the dust shield firmly to snap into position.
7. Using the special tools, install the intermediate shaft seal.

8. Using the special tools, install the output seal.
9. Using the special tools, install the dust cover onto the output flange.
10. Install the output shaft flange. 11. Install the PTU in the vehicle.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component
View 151-27
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component
C4347
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids -
Special Tool(s)
Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams
C199
Page 3896
Special Tool(s)
Page 3897
Page 3898
Special Tool(s)
> Locations
View 151-27
> Locations > Page 3908
C4347
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators -
Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Adjustments

Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Adjustments > Page
3914
unlocked.
Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information >
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules -
Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component
View 151-22
C3184
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches -
Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Typical BPP Switch
as follows:
overdrive.

View 151-10
View 151-11
C167
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Removal
range (TR) sensor.
Installation

Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
View 151-10
View 151-11
View 151-10
View 151-11
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
C193
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3952
C143
Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Material


Material


Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair
of the transaxle.
procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > ABS Sensor Block >
View 151-22
C3296
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Diagnostic
Connector - ABS > Component Information > Diagrams
C126
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations
View 151-1
C155 (Part 1)
C155 (Part 2)

Material
injury.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control
Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)

Material
injury.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control
Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3982
NOTE: When installing a new ABS module/hydraulic control unit (HCU) assembly, it must be
configured (either by download/upload or uploading the as-built data method).
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with roll stability control (RSC), the ABS module is available
separately from the HCU and should be serviced separately. However, if the RSC equipped vehicle
requires a new HCU, then the ABS module and the HCU must be installed as an assembly. Make
sure to use the most recently released service parts.
All vehicles
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe.
3. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the hydraulic control unit (HCU).
4. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the master cylinder and remove the
brake tubes.
All vehicles
5. NOTE: The brake tubes must be installed in the same location as removed.
Disconnect the front brake tube fittings from the HCU. ^
6. Disconnect the rear brake tube fittings from the jumper tubes.
7. Disconnect the electrical connector by rotating the protective cover.
8. Remove the 3 HCU bracket-to-frame bolts and remove the HCU.
^ Bleed the brake system.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Lateral
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control
View 151-13
C2114

Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front
View 151-2
View 151-24
View 151-25
View 151-2
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front
C150
C440
C160
C426
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front



separately.
separately.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor >
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding
Component Bleeding
Material
injury.
clean,
Brake Caliper

Component Bleeding > Page 4017
Wheel Cylinder

Special Tool(s)
Material
Material
injury.
screw
fluid.
injury.
bleed.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair
Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair

Brake Pedal and Bracket
Brake Pedal and Bracket
1. CAUTION: Do not service the brake pedal or brake booster without first removing the stoplamp
switch and speed control deactivator
switch. These switches must be removed with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Switch
plungers must be compressed for the switch to rotate in the bracket. Attempting to remove the
switch when the plunger is extended (during pedal apply) will result in damage to the switch.
Remove the stoplamp switch.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Page 4024
2. If equipped, remove the speed control deactivator switch.
3. NOTE: The booster push rod clevis locking pin is a one-time use only part. Anytime the booster
push rod clevis locking pin is removed, a new
booster push rod clevis locking pin should be used.
NOTE: Remove the clevis locking pin by squeezing the locking tabs and pulling outward on the
opposite end.
Remove and discard the booster push rod clevis locking pin.
4. Remove the brake pedal bracket upper bolt.
5. Remove the brake pedal bracket upper nut.
6. Remove the 4 brake booster nuts.
7. Remove the brake pedal and bracket assembly.
^ Position the brake booster forward to allow the brake pedal and bracket assembly to clear the
brake booster studs.
8. CAUTION: Do not press, pull or otherwise move the brake pedal while installing the stoplamp
switch or the speed control deactivator
switch. These switches must be installed with the booster push rod attached to the brake pedal and
with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Installing these switches with the brake pedal in any
other position will result in incorrect adjustment and may damage the switches.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation, Front
Brake Caliper
Material
Material

Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4030
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
injury.
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. CAUTION: If the brake pad anti-rattle spring is to be removed, do not force the spring off the
brake caliper or damage to the spring can
occur.
CAUTION: Do not use any tools to remove the spring, use hand force only. Do not use excessive
force or damage to the spring can occur.
NOTE: The LH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the
upper brake caliper cavity.
For the LH brake caliper, release the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. ^
Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the bottom of the spring to remove it from
the lower brake caliper cavity.
3. Rotate the spring upward and remove it from the brake caliper.
4. NOTE: The RH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the
lower brake caliper cavity.
For the RH brake caliper, release the upper portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. ^
Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the top of the spring to remove it from the
5. Rotate the spring downward and remove it from the brake caliper.
6. Loosen the brake flexible hose at the brake caliper.
7. CAUTION: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can
occur.
Remove the 2 guide pin bushing caps and the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts, position the caliper
aside. ^
Support the caliper using mechanic's wire.
8. Remove the brake flexible hose and remove the brake caliper. 9. Remove the 2 brake pads from
the caliper.
Installation
1. Install the brake pads onto the caliper and position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate. 2.
Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and the 2 bushing caps.
^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
3. NOTE: If present, the 2-tabbed end of the brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed first.
Install the brake pad anti-rattle spring using the following procedure: 1. Insert the tab of the spring
into the brake caliper cavity. 2. Twist the tab into the cavity (LH side in the upper brake caliper
cavity, RH side in the lower brake caliper cavity).
4. Rotate the brake pad anti-rattle spring and position the upper portion onto the anchor plate. 5.
Position the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring onto the anchor plate. 6. Push down
and inward until the upper and lower ends of the anchor housing spring are latched and seated in
the brake caliper cavities.
7. NOTE: The latch MUST be positioned as shown.
Verify that the brake pad anti-rattle spring is correctly latched by pulling on the spring.
8. NOTE: Make sure that the brake flexible hose is not twisted.
Install the brake flexible hose to the brake caliper. ^
9. Install the wheel and tire.

Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation, Rear
Brake Caliper
Material

injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow brake fluid to overflow from the master cylinder reservoir. Brake fluid may
damage the high-voltage components.
NOTE: The rear brake pads will wear at approximately twice the rate of the front brake pads.
2. NOTE: The following steps must be followed to prevent the accumulator from charging and
pressurizing the brake system.
Disconnect the battery. ^
Remove the battery junction box (BJB) fuses 24 (50A) and 31 (50A).
3. Remove the brake flexible hose flow bolt and discard the 2 copper washers.
4. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide bolts.
5. Remove the brake caliper. 6. Remove the brake pads from the caliper. 7. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.

Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate, Front
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate

occur.
Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside. ^
3. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts.

4. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Pad: Specifications
Front Brake Pads
Maximum taper wear (in any direction)

................................................................................................................................................ 3.0 mm
(0.118 in)
Rear Brake Pads
Maximum taper wear (in any direction)

................................................................................................................................................ 3.0 mm
(0.118 in)
Service and Repair > Front
Brake Pad: Service and Repair Front
Brake Pads
Material
Material
Service and Repair > Front > Page 4042
Removal
injury.
1. If necessary, using a suitable suction device, remove the brake fluid from the master cylinder
reservoir until it is half filled. 2. Remove the wheel and tire.
occur.
occur.
aside. ^
8. Remove the 2 brake pads from the caliper.

9. Inspect the brake pads for wear and contamination, install new pads as necessary.
10. NOTE: Use a suitable tool to protect the brake caliper piston boots.
Compress the brake caliper piston into the brake caliper.
11. Inspect the brake disc and resurface or install new as necessary.
Installation
1. Clean, dry and inspect the brake caliper anchor plate. Apply a light coat of specified lubricant to
the 4 brake pad contact points on the anchor
plate.
Install the brake pads onto the caliper and position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate.
3. Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and the 2 bushing caps.
4. NOTE: The 2-tabbed end of the brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed first.
Install the anchor housing spring using the following procedure: 1. Insert the tab of the spring into
the brake caliper cavity. 2. Twist the tab into the cavity (LH side in the upper brake caliper cavity,
RH side in the lower brake caliper cavity).
and inward until the upper and lower ends of the brake pad anti-rattle spring are latched and
seated in the brake caliper cavities.
8. CAUTION: The latch MUST be positioned as shown, or damage to component may occur.
9. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
10. Install the wheel and tire. 11. Test the brakes for normal operation.
Brake Pad: Service and Repair Rear
Brake Pads

Disconnect the battery.

^ Remove the battery junction box (BJB) fuses 24 (50A) and 31 (50A).
occur.
^ Support the caliper using mechanic's wire.
4. Remove the brake pads from the brake caliper. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Specifications
Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications
Brake Discs
Hybrid
Front
Minimum thickness ..............................................................................................................................

...................................... 24 mm (0.944 in) Minimum thickness to machine
............................................................................................................................................... 24.6 mm
(0.969 in)
Rear

................................... 11.0 mm (0.433 in) Minimum thickness to machine
............................................................................................................................................... 11.6 mm
(0.456 in)
Non-Hybrid
Front

...................................... 22 mm (0.866 in) Minimum thickness to machine
............................................................................................................................................... 22.6 mm
(0.889 in)
Rear

................................... 11.0 mm (0.433 in) Minimum thickness to machine
............................................................................................................................................... 11.6 mm
(0.456 in)
> Service and Repair > Procedures
Brake Rotor/Disc: Procedures
Brake Disc Machining
Material
All vehicles
NOTE: Read the entire operating manual and/or view the video shipped with the lathe before
installing, operating or repairing the lathe.
NOTE: Is it not necessary to machine new brake discs.
NOTE: Lateral runout and disc thickness variation measurements are not required because correct
adjustment of the on-vehicle brake lathe makes sure that these dimensions are within
specifications.
Hybrid vehicles
Disconnect the 12-volt battery.
3. Remove the battery junction box (BJB) fuses 9 (50 A) and 18 (50 A).
All vehicles
4. NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the brake line from the brake caliper.
Position the brake caliper and brake caliper anchor bracket (if equipped) aside.
5. Machine the brake disc using the on-vehicle brake lathe.

1. Install the hub adapter and silencer belt, if necessary. 2. Install the cutting lathe. 3. If the lathe is
not self adjusting, adjust the lathe oscillation using a dial indicator. The total indicated reading (TIR)
target is 0.000 mm (0.000
inch), and the maximum is 0.08 mm (0.003 inch).
4. Center the cutting head, adjust the cutting bits and install the chip deflector.
5. NOTE: The depth of cut should be between 0.10 and 0.20 mm (0.004 and 0.008 inch). Lighter
cuts cause the bit to heat up and wear faster.
Heavier cuts cause poor brake disc surface finish.
Machine the brake disc.
6. Remove the lathe and, if installed, the silencer belt. 7. Remove the hub adapter.
6. Remove the metal shavings.
7. NOTE: It is not necessary to install new brake pads if the friction material properties are within
specification.
Install the brake caliper and brake caliper anchor bracket (if equipped).
> Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4053
Brake Rotor/Disc: Removal and Replacement
Disc Removal and Installation, Front
Brake Disc
1. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate. 2. Remove the brake disc. 3. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Disc Removal and Installation, Rear
Brake Disc
3. CAUTION: Do not allow the caliper and brake pad assembly to hang from the brake hose or
damage to the hose can occur.
Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper and brake pad assembly aside.
^ Support the caliper using mechanic's wire.
4. Remove the brake disc. 5. If the brake disc binds on the parking brake shoes, remove the
adjustment hole access plug and retract the parking brake shoes by rotating the
adjuster.
^ Adjust the parking brake shoes, if necessary.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Backing Plate: Service and Repair
Brake Backing Plate
1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder. 2. Remove the brake flexible hose bracket bolt.
3. Compress the parking brake cable conduit locking tabs and pull the parking brake cable
assembly through the backing plate.
4. Remove the rear wheel hub. 5. Remove the 4 backing plate bolts and the backing plate.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Brake Drum: Service and Repair
Brake Drum
Special Tool(s)
Removal
CAUTION: To reduce the possibility of uneven braking, always install new rear brake shoes at both
ends of an axle.
2. CAUTION: Use of a brake drum puller or a torch is not recommended. Brake drum distortion can
result.
NOTE: If the brake drum is seized to the wheel hub pilot diameter, tap the center of the brake drum
between the wheel studs.
If the brake drum binds on the brake shoes, retract the brake shoes. 1. Move the brake shoe
adjuster actuator lever away from the adjuster. 2. Rotate the brake shoe adjuster screw upward to
retract the brake shoes.
3. Remove the brake drum.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, measure the inside diameter of the brake drum.
^ Install a new brake drum if the inside diameter exceeds the specification stamped on the outside
face of the brake drum.
2. Adjust the rear brakes, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment. 3. Position the brake drum on the
vehicle.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise
Brake Shoe: Customer Interest Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise
TSB 08-20-11
10/13/08
REAR BRAKE NOISE - ROTATIONAL CHIRP - (EXCLUDES HYBRID)
FORD: 2008 Escape
This article supersedes TSB 08-11-2 to update the Service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner (Excludes Hybrid) vehicles may exhibit a noise from the
rear brakes while coming to a stop. This condition does not affect brake performance. The noise is
typically described as a cyclic, scraping, or rotational chirp noise.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
To better determine if this procedure is applicable, be advised of the following characteristics:
^ The noise this procedure addresses is unlike a typical brake squeak.
^ It is often described as a groan noise or scraping noise which is cyclic and follows wheel speed.
^ Vehicles will usually exhibit the noise at speeds under 20 MPH (32 Km/h).
^ This noise will only be present when the brakes are very warm or hot such as experienced in stop
and go traffic.
Vehicles built prior to 6/15/2007 follow both procedures A and B.
Vehicles built after 6/15/2007 perform only procedure B.
NOTE
PERFORMING PROCEDURE B IS THE MOST CRITICAL PART OF THIS REPAIR. ADDING

LUBRICANT TO THE WHEEL CYLINDER PISTONS WILL REDUCE FRICTION BETWEEN THE
WHEEL CYLINDER PISTON AND ALUMINUM WHEEL CYLINDER WALL ELIMINATING NOISE
SOURCE.
PROCEDURE A
1. Replace the rear brake shoes. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-02.
2. Apply Motorcraft® Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound to the contact points
between the shoe and the rear backing plate. Ensure grease will not contact brake lining surface.
PROCEDURE B
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise >
Page 4072
1. Remove the rear brake shoe return springs brake shoes, and wheel cylinder dust boots. Using
your hands, push one piston into the wheel cylinder until the opposite side piston is exposed. Be
sure the wheel cylinder piston is extending out beyond the end of the wheel cylinder sufficient to
allow complete coverage of the piston surface and piston seal. It is possible and recommended to
have the piston cup seal slightly exposed when performing this operation (Figure 1).
2. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound around the wheel
cylinder pistons and then repeat procedure for opposite side wheel cylinder pistons. Be sure to
pack the grease into the wheel cylinder bore to ensure grease gets back to the piston seal. (Figure
2)
3. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, shuttle the pistons side to side three (3)
or more times to distribute the lubricant and ensure smooth movement. (Figure 3)
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise >
Page 4073
Parts Block
082011A 2008 Escape/Mariner: 1.0 Hrs.
Remove The Rear Brake Shoes, Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease Following Service
Procedure, Replace The Rear Brake Shoes If Necessary (Do Not Use With 2001BB, 2001B1B)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE

2200 42
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp
Noise
Brake Shoe: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise
TSB 08-20-11
10/13/08
FORD: 2008 Escape
SERVICE PROCEDURE
and go traffic.
NOTE

SOURCE.
PROCEDURE A
PROCEDURE B
Noise > Page 4079
2)
Noise > Page 4080
Parts Block
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE

2200 42
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Shoe: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking
Noises
TSB 09-5-8
03/23/09

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE POWERTRAIN.
noise.
Parts Block
090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr.

1015D)
090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs.
Noises > Page 4086
Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs.
090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
1007 07
Disclaimer
Noises > Page 4092
Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs.
090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
1007 07
Disclaimer
Brake Shoe: Adjustments
Brake Shoe Adjustment
Special Tool(s)
1. Remove the brake drum. 2. Using the special tool, measure the inside diameter of the brake
drum.
3. Position the special tool on the brake shoes and linings and adjust accordingly.
4. Install the brake drum.

Brake Shoe: Service and Repair
Brake Shoes
Material
1. NOTE: If new rear brake shoes and linings are being installed, resurface the brake drums to
remove glazing and to provide an equal friction
surface from side-to-side. Resurfacing also corrects out-of-round and bell conditions.
Remove the brake drum.
2. Remove the 2 brake shoe retaining springs and the 2 pins. 3. Remove the upper return spring. 4.
Remove the self-adjuster and spring assembly. 5. Remove the lower return spring. 6. Remove the
trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly. 7. Remove the leading brake shoe.
^ Clean and dry the brake shoe contact points on the backing plate.
^ Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the brake shoe contact points on the backing plate.
8. NOTE: Adjust the self-adjuster to the full retracted position to ease the installation of the brake
drum.
Adjust the rear brake shoes.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Cylinder: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake
Rotational Chirp Noise
Wheel Cylinder: Customer Interest Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise
TSB 08-20-11
10/13/08
FORD: 2008 Escape
SERVICE PROCEDURE
and go traffic.
NOTE

SOURCE.
PROCEDURE A
PROCEDURE B
Rotational Chirp Noise > Page 4103
2)
Parts Block
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE

2200 42
Disclaimer
> Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Cylinder: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear
Brake Rotational Chirp Noise
Wheel Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise
TSB 08-20-11
10/13/08
FORD: 2008 Escape
SERVICE PROCEDURE
and go traffic.
NOTE

SOURCE.
PROCEDURE A
PROCEDURE B
Brake Rotational Chirp Noise > Page 4110
2)
Brake Rotational Chirp Noise > Page 4111
Parts Block
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE

2200 42
Disclaimer
> Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement
Wheel Cylinder: Removal and Replacement
Wheel Cylinder
Material
injury.
1. Remove the brake shoes. 2. Disconnect the brake tube fitting.
3. Remove the 2 wheel cylinder bolts and remove the wheel cylinder.
^ Bleed the brake hydraulic system.

> Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 4114
Wheel Cylinder: Overhaul
Wheel Cylinder
Material
Disassembly and Assembly
injury.
1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder. 2. Remove the bleeder screw cap. 3. Remove the bleeder
screw.
4. Remove the 2 dust boots. 5. Remove the 2 pistons. 6. Remove the 2 piston seals.
^ To install, lubricate the piston seals with clean brake fluid.
7. Remove the spring.

> Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 4115
8. NOTE: Inspect the wheel cylinder bore for excessive wear, corrosion or pitting. If any of these
conditions exist, a new wheel cylinder must be
installed.
To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding
Component Bleeding
Material
injury.
clean,
Brake Caliper

> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 4121
Wheel Cylinder

Special Tool(s)
Material
Material
injury.
screw
fluid.
injury.
bleed.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation, Front
Brake Caliper
Material
Material

Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4129
injury.
occur.
6. Loosen the brake flexible hose at the brake caliper.
occur.
aside. ^
8. Remove the brake flexible hose and remove the brake caliper. 9. Remove the 2 brake pads from
the caliper.
Installation
1. Install the brake pads onto the caliper and position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate. 2.
Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and the 2 bushing caps.
3. NOTE: If present, the 2-tabbed end of the brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed first.
Install the brake pad anti-rattle spring using the following procedure: 1. Insert the tab of the spring
into the brake caliper cavity. 2. Twist the tab into the cavity (LH side in the upper brake caliper
cavity, RH side in the lower brake caliper cavity).
and inward until the upper and lower ends of the anchor housing spring are latched and seated in
the brake caliper cavities.
7. NOTE: The latch MUST be positioned as shown.
Install the brake flexible hose to the brake caliper. ^

Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation, Rear
Brake Caliper
Material

injury.
3. Remove the brake flexible hose flow bolt and discard the 2 copper washers.
4. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide bolts.
5. Remove the brake caliper. 6. Remove the brake pads from the caliper. 7. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.

Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate, Front
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate

occur.
3. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts.

4. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information
> Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
BRAKE FLUID
Ford P/N ..............................................................................................................................................

.................................................................. PM-1-C Ford Specification ...............................................
.....................................................................................................................................
WSS-M6C62-A
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch >
View 151-2
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch >
C124
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Flexible Hose
Brake Flexible Hose
Material
Material

Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose > Page 4147

injury.
1. Disconnect the brake flexible hose fitting from the wheel cylinder.
2. Remove the brake flexible hose bracket bolt.
3. Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose.

4. Remove the flexible hose clip and the brake hose.

Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Front
Brake Flexible Hose
Material

injury.
Hybrid vehicles
2. Remove the battery junction box (BJB) fuses 24 (50A) and 31 (50A).
All vehicles
3. Remove the wheel and tire. 4. Remove and discard the brake flexible hose retaining clip. 5.
Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose.
6. Detach the brake flexible hose from the strut bracket. 7. Disconnect the brake flexible hose from
the caliper.
^ Bleed the brake caliper.

Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Rear
Brake Flexible Hose
Material

injury.
1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Remove the brake caliper flow bolt and discard the 2 copper
washers.
3. Remove and discard the brake flexible hose retaining clip. 4. Disconnect the brake tube fitting
from the brake flexible hose.
5. Remove the bracket bolt and the brake flexible hose.
^ Bleed the brake caliper.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)

Material
injury.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4157
NOTE: When installing a new ABS module/hydraulic control unit (HCU) assembly, it must be
configured (either by download/upload or uploading the as-built data method).
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with roll stability control (RSC), the ABS module is available
separately from the HCU and should be serviced separately. However, if the RSC equipped vehicle
requires a new HCU, then the ABS module and the HCU must be installed as an assembly. Make
sure to use the most recently released service parts.
All vehicles
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe.
3. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the hydraulic control unit (HCU).
4. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the master cylinder and remove the
brake tubes.
All vehicles
5. NOTE: The brake tubes must be installed in the same location as removed.
Disconnect the front brake tube fittings from the HCU. ^
6. Disconnect the rear brake tube fittings from the jumper tubes.
7. Disconnect the electrical connector by rotating the protective cover.
8. Remove the 3 HCU bracket-to-frame bolts and remove the HCU.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition
Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition
Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition
1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder. 2. Plug the outlet ports of the master
cylinder. 3. Apply the brakes. If brake pedal height cannot be maintained, the brake master cylinder
has an internal leak and a new brake master cylinder must
be installed.
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 4162
Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake Master Cylinder - Compensator Port
Brake Master Cylinder - Compensator Port
The purpose of the compensator ports in the brake master cylinder is to: ^
supply additional brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir needed by the brake system
due to brake lining wear.
^ allow brake fluid to return to the brake master cylinder reservoir when the brakes are released.
The returning brake fluid creates a slight turbulence in the brake master cylinder reservoir. This is a
normal condition and indicates that the compensator ports are not clogged.
Clogged compensator ports may cause the brakes to hang up or not fully release. If clogged
compensator ports are suspected, proceed as follows: 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it
on a hoist. 2. With the brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel and check for any brake drag.
^ If an excessive amount of brake drag exists at all 4 wheels, continue with the test.
^ If an excessive amount of brake drag exists at only 1 wheel, it indicates a possible seized brake
caliper, brake wheel cylinder or parking brake component. Repair or install new components as
necessary.
3. Check the brake stoplamp switch, speed control deactivator switch and the brake pedal free play
to verify that the brake pedal is not partially
applied.
4. NOTE: If the booster vacuum is not depleted, the seal between the booster and the master
cylinder can be drawn into the booster when the 2
components are separated.
Press the brake pedal several times to deplete the vacuum in the booster.
5. Loosen the brake master cylinder nuts and position the brake master cylinder away from the
brake booster. 6. With the brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel and check for any brake
drag.
^ If the brake drag is no longer present, install a new brake booster.
^ If the brake drag is still present, install a new master cylinder.

Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder
Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Brake Master Cylinder
Brake Master Cylinder
Material
injury.
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder > Page 4165
1. Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch electrical connector. 2. Using a suitable suction
device, remove the brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. If equipped with a
manual transmission, disconnect the clutch master cylinder feed.
^ Plug the clutch master cylinder feed hose.
4. If installing a new brake master cylinder, remove the brake fluid reservoir. 5. Disconnect the 2
brake tube fittings and plug the brake tubes and the brake master cylinder ports.
6. NOTE: Install new brake master cylinder nuts.
Remove and discard the 2 brake master cylinder nuts. ^
7. Remove the brake master cylinder assembly. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the master cylinder.
^ If equipped with a manual transmission, bleed the clutch master cylinder.

Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Brake Fluid Reservoir
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Material
injury.
1. Remove the reservoir cap. 2. Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch electrical
connector. 3. Using a suitable suction device, remove the brake fluid from the brake master
cylinder reservoir. 4. If equipped with a manual transmission, disconnect the clutch master cylinder
feed hose.
^ Plug the clutch master cylinder feed hose.
5. Remove the reservoir.
^ Release the retaining clips on the underside of the reservoir.
^ Pull the reservoir upwards.
6. Remove and discard the 2 seals. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install new seals. Lubricate the seals with clean, specified brake fluid.
^ If equipped with a manual transmission, bleed the clutch master cylinder.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational
Chirp Noise
Wheel Cylinder: Customer Interest Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise
TSB 08-20-11
10/13/08
FORD: 2008 Escape
SERVICE PROCEDURE
and go traffic.
NOTE

SOURCE.
PROCEDURE A
PROCEDURE B
Chirp Noise > Page 4176
2)
Chirp Noise > Page 4177
Parts Block
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE

2200 42
Disclaimer
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake
TSB 08-20-11
10/13/08
FORD: 2008 Escape
SERVICE PROCEDURE
and go traffic.
NOTE

SOURCE.
PROCEDURE A
PROCEDURE B
2)
Parts Block
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE

2200 42
Disclaimer
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheel Cylinder: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 > Engine -
FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise
TSB 09-21-2
11/02/09
FORD: 2008 Escape
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Section 303-05B.
3. Remove pulley.
NOTE

Parts Block
FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise > Page 4190
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19A216 69
Disclaimer
FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise > Page 4196
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19A216 69
Disclaimer
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement
Wheel Cylinder: Removal and Replacement
Wheel Cylinder
Material
injury.
1. Remove the brake shoes. 2. Disconnect the brake tube fitting.
3. Remove the 2 wheel cylinder bolts and remove the wheel cylinder.
^ Bleed the brake hydraulic system.

Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 4199
Wheel Cylinder: Overhaul
Wheel Cylinder
Material
injury.
1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder. 2. Remove the bleeder screw cap. 3. Remove the bleeder
screw.
4. Remove the 2 dust boots. 5. Remove the 2 pistons. 6. Remove the 2 piston seals.
^ To install, lubricate the piston seals with clean brake fluid.
7. Remove the spring.

8. NOTE: Inspect the wheel cylinder bore for excessive wear, corrosion or pitting. If any of these
conditions exist, a new wheel cylinder must be
installed.
To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Parking Brake Cable: Procedures
Parking Brake Cable Tension Release
1. Remove the LH cowl side trim panel. 2. With the help of an assistant, release the parking brake
cable tension by pulling down on the front cable at the cable union, until the parking brake
control drum track rotates to its stop and a 4 mm (0.15 inch) x 100 mm (3.93 inch) retainer pin can
be inserted.
3. NOTE: Before removing the brake control retaining pin, make sure all cable connections are
secure and the cable tension is reloaded slowly.
To reload the tension on the parking brake cable, follow the release procedure in reverse.
Parking Brake Cable: Removal and Replacement
Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH
NOTE: Rear disc shown, rear drum similar.
Removal and Installation All vehicles

1. Release the parking brake cable tension.
Rear disc brake vehicles

Rear drum brake vehicles
3. Remove the rear brake shoes.
All vehicles
4. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the cable connector and the equalizer bracket by
compressing the cable conduit locking tabs. 5. Detach the cable-to-fuel tank strap pin type retainer.
6. Remove the 2 parking brake cable bracket bolts.
7. Compress the rear parking brake cable conduit locking tabs and pull the cable assembly through
the brake backing plate.
8. NOTE: During installation, make sure parking brake cable is seated correctly as shown.
Release the rear parking brake cable end from the parking brake actuator lever and compress the
cable conduit locking tabs.
All vehicles
Parking Brake Cable - Rear, RH
NOTE: Rear disc shown, rear drum similar.

Removal and Installation All vehicles
1. Release the parking brake cable tension.
3. Remove the rear brake shoes.

All vehicles
4. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the cable connector and the equalizer bracket by
compressing the cable conduit locking tabs. 5. Remove the 2 parking brake cable bracket bolts.
6. Compress the rear parking brake cable conduit locking tabs and pull the cable assembly through
the brake backing plate.
7. NOTE: During installation, make sure parking brake cable is seated correctly as shown.
Release the rear parking brake cable end from the parking brake actuator lever and compress the
cable conduit locking tabs.
All vehicles
Parking Brake Cable - Front

1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the parking brake control. 3.
Remove the driver side front seat. 4. Remove the 3 front parking brake cable bracket bolts.
5. Disconnect the front parking brake cable from the RR parking brake cable connector by
releasing the locking tab.
6. Disconnect the front parking brake cable conduit from the LR parking brake cable.
7. Release the front parking brake cable pass-through grommet from the vehicle underbody. 8. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component
Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Control
1. Remove the front driver side door scuff plate and kick panel. 2. Release the parking brake cable
tension. 3. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt.
4. Disconnect the parking brake warning indicator switch electrical connector and detach the
harness pin-type retainer from the parking brake control
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component
cover.
5. Remove the 2 parking brake control bolts.
6. Remove the 2 parking brake control nuts.
7. Remove the parking brake control.
^ Disconnect the front parking brake cable.
8. NOTE: Make sure that the cable is in the groove on the control wheel prior to final tightening of
fasteners.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component
Information > Adjustments
Parking Brake Shoe: Adjustments
Parking Brake Shoe Adjustment
Special Tool(s)
2. NOTE: Make sure the parking brake is fully released.
Using the release handle, release the parking brake control.
3. Remove the rear brake disc. 4. Using the special tool, measure the inside diameter of the drum
portion of the rear brake disc and set the locking screw.
^ Record the measurement.
5. Place the special tool over the widest diameter of the parking brake shoes.
6. Adjust the parking brake shoe clearance to 0.50 mm (0.01 inch) less than the inside diameter of
the drum portion of the rear brake disc.
^ Rotate the parking brake shoe adjuster to achieve the correct parking brake shoe-to-brake disc
clearance.
7. Install the rear brake disc. 8. Test the parking brake for normal operation.
Information > Adjustments > Page 4219
Parking Brake Shoe: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Shoes
Material
1. Remove the rear brake disc. 2. Remove the parking brake shoe upper return spring. 3. Remove
the 2 parking brake shoe retaining pins. 4. Remove the 2 parking brake shoe retaining springs. 5.
Remove the parking brake shoe lower return spring. 6. Remove the parking brake shoe adjuster. 7.
Remove the parking brake shoes. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Information > Adjustments > Page 4220
^ Using the specified lubricant, lubricate the parking brake shoe contact points before installation of
the rear parking brake shoes.
^ Lubricate the adjust screw threads with anti-seize lubricant.
^ Adjust the parking brake shoes.
^ Check the parking brake for normal operation.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
View 151-22
C2015
indicator switch.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Vacuum Brake Booster: Specifications

Vacuum Brake Booster: Description and Operation
Brake Booster
The power brake actuation system consists of the following components: ^
Brake booster assembly
^ Brake booster vacuum fitting
Pedal pressure is amplified by the brake booster. The brake booster uses engine vacuum from the
intake manifold. The low pressure in the intake manifold is applied to a rubber diaphragm on the
vacuum side of the brake booster chamber, which then pulls the piston rod in when the brakes are
applied to supply a power assist. The piston rod is connected to the brake pedal.
Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection
Brake Booster
1. Disconnect the check valve from the brake booster. 2. Apply the parking brake, start the engine
and place the transmission in NEUTRAL. 3. Verify that manifold vacuum is available at the check
valve with the engine at idle speed and the transmission in NEUTRAL.
^ If manifold vacuum is available, stop the engine, connect the check valve and continue with Step
5.
^ If manifold vacuum is not available, continue with Step 4.
4. Disconnect the check valve from the vacuum hose and verify that manifold vacuum is available
at the hose with the engine at idle speed and the
transmission in NEUTRAL. ^
If manifold vacuum is available, stop the engine, install a new check valve and continue with Step
5.
^ If manifold vacuum is not available, stop the engine, connect the vacuum hose to the check valve
and refer to Engine System to diagnose the no vacuum condition.
5. Apply the brake pedal several times to exhaust all vacuum from the system. 6. Apply the brake
pedal and hold it in the applied position. Start the engine and verify that the brake pedal moves
downward after the engine starts.
^ If the brake pedal moves, the brake booster is operating correctly
^ If the brake pedal does not move, install a new brake booster.
7. Operate the engine a minimum of 10 seconds at fast idle. Stop the engine, and let the vehicle
stand for 10 minutes. Then apply the brake pedal with
approximately 89 N (20 lb) of force. The brake pedal feel should be the same as that noted with the
engine operating. If the brake pedal feels hard (no power assist), install a new brake booster check
valve and retest. If the brake pedal feels spongy, bleed the hydraulic system to remove air. Refer to
Brake System Bleeding.
Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair
Brake Booster
Brake Booster
1. Disconnect the vacuum hose/check valve assembly from the brake booster. 2. Remove and
discard the 2 master cylinder nuts.

3. NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the brake tube fittings.
Carefully position the brake master cylinder assembly forward.
4. CAUTION: Do not service the brake pedal or brake booster without first removing the stoplamp
switch and speed control deactivator
switch. These switches must be removed with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Switch
plungers must be compressed for the switch to rotate in the bracket. Attempting to remove the
switch when the plunger is extended (during pedal apply) will result in damage to the switch.
Remove the stoplamp switch.
5. If equipped, remove the speed control deactivator switch.
6. NOTE: The booster push rod clevis-locking pin is a one-time use only part. Anytime the booster
push rod clevis-locking pin is removed, a new
booster push rod clevis-locking pin should be used.
NOTE: Remove the clevis-locking pin by squeezing the locking tabs and pulling outward on the
opposite end.
Remove and discard the booster push rod clevis-locking pin.
7. Remove the 4 nuts and the brake booster.
8. CAUTION: Do not press, pull or otherwise move the brake pedal while installing the stoplamp
switch or the speed control deactivator
switch. These switches must be installed with the booster push rod attached to the brake pedal and
with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Installing these switches with the brake pedal in any
other position will result in incorrect adjustment and may damage the switches.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve >
Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Testing and Inspection
Brake Booster Check Valve
The function of the brake booster check valve is to allow manifold vacuum to enter the brake
booster and prevent the escape of vacuum in case manifold vacuum is lost during sustained full
throttle operation. 1. Disconnect the vacuum booster hose from the check valve. 2. Apply the
parking brake, start the engine and place the transmission in NEUTRAL. 3. Verify that manifold
vacuum is available at the check valve end of the vacuum hose with the engine at idle speed and
the transmission in
NEUTRAL. ^
If manifold vacuum is available, stop the engine, connect the vacuum hose to the check valve and
continue this test.
^ If manifold vacuum is not available, stop the engine, connect the vacuum hose to the check valve
and refer to Engine System to diagnose the no vacuum condition.
4. Connect the vacuum hose to the check valve and run the engine for at least 10 seconds. 5.
Operate the brake pedal to check for power assist.
^ If power assist is present, continue with this test.
^ If power assist is not present, refer to Brake Booster Component Test.
6. NOTE: Do not remove the brake booster check valve from the brake booster in this step.
Stop the engine and disconnect the vacuum booster hose from the brake booster check valve.
7. Apply the brake and verify that there is enough vacuum retained in the brake booster for at least
one power-assisted brake application.
^ If there is enough vacuum for at least one power-assisted brake application, the check valve is
functioning correctly.
^ If there is not enough vacuum for at least one power-assisted brake application, continue with this
test.
8. Inspect the brake booster for any signs of damage that could cause a leak.
^ If any damage is found, install a new brake booster and repeat this test.
^ If no damage is found, install a new check valve.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations
View 151-1
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4241
C155 (Part 1)
C155 (Part 2)

Material
injury.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > ABS
Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations
View 151-22
Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations > Page 4249
C3296
Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations > Page 4250
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4254
C124
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-22
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4261
C2015
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4262
indicator switch.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction
Control Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-13
Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4266
C2114
Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4267

Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front
View 151-2
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 4272
View 151-24
View 151-25
View 151-2
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front
C150
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 4277
C440
C160
C426
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front

Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 4282


separately.
separately.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch
View 151-3
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4296
View 151-3
Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch
C2072
Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4299
C2070
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09

SERVICE PROCEDURE
ignition key.
Parts Block
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 4309
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09

SERVICE PROCEDURE
ignition key.
Parts Block
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional


Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional > Page
4318

Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch
View 151-10
View 151-11
C167
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
Battery Cable: Service and Repair

BATTERY CABLES
Part 1
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Page 4333
Part 2
1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 3. Remove the starter solenoid
terminal cover. 4. Remove the starter motor positive cable nut.
5. Remove the starter solenoid wire nut.
6. Position the starter motor terminals aside. 7. Remove the battery ground cable-to-transaxle bolt.
8. Position the battery ground cable aside. 9. Disconnect the retainers fastening the battery cables
to the battery tray.
10. Open the battery junction box (BJB) cover and remove the BJB terminal nut.
11. Position the BJB terminal aside. 12. Disconnect the BJB electrical connector. 13. Remove the
body ground terminal bolt from the left fenderwell.
14. Release the battery cable locators and remove the battery cables from the vehicle. 15. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Electrical Specifications
Alternator: Electrical Specifications
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................Specification
Battery
Voltage.................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................12 volts
Generator
Rating..............................................................................................75/120 amp (max) @

1,800-6,000 generator rpm, approximately 500-2,000 engine rpm
Generator
Load at 2,000 rpm................................................................................................................................

....................................................................75 amps No Load at 2,000 rpm........................................
.......................................................................................................................between 13.2 and 15.5
volts
Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 4339
Alternator: Diagrams
C102A
C102B
C1104A
C1104B
Alternator: Application and ID
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................Specification
Generator
Rating..............................................................................................75/120 amp (max) @

1,800-6,000 generator rpm, approximately 500-2,000 engine rpm Generator pulley ratio...................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....................2.70:1 Voltage regulator type...........................................................................................
...............................................................Electronic internal with generator
Alternator: Description and Operation
GENERATOR
The charging system consists of the following components:
- Generator
- Integral voltage regulator
The generator maximum output provides 120 amps.

Alternator: Service and Repair
GENERATOR
1. CAUTION: Do not allow any metal object to come in contact with the generator housing and
internal diode cooling fins. A short circuit
may result and burn out the diodes. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component
damage.
2. Remove the 6 lower splash shield bolts and the 2 pin-type retainers.
3. NOTE: The LH lower splash shield must be removed before the RH lower splash shield.
Remove the lower splash shields.
4. Rotate the front end accessory drive tensioner counterclockwise and position the accessory
drive belt aside. 5. Disconnect the generator electrical connector.
6. Position the generator B+ protective cover aside and remove the generator B+ terminal nut.
7. Remove the 3 A/C compressor bolts. Use a tie-strap and position A/C compressor aside.
8. Loosen the 2 generator nuts.
9. Remove the 2 lower generator studs.
10. Remove the upper generator bolt and the generator.
- Tighten the upper generator bolt with vehicle on the ground.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Clutch Cut Off Switch
View 151-3
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4351
View 151-3
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Clutch Cut Off Switch
C2072
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4354
C2070
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign.
Cylinder
Ignition Lock: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09

SERVICE PROCEDURE
ignition key.
Parts Block
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign.
Cylinder > Page 4363
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key
Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Lock: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09

SERVICE PROCEDURE
ignition key.
Parts Block
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key
Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 4369
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign.
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09

SERVICE PROCEDURE
ignition key.
Parts Block
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign.
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 >
Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09

SERVICE PROCEDURE
ignition key.
Parts Block
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 >
Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 4385
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: >
10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening
TSB 10-5-1
03/29/10


SERVICE PROCEDURE
diagnostics.
Parts Block

10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 4391
100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13412 12
Disclaimer
10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 4397
100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13412 12
Disclaimer
Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional


Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional > Page 4400

Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-10
View 151-11
C167
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Starter Motor: > 07-14-9 > Jul > 07 > Engine - Grinding Rattling Noises
Starter Motor: Customer Interest Engine - Grinding Rattling Noises
TSB 07-14-9
07/23/07
ENGINE NOISE - GRINDING/RATTLE MOST NOTICEABLE AT IDLE - VEHICLES BUILT FROM

4/27/2007-4/30/2007.
FORD: 2008 Escape
ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine, may exhibit a
grinding or rattling noise with the engine running, more noticeable at idle.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check the vehicle build date:
a. If the vehicle was built from 4/27/2007-4/30/2007, go to Step 2.
b. If not, follow normal diagnostics using Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
2. Remove the starter, Refer to WSM, Section 303-06.
a. Inspect the starter drive for loose washers and/or the snap ring not seated in the shafi groove.
Replace as necessary.
3. Install the starter, Refer to WSM, Section 303-06.

Parts Block
071409A 2008 Escape/Mariner 3.0L 0.6 Hr.
Engine: Replace Starter, Includes Time To Inspect Build Date And Starter Drive (Do Not Use With
11002A)
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Starter Motor: > 07-14-9 > Jul > 07 > Engine - Grinding Rattling Noises
Starter Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Grinding Rattling Noises
TSB 07-14-9
07/23/07
ENGINE NOISE - GRINDING/RATTLE MOST NOTICEABLE AT IDLE - VEHICLES BUILT FROM

4/27/2007-4/30/2007.
FORD: 2008 Escape
ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine, may exhibit a
grinding or rattling noise with the engine running, more noticeable at idle.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check the vehicle build date:
a. If the vehicle was built from 4/27/2007-4/30/2007, go to Step 2.
b. If not, follow normal diagnostics using Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
2. Remove the starter, Refer to WSM, Section 303-06.
a. Inspect the starter drive for loose washers and/or the snap ring not seated in the shafi groove.
Replace as necessary.
3. Install the starter, Refer to WSM, Section 303-06.

Parts Block
071409A 2008 Escape/Mariner 3.0L 0.6 Hr.
Engine: Replace Starter, Includes Time To Inspect Build Date And Starter Drive (Do Not Use With
11002A)
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Specifications > Electrical Specifications
Starter Motor: Electrical Specifications
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................Specification
Normal engine cranking speed.............................................................................................................

................................................................200-250 rpm Starter motor maximum load current draw......
..........................................................................................................................................................80
0 amps Starter circuit maximum voltage drop (engine at normal operating
temperature).........................................................................................................0.5 volt Starter
motor no load current draw...................................................................................................................
......................................................60-80 amps Starter motor normal load current draw......................
........................................................................................................................................130-190
amps
Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 4421
Starter Motor: Locations
View 151-4
View 151-5
Starter Motor: Diagrams
C197A
C197B
Starter Motor: Service and Repair
STARTER MOTOR
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner. 3. Disconnect the transmission
shift cable-to-manual lever. 4. Remove the 2 transmission cable bracket bolts and detach the wire
harness retainer and position aside the transmission cable and bracket.
5. Remove the starter motor solenoid wire nut.
6. Remove the starter motor solenoid battery cable nut and position aside the cables.
7. Remove the 2 bolts and the starter motor.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 4430
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console
C380
Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console > Page 4436
C2033
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair
POWER POINT
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: Power point cover may differ depending on location.
1. Open the power point cover. 2. Install the special tool in one of the power point socket slots.
3. Position the special tool so that it engages in the adjacent slot.
4. Using the special tool, pull the power point socket out of the retainer.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Installation
1. Connect the electrical connector. 2. Slide the power point socket into the retainer.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
C174
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Smart Junction Box
Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4446
Application and ID > Smart Junction Box
Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4451
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Smart Junction Box
> Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4458
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
been simplified.
Current Flow (1)
Diagrams.
Splices (3)
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4463
Component Names (5)

the wire color.
"Symbols".
Power Distribution
Ground Distribution
C904
on the vehicle.
WARNINGS

the procedure.
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Symbols (Part 2)
Symbols (Part 3)
Symbols (Part 4)
Symbols (Part 5)
terminal.
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
7 = Seal
1 = Proper crimp
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
6 = Male half
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
signal.
4 = Grounding foil
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
NOTE: -
splice.
wire size
harness.
C1035A
C1035B
C1035C
C2280A
C2280B (Part 1)
C2280B (Part 2)
C2280C
C2280D
C2280E
C2280F
C2280G
> Application and ID > Smart Junction Box
> Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4488
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C110
C110 (Part 1)
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4501
C110 (Part 2)
C134 (Part 1)
C134 (Part 2)
C139
C210 (Part 1)
C210 (Part 2)
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams
C110 (Part 1)
C110 (Part 2)
C134 (Part 1)
C134 (Part 2)
C139
C210 (Part 1)
C210 (Part 2)
C211
C212
C213
C214
C215 (Part 1)
C215 (Part 2)
C237
C238
C248
C260
C311
C312 (Part 1)
C312 (Part 2)
C313
C314 (Part 1)
C314 (Part 2)
C315
C339
C340
C405
C408
C410
C421
C422
C922
C913
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module >
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE:
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module >
after installation.
Installation
7. NOTE:
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE:
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4549
after installation.
Installation
7. NOTE:
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4554
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
C1035A
C1035B
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4559
C1035C
C2280A
C2280B (Part 1)
C2280B (Part 2)
C2280C
C2280D
C2280E
C2280F
C2280G
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4570
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Smart Junction Box
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
C1035A
C1035B
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4582
C1035C
C2280A
C2280B (Part 1)
C2280B (Part 2)
C2280C
C2280D
C2280E
C2280F
C2280G
Application and ID > Smart Junction Box
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Power Point, Console
C380
Power Point, Console > Page 4601
C2033
Page 4602
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair
POWER POINT
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: Power point cover may differ depending on location.
1. Open the power point cover. 2. Install the special tool in one of the power point socket slots.
3. Position the special tool so that it engages in the adjacent slot.
4. Using the special tool, pull the power point socket out of the retainer.
Page 4603
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Installation
1. Connect the electrical connector. 2. Slide the power point socket into the retainer.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Diagrams
C174
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction
Box
Box > Page 4611
Box > Page 4612
Box > Page 4613
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart
Junction Box
Junction Box > Page 4616
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Smart
Junction Box
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
been simplified.
Current Flow (1)
Diagrams.
Splices (3)
Information and Instructions > Page 4628
Component Names (5)

the wire color.
"Symbols".
Power Distribution
Ground Distribution
C904
on the vehicle.
WARNINGS

the procedure.
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Symbols (Part 2)
Symbols (Part 3)
Symbols (Part 4)
Symbols (Part 5)
terminal.
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
7 = Seal
1 = Proper crimp
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
6 = Male half
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
signal.
4 = Grounding foil
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
NOTE: -
splice.
wire size
harness.
C1035A
C1035B
C1035C
C2280A
C2280B (Part 1)
C2280B (Part 2)
C2280C
C2280D
C2280E
C2280F
C2280G
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID >
Smart Junction Box
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110
C110 (Part 1)
Diagrams > C110 > Page 4666
C110 (Part 2)
C134 (Part 1)
C134 (Part 2)
C139
C210 (Part 1)
C210 (Part 2)
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams
C110 (Part 1)
C110 (Part 2)
C134 (Part 1)
C134 (Part 2)
C139
C210 (Part 1)
C210 (Part 2)
C211
C212
C213
C214
C215 (Part 1)
C215 (Part 2)
C237
C238
C248
C260
C311
C312 (Part 1)
C312 (Part 2)
C313
C314 (Part 1)
C314 (Part 2)
C315
C339
C340
C405
C408
C410
C421
C422
C922
C913
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE:
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service
after installation.
Installation
7. NOTE:
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro
ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini
ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE:
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4714
after installation.
Installation
7. NOTE:
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box
Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4719
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
C1035A
C1035B
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4724
C1035C
C2280A
C2280B (Part 1)
C2280B (Part 2)
C2280C
C2280D
C2280E
C2280F
C2280G
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4735
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart
Junction Box
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB)
C1035A
C1035B
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4747
C1035C
C2280A
C2280B (Part 1)
C2280B (Part 2)
C2280C
C2280D
C2280E
C2280F
C2280G
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Smart Junction Box
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment
Specifications
Alignment: Specifications Alignment Specifications
Alignment Specifications
Alignment: Specifications General Specifications

General Specifications

Alignment: Specifications Torque Specifications
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 4768
Alignment: Description and Operation
Wheel Alignment Angles
Camber
Negative And Positive Camber
Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or
negative and has a direct effect on tire wear.
Caster Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top
of strut and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the
vehicle the best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is
not related to tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable.
A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a
separate procedure on this vehicle. Front caster should fall within specification when the front
camber is adjusted.
Toe
Positive Toe (Toe In)
Positive Toe (Toe Out)
The vehicle toe setting:
^ affects tire wear and directional stability.
Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not
square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking.
Wander Wander is the tendency of the vehicle to require frequent, random left and right steering
wheel corrections to maintain a straight path down a level road.
Shimmy Shimmy, as experienced by the driver, is large, consistent, rotational oscillations of the
steering wheel resulting from large, side-to-side (lateral) tire/wheel movements.
Shimmy is usually experienced near 64 km/h (40 mph), and can begin or be amplified when the tire
contacts pot holes or irregularities in the road surface.
Nibble Sometimes confused with shimmy, nibble is a condition resulting from tire interaction with
various road surfaces and experienced by the driver as small rotational oscillations of the steering
wheel.
Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering Poor returnability and sticky steering are used to describe the
poor return of the steering wheel to center after a turn or steering correction.
Drift/Pull Pull is a tugging sensation felt by the hands on the steering wheel that must be overcome
to keep the vehicle going straight.
Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with the hands off the steering wheel.
^ A vehicle-related drift/pull on a flat road causes a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead
path and requires constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect.
^ Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (wind or road crown).
Poor Groove Feel Poor groove feel is characterized by little or no buildup of turning effort felt in the
steering wheel as the wheel is rocked slowly left and right within very small turns around center or
straight-ahead (under 20 degrees of steering wheel turn). Effort may be said to be "flat on-center."
^ Under 20 degrees of turn, most of the turning effort that builds up comes from the mesh of the
gear teeth in the steering gear. In this range, the steering wheel is not yet turned enough to feel the
effort from the self-aligning forces at the road wheel or tire patch.
^ In the diagnosis of a driveability problem, it is important to understand the difference between

wander and poor groove feel.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment
Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment
Camber and Caster Adjustment
Front Camber and Caster Adjustment
Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts.
3. Push the front strut mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired position to set the
camber and caster. Both camber and caster for the
front suspension are adjustable. For additional information, refer to Steps 4 and 5.
Use the following table for LH side camber and or caster adjustment.
Caster Adjustment > Page 4773
Difference From Standard Position (LH Side)
Use the following table for the RH side camber and or caster adjustment.
6. Install the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts.

7. Recalibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Diagnosis and
Testing for steering wheel position sensor
calibration. See: Steering/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Steering Wheel

Position Sensor Calibration
Alignment: Service and Repair Front Toe Adjustment
Front Toe Adjustment
1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel. 2. Turn the engine off. Hold the steering wheel in
the straight-ahead position using a suitable holding device. 3. Check the toe settings following the
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
4. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the front wheel spindle tie rod is
rotated.
Remove the steering gear bellows clamp(s).
5. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut(s).
^ Clean and lubricate the nut(s) and front wheel spindle tie-rod threads.
6. Rotate the front wheel spindle tie rods to increase or decrease the front toe.
7. CAUTION: Hold the tie-rod end stationary with a wrench while tightening the nut, or damage to
the boot can occur.
NOTE: Do not disturb the toe settings while tightening the nut(s).
Tighten the tie-rod end jam nut(s) to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).

8. Install the steering gear bellows clamp(s).
9. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
Testing. See: Steering/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Steering Wheel

Alignment: Service and Repair Ride Height Measurement
Ride Height Measurement
1. Position a suitable surface gauge (such as Starrett 57D Surface Gauge), on a flat, level surface
and adjust the gauge's arm until the scriber point is
located in the center of the lower ball joint bolt. ^
surface gauge position (measurement A).
3. Position the surface gauge on the same flat, level surface as used in Step 1, adjust the gauge's
arm until the scriber point is located in the center of
the forward lower arm bolt. ^
surface gauge position (measurement B).
5. Subtract measurement A from measurement B to obtain the front ride height (C).

1. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the shock absorber lower
bolt (measurement A). 2. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the
lower arm inner bolt (measurement B). 3. Subtract measurement B from measurement A to obtain
the rear ride height (C).
Alignment: Service and Repair Rear Toe Adjustment
Rear Toe Adjustment
1. CAUTION: The cam nut and cam bolt area must be free of foreign material to make sure of
correct clamping.
NOTE: Clean the general area of the joint to prevent foreign material from entering the joint. Clean
the area using only mild liquids.
NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal, at-rest position.
Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment.
2. NOTE: Do not remove the rear knuckle cam nut and wheel knuckle bolts. If removed, clean the
serrations in the bushing sleeve with a wire brush
and install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut.
Loosen the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts.
3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification.
4. Tighten the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts.
^ Using a suitable tool, hold the adjustment cam nut stationary while tightening the rear wheel
knuckle bolt.

Testing. See: Steering/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Steering Wheel

Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations
View 151-1
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4787
View 151-13
C1463A
C1463B
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
maneuvers.
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Training
Special Tool(s)
the valve stem.

successful.
Activation
Special Tool(s)
pressure sensor.
times.
Chart
in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Disassembly
accordingly.
instructed.
Assembly
installation.

Cradle

Material
Disassembly
accordingly.
base part number.
the worm gear.
and prying up.
Assembly
valve stem.
of the wheel.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair
Wheel Knuckle
Removal
1. Remove the brake disc. 2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 3. Using the special tool,
separate the outer CV joint spindle from the wheel hub.
4. Remove the cotter pin and the tie-rod end-to-knuckle nut.
5. CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle or damage
to the wheel knuckle can result.
CAUTION: Do not damage the tie-rod end boot while installing the special tool.
Using the special tool, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle.
6. Remove the lower ball joint pinch bolt nut and the pinch bolt. 7. Remove the anti-lock brake
system (ABS) wheel speed sensor bolt and position the sensor aside.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
8. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 9. Remove the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts, bolts
and the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle and install the 2 strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts.
2. Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the lower ball joint pinch
bolt and nut.
4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor and the bolt.
5. Position the tie-rod end into the wheel knuckle and install the tie-rod end-to-knuckle nut and a
new cotter pin.
6. Using a suitable halfshaft installer, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 7. Install the brake
disc.
Install the new front wheel hub nut. ^
9. Check and, if necessary, align the front end.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
Power Steering Fluid
This vehicle is equipped with an Electric Power-Assisted Steering (EPAS) System. There is no fluid
reservoir to check or fill.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component
View 151-1
View 151-13
C1463A
C1463B
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module
View 151-1
View 151-13
C1463A
C1463B
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
maneuvers.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

latches.
impact sensor(s).
the cover.

System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
4841
fail to light.
- flash.
scan tool.
4842
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Deactivation
WARNING: -
NOTE: -
from the SPDJB.
latches.
impact sensor(s).
4843
wheel.

4844
4845
4846
Reactivation

4847
4848
clip.
9. CAUTION:
NOTE: -
clips into the I/P.

4849
14. NOTE:
install the cover.
fail to light.
- flash.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Adaptive Collapsible Steering Column
Adaptive Collapsible Steering Column: Service and Repair
DEPLOYABLE STEERING COLUMN - IN-VEHICLE DEPLOYMENT
WARNING: Deploy all supplemental restraint system (SRS) devices (air bags, pretensioners, load
limiters, etc.) outdoors with all personnel at least 9.14 meters (30 feet) away to make sure of
personal safety. Due to the loud report which occurs when an SRS device is deployed, hearing
protection is required. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
1. Depower the SRS.
2. NOTE: It may be necessary to lower or remove the deployable steering column from the
instrument panel to access the deployable steering
column electrical connector.
Access the deployable steering column electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If the deployable steering column does not have a hard-wired pigtail, it will be necessary
to cut the wires and connector(s) from the
vehicle wire harness and reconnect to the deployable steering column.
Cut each of the deployable steering column wires, leaving at least 4 inches to work with.
4. Remove any sheathing (if present) and strip the insulation from the ends of the cut wires. 5.
Make a jumper harness to deploy the deployable steering column.
- Obtain 2 wires (20 gauge minimum) at least 9.14 m (30 ft) long and strip both ends of each wire.
- At one end of the jumper harness, connect the wires together.
6. Using the end of the jumper harness that the wires are not connected together, attach each wire
of the jumper harness to each wire of the
deployable steering column. Use tape or other insulating material to make sure that the leads do
not make contact with each other.
7. Remain at least 9.14 m (30 ft) away from the deployable steering column. 8. From the end of the
jumper harness that is not connected to the deployable steering column, disconnect the 2 wires of
the jumper harness from
each other.
9. Deploy the deployable steering column by touching the ends of the 2 wires of the jumper
harness to the terminals of a 12-volt battery.
10. To allow for cooling, wait at least 10 minutes before approaching the deployed steering column.
11. Dispose of the deployed steering column in the same manner as any other part to be scrapped.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Column Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 >
Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Steering Column Lock: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09

SERVICE PROCEDURE
ignition key.
Parts Block
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Column Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 >
Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 4861
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Column Lock: > 09-2-8 > Feb > 09 > Steering -
Chime With Key Out/Column Won't Lock
Steering Column Lock: Customer Interest Steering - Chime With Key Out/Column Won't Lock
TSB 09-2-8
02/09/09
KEY-IN-IGNITION WARNING CHIME - KEY REMOVED - STEERING WHEEL NOT LOCKING
FORD: 2008 Focus, Escape Hybrid, Escape
ISSUE Some 2008 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid and Focus vehicles may
exhibit an ignition key chime that continues to chime with the door open and key out of the ignition
and/or steering wheel that will not lock.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY LOCKS AT THE 12 O'CLOCK POSITION.
Install a revised steering column lock module following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-05
for Steering Column Lock Module replacement.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, Focus: Install revised Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use
With 11582A, 3564A, 3600A, 12650D, 12651D16, 14056D5, 14056D6, 13300D, 13300D4)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 42
Disclaimer
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Column Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09
> Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Steering Column Lock: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign.
Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09

SERVICE PROCEDURE
ignition key.
Parts Block
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Column Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09
> Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 4871
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Column Lock: > 09-2-8 > Feb > 09 >
Steering - Chime With Key Out/Column Won't Lock
Steering Column Lock: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Chime With Key Out/Column
Won't Lock
TSB 09-2-8
02/09/09
KEY-IN-IGNITION WARNING CHIME - KEY REMOVED - STEERING WHEEL NOT LOCKING
FORD: 2008 Focus, Escape Hybrid, Escape
ISSUE Some 2008 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid and Focus vehicles may
exhibit an ignition key chime that continues to chime with the door open and key out of the ignition
and/or steering wheel that will not lock.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY LOCKS AT THE 12 O'CLOCK POSITION.
Install a revised steering column lock module following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-05
for Steering Column Lock Module replacement.
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, Focus: Install revised Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use
With 11582A, 3564A, 3600A, 12650D, 12651D16, 14056D5, 14056D6, 13300D, 13300D4)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 42
Disclaimer
Steering Column Lock: Service and Repair
Steering Column Lock Module

CAUTION: Do not remove the ignition lock cylinder and the ignition switch at the same time or
damage to the column may result.
All vehicles
1. Remove the clockspring. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. 2. Disconnect the
multi-function switch electrical connector. 3. Disconnect the ignition switch electrical connector. 4.
Detach the 2 electrical harness pin-type retainers. 5. Remove the 3 multi-function switch carrier
bolts.
^ Remove the multi-function switch and carrier as an assembly.
Vehicles equipped with passive anti-theft system (PATS)
6. Disconnect the passive anti-theft system (PATS) transceiver electrical connector. 7. Remove the
PATS transceiver.
All vehicles 8. Remove the lock cylinder. For additional information, refer to Locks. 9. Position the
steering column to the full downward position to access the lock module bolt.
10. NOTE: Clean all metal shavings and foreign material after cutting a slot into the steering
column lock module bolt.
Cut a slot into the head of the steering column lock module bolt.
11. Remove and discard the steering column lock module bolt.
^ To install, tighten the new bolt until the head of the bolt shears off.
12. Remove the steering column lock module. 13. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Align the ribs on the steering column lock module with the window of the steering column tube.
^ Align the locating pin with the slot on the locating bracket of the steering column.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Damper: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In
Cold Temps
Steering Damper: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
TSB 10-18-8
09/27/10
VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the
steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F
(-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A
steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-04.
2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent.
3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency.
a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to
temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal
tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04.
b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to
Step 4.
c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure.
Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM,
Section 100-04.
4. Install a revised steering wheel damper.
a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel.
c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering
damper. (Figure 1)
d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws.

Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Damper: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In
Cold Temps > Page 4886
e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
Parts Block
101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.

Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 42
Disclaimer
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel
Nibble In Cold Temps
Steering Damper: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
TSB 10-18-8
09/27/10
SERVICE PROCEDURE
204-04.
Step 4.
Section 100-04.
damper. (Figure 1)

Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel
Nibble In Cold Temps > Page 4892
Parts Block
101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.

101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 42
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Steering Gear: Service and Repair

Steering Gear
Special Tool(s)
Steering Gear - Exploded View
All vehicles
1. Remove the front wheels and tires. 2. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
^ Remove the ignition key.

Repair > Page 4896
3. CAUTION: Do not allow the steering wheel to rotate while the intermediate shaft is disconnected
or damage to the clockspring can
result. If there is evidence that the shaft has rotated, the clockspring must be removed and
recentered. For additional information, refer to Air Bag System.
Remove and discard the steering column coupling-to-steering gear bolt and disconnect the
coupling from the steering gear. ^
4. From the engine compartment, loosen the 2 steering gear bolts.
5. If equipped, remove the 3 pin-type retainers and the steering gear shield. 6. Remove and discard
the 2 outer tie-rod end nuts.
Using the special tool, separate the tie-rod ends from the wheel knuckles.
All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 8. Remove the rear transaxle insulator through bolt.
Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles with automatic transaxle - 2.3L 9. Remove the 3 transmission
damper bolts and the transmission damper.

Repair > Page 4897
All vehicles 10. Remove and discard the 2 steering gear bolts.
11. NOTE: For all wheel drive (AWD) vehicles, it is necessary to grasp the driveshaft by hand and
apply slight downward pressure to obtain
clearance for the removal of the steering gear.
Remove the steering gear from the LH side of the vehicle.
12. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 13. Check and, if necessary, align the front end.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
Steering Shaft: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
TSB 10-13-2
07/19/10
STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010
This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a
pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter
turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight
off the wheels.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE,

AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE
ON TURNS.
1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before
steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop.
a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal
characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not
apply.
b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2.
2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual
a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m).
101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern
DEALER CODING
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 4906
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3B676 14
Disclaimer
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
Steering Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
TSB 10-13-2
07/19/10
off the wheels.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE

ON TURNS.
apply.
101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
DEALER CODING
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns >
Page 4912
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3B676 14
Disclaimer
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08

082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect
TSB 08-19-2
09/29/08

SERVICE PROCEDURE
(DLC).
b. ID the vehicle.
12651D4)
Autolock/Autounlock Status > Page 4922
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Autolock/Autounlock Status > Page 4932
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Service Bulletins > Page 4933
Steering Shaft: Service and Repair

Steering Column Shaft

1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the LH instrument panel side finish panel.
3. Through the side finish panel opening, remove the ground wire eyelet bolt.
^ Position the 2 ground wire eyelets and wires aside.
4. Through the side finish panel opening, disconnect the 2 instrument panel wiring harness
electrical connectors and, if equipped, the battery
high-voltage jumper switch electrical connector. ^
Position the connectors and harnesses aside.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and rotate the steering wheel clockwise until the
steering column coupling-to- steering column bolt is
accessible.
6. Through the side finish panel opening, remove and discard the steering column
coupling-to-steering column bolt.
7. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key.
^ Rotate the steering wheel counter clockwise until the column locks.
8. CAUTION: Do not allow the steering column shaft to rotate while the lower shaft is disconnected
or damage to the clockspring can
result. If there is evidence that the shaft has rotated, the clockspring must be removed and
recentered. For additional information, refer to Air Bags Systems.
Separate the steering column coupling from the steering column.
9. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the steering column dash seal and clip-type retainers
during removal. Do not use excessive force
when compressing the retainers or the clips may be broken.
NOTE: The 2-piece steering column dash seal is serviced as an assembly.
From the engine compartment, using a suitable prying tool with a non-sharpened edge, compress
the steering column dash seal clip-type retainers toward the center of the seal and separate the
seal from the floorboard.
10. From the passenger compartment, slide the dash seal upwards on the steering column shaft.
11. Remove and discard the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt.
12. Remove the steering column shaft and dash seal. 13. Remove the steering column dash seal
from the shaft.
^ Inspect the dash seal and clip-type retainers for damage and, if necessary, install a new dash
seal.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering
Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
Steering Shaft Coupler: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
TSB 10-13-2
07/19/10
off the wheels.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE

ON TURNS.
apply.
101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
DEALER CODING
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering
Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 4944
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3B676 14
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering -
Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
Steering Shaft Coupler: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On
Turns
TSB 10-13-2
07/19/10
off the wheels.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE

ON TURNS.
apply.
101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
DEALER CODING
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering -
Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 4950
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3B676 14
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Wheel: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold
Temps
Steering Wheel: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
TSB 10-18-8
09/27/10
SERVICE PROCEDURE
204-04.
Step 4.
Section 100-04.
damper. (Figure 1)

Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Wheel: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold
Temps > Page 4959
Parts Block
101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.

101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 42
Disclaimer
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering
Wheel Is Loose
Steering Wheel: Customer Interest Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose
TSB 07-4-3
03/05/07
LEATHER - WRAPPED STEERING WHEEL - LEATHER COMING LOOSE
FORD: 2000-2005 Thunderbird 2000-2007 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2005-2007
Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2008 F-Super Duty
2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2008 Escape 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar 2005-2008 Escape
Hybrid 2007 Edge 2004-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2000-2007 Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 2000-2007 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX
MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan
2000-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2008 Mariner 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-3 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with leather-wrapped steering wheels may exhibit the leather
coming loose from the spoke area.
ACTION Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive to re-adhere the loose leather to the wheel spoke.
Refer to the following Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
IF RE-ADHERING LEATHER TO THE FRONT SIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY, OMIT
STEPS 1 AND 6. STEERING WHEEL/AIR BAG ASSEMBLY REMOVAL IS NECESSARY ONLY
WHEN REPAIRING LOOSE LEATHER ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL.
CAUTION
AVOID SKIN CONTACT WITH MOTORCRAFT INSTANT GEL ADHESIVE.

Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering
Wheel Is Loose > Page 4964
1. Remove the steering wheel (ONLY NECESSARY TO REPAIR BACKSIDE OF STEERING

WHEEL). Refer to Workshop Manual Sections 211-04 and 501-20B.
2. Fold loose leather out of the way.
3. Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive evenly over the wheel spoke.
4. Fold the leather back into its original position.
5. Smooth the leather tuck in for neat appearance, and apply pressure until the leather is bonded to
the wheel spoke (apply pressure for at least 30 seconds).
NOTE
THE ADHESIVE SHOULD BE COMPLETELY SET AFTER 5 MINUTES. DO NOT PULL ON THE
REPAIR AREA.
6. Reinstall steering wheel.
MT070403 Use SLIS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time

Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3600 33
Disclaimer
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel
Nibble In Cold Temps
Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
TSB 10-18-8
09/27/10
SERVICE PROCEDURE
204-04.
Step 4.
Section 100-04.
damper. (Figure 1)

Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel
Nibble In Cold Temps > Page 4970
Parts Block
101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.

101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 42
Disclaimer
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On
Steering Wheel Is Loose
Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is
Loose
TSB 07-4-3
03/05/07
LEATHER - WRAPPED STEERING WHEEL - LEATHER COMING LOOSE
FORD: 2000-2005 Thunderbird 2000-2007 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2005-2007
Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2008 F-Super Duty
2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2008 Escape 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar 2005-2008 Escape
Hybrid 2007 Edge 2004-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2000-2007 Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 2000-2007 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX
MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan
2000-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2008 Mariner 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-3 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with leather-wrapped steering wheels may exhibit the leather
coming loose from the spoke area.
ACTION Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive to re-adhere the loose leather to the wheel spoke.
Refer to the following Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
IF RE-ADHERING LEATHER TO THE FRONT SIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY, OMIT
STEPS 1 AND 6. STEERING WHEEL/AIR BAG ASSEMBLY REMOVAL IS NECESSARY ONLY
WHEN REPAIRING LOOSE LEATHER ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL.
CAUTION
AVOID SKIN CONTACT WITH MOTORCRAFT INSTANT GEL ADHESIVE.

Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On
Steering Wheel Is Loose > Page 4975
1. Remove the steering wheel (ONLY NECESSARY TO REPAIR BACKSIDE OF STEERING

WHEEL). Refer to Workshop Manual Sections 211-04 and 501-20B.
2. Fold loose leather out of the way.
3. Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive evenly over the wheel spoke.
4. Fold the leather back into its original position.
5. Smooth the leather tuck in for neat appearance, and apply pressure until the leather is bonded to
the wheel spoke (apply pressure for at least 30 seconds).
NOTE
THE ADHESIVE SHOULD BE COMPLETELY SET AFTER 5 MINUTES. DO NOT PULL ON THE
REPAIR AREA.
6. Reinstall steering wheel.
MT070403 Use SLIS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time

Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3600 33
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations >
Steering Wheel/Audio Control Switch
View 151-28
Steering Wheel/Audio Control Switch > Page 4978
View 151-28
Page 4979
Steering Wheel: Service and Repair
Steering Wheel
Special Tool(s)
1. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. 2.
Disconnect the steering wheel switch electrical connector from the clockspring.
Page 4980
^ Detach the steering wheel switch wiring from the retainers and position the wires aside.
3. Remove the steering wheel bolt.
4. CAUTION: Do not allow the special tool to damage the steering wheel switch wires and
connector while removing the steering wheel.
Using the special tool, remove the steering wheel.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod Boot > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Tie Rod Boot: Service and Repair
Steering Gear Boot
1. Remove the outer tie-rod end. 2. Remove the tie-rod end jam nut. 3. Remove and discard the 2
steering gear boot clamps and the steering gear boot. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications
Ball Joint: Specifications
Ball Joint Deflection .............................................................................................................................

.............................................. 0-0.2 mm (0-0.008 in)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications >
Page 4989
Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection
Ball Joint Inspection
1. Prior to inspecting the ball joints for wear, inspect the wheel bearings. Install a new wheel
bearing as necessary.
2. NOTE: In order to obtain accurate measurements, the suspension must be in full rebound with
the weight of the vehicle supported by the frame.
Raise and support the vehicle by the frame to allow the wheels to hang in the rebound position.
3. Inspect the ball joint and ball joint boot for damage.
^ If the ball joint or ball joint boot is damaged, install a new ball joint as necessary.
4. CAUTION: Do not use any tools or equipment to move the wheel and tire assembly or
suspension components while checking for relative
movement. Suspension damage may occur. The use of tools or equipment will also create relative
movement that may not exist when using hand force. Relative movement must be measured using
hand force only.
Inspect the ball joint for relative movement by alternately pulling downward and pushing upward on
the lower control arm by hand. Note any relative vertical movement between the wheel knuckle and
lower arm at the lower ball joint. ^
If relative movement is not felt or seen, the ball joint is OK. Do not install a new ball joint.
^ If relative movement is found, continue with Step 5.
5. NOTE: In order to obtain an accurate measurement, the dial indicator should be aligned as close
as possible with the vertical axis (center line) of
the ball joint.
To measure ball joint deflection, attach a suitable dial indicator with a flexible arm between the
lower control arm and the wheel knuckle or ball joint stud.
6. Measure the ball joint deflection while an assistant pushes up and pulls down on the lower
control arm, by hand.
^ If the deflection exceeds the specification, a new ball joint must be installed.
^ If the deflection meets the specification, no further action is required.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection
Control Arm Bushing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing
Inspection
TSB 09-5-1
03/23/09
LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING INSPECTION PROCEDURE
FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid
ISSUE Many states and Canadian provinces require annual safety inspections which include the
evaluation of suspension components. The information in this procedure is intended to assist the
technician performing the inspection with specific criteria for 2001-2009 Escape and Mariner lower
control arm (LCA) bushings and will prevent the unnecessary replacement of good components.
ACTION Inspect according to the procedure below.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
The LCA bushing is located at the rear of the front suspension lower control arm. The bushing is
identified as number 1 of Figure 1. The control arm is mounted in the front subframe with bolts
number 2 and number 3. The bushing is part of the LCA and cannot be serviced separately from
the arm.
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection > Page 4995
Figure 2 - Shows a new bushing prior to assembly into the control arm. Bolt number 2 passes
through the inner sleeve and the outer sleeve is pressed into the control arm. The rubber bushing
is bonded to both the inner and outer sleeves.
Figure 3 - Illustrates a generic bushing showing minor sur[ace cracks that do not adversely affect
the performance of the bushing. Bushings exhibiting sur[ace cracks with a depth less than 3/8" (10
mm) are acceptable and will continue to function normally. These do not require replacement.
Figure 4 - Illustrates a partial separation between the rubber and the outer sleeve. The bushing
may show signs of movement on the rubber surface, making the surface shiny. Bushings with a
separation or crack depth less than or equal to 3/8" (10 mm) are acceptable and meet all functional
requirements. These do not require replacement.
Bushings with a separation or crack greater than 3/8" (10 mm) in depth should be replaced. The
customer may hear a bang or clunk in the front suspension if there is enough separation for the
arm to contact the subframe. This does not affect the retention of the control arm to the vehicle as
the bushing is sandwiched in the subframe and held in place with the bolt. The vehicle can be
safely operated in this condition until the bushing is replaced.
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection > Page 4996
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair
Wheel Knuckle
Removal
1. Remove the brake disc. 2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 3. Using the special tool,
separate the outer CV joint spindle from the wheel hub.
4. Remove the cotter pin and the tie-rod end-to-knuckle nut.
CAUTION: Do not damage the tie-rod end boot while installing the special tool.
Using the special tool, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle.
6. Remove the lower ball joint pinch bolt nut and the pinch bolt. 7. Remove the anti-lock brake
system (ABS) wheel speed sensor bolt and position the sensor aside.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
8. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 9. Remove the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts, bolts
and the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle and install the 2 strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts.
2. Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the lower ball joint pinch
bolt and nut.
4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor and the bolt.
5. Position the tie-rod end into the wheel knuckle and install the tie-rod end-to-knuckle nut and a
new cotter pin.
6. Using a suitable halfshaft installer, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 7. Install the brake
disc.
9. Check and, if necessary, align the front end.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Wheel Knuckle - Disc Brakes
Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair Wheel Knuckle - Disc Brakes
Wheel Knuckle - Disc Brakes
Special Tool(s)
Removal
All vehicles
2. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
Remove and discard the wheel hub nut.
All vehicles 3. Remove the parking brake shoes.
AWD vehicles
4. CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to separate the outer constant velocity (CV) joint from the hub.
Damage to the threads and internal
CV joint components can result.
Using the special tools, separate the outer CV joint from the wheel hub.
Vehicles with anti-lock brake system (ABS)
5. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor bolt and the 2 ABS wheel speed sensor harness bolts. 6.
Remove and position the wheel speed sensor and harness aside.
All vehicles
7. Remove the coil spring. 8. Remove and discard the lower ball joint nut.
9. CAUTION: The joint area must be free of foreign material to make sure of correct clamping.
Index-mark the notch on the cam nut adjustment cam.

Repair > Wheel Knuckle - Disc Brakes > Page 5005
10. Remove and discard the wheel knuckle bolt. 11. Remove and discard the cam nut. 12. Remove
the wheel knuckle.
Installation
All vehicles
NOTE: The joint surfaces and the bushing sleeve serrations must be clean before assembly. Clean
the joint surfaces and the bushing sleeve serrations with a wire brush.
NOTE: Align the notch on the cam nut with the index marks.
Position the wheel knuckle and install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut.
2. Using a suitable tool, hold the cam nut stationary while tightening the wheel knuckle bolt.
3. Position the lower ball joint into the wheel knuckle and install the lower ball joint nut.
4. Install the coil spring.
Vehicles with ABS 5. Position the ABS wheel speed sensor harness and the sensor. 6. Install the
ABS wheel speed sensor bolt and the 2 ABS wheel speed sensor harness bolts.
All vehicles 7. Install the parking brake shoes.
AWD vehicles 8. Using a suitable halfshaft installation tool, install the halfshaft.
All vehicles 10. Check and, if necessary, align the rear end.
Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair Wheel Knuckle - Drum Brakes
Wheel Knuckle - Drum Brakes
Special Tool(s)
Removal
All vehicles 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Remove the brake shoes. 3. Remove the parking
brake cable bracket-to-control arm bolt. 4. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the brake
backing plate.
^ Remove the parking brake cable from the brake backing plate.
5. Disconnect the brake tube from the wheel cylinder and remove the brake tube bracket bolt.
Vehicles equipped with anti-lock brake system (ABS) 6. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor bolt
and the 2 ABS wheel speed sensor harness bolts. 7. Remove and position the wheel speed sensor
and harness aside.
All vehicles 8. Remove the coil spring.

9. Remove the lower ball joint nut.
Index-mark the notch on the cam nut adjustment cam.
11. Remove and discard the wheel knuckle bolt. 12. Remove and discard the cam nut. 13. Remove
the wheel knuckle.
Installation
All vehicles
NOTE: Align the notch on the cam nut with the index marks.
Position the wheel knuckle and install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut.
2. Using a suitable tool, hold the cam nut stationary while tightening the wheel knuckle bolt.
3. Position the lower ball joint into the wheel knuckle and install the lower ball joint nut.
4. Install the coil spring.
Vehicles with ABS 5. Position the ABS wheel speed sensor harness and the sensor. 6. Install the
ABS wheel speed sensor bolt and the 2 ABS wheel speed sensor harness bolts.
All vehicles 7. Connect the brake tube to the wheel cylinder.
8. Install the brake tube bracket bolt.
9. Connect the parking brake cable to the brake backing plate and install the parking brake cable
bracket bolt.
10. Install the brake shoes. 11. Bleed the brake system. 12. Check and, if necessary, align the rear
end.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Bushing >
Stabilizer Bushing: Service and Repair
Stabilizer Bar Bushing
CAUTION: When installing the stabilizer bar bushings, make sure the bushings are correctly
oriented with the bushing flanges in the up position and the bushing split pointing to the front of the
vehicle.
Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the 2 bolts and the stabilizer bar bushing bracket.
3. NOTE: Inspect the stabilizer bar bushing for wear. If necessary, install a new part.
Remove the stabilizer bar bushing.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 >
Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps
Stabilizer Link: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps
TSB 09-24-2
12/14/09
CLICK/POP NOISE FROM FRONT STABILIZER BAR
END LINK AREA WHEN DRIVING OVER BUMPS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/9/2009
built on or before 10/9/2009 may exhibit a click/pop noise from the front end when going over
bumps. This may be due to the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears, can the click/pop noise be isolated to the stabilizer bar end links?
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-00 diagnostics.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 2.
2. Inspect the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment nuts for signs of looseness. Is any
evidence present of loose upper nuts?
a. No - Replace stabilizer bar end links and install revised upper nuts per WSM, Section 204-01.
NOTE
THE REVISED, TALLER NUTS CANNOT BE INSTALLED ON THE STABILIZER BAR END LINK
LOWER ATTACHMENT.
b. Yes - Remove and replace both upper nuts with revised, taller nuts per WSM, Section 204-01.
Torque to 46 lb-ft (63 N.m). It is not necessary to
replace the stabilizer bar end link.
Parts Block
092402A 2005-2010 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid: Diagnose With Chassis Ears And Road Test,
Inspect Stabilizer Bar End Links, Replace Four (4) Stabilizer End Link Nuts Or Stabilizer Bar End
Links (Do Not Use With Any
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 >
Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps > Page 5020
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5K483 24
Disclaimer
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec >
09 > Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps
Stabilizer Link: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On
Bumps
TSB 09-24-2
12/14/09
CLICK/POP NOISE FROM FRONT STABILIZER BAR
END LINK AREA WHEN DRIVING OVER BUMPS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/9/2009
built on or before 10/9/2009 may exhibit a click/pop noise from the front end when going over
bumps. This may be due to the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears, can the click/pop noise be isolated to the stabilizer bar end links?
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-00 diagnostics.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 2.
2. Inspect the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment nuts for signs of looseness. Is any
evidence present of loose upper nuts?
a. No - Replace stabilizer bar end links and install revised upper nuts per WSM, Section 204-01.
NOTE
THE REVISED, TALLER NUTS CANNOT BE INSTALLED ON THE STABILIZER BAR END LINK
LOWER ATTACHMENT.
b. Yes - Remove and replace both upper nuts with revised, taller nuts per WSM, Section 204-01.
Torque to 46 lb-ft (63 N.m). It is not necessary to
replace the stabilizer bar end link.
Parts Block
092402A 2005-2010 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid: Diagnose With Chassis Ears And Road Test,
Inspect Stabilizer Bar End Links, Replace Four (4) Stabilizer End Link Nuts Or Stabilizer Bar End
Links (Do Not Use With Any
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec >
09 > Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps > Page 5026
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5K483 24
Disclaimer
Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair
Stabilizer Bar Link
2. NOTE: Use the hex holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or
installing the stabilizer bar link nut.
Remove the upper stabilizer bar link nut. ^
installing the stabilizer link nut.
Remove the lower stabilizer bar link nut. ^
4. NOTE: Inspect the stabilizer bar link ball joints and boots for wear. If necessary, install new
parts.
Remove the stabilizer bar link.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS

CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises >
Page 5037
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.

NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises >
Page 5038
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame -
Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5044
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE

NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake
TSB 08-20-11
10/13/08
FORD: 2008 Escape
SERVICE PROCEDURE
and go traffic.
NOTE

SOURCE.
PROCEDURE A
PROCEDURE B
2)
Parts Block
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE

2200 42
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 5053
Front Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE

NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10


SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Adjust
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Front Subframe: Description and Operation
FRONT SUBFRAME
The front subframe is bolted to the body and is used to:
- aid in structural support.
- provide mounting surfaces for the front suspension control arms.
- provide a mounting point for the engine isolators.
- provide the mounting surface for the steering gear.
- provide the mounting surface for the sway bar.

Front Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - FRONT
Special Tool(s)
NOTE: Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) shown, all other vehicles similar.
Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Shown (Part 1)

NOTE: Escape and Mariner only.

Escape And Mariner Only
NOTE: Escape Hybrid only.

Escape Hybrid Only
All vehicles
NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of
vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the
same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement
part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during
reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Turn the wheels to the straight ahead
position and remove the key.
Hybrid vehicles 3. Disconnect the high-voltage traction battery. For additional information, refer to
Hybrid Drive Systems. 4. Remove the rear transmission insulator and retainer.
All vehicles 5. Remove the front tires.
6. NOTICE:
- Do not reuse the Constant Velocity (CV) joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and washers or
- Do not reuse the bolts and cap straps for the center U-joint. Install new bolts and cap straps or
NOTE: Index-mark the front driveshaft to the center bearing.
Remove the front driveshaft, if equipped. -
Remove the 6 front driveshaft-to-transfer case bolts and washers. Discard the bolts and washers. -
- Remove the 4 U-joint cap strap bolts and 2 cap straps and remove the front driveshaft. Discard
the U-joint cap strap bolts and cap straps. -
7. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) and the lateral support crossmember.
8. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe (2.3L) or the dual converter Y-pipe (3.0L). 9. Remove the 6
bolts and the scrivet from the LH splash shield and remove the splash shield.
10. Remove the engine support crossmember front insulator bolt.

11. Remove the 2 engine support crossmember bolts.
Hybrid vehicles only 12. Remove the 2 bolts from the lower transmission insulator and retainer
bracket.
All vehicles 13. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember. Discard the nut.
All vehicles except hybrid 14. Remove the rear transaxle support isolator through bolt.

All vehicles 15. Remove the power steering coupler bolt. Discard the bolt.
- To install, tighten to 63Nm (46 lb-ft).
16. Remove the 2 outer tie-rod end nuts. Discard the nuts.
17. Using the Tie-Rod End Remover, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle.
18. NOTE: Use the hex-holding fixture to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing and
Remove the 2 lower stabilizer bar link nuts. Discard the nuts. -
19. Remove the 2 lower control arm ball joint pinch bolt nuts and pinch bolts. Discard the nuts and
the bolts.
20. Using a suitable lift, support the front subframe.
21. NOTE:
- Do not allow the front subframe rear bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing.
- When installing the front subframe rear bolts, make sure both of the front subframe rear bolts are
fully engaged in their cage nuts before tightening to specification.
Loosen the 2 front subframe rear bolts. -
22. Remove the 2 front subframe nuts.
23. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same
time the subframe is lowered.
With an assistant, remove the front subframe.
- Transfer the components as necessary.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5075
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE

NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5082
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE

NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 5084
Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE

NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10


SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Adjust
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5098
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE

NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame -
Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE

NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 5107
Rear Subframe: By Symptom
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE

NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10


SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Adjust
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Rear Subframe: Description and Operation
REAR SUBFRAME
The rear subframe is bolted to the body and is used to:
- provide mounting surfaces for the rear suspension control arms.
- provide mounting surfaces for the rear differential (all-wheel drive [AWD]).
Rear Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - REAR
Removal
All vehicles
1. NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance
of vital parts and systems and their failure can
result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if
installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute
design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct
retention of these parts.
With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
Vehicles with all All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 2. Remove the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles
3. Remove the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts. 4. Remove the 4 bolts and position the 4 rear
control arms aside.
5. Remove and discard the exhaust hanger from the subframe.
6. With an assistant, remove the 4 bolts and the rear subframe.
Installation
All vehicles 1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and install the bolts.
- To install, tighten the rear bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).

- To install, tighten the front bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
2. Install a new exhaust hanger on the subframe.
3. NOTE: The vehicle must be at ride height before tightening the bolts.
Position the 4 rear control arms into the subframe. -
4. Install the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts.
Vehicles with AWD 5. Install the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles 6. Tighten the 4 rear control arms bolts.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Rear Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE

NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE

NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 5134
Rear Subframe Mount: By Symptom
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE

NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10


SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Adjust
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Removal and Replacement
Front
Strut and Spring Assembly
Strut And Spring Assembly

Removal
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
1. NOTE: Verify the steering wheel is in the unlocked position before removal.
Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Remove the brake jounce hose clip. 3. Pull the brake jounce hose downward slightly to remove
the hose from the bracket and position the brake jounce hose aside.
4. Remove the anti-lock brake system (ABS) wheel speed sensor harness bolt.
Remove the upper stabilizer bar link nut.
6. Remove the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts and bolts.
7. NOTE: Reference mark the 4 strut upper bushing plate nuts.
Remove the 4 strut upper bushing nuts.
8. CAUTION: Do not allow the axle shaft to move outboard. Over-extension of the tripod CV joint
can result in the separation of internal
parts, causing failure of the axle shaft.
Remove the strut and spring assembly.
9. For additional information on the disassembly and assembly of the strut and spring assembly,
refer to Strut and Spring Assembly Disassembly and
Assembly. See: Overhaul
Installation
1. Position the strut and spring assembly upper mounting plate into the inner fender. 2. Align the 4
strut upper bushing nuts to the reference marks.
3. Install the 2 strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts.

4. Install the upper stabilizer bar link nut.
5. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor harness bolt.
6. Position the brake jounce hose to the bracket and install the brake jounce hose clip. 7. Check
the front end alignment and adjust as necessary.
Rear
Spring
Removal
All vehicles
1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Remove the brake hose bracket-to-wheel knuckle bolt.
Vehicles with drum brakes 3. Disconnect the brake tube from the wheel cylinder and remove the
brake tube bracket.
Vehicles with disc brakes
4. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose
can occur.
Remove the 2 brake caliper guide bolts and position the brake caliper aside. ^

All vehicles 5. Support the wheel knuckle and remove and discard the upper ball joint nut. 6.
Remove and discard the lower shock absorber nut, washer and bolt. 7. Remove and discard the
upper arm inner bolt and remove the upper arm.
^ Loosen the lower arm inner bolt.
8. NOTE: Note the position of the coil spring insulator and coil spring for installation.
Carefully lower the wheel knuckle support.
9. Remove the coil spring.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Align the coil spring and coil spring insulator to the previously noted position. 2. Carefully raise
the wheel knuckle support. 3. Position the upper control arm and install the upper arm inner bolt.
^ Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft) with the weight of the vehicle on the wheels and tires.
4. Install the lower shock absorber bolt, washer and nut.
5. Install the upper ball joint nut and remove the wheel knuckle support.
Vehicles with disc brakes 6. Position the brake caliper and install the 2 brake caliper guide pin
bolts.
Vehicles with drum brakes 7. Connect the brake tube fitting to the wheel cylinder.
8. Install the brake tube bracket bolt.
All vehicles 9. Install the brake hose bracket-to-wheel knuckle bolt.
Vehicles with drum brakes 10. Bleed the brake system.

Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Overhaul

NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench on the nut.
Mount the strut and spring assembly in a suitable spring compressor.
2. Compress the coil spring enough to relieve the tension on the strut assembly. 3. Remove the
strut piston rod-to-bushing nut.
^ To assemble, tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
4. Remove the strut. 5. Remove the lower coil spring insulator.

6. Remove the coil spring. 7. Remove the upper coil spring insulator.
8. NOTE: During assembly, assemble the bearing plate to the strut so the arrow on the bearing
plate points to the outboard side of the vehicle when
the strut is installed.
Remove the bearing plate.
9. Remove the bearing.
10. Remove the strut upper bushing. 11. Remove the dust boot and the bumper. 12. To assemble,
reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 >
Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Customer Interest Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
TSB 09-6-5
04/06/09
NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA
ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner
Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area
during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009
may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while
driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch,
thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut
area during slow parking lot type maneuvers?
a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00
diagnostics.
b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure
and install new dust boot designed for this
concern.
d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM,
Section 204-00 diagnostics.
2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02.
b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight
down, out of the upper spring seat.
c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover.
d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce
bumper itself.
e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut.
f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009).

a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01.
b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01.
Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 5156
C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot.
(3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself.
d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01.
e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service
Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With
1007D, 18124A)
090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots,
Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears
and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A)
090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In
Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And
Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 5157
Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5,
2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18A179 07
Disclaimer
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5
> Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
TSB 09-6-5
04/06/09
NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA
ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner
Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area
during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009
may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while
driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch,
thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut
area during slow parking lot type maneuvers?
a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00
diagnostics.
b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure
and install new dust boot designed for this
concern.
d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM,
Section 204-00 diagnostics.
2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02.
b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight
down, out of the upper spring seat.
c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover.
d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce
bumper itself.
e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut.
f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009).

a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01.
b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01.
> Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 5163
C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot.
(3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself.
d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01.
e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service
Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With
1007D, 18124A)
090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots,
Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears
and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A)
090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In
Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And
> Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 5164
Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5,
2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18A179 07
Disclaimer
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Diagrams
Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly - Exploded View
Shock Absorber And Spring Assembly - (Exploded View)

Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Removal and Replacement
Front Suspension

Removal
1. NOTE: Verify the steering wheel is in the unlocked position before removal.
Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Remove the brake jounce hose clip. 3. Pull the brake jounce hose downward slightly to remove
the hose from the bracket and position the brake jounce hose aside.
4. Remove the anti-lock brake system (ABS) wheel speed sensor harness bolt.
Remove the upper stabilizer bar link nut.
6. Remove the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts and bolts.
7. NOTE: Reference mark the 4 strut upper bushing plate nuts.
Remove the 4 strut upper bushing nuts.
8. CAUTION: Do not allow the axle shaft to move outboard. Over-extension of the tripod CV joint
can result in the separation of internal
parts, causing failure of the axle shaft.
Remove the strut and spring assembly.
9. For additional information on the disassembly and assembly of the strut and spring assembly,
refer to Strut and Spring Assembly Disassembly and
Assembly. See: Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf )/Service and Repair/Overhaul
Installation
1. Position the strut and spring assembly upper mounting plate into the inner fender. 2. Align the 4
strut upper bushing nuts to the reference marks.
3. Install the 2 strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts.
4. Install the upper stabilizer bar link nut.
5. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor harness bolt.
6. Position the brake jounce hose to the bracket and install the brake jounce hose clip. 7. Check
the front end alignment and adjust as necessary.
Rear Suspension
Shock Absorber
1. Remove the rear quarter trim panel. For additional information, refer to Trim Panel. 2. Remove
the wheel and tire. 3. Remove and discard the upper shock absorber nuts, washer and bushing.
4. Remove and discard the lower shock absorber nut, washer and bolt.

5. Remove the shock absorber and the bushing. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Overhaul

NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench on the nut.
Mount the strut and spring assembly in a suitable spring compressor.
2. Compress the coil spring enough to relieve the tension on the strut assembly. 3. Remove the
strut piston rod-to-bushing nut.
^ To assemble, tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
4. Remove the strut. 5. Remove the lower coil spring insulator.

6. Remove the coil spring. 7. Remove the upper coil spring insulator.
8. NOTE: During assembly, assemble the bearing plate to the strut so the arrow on the bearing
plate points to the outboard side of the vehicle when
the strut is installed.
Remove the bearing plate.
9. Remove the bearing.
10. Remove the strut upper bushing. 11. Remove the dust boot and the bumper. 12. To assemble,
reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams

Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front

and Repair > Front > Page 5176
Removal
bearing.
wheel knuckle.
Installation

Wheel Bearing

Removal
Installation
wheel bearing.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information >
Specifications > Front

.................................................... 300 Nm (222 lb-ft)

Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information >
Specifications > Front > Page 5187

..................................................... 290 Nm (214 lb-ft)

Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information >
JACKING AND LIFTING
WARNING:
CAUTION:

Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Training
Special Tool(s)
the valve stem.
Training > Page 5197

successful.
Training > Page 5198
Activation
Special Tool(s)
pressure sensor.
times.
Chart
in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Disassembly
accordingly.
instructed.
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor >
Page 5201
Assembly
installation.

Page 5202
Page 5203
Cradle

Material
Page 5204
Disassembly
accordingly.
base part number.
the worm gear.
and prying up.
Assembly
Page 5205
valve stem.
of the wheel.
Page 5206
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure
Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
illuminate.
SJB.

Procedures
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Training
Special Tool(s)
the valve stem.
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page
5215

successful.
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page
5216
Activation
Special Tool(s)
pressure sensor.
times.
Chart
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Disassembly
accordingly.
instructed.
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 5219
Assembly
installation.

Cradle
Material
Disassembly
accordingly.
base part number.
the worm gear.
and prying up.
Assembly
valve stem.
of the wheel.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises
Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises
TSB 09-5-8
03/23/09

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE POWERTRAIN.
noise.
Parts Block
090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr.

1015D)
090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs.
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 5233
Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs.
090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
1007 07
Disclaimer
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises
TSB 09-5-8
03/23/09

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE POWERTRAIN.
noise.
Parts Block
090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr.

1015D)
090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs.
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises >
Page 5239
Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D)
090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs.
090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
1007 07
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Diagrams


Removal
bearing.
wheel knuckle.
Installation

Wheel Bearing

Removal
Installation
wheel bearing.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information
> Specifications > Front

.................................................... 300 Nm (222 lb-ft)

Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information
> Specifications > Front > Page 5256

..................................................... 290 Nm (214 lb-ft)

Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Specifications
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Wheel lug nuts .....................................................................................................................................

...................................................... 133 Nm (98 lb-ft)
Tighten the wheel nuts in a star pattern

Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front
Wheel Studs
1. Remove the wheel bearing and hub. 2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel stud from the
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear
Wheel Studs
1. Remove the wheel bearing and hub. 2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel studs from the
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 10-8-6 > May > 10 > A/C -
Side To Side Temperature Variations
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Customer Interest A/C - Side To Side Temperature Variations
TSB 10-8-6
05/10/10
CLIMATE CONTROL TEMPERATURE VARIATION FROM SIDE TO SIDE-BUILT BEFORE

12/17/2008
This article supersedes TSB 09-12-6 to update the Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built before
12/17/2008 may exhibit intermittent or erratic side to side temperature difference and/or temp
fluctuation from the climate control vents. The concern may be with the temperature blend door
actuator.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove temperature blend door actuator(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412-01.
2. Inspect the 5 digit manufacturer's date code on the temperature blend door actuator. It will be
the last 5 digits on the second line of manufacturer's
data. The first three digits equal day of year. The last two digits equal year. (Figure 1)
a. If the part number is 8L84-19E616-EA and the date code is 30708 or lower - replace the
temperature blend door actuator assembly.
b. If the part number is 8L84-19E616-EA and the date code is 30808 or higher - reinstall the
actuator and continue with normal diagnostics per
WSM, Section 412-00.
c. If the part number is something other than 8L84-19E616-EA - reinstall the actuator and continue
with normal diagnostics per WSM, Section
412-00.
NOTE
IF THE VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (DATC),

AND EITHER ONE OF THE ACTUATORS EXHIBITS THIS CONCERN AND HAS SUSPECT
DATE CODE, THEN REPLACE BOTH RIGHT (RH) AND LEFT HAND (LH) ACTUATORS AS A
SET.
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 10-8-6 > May > 10 > A/C -
Side To Side Temperature Variations > Page 5273
Parts Block
100806A 2008 Escape, Mariner, 2.3 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Right Blend Door Actuator Electronic
Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
100806B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2.8 Hrs
Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Both Right And Left Blend Door
Actuator Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100806B 2008 Escape, Mariner, 2.4 Hrs.
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19E616 42
Disclaimer
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 10-8-6 > May >
10 > A/C - Side To Side Temperature Variations
Air Door Actuator / Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Side To Side Temperature
Variations
TSB 10-8-6
05/10/10
CLIMATE CONTROL TEMPERATURE VARIATION FROM SIDE TO SIDE-BUILT BEFORE

12/17/2008
This article supersedes TSB 09-12-6 to update the Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built before
12/17/2008 may exhibit intermittent or erratic side to side temperature difference and/or temp
fluctuation from the climate control vents. The concern may be with the temperature blend door
actuator.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove temperature blend door actuator(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412-01.
2. Inspect the 5 digit manufacturer's date code on the temperature blend door actuator. It will be
the last 5 digits on the second line of manufacturer's
data. The first three digits equal day of year. The last two digits equal year. (Figure 1)
a. If the part number is 8L84-19E616-EA and the date code is 30708 or lower - replace the
temperature blend door actuator assembly.
b. If the part number is 8L84-19E616-EA and the date code is 30808 or higher - reinstall the
actuator and continue with normal diagnostics per
c. If the part number is something other than 8L84-19E616-EA - reinstall the actuator and continue
with normal diagnostics per WSM, Section
412-00.
NOTE
IF THE VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (DATC),

AND EITHER ONE OF THE ACTUATORS EXHIBITS THIS CONCERN AND HAS SUSPECT
DATE CODE, THEN REPLACE BOTH RIGHT (RH) AND LEFT HAND (LH) ACTUATORS AS A
SET.
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 10-8-6 > May >
10 > A/C - Side To Side Temperature Variations > Page 5279
Parts Block
100806B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2.8 Hrs
Operations)
100806B 2008 Escape, Mariner, 2.4 Hrs.
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19E616 42
Disclaimer
Information > Locations > Recirculation Blend Door Actuator
View 151-23
Information > Locations > Recirculation Blend Door Actuator > Page 5282
View 151-23
View 151-23
View 151-23
View 151-23
Information > Diagrams > Recirculation Blend Door Actuator
C2261
Information > Diagrams > Recirculation Blend Door Actuator > Page 5288
C2278
C2091
C2092
C289
Information > Testing and Inspection > Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Actuator
Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Actuator

Information > Testing and Inspection > Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Actuator > Page 5294
Blend Door Actuators

Air Door Actuator / Motor: Procedures
Auxiliary Mode Door Actuator
Removal and Installation. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 2
auxiliary line floorpan bracket nuts. To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in)
3. NOTE: The D-pillar bracket mill remain in place. Remove the LH D-pillar trim panel. See: Body
and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim
4. NOTE: When installing, tighten the screws on the High voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) first to
make sure the duct is sealed correctly. Remove
the 4 battery airflow duct screws, the 1 pin-type retainer and the battery airflow duct assembly To
install, tighten 12 Nm (18 lb-in)
5. Remove the 2 auxiliary climate control fresh air inlet duct nuts
^ To install tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
6. Remove the 2 auxiliary climate control housing bolts.
^ To install tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
7. Remove the D-pillar bracket pin-type retainer.
8. Remove the D-pillar bracket upper pin-type retainer and bolt end remove the D-pillar bracket. 9.
Disconnect the auxiliary airflow mode door actuator electrical connector
10. NOTE: The auxiliary climate control housing must be slightly repositioned to remove the
screws. Remove the auxiliary airflow mode door
actuator screws. ^
Disconnect the rod.
11. Remove the auxiliary airflow mode door actuator
12. NOTE: The auxiliary climate control housing must be installed behind the lower portion of the
D-pillar bracket. When installed correctly, the
auxiliary climate control housing bolt will go through the D-pillar bracket first, then through the
housing mounting location.
NOTE: Before the D-pillar trim panel and LH quarter trim panel are installed, correct auxiliary mode
door actuator operation can be verified by carrying out the Traction Battery Control Module (TBCM)
self-test while visually verifying correct actuator operation. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Removal and Replacement
Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door
MODE DOOR ACTUATOR - DEFROST/PANEL/FLOOR DOOR
NOTE: The defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator can be accessed from below the LH side of the
instrument panel.
1. Disconnect the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2
defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator screws.
3. Remove the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Mode Door Actuator - Air Inlet Door
MODE DOOR ACTUATOR - AIR INLET DOOR

1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. 2. Disconnect the air inlet mode door
actuator electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 air inlet mode door actuator screws.
4. Remove the air inlet mode door actuator. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Temperature Blend Door Actuator - RH
TEMPERATURE BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR - RH

NOTE: On vehicles equipped with dual-zone electronic automatic temperature control (EATC), the
RH temperature blend door actuator is used to control only the RH temperature blend door. On
vehicles equipped with electronic manual temperature control (EMTC), the RH temperature blend
door actuator is used to control the single temperature blend door for both sides of the vehicle.
1. Remove the upper center instrument panel finish panel. 2. Remove the passenger airbag
module. 3. Working through the passenger airbag module opening, remove the RH panel duct
screw.
4. Working through the passenger airbag module opening, remove the upper RH center panel duct
screw
5. NOTE: The lower RH center panel duct screw is located just below the RH lower rear corner of
the audio unit.
Remove the lower RH center panel duct screw. 1
Detach the wire harness pin-type retainer.
2 Remove the lower RH center panel duct screw.
6. Working through the glove compartment opening, detach the wire harness pin-type retainer
above the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor.
7. Disconnect the RH temperature blend door actuator electrical connector.
8. CAUTION: Use care to avoid dropping the RH temperature blend door actuator screws into the
plenum chamber when removing the
screws. If a screw is dropped into the plenum chamber, it may cause the airflow mode doors to
jam, or may cause noise concerns.
NOTE: The RH center instrument panel duct must be slightly repositioned to allow access to the
RH temperature blend door actuator screws.
Remove the 2 RH temperature blend door actuator screws. -
9. Remove the RH temperature blend door actuator.
Temperature Blend Door Actuator - LH
TEMPERATURE BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR - LH

NOTE: The LH temperature blend door actuator is present on dual-zone electronic automatic
temperature control (EATC) vehicles to control the LH temperature blend door only. Vehicles
equipped with electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) are not equipped with this actuator.
For EMTC vehicles, refer to Temperature Blend Door Actuator - RH.
1. Disconnect the LH temperature blend door actuator electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 LH
temperature blend door actuator screws.
3. Remove the LH temperature blend door actuator. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
Air Duct: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS
FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge
2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX
MERCURY:
2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower
motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the
evaporator core.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes
WARNING
MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED

EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY
SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA).
^ Avoid inhaling dust.
^ Avoid contact with eyes.
^ Store away from acids.
^ Wash thoroughly after handling.
^ Avoid release to the environment.
NOTE
THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST
MASK IS RECOMMENDED.
Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through
the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening.
NOTE
THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS.
NOTE
WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH
AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY
START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT.
Clean A/C Ducts:

> Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 5312
1. Remove floor duct trim.
2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver
side.
3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings.
4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop
air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the
blowgun using a worm clamp.
5. Close all instrument panel registers.
6. Set temperature setting to full cold.
7. Place mode in floor / panel.
8. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air
through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each
register before moving on to the next register.
10. Change mode to floor I defrost.
11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds.
12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to
move between each change.
13. Turn off vacuum cleaner.
Clean Evaporator Core:
1. Change mode to full floor.
2. Ensure temperature is full cold.
3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412.
5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5
minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action.
6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side.
NOTE
ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE

EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR.
7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412.
8. Open all registers.
9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the
temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is
achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached.
10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times.
11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not
come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present
continue to Step 12.
12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct.
13. Reassemble floor duct trim.
14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required.
> Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 5313
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid,
2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
> All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
Air Duct: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
MERCURY:
evaporator core.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
WARNING

NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Clean A/C Ducts:

> All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents >
Page 5319
side.
NOTE

> All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents >
Page 5320
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement
Air Duct: Removal and Replacement
FOOTWELL DUCT - REAR
All vehicles
1. Remove the driver and front passenger seats. 2. Remove the floor console. 3. Remove the front
door scuff plate trim panels and the lower A-pillar trim panels.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
4. Detach the selector lever cable from the gearshift assembly.
1 Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the gearshift lever.
Removal and Replacement > Page 5323
All vehicles
5. NOTE: Position the carpet to gain access to the floor ducts.
Separate the wiring harness from the LH floor duct and position aside.
6. Remove the LH floor duct. 7. Remove the RH floor duct pin-type retainer. 8. Remove the RH
floor duct. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure
Air Duct: Overhaul

INSTRUMENT PANEL AIR DISTRIBUTION DUCTS
Part 1
Part 2
Part 1
Part 2
1. Remove the passenger airbag module. 2. Remove the audio unit. 3. Remove the instrument
cluster. 4. Remove the instrument panel. 5. Remove the 4 defroster duct adapter screws and the
defroster duct adapter. 6. Remove the 4 front display interface module (FDIM) screws and the
FDIM.
- Disconnect the FDIM electrical connector.
7. Remove the 2 instrument cluster opening instrument panel trim screws. 8. Remove the 4
instrument panel trim-to-audio unit bracket screws. 9. Remove the 2 instrument panel trim-to-audio
unit bracket nuts.
10. Remove the 3 glove compartment screws and the glove compartment. 11. Remove the 2 glove
compartment latch striker screws and the glove compartment latch striker. 12. Remove the lower
center instrument panel trim screw. 13. Remove the 4 lower steering column opening instrument
panel trim screws. 14. Disconnect the headlamp switch and the message center switch electrical
connectors. 15. Remove the 2 upper corner instrument panel trim screws. 16. Remove the 2 lower
corner instrument panel trim screws. 17. Remove the 2 instrument panel support-to-defroster duct
screws.
18. NOTE: The instrument panel trim will need to be positioned away from the instrument panel
support to access the LH duct assembly upper center
screw.
Remove the 4 LH duct assembly screws and remove the LH duct assembly.
19. NOTE: The instrument panel trim will need to be positioned away from the instrument panel
support to access the RH duct assembly upper
center screw.
Remove the 4 RH duct assembly screws and remove the RH duct assembly.
20. To assemble, reverse the assembly procedure.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
Air Register: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
MERCURY:
evaporator core.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
WARNING

NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Clean A/C Ducts:

Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents >
Page 5335
side.
NOTE

Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents >
Page 5336
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From
Dash Vents
Air Register: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
MERCURY:
evaporator core.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
WARNING

NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Clean A/C Ducts:
Dash Vents > Page 5342
side.
NOTE

Dash Vents > Page 5343
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Register - Passenger Side
Air Register: Service and Repair Register - Passenger Side
REGISTER - PASSENGER SIDE
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the tool is inserted behind the register housing, not the register trim
ring. Prying on the register trim ring
will damage the register assembly.
Using a suitable tool, gently pry to disengage the register clips from the instrument panel while
working around the perimeter of the register.
2. Remove the passenger side register. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Register - Passenger Side > Page 5346
Air Register: Service and Repair Register - Center
REGISTER - CENTER
1. NOTE: The center registers are available only as part of the upper center instrument panel finish
panel assembly.
For additional information, refer to Dash Board.

Register - Passenger Side > Page 5347
Air Register: Service and Repair Register - Driver Side
REGISTER - DRIVER SIDE
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the tool is inserted behind the register housing, not the register trim
ring. Prying on the register trim ring
will damage the register assembly.
Using a suitable tool, gently pry to disengage the register clips from the instrument panel while
working around the perimeter of the register.
2. Remove the driver side register. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component
View 151-2
C132

Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Auxiliary Water Pump: Service and Repair
AUXILIARY COOLANT FLOW PUMP
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the engine coolant. 3. Remove the
LH lower engine splash shield.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 5357
4. Release the clamp and disconnect the auxiliary coolant pump-to-thermostat hose. 5. Release
the clamp and disconnect the heater outlet hose. 6. Disconnect the auxiliary coolant flow pump
electrical connector. 7. Remove the 2 auxiliary coolant flow pump bolts.
8. Remove the auxiliary coolant flow pump and rubber bracket assembly.
9. NOTE: Lubricate the coolant hoses with plain water only if needed. Do not use soap or other
detergents.
Fill the engine cooling system.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Blower Motor: > 07-26-5 > Dec > 07 > A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or Stuck on High
Blower Motor: Customer Interest A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or Stuck on High
TSB 07-26-5
12/24/07
Parts Block

072605A 2008 F-Super 0.3 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19E624 42
Disclaimer
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Blower Motor: > 07-26-5 > Dec > 07 > A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or Stuck
on High
Blower Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or Stuck on High
TSB 07-26-5
12/24/07
Parts Block
072605A 2008 F-Super 0.3 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19E624 42
Disclaimer
Bulletins > Page 5371
View 151-23
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
been simplified.
Current Flow (1)
Diagrams.
Splices (3)
Component Names (5)

the wire color.
"Symbols".
Power Distribution
Ground Distribution
C904
on the vehicle.
WARNINGS

the procedure.
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Symbols (Part 2)
Symbols (Part 3)
Symbols (Part 4)
Symbols (Part 5)
Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids
terminal.
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
7 = Seal
1 = Proper crimp
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
6 = Male half
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
signal.
4 = Grounding foil
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
NOTE: -
splice.
wire size
harness.
C2004
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5388
Blower Motor: Service and Repair
BLOWER MOTOR
1. Disconnect the blower motor electrical connector. 2. Release the 2 blower motor vent tube clips
and pull the vent tube down until it is disengaged from the heater core and evaporator core
housing.
3. NOTE: The carpet below the blower motor must be slightly repositioned to remove the blower
motor.
Rotate the blower motor counterclockwise to disengage it from the housing and remove the blower
motor.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5392
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5396
C293
Page 5397
Resistor - Blower Motor

Page 5398
Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair
BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR
1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Disconnect the blower motor resistor electrical connector. 3.
Remove the 2 blower motor resistor screws.
4. Remove the blower motor resistor. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Blower Motor Switch: > 07-26-5 > Dec > 07 > A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or
Stuck on High
TSB 07-26-5
12/24/07
Parts Block
072605A 2008 F-Super 0.3 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19E624 42
Disclaimer
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Blower Motor Switch: > 07-26-5 > Dec > 07 > A/C - Blower Motor
Inoperative or Stuck on High
High
TSB 07-26-5
12/24/07
Parts Block
072605A 2008 F-Super 0.3 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19E624 42
Disclaimer
View 151-23
C297
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations
Cabin Air Filter: Locations
CABIN AIR FILTER
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page
5418
Cabin Air Filter: Description and Operation

Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page
5419
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
CABIN AIR FILTER
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-13
C233


Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Compressor Clutch: Specifications
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................Specification
A/C Compressor Magnetic Clutch
Air gap between pulley and hub...........................................................................................................

........................................0.3-0.6 mm (0.012-0.024 in)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Compressor Clutch: Adjustments
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CLUTCH AIR GAP ADJUSTMENT
1. Check the A/C clutch air gap at 3 equally spaced places between the clutch plate and the A/C
clutch pulley.
2. If the A/C clutch air gap is out of range, remove the clutch plate. Add or remove spacers
between the clutch plate hub and the compressor shaft
until the clearance is within specification.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Compressor Clutch Coil: Locations
View 151-4
View 151-5
C100
Compressor Clutch Coil: Service and Repair
CLUTCH AND CLUTCH FIELD COIL
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Part 1
Part 2
Removal
1. Remove the A/C compressor. 2. Remove the A/C clutch disc and hub bolt.
1 Using a suitable spanner-type wrench, hold the A/C clutch disc and hub.
2 Remove the A/C clutch disc and hub bolt.
3. Remove the A/C clutch disc and hub and the A/C clutch disc and hub spacer(s). 4. Remove the
A/C compressor pulley snap ring.
5. CAUTION: Do not use air tools. Damage to the A/C clutch pulley or A/C compressor may result.
Remove the A/C compressor pulley. 1
Install the special tool.
2 Install a suitable 3-jaw puller on the special tool and A/C compressor pulley.
3 Remove the A/C compressor pulley.
6. Remove the 4 A/C clutch field coil screws. 7. Remove the A/C clutch field coil.
Installation
NOTE: The A/C clutch components should be reused unless obvious signs of damage are found.
1. Visually inspect the A/C clutch disc and hub, A/C compressor pulley and A/C clutch field coil for
damage.
- Inspect for physical damage, including cracked or melted components or discoloration due to
excessive heat.
- Inspect for excessive wear, including grooving in the A/C clutch disc and hub or A/C compressor
pulley that is more than fingernail depth.
- Inspect for roughness in the A/C compressor pulley bearing.
2. Clean the A/C clutch field coil and pulley mounting surfaces. 3. Install the A/C clutch field coil. 4.
Install the 4 A/C clutch field coil screws.
5. CAUTION: The A/C compressor must be positioned on the press so that only the flat part of the
A/C compressor housing is contacting
the base with the A/C compressor shaft aligned with the center of the press shaft. If the A/C
compressor is not installed correctly on the press, the A/C compressor and/or A/C compressor
pulley will be damaged.
Install the A/C compressor pulley. 1
Install the A/C compressor on a suitable press.
2 Position the A/C compressor pulley on the A/C compressor.
3 Install the special tool on the A/C compressor pulley.
4 Using the press, install the A/C compressor pulley.
6. Install the A/C compressor pulley snap ring with the bevel side out. 7. Place one nominal
thickness A/C clutch disc and hub spacer inside the clutch hub spline opening. 8. Install the A/C
clutch disc and hub. 9. Install the A/C compressor clutch disc and hub bolt.
1 Hold the A/C clutch disc and hub with a suitable spanner-type wrench.
2 Tighten the bolt to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft).

10. Measure and adjust the clutch air gap by removing or adding A/C clutch disc and hub spacers.
11. Install the A/C compressor.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 5444
the A/CCR.
> Page 5445
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Condenser HVAC: Description and Operation
A/C CONDENSER
The A/C condenser is an aluminum fin-and-micro-channel design heat exchanger located in front of
the vehicle radiator. It cools compressed refrigerant gas by allowing air to pass over fins and tubes
to extract heat and by condensing gas to liquid refrigerant as it is cooled.
On 2.3L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, the top portion of the
condenser is partitioned from the refrigerant system and is used for transmission fluid cooling.
Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair
CONDENSER CORE
Part 1
Part 2
NOTE:
- Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the air conditioning system,
- If a condenser core leak is suspected, the condenser core must be leak tested before it is
removed from the vehicle.
All vehicles
front bumper cover. 4. Remove the 4 radiator bracket bolts.
5. Detach and remove the RH and LH radiator brackets. 6. Remove the condenser outlet and inlet
fitting nuts and disconnect the fittings.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
7. NOTE: The transmission cooler hose inlet (upper tube) attaches to the transmission outlet line
(passenger side front of transmission). The
transmission cooler outlet (lower tube) attaches to the transmission inlet line (driver side of
transmission).
Release the 2 transmission cooler line clamps and disconnect the lines from the A/C condenser.
All vehicles
8. Remove the 2 condenser bolts.
9. Remove the condenser core.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Control Assembly: Service and Repair
HEATING VENTILATION AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) MODULE

1. Remove the center instrument panel finish panel. 2. Remove the 4 HVAC module screws. 3.
Remove the HVAC module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations >
Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module
View 151-13
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations >
Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module > Page 5458
View 151-13
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module
C2356A
C2356B
C2357A
C2357B
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash
Vents
Evaporator Core: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
MERCURY:
evaporator core.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
WARNING

NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Clean A/C Ducts:
Vents > Page 5475
side.
NOTE

Vents > Page 5476
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing
From Dash Vents
Evaporator Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
MERCURY:
evaporator core.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
WARNING

NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Clean A/C Ducts:
From Dash Vents > Page 5482
side.
NOTE

From Dash Vents > Page 5483
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
Evaporator Core: Description and Operation
EVAPORATOR CORE
NOTE:
- A second (auxiliary) evaporator core is used for HVTB cooling on hybrid vehicles. For information
concerning the auxiliary evaporator core, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning.
The evaporator core is an aluminum plate/fin-type and is located in the heater core and evaporator
core housing. A mixture of liquid refrigerant and oil enters the bottom of the evaporator core
through the evaporator core inlet tube and continues out of the evaporator core through the
evaporator core outlet tube as a vapor. During A/C compressor operation, airflow from the blower
motor is cooled and dehumidified as it flows through the evaporator core fins.
Evaporator Core: Testing and Inspection
EVAPORATOR/CONDENSER CORE - ON-VEHICLE LEAK TEST
1. Discharge and recover the refrigerant. Refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery,
Evacuation and Charging. 2. Disconnect the suspect evaporator core (leave the TXV attached to
the evaporator core) or condenser core from the A/C system. 3. Clean the fittings. 4. Connect the
appropriate test fittings from the A/C Fittings Set to the condenser or evaporator core/TXV tube
connections.
5. NOTE: The automatic shut-off valves on some gauge set hoses do not open when connected to
the test fittings. If available, use hoses without
shut-off valves. If hoses with shut-off valves are used, make sure the valve opens when attached to
the test fittings or install an adapter that will activate the valve. The test is not valid if the shut-off
valve does not open.
Connect the red and blue hoses from the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the test fittings on the
evaporator core/TXV or condenser core. Connect the yellow hose to a known good vacuum pump.
6. Open both gauge set valves and start the vacuum pump. Allow the vacuum pump to operate for
a minimum of 45 minutes after the gauge set low
pressure gauge indicates 101 kPa (30 in-Hg). The 45-minute evacuation is necessary to remove
any refrigerant from oil left in the evaporator core or condenser core. If the refrigerant is not
completely removed from the oil, outgassing will degrade the vacuum and appear as a refrigerant
leak.
7. If the low pressure gauge reading will not drop to 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) when the valves on the
gauge and manifold set are open and the vacuum
pump is operating, close the gauge set valves and observe the low pressure gauge. If the pressure
rises rapidly to zero, a large leak is indicated. Recheck the test fitting connections and gauge set
connections before installing a new evaporator core or condenser core.
8. After evacuating for 45 minutes, close the gauge set valves and stop the vacuum pump.
Observe the low pressure gauge; it should remain at the
101 kPa (30 in-Hg) mark. -
If the low pressure gauge reading rises 34 or more kPa (10 or more in-Hg) of vacuum from the 101
kPa (30 in-Hg) position in 10 minutes, a leak is indicated.
- If a very small leak is suspected, wait 30 minutes and observe the vacuum gauge.
- If a small amount of vacuum is lost, operate the vacuum pump with gauge valves open for an
additional 30 minutes to remove any remaining refrigerant from the oil in the evaporator core or
condenser core. Then recheck for loss of vacuum.
- If a very small leak is suspected, allow the system to sit overnight with vacuum applied and check
for vacuum loss.
9. If the condenser core does leak, as verified by the above procedure, install a new condenser
core.
If the evaporator core/TXV does leak, as verified by the above procedure, disconnect the TXV and
recheck the evaporator core for a leak. If the evaporator core does leak, install a new evaporator
core or condenser core. TEST the system for normal operation.
If the evaporator core does not leak, install new evaporator core/TXV seals and retest the
evaporator core/TXV. If the evaporator core/TXV does leak, install a new TXV. TEST the system
for normal operation.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component
View 151-23
C296
sensor.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Description and Operation
THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE (TXV)
NOTE:
- A second (auxiliary) TXV is used for HVTB cooling on hybrid vehicles. For information concerning
the auxiliary TXV, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning.
The TXV is located at the evaporator core inlet and outlet tubes at the dash panel at the rear of the
engine compartment. The TXV provides a restriction to the flow of refrigerant from the
high-pressure side of the refrigerant system and separates the low-pressure and high-pressure
sides of the refrigerant system. Refrigerant entering and exiting the evaporator core passes
through the TXV through 2 separate flow paths. An internal temperature sensing bulb senses the
temperature of the refrigerant flowing out of the evaporator core and adjusts an internal pin-type
valve to meter the refrigerant flow into the evaporator core. The internal pin-type valve decreases
the amount of refrigerant entering the evaporator core at lower temperatures and increases the
amount of refrigerant entering the evaporator core at higher temperatures.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair
Expansion Valve: Service and Repair
THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE
1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) fitting nut and
disconnect the fitting.
3. Remove the 2 TXV bolts and the TXV.
- Discard the O-ring seals.
4. To install, reverse the reverse the removal procedure.
- If the TXV stud has become loose during removal, or has been removed for any reason, tighten
the TXV stud to 6 Nm (53 lb-in) before the TXV fitting nut is reinstalled.
- Install new O-ring seals and gasket seals.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection
HEATER CORE
1. NOTE: Testing of returned heater cores reveals that a large percentage of heater cores are good
and did not require the installation of a new
heater core. If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be tested by following the
plugged heater core component test before the heater core pressure test. Carry out a system
inspection by checking the heater system thoroughly as follows:
Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater hose to heater core attachments. A coolant
leak in the heater hose could follow the heater core tube to the heater core and appear as a leak in
the heater core.
2. NOTE: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening of
non-specified clamps can cause leakage at the
heater hose connection and damage the heater core.
Check the integrity of the heater hose clamps.
Heater Core - Plugged
1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level. 2. Start the engine and turn on the
heater. 3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, check the heater core inlet and
outlet hoses to see if they are hot. 4. If the outlet only is not hot:
- the heater core may have an air pocket.
- the heater core may be plugged.
5. If the inlet only is not hot, the thermostat may not be working correctly.
Heater Core - Pressure Test
Use the Pressure Test Kit to carry out the pressure test.
1. NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing.
Drain the coolant from the cooling system.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Install a short piece of heater hose,
approximately 101 mm (4 in) long on each heater core tube. 4. Fill the heater core and heater
hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter BT-7422-A from the Pressure Test Kit.
Secure the heater
hoses, plug and adapter with hose clamps.
5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter. 6. Close the
bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure into the heater core. 7.
Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of 3 minutes. 8. If the pressure drops, check the heater
hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the heater hoses do not leak, remove the heater
core from the
vehicle.
9. Carry out the bench test.
Heater Core - Bench Test
1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle. 2. Drain all of the coolant from the heater core. 3.
Connect the 101 mm (4 in) test heater hoses with plug and adapter to the core tubes. Then
connect the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter. 4. Apply 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure to the heater
core. Submerge the heater core in water. 5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core.
> Page 5501
> Page 5502
Heater Core: Service and Repair

HEATER CORE
NOTE:
- If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater core is
removed.
- Use only the approved coolant for this vehicle.
1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. 2. Remove the dash panel seal. 3.
Remove the heater core bracket screw and the heater core bracket.
4. Remove the heater core. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information >
Service and Repair
High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Service and Repair
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
A/C pressure relief valve and O-ring seal.
4. NOTE: A new O-ring seal will already be installed on the new A/C pressure relief valve service
part.
Add the correct amount of clean PAG refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line
COMPRESSOR TO CONDENSER DISCHARGE LINE
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the air conditioning system
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover refrigerant. 3. Remove the RH
lower engine splash shield.
4. Remove the front bumper cover.

> Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 5510
5. Remove the condenser inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
6. Remove the A/C compressor discharge fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
7. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line. 8. To install, reverse the removal

procedure.

Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Condenser to Receiver Drier Line
CONDENSER TO RECEIVER DRIER LINE
Part 1
Part 2
1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the DC/DC converter. 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4.
Remove the compressor manifold and tube bracket nut.
5. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal.
6. Remove the evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
7. Remove the auxiliary evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seals.

8. Remove the receiver/drier inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
9. Remove the condenser-to-receiver/drier line.
- Install new gasket seal and O-ring seal.

Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Inlet Line
EVAPORATOR INLET LINE
1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the evaporator inlet line bracket nut.

3. Remove the receiver/drier outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
4. Remove the thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
5. Remove the evaporator inlet line. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Outlet Line
EVAPORATOR OUTLET LINE
RH lower engine splash shield.
4. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
5. Detach the wire harness clip from the evaporator outlet line. 6. Remove the thermostatic
expansion valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
7. Disconnect the low-charge protection switch electrical connector. 8. Detach the evaporator outlet
line from the receiver/drier bracket. 9. Remove the evaporator outlet line.
- Install new gasket seals and a new O-ring seal.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Removal and Replacement
Housing Assembly HVAC: Removal and Replacement
HEATER CORE AND EVAPORATOR CORE HOUSING
Part 1
Part 2

and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5521
NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater
core is removed.
1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Recover the refrigerant. 3. Remove the instrument panel. 4.
Remove the thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
5. Release the clamps and disconnect the heater inlet and outlet hoses from the heater core. 6.
Remove the 6 heater core and evaporator core housing nuts.
7. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing.
1 Detach the heater core and evaporator core housing from the dash panel studs.
2 Rotate the RH side of the heater core and evaporator core housing toward the rear of the vehicle
while pulling the housing toward the RH door opening to detach it from the rear footwell duct.
3 Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing.
8. Disassemble the heater core and evaporator core housing as needed. 9. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals.
10. Fill and bleed the engine cooling system. 11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant
system.
Housing Assembly HVAC: Overhaul

HEATER CORE AND EVAPORATOR CORE HOUSING
Part 1
Part 2
Part 1
Part 2
Plenum chamber
1. Remove the 2 RH temperature blend door actuator screws.
2. Detach the heater core and evaporator core housing wire harness from the plenum chamber. 3.
Remove the 2 defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator screws.
4. Remove the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator. 5. Remove the 6 plenum chamber screws.
6. Remove the plenum chamber.
Air inlet duct
7. Detach the heater core and evaporator core housing wire harness from the air inlet duct. 8.
Remove the 2 air inlet mode door actuator screws.
9. Remove the air inlet mode door actuator.
Complete disassembly
10. Detach and remove the heater core and evaporator core housing wire harness. 11. Remove
the 2 blower motor speed control or blower motor resistor screws.
12. Remove the blower motor speed control or blower motor resistor. 13. Remove the heater core
tube dash panel seal.
14. Remove the heater core bracket screw and the heater core bracket.
15. Remove the heater core. 16. Remove the thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) dash panel seal.
17. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing drain dash panel seal. 18. Remove the 2
LH temperature blend door actuator screws (if equipped).
19. Remove the LH temperature blend door actuator (if equipped).
20. Detach the 2 blower motor vent tube clips and disengage the vent tube from the heater core
and evaporator core housing. 21. Rotate counterclockwise and remove the blower motor. 22. To
assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Receiver Dryer: Description and Operation
RECEIVER/DRIER
The receiver/drier is mounted to the right of the radiator support for 2.3L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles, or at
the RH shock tower for hybrid vehicles. It stores high-pressure liquid after it leaves the condenser
core. A desiccant cartridge mounted inside the receiver/drier removes any retained moisture from
the refrigerant.
Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair
RECEIVER DRIER
NOTE:
- The receiver/drier fitting studs can be removed and installed separately from the receiver/drier
and are available as service parts. If only the fitting studs are damaged, it is not necessary to install
a new receiver/drier.
1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the front bumper cover. 3. Remove the condenser outlet
fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
4. Disconnect the dual-function pressure switch electrical connector. 5. Remove the receiver/drier
outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
6. Detach the evaporator outlet line from the receiver/drier bracket clip. 7. Remove the 2
receiver/drier nuts.
8. Remove the receiver/drier.


Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications

Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) WSH-M17B19-A (Specification)

Non-hybrid ...........................................................................................................................................
........................................... 0.71kg (25 oz) (1.57 lb) Hybrid ................................................................
............................................................................................................................ 1.08 kg (38 oz)
(2.38 lb)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Control Solenoid Valve > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Refrigerant Control Solenoid Valve: Service and Repair
PASSENGER ZONE VALVE
1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Disconnect the passenger zone valve electrical connector. 3.
Disconnect the 2 passenger zone valve fittings.
- Discard the O-ring seals.

4. Remove the passenger zone valve bracket nut.
5. Remove the passenger zone valve. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new O-ring seals.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications

Non-hybrid ...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................ 148 ml (5 fl oz) Hybrid ................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ 325 ml (11 fl
oz)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 5543
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications

Non-hybrid ...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................ 148 ml (5 fl oz) Hybrid ................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ 325 ml (11 fl
oz)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Dual Pressure Switch
View 151-1
Information > Locations > Dual Pressure Switch > Page 5548
View 151-1
Information > Diagrams > Dual Pressure Switch
C1062
Information > Diagrams > Dual Pressure Switch > Page 5551
C130
Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch
Switch
wiring.

Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 5554
switch.

clutch.
protection switch.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
the A/CCR.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Locations > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module
View 151-13
Component Information > Locations > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module > Page 5571
View 151-13
Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module
C2356A
Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module > Page 5574
C2356B
C2357A
C2357B
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor /
Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 5581
C132

Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-26-5 > Dec > 07 > A/C - Blower Motor
Inoperative or Stuck on High
TSB 07-26-5
12/24/07
Parts Block
072605A 2008 F-Super 0.3 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19E624 42
Disclaimer
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-26-5 > Dec > 07 > A/C - Blower
Motor Inoperative or Stuck on High
High
TSB 07-26-5
12/24/07
Parts Block
072605A 2008 F-Super 0.3 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19E624 42
Disclaimer
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Blower Motor Switch: > 09-21-2 > Nov
> 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise
Idler Pulley: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise
TSB 09-21-2
11/02/09
FORD: 2008 Escape
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Section 303-05B.
3. Remove pulley.
NOTE

Parts Block
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19A216 69
Disclaimer
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19A216 69
Disclaimer
View 151-23
C297
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor /
View 151-13
C233


Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature
Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature
Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5625
C296
sensor.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Dual Pressure Switch
View 151-1
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Dual Pressure Switch > Page 5632
View 151-1
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Pressure Switch
C1062
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Pressure Switch > Page 5635
C130
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch
Switch
wiring.

Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 5638
switch.

clutch.
protection switch.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
View 151-13
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
C286
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Service Port HVAC: Description and Operation
SERVICE GAUGE PORT VALVES
The high-pressure service gauge port valve is located on the receiver/drier inlet line.
The low-pressure service gauge port valve is located on the evaporator outlet line.
The fitting is an integral part of the refrigerant line or component.
- Special couplings are required for both the high-side and low-side service gauge ports.
- A very small amount of leakage will always be detectable around the Schrader-type valve with the
service gauge port valve cap removed, and is considered normal. A new Schrader-type valve core
can be installed if the seal leaks excessively.
- The service gauge port valve caps are used as primary seals in the refrigerant system to prevent
leakage through the Schrader-type valves from reaching the atmosphere. Always install and tighten
the A/C service gauge port valve caps to the correct torque after they are removed.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations
View 151-13
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5651
C286
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information >
Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Inspection and Repair After
A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment
INSPECTION AND REPAIR AFTER A SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

DEPLOYMENT
WARNING: Remove restraint system diagnostic tools from the vehicle prior to road testing. If tools
are not removed, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) device may not deploy in a crash.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash and
possibly violate vehicle safety standards.
NOTE:
- After diagnosing or repairing a supplemental restraint system (SRS), the restraint system
diagnostic tools (if required) must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
- Deployable devices (such as air bag modules, pretensioners) may deploy alone or in various
combinations depending on the impact event.
- Always refer to the appropriate Vehicle System procedures prior to carrying out vehicle repairs
affecting the SRS and safety belt system.
All vehicles
1. NOTE: Refer to the correct removal and installation procedure for all SRS components being
installed.
When any deployable device or combination of devices are deployed and/or the restraints control
module (RCM) has the DTC B1231 (Event Threshold Exceeded) in memory, the repair of the
vehicle's SRS is to include the removal of all deployed devices and the installation of new
deployable devices, the removal and installation of new impact sensors, and the removal and
installation of a new RCM. DTCs must cleared from all required modules after repairs are carried
out.
Vehicles with occupant classification sensor (OCS) system
2. NOTE: After installation of new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components carry
out the OCS System Reset procedure as
instructed in the Vehicle System. Refer to the appropriate Vehicle System for OCS system removal
and installation procedure.
When a vehicle has been involved in a collision and the occupant classification system module
(OCSM) has DTC B1231 stored in memory, the repair of the OCS system is to include the following
procedures for the specified system: -
For rail type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and repair as
necessary. Install new OCS rails.
- For weight sensor bolt type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and
repair as necessary. Install a new seat track with OCS weight sensor bolts.
- NOTE: Most bladder type OCSM do not store a DTC B1231 in memory after deployment. The
DTC B1231 is stored only by the RCM.
For bladder type OCS system, inspect for damage and repair as necessary. If installation of an
OCS system component is required, an OCS system service kit must be installed.
All vehicles
3. When any damage to the impact sensor mounting points or mounting hardware has occurred,
repair or install new mounting points and mounting
hardware as needed.
4. When the driver air bag module has deployed, a new clockspring must be installed. 5. New
driver and/or front passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height
adjusters) must be installed if the vehicle is
involved in a collision that results in deployment of the driver and/or front passenger safety belt
pretensioners.
6. Inspect the entire vehicle for damage, including the following components:
- Steering column (deployable column if equipped)
- Instrument panel knee bolsters and mounting points
- Instrument panel braces and brackets
- Instrument panel and mounting points
- Seats and seat mounting points
- Safety belts, safety belt buckles and safety belt retractors.
- SRS wiring, wiring harnesses and connectors
7. After carrying out the review and inspection of the entire vehicle for damage, repair or install new
components as needed.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information >
Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment > Page 5657
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Safety Belt Procedure After
A Collision
SAFETY BELT PROCEDURE AFTER A COLLISION
1. WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware
must be inspected by an authorized
dealer to verify correct function: -
Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing portion, a new safety belt assembly must be
installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal
must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching
hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware
may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Safety belt assemblies should be periodically inspected to make sure they have not
become damaged and that they remain in correct operating condition, particularly if they have been
subjected to severe stress.
Before installing the new safety belt assembly, the safety belt attaching areas must be inspected
for damage and distortion. If the attaching points are damaged and distorted, the sheet metal must
be reworked back to its original shape and structural integrity.
Install the new safety belt(s) using the appropriate instructions. Carry out the Functional Test. See:
Seat Belt Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Adaptive Collapsible Steering Column > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Adaptive Collapsible Steering Column: Service and Repair
DEPLOYABLE STEERING COLUMN - IN-VEHICLE DEPLOYMENT
WARNING: Deploy all supplemental restraint system (SRS) devices (air bags, pretensioners, load
limiters, etc.) outdoors with all personnel at least 9.14 meters (30 feet) away to make sure of
personal safety. Due to the loud report which occurs when an SRS device is deployed, hearing
protection is required. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
1. Depower the SRS.
2. NOTE: It may be necessary to lower or remove the deployable steering column from the
instrument panel to access the deployable steering
column electrical connector.
Access the deployable steering column electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If the deployable steering column does not have a hard-wired pigtail, it will be necessary
to cut the wires and connector(s) from the
vehicle wire harness and reconnect to the deployable steering column.
Cut each of the deployable steering column wires, leaving at least 4 inches to work with.
4. Remove any sheathing (if present) and strip the insulation from the ends of the cut wires. 5.
Make a jumper harness to deploy the deployable steering column.
- Obtain 2 wires (20 gauge minimum) at least 9.14 m (30 ft) long and strip both ends of each wire.
- At one end of the jumper harness, connect the wires together.
6. Using the end of the jumper harness that the wires are not connected together, attach each wire
of the jumper harness to each wire of the
deployable steering column. Use tape or other insulating material to make sure that the leads do
not make contact with each other.
7. Remain at least 9.14 m (30 ft) away from the deployable steering column. 8. From the end of the
jumper harness that is not connected to the deployable steering column, disconnect the 2 wires of
the jumper harness from
each other.
9. Deploy the deployable steering column by touching the ends of the 2 wires of the jumper
harness to the terminals of a 12-volt battery.
10. To allow for cooling, wait at least 10 minutes before approaching the deployed steering column.
11. Dispose of the deployed steering column in the same manner as any other part to be scrapped.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

latches.
impact sensor(s).
the cover.

> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5666
fail to light.
- flash.
scan tool.
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Deactivation
WARNING: -
NOTE: -
from the SPDJB.
latches.
impact sensor(s).
wheel.

Reactivation

clip.
9. CAUTION:
NOTE: -
clips into the I/P.

14. NOTE:
install the cover.
fail to light.
- flash.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver
Air Bag Module
View 151-28
Air Bag Module > Page 5679
View 151-16
View 151-17
View 151-13
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams >
Passenger Air Bag Module
Air Bag: Diagrams Passenger Air Bag Module
C256A
C256B
Passenger Air Bag Module > Page 5684
Air Bag: Diagrams Side Air Bag Module
C337
C367
Air Bag: Diagrams Safety Canopy
C9006
C9007
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module
Air Bag: Service and Repair Driver Air Bag Module
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
Removal
WARNING: -
Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim cover/tear
seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the deployment
door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
- Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which
increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: -
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5689
1. Depower the SRS. 2. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag
module release hole on the underside of the steering wheel.
wire clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and/or the steering
wheel.
Installation
the electrical connectors into the driver air bag module. Damage to the connector or component
may occur.
2. NOTE:
- Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed away from the driver air bag module
hooks during installation.
3. Repower the SRS.

Air Bag: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Module

PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
WARNING:
- Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim cover/tear
- Do not repaint air bag modules with discolored or damaged trim covers or deployment doors; new
air bag modules must be installed.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in the air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE:
1. Depower the SRS. 2. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 3. Remove the 2 passenger
air bag module bolts.
deployment door. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: -
- Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel (I/P). The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the I/P.
5. CAUTION:
Remove the passenger air bag module. 1
Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.

7. Repower the SRS.
Air Bag: Service and Repair Safety Canopy Module
SAFETY CANOPY MODULE
Part 1
Part 2
Removal
WARNING: -
Always carry or place a live safety canopy, or side air curtain module, with the module and tear
seam pointed away from your body. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal
injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment.
- Anytime the safety canopy or side air curtain module has deployed, a new headliner and new A-,
B- and C-pillar upper trim panels and attaching hardware must be installed. Remove any other
damaged components and hardware and install new components and hardware as needed. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in the safety canopy or side air curtain module deploying
incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
- When installing a new headliner on a vehicle equipped with safety canopy or side air curtain
modules, make sure the headliner has the word AIRBAG on the headliner where it meets each
B-pillar trim panel. Otherwise, you have the wrong headliner. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in the safety canopy or side air curtain module not deploying or deploying incorrectly,
increasing the risk of personal injury or death in a crash.
- Before installing a safety canopy or side air curtain module, inspect the roofline for any damage. If
necessary, the sheet metal must be reworked to its original condition and structural integrity. Install
new fasteners if damaged and remove foreign material. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in the safety canopy or side air curtain deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of
serious personal injury or death in a crash.
- Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag
module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
- Do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the safety canopy or side air curtain
module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the safety canopy or side air curtain module
deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
- Never put any type of fastener or tie strap around any part of a safety canopy module, side air
curtain module or interior trim panel. This will prevent the safety canopy or side air curtain module
from deploying correctly. Failure to follow this instruction may increase the risk of serious personal
injury or death in a crash.
- Always use new torque-prevailing type J-nuts when installing the safety canopy in the vehicle.
Use of these J-nuts is mandatory to reduce the risk of loss of fastener effectiveness. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in the safety canopy module deploying incorrectly and increases
NOTE: -
There are different safety canopy modules for vehicles equipped with a moon roof and vehicles
without a moon roof. The safety canopy modules are NOT interchangeable. If installing a new
safety canopy module, the correct safety canopy module MUST be installed for the vehicle
application.
- RH side safety canopy module shown, LH side similar.
1. Depower the SRS.

2. Remove the headliner. 3. Detach the A-pillar tether pin-type retainer from the A-pillar.
4. NOTE: If equipped with a moonroof and/or rear window wiper assembly, note position and
routing of the moonroof front drain hose and/or rear
window washer solvent hose for installation purposes.
Remove the A-pillar tether bolt.
5. Remove the 2 safety canopy module bolts located near the top of the A- and B-pillars. 6.
Disconnect the safety canopy module electrical connector and detach the connector from the
D-pillar.
7. Detach the safety canopy module wiring clip from the roof panel brace.
8. Remove the 2 safety canopy module bolts near the ignitor (between the C- and D-pillars). 9. If
the vehicle is equipped with a moonroof, disconnect the moonroof rear drain hose.
10. If the vehicle is equipped with a rear window wiper assembly, detach the hose clip and position
the hose aside.
11. Remove the 2 bolts from the safety canopy module tether bracket at the C-pillar. 12. Remove
the remaining 2 safety canopy module bolts (1 near the top of the C-pillar and 1 between the B-
and C-pillars). 13. Lift to unhook the safety canopy module from the C-pillar.
14. Move the safety canopy module forward and release the rear hook.
Installation
1. Install new safety canopy module J-nuts.

2. NOTE: If equipped with a moonroof and/or rear window wiper assembly, make sure of correct
moonroof drain hose and/or rear window solvent
hose routing.
Install the safety canopy rear hook.
3. Hook the safety canopy module to the C-pillar.
4. Install the 2 safety canopy module bolts located near the top of the A- and B-pillars.
5. Attach the A-pillar tether pin-type retainer to the A-pillar.
6. NOTE: If equipped with a moonroof and/or rear window wiper assembly, do not pinch the front
moonroof drain hose and/or rear window washer
solvent hose.
Install the A-pillar tether bolt. -
7. Install the 2 safety canopy module bolts near the top of the C-pillar and between the B- and
C-pillars.

8. Install the 2 bolts to the safety canopy module tether bracket at the C-pillar.
9. If the vehicle is equipped with a rear window wiper assembly, position the hose and attach the
hose clip.
10. If the vehicle is equipped with a moonroof, connect the moonroof rear drain hose.
11. Connect the safety canopy module electrical connector and attach the connector to the D-pillar.
12. Install the safety canopy module wiring clip to the roof panel brace.
13. Install the remaining 2 safety canopy module bolts near the ignitor (between the C- and
D-pillars).

14. Install the headliner. 15. Repower the SRS.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-13
View 151-22
C2041A
C2041B (Part 1)
C2041B (Part 2)
Removal
WARNING: -
death in a crash.
CAUTION: -
can result.
NOTE: -
stops.
Installation
failure.
RCM. -

SRS as follows:
fail to light.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information
Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Service and Repair
PASSENGER AIR BAG DEACTIVATION (PAD) INDICATOR
NOTE:
- The passenger air bag deactivation indicator is part of the upper I/P center finish panel.
1. Depower the SRS.
2. NOTE: The passenger air bag module is not shown for clarity.
Open and lower the glove compartment door to gain access to the passenger airbag deactivation
(PAD) indicator electrical connector. -
Disconnect the PAD indicator electrical connector.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Page 5715
3. Pull out to release the retaining clips and detach the I/P upper center finish panel. 4. To install,
reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the SRS.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams
C2286
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
C218
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair
CLOCKSPRING
Removal
NOTE: -
1. Depower the SRS. 2. Remove the driver air bag module. 3. Tilt the steering wheel in the
downward position and lock the tilt handle.
4. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the clockspring make sure the road wheels are in the
straight-ahead position.
Remove the steering wheel.
5. NOTE: The upper steering column shroud is a 2-piece design and must be removed as an
assembly.
Release the tabs and remove the 2-piece upper steering column shroud as an assembly.
6. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. Then release the tilt column locking lever
and remove the lower steering column shroud. 7. Disconnect the clockspring electrical connector.
8. Remove the 2 screws and the clockspring.
Installation
1. CAUTION: If installing a new clockspring, do not remove the clockspring anti-rotation key until
the steering wheel is installed. If the
anti-rotation key has been removed before installing the steering wheel, the clockspring must be
centered. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system failure.
Install the clockspring and the 2 screws.
2. Connect the clockspring electrical connector. 3. Install the lower steering column shroud and the
3 screws. 4. Tilt the steering column down and lock the tilt column locking lever. 5. Attach the upper
steering column shroud to the lower steering column shroud.
6. WARNING: If the clockspring is not correctly centralized, it may fail prematurely. If in doubt,
repeat the centralizing procedure.
Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a
crash.
CAUTION: -
To prevent component damage and/or system failure, when reusing a clockspring it must be
centered.
- Do not over-rotate the clockspring inner rotor. The internal ribbon wire is connected to the
clockspring rotor. The internal ribbon wire acts as a stop and can be broken from its internal
connection. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system
failure.
If a new clockspring was installed and the anti-rotation key has not been removed proceed to step
8.
If a new clockspring was installed and the anti-rotation key has been removed before the steering
wheel is installed or the same clockspring is being installed, rotate the clockspring inner rotor
counterclockwise and carefully feel for the ribbon wire to run out of length with slight resistance.
Stop rotating the clockspring inner rotor at this point.
7. Starting with the clockspring inner rotor, wiring and connector in the 12 o'clock position, rotate
the inner rotor clockwise through 4 revolutions to
center the clockspring.
Verify that the clockspring is correctly centered by observing that after 4 revolutions: -
the clockspring rotor window is in the 4 o'clock position and the yellow indicator shows in the
window.
- the 2 arrows located on the inner and outer rotor of the clockspring line up in the 6 o'clock
position.
- the clockspring inner rotor, wiring and connector are in the 12 o'clock position.
8. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the clockspring make sure the road wheels are in the
straight-ahead position.
NOTE: The clockspring inner rotor, wiring and connector must be in the 12 o'clock position to install
the steering wheel.
Install the steering wheel.
9. If a new clockspring was installed, remove the anti-rotation key.
10. Install the driver air bag module. 11. Repower the SRS.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Forward Crash Sensor
View 151-2
Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5729
View 151-24
View 151-24
View 151-25
View 151-25
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Forward Crash Sensor
C177
C3209
C3210
C3211
C3212
Page 5737
SENSORS
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor
WARNING:
death in a crash.
NOTE:
NOTE: -
Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5740


WARNING:
death in a crash.
NOTE:
NOTE: -
foreign material.

WARNING:
death in a crash.
NOTE:
NOTE: -
material.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag >
View 151-17
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag >
C3285
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-17
C3042
NOTE:
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5756
Removal
WARNING: -
NOTE: -
connector.
trim cover.
rivets.
with the bladder.
Installation
2. CAUTION:
death in a crash.
CAUTION: -
NOTE: -
installed.
fail to light.

Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Removal
WARNING: -
NOTE: -


connector.
trim cover.
bracket.
9. Remove the OCS.
Installation
2. CAUTION:
3. NOTE:
not used.

system failure.

7. NOTE:
connector.
connectors.
death in a crash.
CAUTION: -
NOTE: -
installed.
fail to light.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-16
C356
NOTE:
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Side Air Bag: Service and Repair
SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
Removal
WARNING: -
- If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if the air bag
material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair the seat side
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying
incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
- Front seat backrest trim covers installed on seats equipped with seat side air bags cannot be
repaired. A new trim cover must be installed. Cleaning is permissible. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of
NOTE: -
If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover, side air bag module and
nuts must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary.
Repair > Page 5779
All seats 1. Remove the front seat and depower the SRS.
2. NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar.
Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield. 1
Remove the rear screw.
2 Push the inboard seat cushion side shield forward to release.
3. CAUTION: Note the position of the wiring harness, to aid installation. An incorrectly routed wiring
harness could become damaged
when the seat is moved.
Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector and detach it from the seat track. Then
detach the 3 wiring harness routing retainers.
Seats with manual lumbar adjust 4. Turn the manual lumbar knob clockwise until it stops, releasing
all tension on the manual lumbar support cable. 5. Pull and remove the manual lumbar knob.
All seats 6. Release the seat backrest trim cover J-clip.

Repair > Page 5780
7. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip.
The hook-and-loop strip can be torn
from the seat backrest foam pad. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage
Place a hand between the seat backrest trim cover and the seat backrest foam pad and carefully
separate the hook-and-loop strips.
8. Carefully roll up the seat back trim cover in an inside out fashion to the side air bag module. 9.
Release the side air bag module deployment chute J-clip from around the side air bag module.
10. Feed the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips out through the side air bag module
seat backrest foam opening.
11. Continue to roll the seat backrest trim cover up to access the side air bag module. 12. Detach
the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers from the seat backrest frame.
13. Through the back of the seat backrest, position out the seat backrest foam pad. Then remove
the 2 side air bag module nuts and remove the side air
bag module.
Repair > Page 5781
Installation
WARNING: -
Inspect the seat side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material
before installing the seat side air bag module. If any damage is found, install new components. If
any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat
side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
- Before installing the seat side air bag module/deployment chute assembly: -
Inspect the side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material.
- Remove any foreign material from the mounting surfaces of the deployment chute, the seat
backrest frame mounting bracket and the air bag module cavity in the seat backrest foam pad.
- Install new parts if damaged.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which
increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
CAUTION: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air
bag module and the mounting bracket. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage and may cause system failure.
All seats 1. Install the side air bag module and nuts onto the seat backrest frame mounting bracket.
2. Attach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers to the seat backrest frame.
Repair > Page 5782
3. Roll down the seat trim cover to the side air bag module.
4. WARNING: Check the seat side air bag deployment chute for damage. The deployment chute
must not be repaired. If there is any
damage to the deployment chute, a new seat back trim cover and deployment chute must be
installed as a unit. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module
deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Feed the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips back through the side air bag module
seat backrest foam opening.
5. WARNING: If the seat side air bag module deployment chute is not correctly positioned and
closed, the seat side air bag module may not
deploy correctly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module
Install the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips around the side air bag module and
seat backrest frame.
6. Roll the seat backrest trim cover down in position and attach the hook-and-loop strips. 7. Feed
the seat backrest trim cover rear J-clip through seat between the seat backrest and seat cushion.
8. Attach the seat backrest trim cover J-clips.
Repair > Page 5783
Seats with manual lumbar adjust 9. Install the manual lumbar control knob.
All seats 10. Attach the 3 wiring harness routing retainers. Then connect the side air bag module
electrical connector and attach it to the seat track.
11. Install the inboard seat cushion side shield and screw.
12. Install the front seat and repower the SRS.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Description and Operation
Child Seat: Description and Operation
ATTACHING SAFETY SEATS WITH TETHER STRAPS
Some manufacturers make child safety seats that include a tether strap that goes over the back of
the vehicle seat and attaches to an anchoring point. Other manufacturers offer the tether strap as
an accessory. Contact the manufacturer of the child safety seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
Refer to Child Safety Seat Tether Anchor in the Removal and Installation portion or the Owner's
Literature for usage information.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
View 151-13
View 151-22
C2041A
C2041B (Part 1)
C2041B (Part 2)
Removal
WARNING: -
death in a crash.
CAUTION: -
can result.
NOTE: -
stops.
Installation
failure.
RCM. -

SRS as follows:
fail to light.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification
Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification
Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 5802
C3285
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

latches.
impact sensor(s).
the cover.

Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5808
fail to light.
- flash.
scan tool.
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Deactivation
WARNING: -
NOTE: -
from the SPDJB.
latches.
impact sensor(s).
wheel.

Reactivation

clip.
9. CAUTION:
NOTE: -
clips into the I/P.

14. NOTE:
install the cover.
fail to light.
- flash.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment >
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Description and Operation
Child Safety Seat Tether Anchors
WARNING: Always tighten the child safety seat tether anchor/bolt to specification. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in the child's safety seat being incorrectly secured, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death to the child in a sudden stop or crash.
The child safety seat tether anchors are attached to the roof near the rear liftgate.
If the child safety seat tether anchors were in use during a collision, inspect and install new anchors
as necessary. Return the vehicle structure to its original production configuration.
Lower Anchors and Tethers For Children (LATCH)
The lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH) system is a standardized and uniform
attachment system for installing child safety seats in passenger vehicles. LATCH-equipped child
safety seats have 2 lower attachments that connect to the vehicle portion of the LATCH system.
The vehicle portion of the system consists of 2 attachment points (6-mm wires) welded to the 60
percent and the 40 percent rear seat backrest frame. The attachment points protrude from the
biteline between the seat cushion and seat backrest.
If a child safety seat was in use during a collision, inspect the vehicle portion of the system for
damage. If any of the attachment points (6-mm wires) are damaged, install a new seat backrest
frame. For information on installing a new seat backrest frame, refer to Seats.
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair
CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ANCHOR
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles

1. Remove the child safety seat tether anchor cover by releasing the top anchor end of the cover
first and rocking the cover off of the anchor bolt end.
2. Remove the bolt and the child safety seat tether anchor.
3. WARNING: Always tighten the child safety seat tether anchor/bolt to specification. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in the
child's safety seat being incorrectly secured, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death to the child in a sudden stop or crash.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Seat Belt Buckle: Description and Operation
SAFETY BELT BUCKLE PRETENSIONER
The safety belt buckle and pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing from
the safety belt when deployed. The pretensioner works in conjunction with the front air bag system.
When the front air bags deploy, the pretensioners deploy, causing the buckle to move downward,
removing excess webbing from the lap and shoulder safety belts.
If the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of the front air bags and safety belt
pretensioners, a new driver and passenger seat belt system (including safety belt buckle and
pretensioners, safety belt retractors, and height adjusters), must be installed.
For safety belt buckle pretensioner diagnostic information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
For safety belt buckle pretensioner disposal information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Seat Belt Buckle: Testing and Inspection
FUNCTIONAL TEST - BUCKLE AND TONGUE
The safety belt buckle and tongue assembly must operate freely during the latching and unlatching
function. Fasten the safety belt by inserting the tongue (male portion) into the buckle (female
portion).
1. Verify the following during the latching sequence:
- Tongue insertion is not hindered by excessive effort.
- A "click" is heard when the buckle latches the tongue.
2. Verify the system integrity by forcefully pulling on the belt webbing. 3. Unlatch the belt by fully
depressing the buckle release button, and allowing the belt to release and retract. 4. Verify the
following during the unlatching process:
- Push-button depression does not require excessive effort.
- Tongue can be removed easily from the buckle.
- Repeat the above steps 3 times.
5. If the inspection reveals an obvious concern(s) that can be readily identified, service as required.
Do not attempt to carry out any repair on the
buckle and tongue assembly. If a concern exists with either component, a new safety belt buckle
and safety belt retractor assembly must be installed.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER
Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner, Power Seat (Driver Only)

and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 5829
Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner, Manual Seat
WARNING:
- Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result
- After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be
inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: -
Retractors
- Buckles
- Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive
load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of
the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the risk of serious
NOTE:
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed
All seats
1. Remove the affected seat. 2. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
- Remove the cushion side shield screw(s).
3. Disconnect the 2 safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connectors.
4. NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for installation.
Detach the side air bag wiring harness pin-type retainer from the safety belt buckle pretensioner.
Driver seat
5. Remove the seat position sensor wiring harness tie strap from the safety belt buckle
pretensioner.
All seats
6. Detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors from the seat
track and detach the wiring harness pin-type
retainer.
7. Remove the bolt and the safety belt buckle pretensioner.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 9. Install the seat.
10. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.

Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle - Rear
SAFETY BELT BUCKLE - REAR
- Retractors
- Buckles

1. NOTE: To access the center and passenger side rear safety belt buckles, pivot the rear seat
cushion forward and the rear seat backrest rearward.
Remove the bolt and the rear center and RH safety belt buckle assembly. -

2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 3. Check the active restraint system for correct
operation.
- Make sure the safety belts and buckles are accessible to the occupants after installation.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger
View 151-17
Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger > Page 5837
View 151-16
Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver
C3065
Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 5840
C3066
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Extension > Component Information >
Seat Belt Extension: Description and Operation
SAFETY BELT EXTENSION ASSEMBLY
In certain cases, the safety belt may be too short even when it is fully extended. About 20 cm (8 in)
can be added to the belt length by using a safety belt extension. Safety belt extensions are
available at no cost from any Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer parts department. Safety belt
extensions are only available with black webbing.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer
identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt extension
only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended. Do not use an extension to change
the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair
SAFETY BELT SHOULDER HEIGHT ADJUSTER
- Retractors
- Buckles
1. NOTE: Inspect the D-ring cover for damage. If the cover is damaged or does not remain closed,
install new D-ring cover and bolt.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Remove the D-ring cover by squeezing the height adjuster buttons and pulling the cover out at the
bottom.
2. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panel. 3. Lower the height adjuster and remove the upper bolt.
4. NOTE: Note the position of the lower locator tab for installation.
Raise the height adjuster and remove the lower bolt and height adjuster. -

operation.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer > Component Information
> Description and Operation
Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Description and Operation
Safety Belt Warning Indicator and Chime
The safety belt warning indicator and warning chime are reminders to fasten the safety belts. The
system operates as follows: -
If the driver safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the
safety belt warning indicator illuminates for one minute and the warning chime sounds for 6
seconds.
- If the driver safety belt is buckled while the warning indicator is illuminated and the warning chime
is sounding, the safety belt warning indicator and warning chime turn off.
- If the driver safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the safety
belt warning indicator and warning chime remain off.
Belt-Minder(R)
The Belt-Minder(R) feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This
feature provides additional reminders that front safety belts are unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster.
Both the driver and passenger safety belts are monitored and either may activate the
Belt-Minder(R) feature. The warnings are the same for the driver and the front passenger. If the
Belt-Minder(R) warnings have expired (warnings for approximately 5 minutes) for one occupant
(driver or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the Belt-Minder(R) feature.
The Belt-Minder(R) feature uses information from the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system
on the front passenger seat to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore
potentially in need of a warning. The warning is activated if the OCS system senses weight
exceeding a programmed set point.
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) feature is deactivated/activated independently.

When deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R) for a seat, do not buckle the safety belts on the
other seat, or the process will be terminated. To deactivate/activate the Belt-Minder(R) feature,
refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information >
Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation
seconds.
Belt-Minder(R)

Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Seat Belt Retractor: Description and Operation
Dual Locking Mode Retractors
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: -
Retractors
- Buckles
NOTE: When installing a new dual locking mode retractor, the retractor should be checked to make
sure it is not in the automatic locking retractor (ALR) mode after installation in the stowed position.
All outboard continuous-loop, 3-point retractor systems, except the driver position, are equipped
with the dual locking mode system.
The emergency locking retractor (ELR) mode will allow the occupant freedom of movement, locking
tight only on hard braking, hard cornering, or an impact of approximately 8 km/h (5 mph). The ELR
mode helps to reduce the forward movement of the driver and passengers. The ELR mode is
continuously in operation at all seating positions.
The ALR portion of this system does not allow the occupant freedom of movement. The ALR mode
is used when locking a child seat in an outboard seating position or when a tight belt fit is desired.
The ALR mode is disengaged when the webbing is free to move in or out of the retractor. The ALR
mode is automatically engaged when the webbing is fully extracted from the retractor and then
allowed to retract. As the webbing is retracted back onto the spool, an audible clicking sound is
made, indicating that the retractor is in ALR mode. The ALR mode is automatically disengaged
when most of the webbing is retracted back onto the spool.
The automatic locking mode must be used when installing a child safety seat in the front or rear
passenger seating positions where dual locking mode retractors are provided.
Energy Management Retractor
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature at the front seating
positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.
The energy management retractor feature is designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner.
This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on an occupant's chest.
Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection
Functional Test - Retractor
The safety belt retractor assembly must be freely operational for extraction and retraction of the
safety belt webbing between full extension and in-vehicle stowed positions.
1. Extract and retract the safety belt between the full extension and stowed positions. 2. Verify the
retractor operates without excessive effort or binding. 3. Install a new safety belt retractor and
buckle if no obvious concerns are noticed and the complaint has been verified.
Functional Test - Automatic Locking Retractor
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: -
Retractors
- Buckles
1. Position the seat back into the full up position. 2. Position the height adjuster (if equipped) in the
full down or up position. 3. Latch the seat belt buckle and tongue assembly. 4. Pull the shoulder
belt out until the automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature is activated. 5. Release the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract until it stops. 6. Pull on the shoulder belt to check that the belt has remained
in the ALR mode. If the belt is not locked, install a new safety belt assembly. 7. Unlatch the safety
belt tongue from the buckle and allow the safety belt to retract to its stowed position. 8. Pull the
shoulder belt to verify the retractor assembly has converted automatically out of the ALR mode. If
the shoulder belt remains locked in the
stowed position, install a new safety belt retractor assembly.

Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor and Pretensioner
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor and Pretensioner
SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR AND PRETENSIONER
Part 1
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor and Pretensioner > Page 5860
Part 2
WARNING:
Retractors
- Buckles
NOTE:
All safety belt retractor pretensioners
1. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
install a new D-ring cover and bolt.
Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt cover by squeezing the height adjuster buttons and pulling the
cover out at the bottom.
3. Remove the D-ring bolt and D-ring from the safety belt height adjuster, and position aside.
4. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel.
Passenger safety belt retractor pretensioner
5. Disconnect the safety belt tension sensor electrical connector.
All safety belt retractor pretensioners
6. Remove the safety belt anchor bolt and position aside the safety belt.
7. Remove the safety belt retractor pretensioner bolt.
8. Disconnect the safety belt retractor pretensioner electrical connector. 9. Unhook and remove the
safety belt retractor pretensioner.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 11. Repower the SRS. 12. Check the active restraint
system for correct operation.
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor - Rear, Center
SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR - REAR, CENTER
Part 1
Part 2
- Retractors
- Buckles
1. Remove the 60 percent seat backrest. 2. Remove the head restraints. 3. Remove the 2 screws
and the latch cover. 4. Remove the 2 seat latch release lever screws. 5. Remove the seat latch
release lever.
1 Detach the latch rod from the seat latch release lever. -
To aid installation, lock the latch using a flat-blade screwdriver before connecting the latch rod.
2 Remove the seat latch release lever.
6. Remove the 2 screws and the safety belt shield. 7. Release the backrest trim cover J-clip.
8. Unzip the backrest trim cover zipper.
9. NOTE:
- The inboard and outboard head restraint guides are not interchangeable.
- The head restraint guides incorporate an alignment tab that must be aligned correctly when
installed.
Squeeze together the tip of each head restraint guide and pull the 4 guides out of the frame tube.
seat backrest foam pad.
Separate the hook-and-loop fasteners and remove the seat backrest trim cover.
11. Remove the backrest foam pad from the backrest frame. 12. Release the seat latch cable from
the retractor.
13. Remove the 2 nuts and the safety belt guide.

14. Remove the nut and the rear center safety belt retractor.
operation.
- Make sure that after the rear safety belt retractor is installed, the retractor is not in the automatic
locking retractor (ALR) mode.
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor - Rear
SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR - REAR
- Retractors
- Buckles
pretensioners, new driver and/or front
outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must
be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury
or death in a crash.
NOTE: RH rear safety belt retractor shown, LH side similar.
1. Remove the rear quarter trim panel.
install a new D-ring cover and bolt.
Remove the D-ring cover.
3. Remove the D-ring bolt.
4. Remove the safety belt anchor bolt.
5. Remove the bolt and the rear safety belt retractor.
operation.
- Make sure that after the rear safety belt retractor is installed, the retractor is not in the automatic
locking retractor (ALR) mode.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor > Component Information >
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner
C323
Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 5875
C303
C3201
C3202
C389
Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation
Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner
The safety belt buckle and pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing from
the safety belt when deployed. The pretensioner works in conjunction with the front air bag system.
When the front air bags deploy, the pretensioners deploy, causing the buckle to move downward,
removing excess webbing from the lap and shoulder safety belts.
If the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of the front air bags and safety belt
pretensioners, a new driver and passenger seat belt system (including safety belt buckle and
pretensioners, safety belt retractors, and height adjusters), must be installed.
For safety belt buckle pretensioner diagnostic information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
For safety belt buckle pretensioner disposal information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner
The driver and passenger seat safety belt retractors use a safety belt pretensioner system. This
works in conjunction with the safety belt buckle pretensioner, front air bag system and, if equipped,
side air bag system. The pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing slack
from the safety belt. When activated by the restraints control module (RCM), the pretensioner
deploys in the retractor, removing excess slack from the lap and shoulder safety belt. The
pretensioners are activated when the RCM detects an impact force exceeding a programmed limit.
If the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of the safety belt pretensioners, a
new driver and passenger seat belt system (including safety belt buckle and pretensioners or
safety belt retractor and pretensioners, safety belt retractors, safety belts, buckles and height
adjusters), must be installed.
For safety belt retractor pretensioner diagnostic information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
For safety belt retractor pretensioner disposal information, refer to Air Bag Systems.
Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair
SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER
Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner, Power Seat (Driver Only)

Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner, Manual Seat
WARNING:
Retractors
- Buckles
NOTE:
- The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed
All seats
1. Remove the affected seat. 2. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
- Remove the cushion side shield screw(s).
3. Disconnect the 2 safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connectors.
4. NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for installation.
Detach the side air bag wiring harness pin-type retainer from the safety belt buckle pretensioner.
Driver seat
5. Remove the seat position sensor wiring harness tie strap from the safety belt buckle
pretensioner.
All seats
6. Detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors from the seat
track and detach the wiring harness pin-type
retainer.
7. Remove the bolt and the safety belt buckle pretensioner.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 9. Install the seat.
10. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch >
C2286
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor
View 151-2
Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5891
View 151-24
View 151-24
View 151-25
View 151-25
Information > Diagrams > Forward Crash Sensor
C177
Information > Diagrams > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5897
C3209
C3210
Information > Diagrams > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5898
C3211
C3212
SENSORS
Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor
WARNING:
death in a crash.
NOTE:
NOTE: -
Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5902


WARNING:
death in a crash.
NOTE:
NOTE: -
foreign material.

WARNING:
death in a crash.
NOTE:
NOTE: -
material.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger
View 151-17
Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger > Page 5911
View 151-16
Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver
C3065
Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 5914
C3066
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor >
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
View 151-17
C3042
NOTE:
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Removal
WARNING: -
NOTE: -
connector.
trim cover.
rivets.
with the bladder.
Installation
2. CAUTION:
death in a crash.
CAUTION: -
NOTE: -
installed.
fail to light.

Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Removal
WARNING: -
NOTE: -


connector.
trim cover.
bracket.
9. Remove the OCS.
Installation
2. CAUTION:
3. NOTE:
not used.

system failure.

7. NOTE:
connector.
connectors.
death in a crash.
CAUTION: -
NOTE: -
installed.
fail to light.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor >
View 151-16
C356
NOTE:
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Antenna - AM/FM
Antenna: Service and Repair Antenna - AM/FM
ANTENNA - AM/FM
1. Remove the antenna mast. 2. Using a suitable tool, remove the stanchion.
3. NOTE: Access the antenna cable connection behind the RH cowl side trim panel.
Disconnect the antenna cable from the antenna lead-in cable.
4. Release the antenna cable grommet from the vehicle body. 5. Remove the RH fender splash
shield. 6. Remove the nut and the AM/FM antenna.

> Antenna - AM/FM > Page 5955
Antenna: Service and Repair Antenna - Satellite Radio
ANTENNA - SATELLITE RADIO
1. Remove the RH A-pillar trim panel. 2. Remove the RH sun visor. 3. Lower the front of the
headliner enough to gain access to the satellite radio antenna electrical connector. 4. Remove the
satellite radio antenna.
- Loosen the antenna bolt. -
- Compress the tabs and release the satellite radio antenna from the roof panel.

Antenna: Service and Repair Antenna Cable - AM/FM
ANTENNA CABLE - AM/FM
1. Remove the audio unit. 2. Disconnect the AM/FM antenna cable from the AM/FM antenna.
3. NOTE: Lower the glove compartment completely to access the pin-type retainers.
Release the AM/FM antenna cable pin-type retainers.
4. Remove the AM/FM antenna cable. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Antenna: Service and Repair Antenna Cable - Satellite Radio
ANTENNA CABLE - SATELLITE RADIO

1. Remove the RH A-pillar trim panel. 2. Remove the RH sun visor. 3. Lower the front of the
headliner enough to gain access to the satellite radio antenna electrical connector. 4. Disconnect
the satellite radio antenna electrical connector. 5. Remove the satellite radio antenna.
- Disconnect the satellite radio antenna cable-to-satellite radio receiver electrical connector.

Antenna: Service and Repair Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna
GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS) ANTENNA
1. Remove the passenger air bag module. 2. Remove the audio unit. 3. Unclip the GPS antenna
and remove it. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transmitter
Alarm System Transmitter: Service and Repair
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) TRANSCEIVER
1. Remove the steering column opening cover. 2. Remove the 3 screws and the lower steering
column shroud. 3. Remove the PATS transceiver.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transmitter
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5965
4. NOTE: Replacement of the PATS transceiver does not require the PATS keys to be
programmed into the instrument cluster again.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System
Transponder > Component Information > Locations
View 151-13
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System
Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Page 5969
C252
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations
View 151-18
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 5974
C500
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Testing and Inspection
KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD CODE PROGRAMMING
NOTE: Up to 3 codes can be programmed. Once there are 3 programmed codes, any attempt to
program additional codes will be unsuccessful.
1. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code.
2. NOTE: The locks should lock and unlock to indicate programming mode has been entered.
Press the 1/2 button within 5 seconds to activate the programming mode. Holding the 1/2 button for
more than 2 seconds after activation erases the stored customer codes.
3. Within 5 seconds, enter the new 5-digit keypad code. The doors lock and unlock to confirm the
new code is programmed. If the locks do not lock
and unlock, the new code programming has not been successful and the procedure must be
started from the beginning.
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Service and Repair
KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD
1. Remove the LH front door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside. 3. Remove the RKE
keypad retaining clip. 4. Remove the RKE keypad from the door.

Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMING
NOTE:
- This procedure is for programming keyfobs only. Refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems for
integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT) programming.
- All remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitters must be programmed at the same time.
- Do not apply the brake pedal during this sequencing, as doing so ends the sequence and the
transmitters will not be programmed.
1. Electronically unlock the door locks using the door lock control switch. 2. Cycle the ignition
switch from the OFF to the RUN position 8 times in rapid succession (within 10 seconds), with the
eighth turn ending in RUN.
If the module successfully enters program mode, it locks and then unlocks all the doors.
3. NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds after a transmitter has been programmed, the
programming sequence ends (the doors lock and
unlock to confirm that programming is complete).
Within 20 seconds, press any button on the RKE transmitter to be programmed. The doors lock
and then unlock to confirm that each RKE transmitter is programmed. Repeat this step for each
RKE transmitter.
4. Exiting the programming mode is accomplished if one of the following occurs:
- The key transitions to the OFF position.
- 20 seconds have passed since entering programming mode or since the last RKE transmitter was
programmed.
- The maximum number (4) of RKE transmitters have been programmed.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter. If the door locks do not respond for the programmed RKE
transmitter(s), wait several seconds and press the
button again. If the door locks still fail to respond, refer to Locks, Latches and Entry Systems.
(Make sure that no more than the maximum number of RKE transmitters are attempted to be
programmed.)
Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming >
Page 5981
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Autolock and Horn Chirp Programming
AUTOLOCK AND HORN CHIRP PROGRAMMING
Autolock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure
NOTE: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the auto-unlock feature.
1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the
ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle
doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed.
Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position.
3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds.
Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF.
6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the enable/disable mode. 8. Press the door
lock control switch UNLOCK button once, then the LOCK button once to toggle the autolock feature
ON/OFF. The horn will chirp
once to indicate autolock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long chirp), the
autolock feature has been enabled.
9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to
indicate the procedure is complete.
Autolock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped)
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 3.
Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad. 4. Within 5 seconds of
entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While holding the 3/4 button, press
the 7/8 button. 5. Release the 7/8 button, then release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to
indicate autolock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (chirp
followed by a honk), the autolock feature has been enabled.
Autolock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped)
1. To disable/enable the autolock feature, select AUTOLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP control for
the current display mode. 2. Press the RESET control to turn the autolock ON or OFF.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure
NOTE: The auto-unlock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the autolock feature.

lock control switch LOCK button once, then the UNLOCK button once to toggle the auto-unlock
feature ON/OFF. The horn will
chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long
chirp), the auto-unlock feature has been enabled.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped)
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
Page 5982
3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad. 4. Within 5 seconds of
and release the 7/8 button
two times.
5. Release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn
chirps twice (chirp followed by a honk), the
auto-unlock feature has been enabled.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped)
1. To disable/enable the auto-unlock feature, select AUTOUNLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP
control for the current display mode. 2. Press the RESET control to turn the auto-unlock ON or
OFF.
Page 5983
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Stepped Unlock Programming
STEPPED UNLOCK PROGRAMMING
1. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, press the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the
remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter
simultaneously for 4 seconds. -
The turn signals will flash twice to indicate the mode change.
2. Repeat STEP 1 to enable/disable the stepped unlocking feature.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 >
Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
personal device.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module:
> 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
personal device.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations
View 151-25
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6002
C4014
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6003
PARKING AID MODULE
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
C4009
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 6009
C4011
C4010
C4012
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6012
PARKING AID SENSOR

Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
PARKING AID SWITCH
Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams
C4015
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
View 151-13
C269
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Description and Operation
INFORMATION AND MESSAGE CENTER
The message center is a fixed format vacuum fluorescent display, integrated into the instrument
cluster. The message center functions are controlled by the message center switches. The
message center displays important vehicle information by constantly monitoring different vehicle
systems. The message center informs the driver of vehicle operations and notifies the driver of
potential vehicle problems by displaying a warning message pertaining to the system in which a
fault has been detected.
The message center provides the following features:
- Information displays
- Setup displays
- System check messages
- System warning messages
The message center information can be selected through a set of 3 buttons:
- INFO
- SETUP
- RESET
Information Displays
The information displays are non-timed modes. The selected mode remains on until the driver
presses a message center button to change the mode or it is overridden by another mode.
The information (INFO button) display modes are: -
Odometer
- Trip odometer A or B
- Distance to empty (DTE)
- Average fuel economy
- Instantaneous fuel economy
- Electrical energy available (Hybrid only)
- Blank display
Setup Displays
The setup (SETUP button) displays are timed modes and terminate after a finite interval. As part of
the setup menu, the message center has the capability to configure items such as units (English or
metric), autolamp delay, to enable/disable a variety of options such as autolock and auto-unlock, or
to carry out calibrations/settings on items such as oil life.
On configurable items such as autolock and auto-unlock, the message center indicates the
appropriate selection (ON/OFF) by bracketing the selection. For example, if the driver selects the
autolock feature on, the message would display as follows: AUTOLOCK [ON] OFF. If the driver
selects the autolock off, the message would display as follows: AUTOLOCK AID ON [OFF].
The setup display modes are: -
Reset to English (if set in another language)
- System check
- Oil life reset/oil life starting value
- Units English/metric
- Autolamp delay in seconds (if equipped)
- Autolock on/off (if equipped)
- Auto-unlock on/off (if equipped)
- Language
Oil Life and Oil Life Start Value
The oil life is displayed in percent and is preset to a maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500
miles) or 180 days. The oil life start value is used to increase or decrease the starting point of the
oil life. The value can be changed back to the maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles)
if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by 10% increments down to 10%.
System Check
The system check provides a check of all the monitored systems on the vehicle. The system check
scrolls through each of the monitored systems and provides a visual indication to report out the
status of each system. The message center displays OK for approximately 2 seconds if the system
check does not detect a fault in the system and displays a warning message for approximately 2
seconds if the system check detects a fault in the system. Press the RESET button to scroll
through the system check messages.
The system check display modes are: -
Oil life status
- Electrical drive status (Hybrid only)

- Brake system status
- Liftgate/liftgate glass status
- DTE/Fuel level status
System Warning Messages
The system warning messages alert the operator to possible problems or malfunctions in the
vehicle operating systems. The message center displays the last selected feature if there are no
additional warning messages. Once a warning message has been displayed, the message must be
acknowledged to allow full functionality of the message center. Press the RESET to acknowledge
and clear the warning message. The warning messages are divided into 3 basic categories: -
Cannot be cleared until the condition is corrected.
- Reappears 10 minutes from pressing the RESET button.
- Reappears if the condition clears then reoccurs within the same ignition ON-OFF cycle.
The warning messages that cannot be reset are: -
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
- PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
- REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR
- REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR
The warning messages that reoccur after 10 minutes are: -
XXX MILES (KM) TO EMPTY FUEL LEVEL LOW
- STOP SAFELY NOW (Hybrid only)
- HIGH ENGINE TEMPERATURE (Hybrid only)
- HIGH MOTOR TEMPERATURE (Hybrid only)
- PARK BRAKE ENGAGED
When a condition exists, the warning messages that are displayed whenever the ignition switch is
turned from the OFF position to the ON position are: -
LIFTGATE/GLASS AJAR
- SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
- LOW BRAKE FLUID
- REGEN BRAKES DISABLED (Hybrid only)
- TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT
- LOW TIRE PRESSURE
- TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT
- OIL CHANGE REQUIRED

- XXX% OIL LIFE/CHANGE OIL SOON
The message center displays warning messages that indicate a system state during repair
procedures related to the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS). The displayed messages are as
follows: -
TRAIN LF TIRE
- TRAIN RF TIRE
- TRAIN LR TIRE
- TRAIN RR TIRE
- TRAIN SPARE TIRE
- TRAINING COMPLETE
- TIRES NOT TRAINED

Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical
damage.
If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC).
5. NOTE: The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground
from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
- Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network), No Power To The Scan Tool, to
diagnose no communication with the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
- Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
- Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
- Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network) to diagnose no response from the
PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
- If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information
Bus (Module Communications Network).
- If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the instrument cluster. 9. If
the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to Body
Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic
Control Module). See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Information and Message Center
The message center is an integral part of the instrument cluster that receives and acts upon much
of the same information that is input and used to operate the instrument cluster gauges,
informational indicators, and warning indicators. The message center, located in the center of the
instrument cluster is a vacuum fluorescent 2-line display. The message center electronic functions
use both hardwired, and the controller area network (CAN) circuitry to transmit and receive
information.
Whenever conditions are present that require a warning message, the message center replaces
the last selected display with the new warning display. Once the message is reset or cleared, the
message center returns to the last selected display. If multiple warnings are present, the message
center displays each warning for approximately 4 seconds. Warning messages are also generally
associated with other observable instrument cluster indications. For example, when the LH front
door is opened, the message center displays the message DRIVER DOOR AJAR along with the
door ajar warning indicator. This allows the message center to be a more informative supplement
to the instrument cluster gauges and indicators.
It is very important to understand:
- where the input (command) originates.
- all the information (messages) necessary in order for a feature to operate.
- which module(s) receive(s) the input or command message.
- if the module that received the input (message) controls the output of the feature, or if it outputs a
message over the CAN to another module.
- which module controls the output of the feature.
Instrument Cluster Messages
NOTE: Whenever a message is suspected as missing, confirmed by a missing message DTC, it is

important to look for other symptoms that may also be present in the instrument cluster and
throughout the vehicle. Once a DTC is set in the instrument cluster, it may be helpful to review the
complete message list available in Information Bus (Module Communications Network) to see what
other modules also rely on the same message and run the self-test for those modules. If the
message is missing from other modules, the same DTC may also be set in those modules.
Confirmation of missing messages common to multiple modules may indicate that the originating
module is the source of the concern or the communication network may be experiencing some
problems.
The instrument cluster uses input messages from other modules to control the gauges,
informational indicators, warning indicators and message center displays over the communication
networks. If a required message is missing or invalid for less than 5 seconds, the gauge or
indicator that requires the message remains at the last commanded state based upon the last
known good message. For example, if the message is missing the driver door ajar off status for
less than 5 seconds and the door ajar indicator was ON, the indicator remains in the ON state until
the next good message is received. If the message remains missing or invalid for greater than 5
seconds, the instrument cluster sets a U-code diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and the output
becomes a default action for the indicator or gauge. Each indicator or gauge utilizes a different
default strategy depending on the nature of the indication. Refer to Instrument Cluster for further
descriptions of the default action specific to each indicator or gauge. If the messaged input to the
cluster returns at any time, the normal function of the gauge or indicator resumes.
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures


Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Pinpoint Tests
Test A: The Message Center Is Not Operating Correctly
PINPOINT TEST A: THE MESSAGE CENTER IS NOT OPERATING CORRECTLY
Normal Operation
The message center is located in the center of the instrument cluster between the tachometer and
the speedometer in the vacuum fluorescent display area. The message center is integral to the
instrument cluster and uses the same voltage supply as the instrument cluster. The RUN/START
voltage is supplied to the instrument cluster on circuit CBP29 (WH/VT) and the keep alive B+
voltage is received on circuit SBP26 (YE/RD). The instrument cluster logic ground is through circuit
GD112 (BK/GN) and the bulb ground is through circuit GD114 (BK/BU). The message center
functionality is controlled through the message center switch, which is hardwired to the instrument
cluster through input circuit CMC29 (GN/VT) and return circuit VMC29 (YE).
A1-A3
Test B: The Message Center Switch Does Not Operate Correctly

PINPOINT TEST B: THE MESSAGE CENTER SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
Normal Operation
The message center functionality is controlled through the message center switch, which is
hardwired to the instrument cluster through input circuit CMC29 (GN/VT) and return circuit VMC29
(YE). There are 3 message center switch buttons with each button operating a switch that uses
different resistance values. The instrument cluster sends out a reference voltage to the message
center switch on the input circuit and monitors the voltage drop when a message center switch
button is pressed. The voltage drop will vary depending upon the resistance of each button,
providing a specific indication to the instrument cluster which switch is pressed.
DTC B1206 (EIC Switch-1 Assembly Circuit Open) - is a continuous and on-demand DTC that sets
when the instrument cluster detects an open on the message center switch input, circuit CMC29
(GN/VT).
DTC B1208 (EIC Switch-1 Assembly Circuit Short to Ground) - is a continuous and on-demand
DTC that sets when the instrument cluster detects a short to ground on the message center switch
input, circuit CMC29 (GN/VT).

- Message center switch
B1-B3
B4-B7
Test C: The STOP SAFELY NOW Warning Is Inoperative/Always On
PINPOINT TEST C: THE STOP SAFELY NOW WARNING IS INOPERATIVE/ALWAYS ON
Normal Operation
The stop safely now display informs the driver that there is a problem with the Hybrid electrical
system and that an impending vehicle shut down is about to occur. The instrument cluster receives
the hazard input from a message over the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN)
communication bus from the powertrain control module (PCM), the transmission control module
(TCM) and the traction battery control module (TBCM).
NOTE: The instrument cluster turns on both the hazard warning indicator in the instrument cluster
and displays the stop safely now warning simultaneously when a problem or fault has been
detected in any of the 3 modules (PCM, TCM or TBCM).
If the hazard status message is missing from the PCM or if the data is deemed invalid by the
instrument cluster for more than 5 seconds, the instrument cluster sets DTC U0100 in continuous
memory. If the hazard status message is missing from the TCM or if the data is deemed invalid by
the instrument cluster for more than 5 seconds, the instrument cluster sets DTC U0101 in
continuous memory. If the hazard status message is missing from the TBCM or if the data is
deemed invalid by the instrument cluster for more than 5 seconds, the instrument cluster sets DTC
U0111 in continuous memory.
If any one of the 3 messages are missing with the other two valid, the instrument cluster defaults
the STOP SAFELY NOW warning to the last observable state (on or off). If all 3 messages are
missing and the instrument cluster does not see an ignition switch transition into RUN/START, the
instrument cluster defaults the STOP SAFELY NOW warning to the last observable state (on or
off).
- PCM concern
- TCM concern
- TBCM concern
C1-C2
C3-C7
Test D: The REGEN BREAKING DISABLED Message Is Inoperative/Always On
PINPOINT TEST D: THE REGEN BRAKING DISABLED MESSAGE IS INOPERATIVE/ALWAYS

ON
Normal Operation
The instrument cluster receives the regenerative brake disabled status from the powertrain control
module (PCM) over the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN) communication bus. If the
regenerative braking system is disabled, the PCM sends a command to the instrument cluster to
display the regenerative braking disabled message.
If the regenerative braking message is missing, the instrument cluster sets DTC U0100 in
continuous memory and the regenerative braking disabled message remains in the last indication
mode (on or off). If the regen braking message is deemed invalid by the instrument cluster, the
instrument cluster defaults the regenerative braking disabled message off.

- PCM concern
D1-D3
Information > Service and Repair > Message Center Configuration
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Message Center Configuration
Oil Life Reset
NOTE: -
new oil life %.
Information > Service and Repair > Message Center Configuration > Page 6039
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Message Center Switch
MESSAGE CENTER SWITCH
All vehicles
1. Remove the LH instrument panel trim panel.
Hybrid vehicles
2. Remove the jump start switch screw and position the jump start switch aside.
All vehicles
3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the message center switch.

Special Tool(s)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack,
Entertainment System > Component Information > Diagrams
C2401
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack,
Entertainment System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6045
Auxiliary Input / Output Jack: Service and Repair
AUDIO INPUT JACK
1. NOTE: Pull straight back to disengage the clips.
Remove the instrument panel lower panel. -
Disconnect the electrical connector(s).
2. Release the tabs and remove the audio input jack.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System Control
Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)
Entertainment System Control Panel: Service and Repair Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)
FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM)
1. Remove the instrument panel upper finish panel by pulling straight back. 2. Remove the 4 FDIM
screws. 3. Remove the FDIM.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System Control
Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) > Page 6050
Entertainment System Control Panel: Service and Repair Front Control Interface Module (FCIM)
FRONT CONTROL INTERFACE MODULE (FCIM)
NOTE: If the front control interface module (FCIM) is being replaced, it must be replaced as an
assembly with the middle center instrument panel center finish panel. However, the middle center
instrument panel center finish panel can be replaced individually if the FCIM does not need to be
replaced.
1. Remove the audio unit. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global Positioning System: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System -
Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
Global Positioning System: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
personal device.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R)
System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
Global Positioning System: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy
Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
personal device.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation System: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults
To 'Privacy Mode'
Navigation System: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
personal device.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System
- Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
personal device.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
Disclaimer
Locations > Front Control Interface Module (FCIM)
View 151-13
Locations > Front Control Interface Module (FCIM) > Page 6079
View 151-13
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Navigation System: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
been simplified.
Current Flow (1)
Diagrams.
Splices (3)
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6082
Component Names (5)

the wire color.
"Symbols".
Power Distribution
Ground Distribution
C904
on the vehicle.
WARNINGS

the procedure.
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Symbols (Part 2)
Symbols (Part 3)
Symbols (Part 4)
Symbols (Part 5)
Navigation System: Diagnostic Aids
terminal.
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
7 = Seal
1 = Proper crimp
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
6 = Male half
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
signal.
4 = Grounding foil
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
NOTE: -
splice.
wire size
harness.
Navigation System: Connector Views
C2402
C2123
Navigation System: Electrical Diagrams
130-1
130-2
130-3
130-4
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Diagrams
C466
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6104
Amplifier: Service and Repair
SUBWOOFER AMPLIFIER
1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel. 3. Disconnect the subwoofer
amplifier electrical connector. 4. Remove the 4 screws and the subwoofer amplifier. 5. To install,
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
C2400
Radio/Stereo: Procedures
Audio Unit Part Number Retrieval
AUDIO UNIT PART NUMBER RETRIEVAL
Audio Units Without Navigation
1. Turn the audio unit on. 2. Press and hold the front control interface module (FCIM) memory
preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds. The speaker walk-around test will begin. 3. Before the
speaker walk-around test is complete, press preset button 6. 4. Rotate the TUNE dial until the
audio unit part number is displayed. 5. Record the audio unit part number. 6. Turn the audio unit
off.
Audio Units With Navigation
1. Turn the audio unit on. 2. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds. The speaker
walk-around test will begin. 3. Before the speaker walk-around test is complete, press END TEST
on the display screen. 4. Select SYSTEM INFO from the menu. 5. Record the audio unit part
number. 6. Turn the audio unit off.
Satellite Radio Receiver Electronic Serial Number (ESN) Retrieval
SATELLITE RADIO RECEIVER ELECTRONIC SERIAL NUMBER (ESN) RETRIEVAL
Audio Units Without Navigation
1. Operate the audio unit in satellite radio mode. 2. Press and hold the AUX button and preset
button 1, simultaneously.
- The satellite radio receiver electronic serial number (ESN) will be displayed on the front display
interface module (FDIM) screen.
3. Record the satellite radio receiver ESN. 4. Turn the audio unit off.
Audio Units With Navigation
1. Turn the audio unit on. 2. Press the MENU button. 3. Select the SYSTEM INFO tab.
4. NOTE: The satellite radio receiver ESN is shown on the lower left corner of the screen with the
text "SR ESN:".
Record the satellite radio receiver ESN.
5. Turn the audio unit off.

Radio/Stereo: Removal and Replacement
SATELLITE RADIO RECEIVER
1. Disconnect the satellite radio receiver antenna cable and electrical connectors.
2. NOTE: Move the passenger seat all the way back to access.
Remove the 2 nuts, the bolt, and the satellite radio receiver.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Remote Control,
Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair
Remote Control: Service and Repair
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
1. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the driver air bag module during this procedure.
Using a suitable tool, pry the steering wheel controls out of the steering wheel.
2. NOTE: Do not allow the electrical connector to fall back into the steering wheel.
Remove the steering wheel controls. -

Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Right Rear
C802
Component Information > Diagrams > Right Rear > Page 6118
C612
C523
C702
Speaker: Testing and Inspection
SPEAKER WALK-AROUND TEST (EXCEPT NAVIGATION)
NOTE: To enter the speaker walk-around test or audio unit self-diagnostic mode, the audio unit
must be turned on and in radio tuner mode.
1. To enter the speaker walk-around test, simultaneously press the preset buttons 3 and 6. 2. The
speaker walk-around test stops at each speaker and applies sound to each speaker for about 1 to
2 seconds. Each speaker is tested and
displayed on the audio unit in the following sequence: RF, LF, LR, RR, SUBWOOFER.
3. To exit the speaker walk-around test, turn the key to OFF, turn the audio unit off, or press preset
button 1 for diagnostics.
Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Speaker
Speaker: Service and Repair Door Speaker
DOOR SPEAKER
1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Remove the 4 screws and the door speaker.

Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Speaker > Page 6124
Speaker: Service and Repair Subwoofer Speaker
SUBWOOFER SPEAKER
NOTE: The subwoofer speaker, amplifier, and enclosure and only replaced as a complete
assembly.
1. Remove the RH quarter trim panel. 2. Disconnect the subwoofer amplifier electrical connector. 3.
Remove the 3 bolts and the subwoofer speaker.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6130
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
personal device.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
Disclaimer
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
personal device.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
Disclaimer
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations
View 151-25
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6147
C4014
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6148
PARKING AID MODULE
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
C4009
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left >
Page 6155
C4011
Page 6156
C4010
Page 6157
C4012
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6158
PARKING AID SENSOR

Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
PARKING AID SWITCH
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
been simplified.
Current Flow (1)
Diagrams.
Splices (3)
Component Names (5)

the wire color.
"Symbols".
Power Distribution
Ground Distribution
C904
on the vehicle.
WARNINGS

the procedure.
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Symbols (Part 2)
Symbols (Part 3)
Symbols (Part 4)
Symbols (Part 5)
Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids
terminal.
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
7 = Seal
1 = Proper crimp
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
6 = Male half
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
signal.
4 = Grounding foil
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
NOTE: -
splice.
wire size
harness.
C439
Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams
95-1
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
been simplified.
Current Flow (1)
Diagrams.
Splices (3)
Component Names (5)

the wire color.
"Symbols".
Power Distribution
Ground Distribution
C904
on the vehicle.
WARNINGS

the procedure.
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Symbols (Part 2)
Symbols (Part 3)
Symbols (Part 4)
Symbols (Part 5)
Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids
terminal.
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
7 = Seal
1 = Proper crimp
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
6 = Male half
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
signal.
4 = Grounding foil
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
NOTE: -
splice.
wire size
harness.
Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams
95-1
Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
The trailer lamps are supplied power by the trailer tow park lamp relay, the LH trailer tow stop/turn
relay and the RH trailer tow stop/turn relay and are energized to correspond with the exterior
lighting functions of the vehicle. A common ground is provided to the trailer tow connector for the
trailer lamps.
1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating
correctly. If not, refer to the appropriate pinpoint test. 3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of
electrical damage.
Electrical -
8 (20A) (trailer tow parking lamps)
- 14 (15A) (trailer tow stop/turn relays)
- Trailer tow stop/turn relays
- Trailer tow parking lamp relay
- Trailer
4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom
Symptom Chart
Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests
Test X: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - All
PINPOINT TEST X: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - ALL
Normal Operation
The trailer tow connector receives ground through circuit RAT08 (WH) for all of the trailer lamps.
- Trailer
X1
Test Y: The Individual Trailer Lamp Is Inoperative - Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
PINPOINT TEST Y: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMP IS INOPERATIVE - TRAILER STOP/TURN

LAMP
Normal Operation
The battery junction box (BJB) fuse 14 (15A) supplies voltage to the LH and RH trailer tow
stop/turn relays. The trailer tow stop/turn relay coils are grounded through circuit GD120 (BK/GN).
The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage from circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the
vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized,
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT06 (YE).
The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) when the
vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized,
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT09 (GN).
- Fuse
- Trailer tow stop/turn relay
- Trailer
Y1-Y2
Y3-Y4
Y5
Test Z: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - Trailer Parking Lamps
PINPOINT TEST Z: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - TRAILER PARKING LAMPS
Normal Operation
The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) when the
vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil is grounded through
circuit GD120 (BK/GN). The battery junction box (BJB) fuse 8 (20A) supplies voltage to the trailer
tow parking lamp relay switch side. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, the
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN).
- Fuse
- Trailer
Z1
Z1-Z4
Z4-Z5
Tests AA: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously
PINPOINT TEST AA: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY
Normal Operation - Trailer Tow Turn/Stoplamp
The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the
Normal Operation - Trailer Tow Parking

vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, voltage
is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN).
- Trailer tow relay
- Trailer
AA1-AA2
Special Tool(s)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions
Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
been simplified.
Current Flow (1)
Diagrams.
Splices (3)
Component Names (5)

the wire color.
"Symbols".
Power Distribution
Ground Distribution
C904
on the vehicle.
WARNINGS

the procedure.
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Symbols (Part 2)
Symbols (Part 3)
Symbols (Part 4)
Symbols (Part 5)
Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids
terminal.
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
7 = Seal
1 = Proper crimp
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
6 = Male half
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
signal.
4 = Grounding foil
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
NOTE: -
splice.
wire size
harness.
C439
Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams
95-1
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Description and Operation
Body Control Systems: Description and Operation
MODULE CONTROLLED FUNCTIONS
NOTE:
- The time out for the battery saver relay and the accessory delay relay (both are controlled by the
SJB/GEM) is 1 minute if the vehicle has less than 80 km (50 miles). Once the vehicle passes the
approximate mileage threshold of 80 km (50 miles), the time out for both relays will be the normal
10 minutes time out, as described by the Owner's Literature.
The SJB/GEM is the only multifunction control module on this vehicle. The SJB/GEM is a
combination of a multifunction control module and a central junction box (CJB). The following
systems are controlled by the SJB/GEM:
- Auto locks
- Exterior lamps
- Illuminated entry and interior lamps
- Keyless entry keypad
- Power door locks
- Remote keyless entry (RKE) system
- Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
The SJB/GEM is located under the front (passenger side floor) console.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Body Control Systems: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
Electrical -
Smart junction box (SJB)/GEM fuse 5 (10A)
5. NOTE: The vehicle communication module (VCM) prove-out confirms power and ground from
PCM.
7. Carry out the network test:
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB/GEM. 9. If the
DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, REFER to
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart. See:
Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Smart Junction Box (SJB)/GEM DTC Chart See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, verify the symptom. GO to Symptom Chart.
See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
NOTE:
- The time out for the battery saver relay and the accessory delay relay is 1 minute if the vehicle
has less than 80 km (50 miles). Once the vehicle passes the approximate mileage threshold of 80
km (50 miles), the time out for both relays will be the normal 10 minute time out, as described by
the Owner's Literature.
The SJB/GEM is a multifunction control module that controls many of the vehicle systems. Several
SJB/GEM functions utilize hardwired inputs and/or outputs. The SJB/GEM controls the following
hardwired functions, using the corresponding inputs and outputs:
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6239
In addition, the SJB/GEM is involved in other vehicle systems through communication over the
controller area network (CAN). For a detailed list of SJB/GEM network inputs and outputs, refer to
Information Bus (Module Communications Network).
Some SJB/GEM parameters are programmable. Two types of programmable parameters are
available: vehicle configuration and customer preference.
The SJB/GEM utilizes a protective circuit strategy for many of its outputs (for example, the
headlamp output circuit). Output loads (current level) are monitored for excessive current (typically
short circuits) and are shut down (voltage or ground provided by the module is turned off) when a
fault is detected. A continuous DTC is stored at that time for the fault. The circuit will then reset
after an ignition cycle or customer demand of the function (which will switch the component on,
causing the 30-minute battery saver timer to be energized). When an excessive circuit load occurs
several times, the module shuts down the output until a service procedure is carried out. At the
same time, the continuous DTC that was stored on the first failure will not clear by a command to
clear the continuous DTCs. The module will not allow this code to be cleared or the normal circuit
function restored, until a successful on-demand self-test proves that the fault has been repaired.
After the on-demand self-test has successfully completed (no on-demand DTCs present), the
continuous DTC will have been cleared and the normal circuit function will be restored.
DTC B106E sets when the SJB/GEM has disabled a circuit due to a repetitive fault causing a circuit
overload. A corresponding DTC for the circuit in question will also be set as follows:
- DTC B1034 - Radio Start Signal Circuit Failure
- DTC B1218 - Horn Relay Coil Circuit Short to Vbatt
- DTC B1304 - Accessory Delay Relay Coil Circuit Short To Battery
- DTC B1316 - Battery Saver Relay Coil Circuit Short To Ground
- DTC B1349 - Heated Backlite Relay Short To Battery
- DTC B1474 - Battery Saver Power Relay Circuit Short To Battery
- DTC B1502 - Lamp Turn Signal Left Circuit Short To Ground
- DTC B1506 - Lamp Turn Signal Right Circuit Short To Ground
- DTC B1626 - Lamp Keypad Output Short Circuit To Ground
- DTC B2070 - Trailer Tow Relay Coil(s) Circuit Failure
- DTC B2501 - LF Lamp Low Beam Circuit Failure
- DTC B2503 - RF Lamp Low Beam Circuit Failure
- DTC B2505 - LF Lamp High Beam Circuit Failure
- DTC B2507 - RF Lamp High Beam Circuit Failure
- DTC B2512 - Front Fog Lamp Relay Ckt Short to Battery
- DTC C1788 - Stoplamp Relay Output Circuit Short to Ground
- DTC C1961 - Park Lamp Relay Coil Circuit Failure
- DTC P0930 - Gear Shift Lock Solenoid Circuit Low

Body Control Systems: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions

B106A-B1137
B1138-B1231
B12A0-B1299
B12AB-B12B6
B12BA-B1318
B1318-B1342
B1342
B1342-B1688
B1696-B2141
B2143-B2427
B273A-B2692
B273B-B2870
B287A-B2965
B2A2A-B298B
B2A3A-B2A39 / C1095-C1277
C1278-C1327
C1328-C1702
C1703-C1998
C2000-C2780 / P0A0A-P0812
P0ABF-P2613 / U0001-U0100
U0100-U0155
U0155-U0249
U0249-U2023
U2023-U2050
U2050-U2051
U261A-U2527
B106E-B106F / P062F
Symptom Chart
Body Control Systems: Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A: DTCS B106E/B106F - SOLID STATE DRIVER DISABLED/MODULE

DISABLED
Normal Operation
When a repetitive fault causing a circuit overload is detected on certain output circuits, the smart
junction box (SJB)/GEM disables the circuit by removing voltage, or ground, to the affected circuit.
The circuit remains disabled until the fault is corrected and an on-demand self-test is run. When the
on-demand self-test has been run after all faults have been corrected, any DTCs related to the fault
are cleared.
DTC B106E (Solid State Driver Disabled Due to Short Circuit) - sets when the SJB/GEM has
disabled a circuit due to a repetitive fault causing a circuit overload. For a complete list of
corresponding DTCs, refer to Principles of Operation. See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Principles of Operation
DTC B106F (Module Disabled Due to External Fault) - sets when one or more output functions are
permanently disabled due to a repetitive circuit overload fault. When DTC B106F is present, the
SJB/GEM must be replaced after the fault condition has been corrected.
Possible Causes
- Output circuit short to ground or voltage
- SJB/GEM
A1-A2
A3
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page
6268
Special Tool(s)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Auxiliary Step / Running Board > System Information > Service and Repair
Auxiliary Step / Running Board: Service and Repair
RUNNING BOARD
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Release the running board trim bezel
push clips and remove the running board trim bezel. 3. Remove the running board push-pin
retainer. 4. Remove the 4 running board bolts and remove the running board.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Procedures
TAB REPAIR - BUMPER
1. NOTE:
- Inspect the bumper cover to determine if part can be repaired to an acceptable level of quality of
appearance, fit and durability. Will labor and material cost of the repair meet or exceed the cost of a
new replacement bumper cover? If the bumper cover is determined to be repairable, proceed to the
following steps.
- The following steps are to be used as a guideline. Depending on what brand of adhesives or
patch materials are used, procedures may vary slightly.
Remove the affected bumper.
2. Clean the broken tab(s) with a plastics wax and grease remover.
3. Hand sand the repair area with 80-grit sandpaper and remove any foreign material with
compressed air. 4. Apply a plastics adhesion promoter per label directions to the repair area. 5.
Measure and cut a patch of fiberglass cloth or equivalent large enough to form the front of the tab,
then slope back in a wedge shape approximately
51 mm (2 in) from original tab.
6. Prepare the repair adhesive cloth patch per manufacturer's instructions and apply to the affected
area.
- Immediately position the plastic repair material patch to form the tab shape.
7. Allow appropriate cure time and shape the repair tab using a small angle sander. Use extreme
care to not sand through the exterior surface.
8. CAUTION: Hybrid vehicles contain a high-voltage traction battery (HVTB). Before placing the
vehicle in a paint booth, the HVTB must
be removed to avoid heat damage.
Perform any required paint repair operations to the bumper cover using Ford-approved paint
systems.
9. Reassemble and install the bumper cover.

Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Removal and Replacement

BUMPER COVER - FRONT
Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2

CAUTION: Prior to removal of the front bumper cover, place tape at the corners of the bumper
cover and below the headlamps to prevent damage to the paint.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 6 scrivets from inside the
front splash shield (3 each side). 3. Remove the 4 fender splash shield-to-air deflector bolts (2 each
side).

4. Remove the 3 air deflector bolts.
5. Remove the 2 front bumper cover center scrivets from the front bumper cover.
6. Disconnect the fog lamp electrical connectors, if equipped. 7. Remove the 2 front bumper cover
upper bolts and the front bumper cover.
- Position the front bumper cover.
- Push inward on the sides of the bumper cover near the bottom corner of the headlamp until you
feel the bumper cover snap onto the bumper slides.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System
Front Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair

BUMPER - FRONT
Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2

1. Remove the front bumper cover. 2. Remove the 2 pushpins (1 each side) from the front bumper.
3. Remove the ambient air temperature sensor from the front bumper, if equipped.
4. Remove the 4 front bumper nuts (2 each side).
5. Remove the front bumper. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures
Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Procedures
TAB REPAIR - BUMPER
1. NOTE:
- Inspect the bumper cover to determine if part can be repaired to an acceptable level of quality of
appearance, fit and durability. Will labor and material cost of the repair meet or exceed the cost of a
new replacement bumper cover? If the bumper cover is determined to be repairable, proceed to the
following steps.
- The following steps are to be used as a guideline. Depending on what brand of adhesives or
patch materials are used, procedures may vary slightly.
Remove the affected bumper.
2. Clean the broken tab(s) with a plastics wax and grease remover.
3. Hand sand the repair area with 80-grit sandpaper and remove any foreign material with
compressed air. 4. Apply a plastics adhesion promoter per label directions to the repair area. 5.
Measure and cut a patch of fiberglass cloth or equivalent large enough to form the front of the tab,
then slope back in a wedge shape approximately
51 mm (2 in) from original tab.
6. Prepare the repair adhesive cloth patch per manufacturer's instructions and apply to the affected
area.
- Immediately position the plastic repair material patch to form the tab shape.
7. Allow appropriate cure time and shape the repair tab using a small angle sander. Use extreme
care to not sand through the exterior surface.
8. CAUTION: Hybrid vehicles contain a high-voltage traction battery (HVTB). Before placing the
vehicle in a paint booth, the HVTB must
be removed to avoid heat damage.
Perform any required paint repair operations to the bumper cover using Ford-approved paint
systems.
9. Reassemble and install the bumper cover.

Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Removal and Replacement
BUMPER COVER - REAR
Exploded View
Rear Bumper Cover Without Trailer Hitch

Rear Bumper Cover With Trailer Hitch (Part 1)

1. Remove the 2 rear bumper cover lower screws (1 each side).
2. Remove the 4 rear bumper cover center screws. 3. Remove the 2 rear bumper cover lower
pushpins. 4. Remove the 2 rear splash shield-to-rear bumper cover screws (1 each side). 5.
Remove the 2 rear bumper cover upper screws (1 each side).

6. Remove the 2 liftgate alignment bumper bolts and the 2 liftgate alignment bumpers.
7. Disconnect the parking aid system or trailer tow electrical connector, if equipped. 8. Remove the
rear bumper cover. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- When installing, position the rear bumper cover into the bumper slides.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information
> Service and Repair > Bumper - Rear, With Trailer Hitch
Rear Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair Bumper - Rear, With Trailer Hitch
BUMPER - REAR, WITH TRAILER HITCH
Exploded View

> Service and Repair > Bumper - Rear, With Trailer Hitch > Page 6300

1. Remove the rear bumper cover. 2. Remove the 2 trailer hitch-to-back panel bolts.
3. Remove the 4 trailer hitch-to-body bolts.
4. Remove the trailer hitch.

- Disconnect the electrical connector from the trailer hitch.

Rear Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair Bumper - Rear, Without Trailer Hitch
BUMPER - REAR, WITHOUT TRAILER HITCH
Exploded View


1. Remove the rear bumper cover. 2. Remove the 4 rear bumper nuts.
3. Remove the rear bumper. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
COWL PANEL GRILLE
1. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arms nuts.
2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms. 3. Remove the LH and RH cowl end cap pushpin
retainers. 4. Remove the cowl end caps. 5. Release the cowl panel grille from the retaining clips
and remove the cowl panel grille. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the wiper pivot arms.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body
- Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
Front Door Exterior Handle: Customer Interest Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not
Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN

RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block

Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body
- Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 6321
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
Front Door Exterior Handle: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0
Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09

bezel.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
501-14.
pinpoint test T.
501-14.
Parts Block

Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 6327
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09

SERVICE PROCEDURE
ignition key.
Parts Block
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Exterior Handle: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 6333
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Exterior Handle: > Page 6334
Front Door Exterior Handle: By Symptom
Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
bezel.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
501-14.
pinpoint test T.
501-14.
Parts Block
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09

MERCURY:
2008-2010 Mariner
bezel.

SERVICE PROCEDURE
501-14.
pinpoint test T.
501-14.
Parts Block
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09

bezel.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
501-14.
pinpoint test T.
501-14.
Parts Block
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.

DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle

EXTERIOR FRONT DOOR HANDLE
Exploded View
Part 1
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle > Page 6342
Part 2
1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside. 3. Remove the exterior front
door handle cover retaining screw from the door handle reinforcement.
4. Remove the exterior front door handle cover.
1 Pull the exterior front door handle open.
2 Pivot the rear of the exterior front door handle cover and remove.
5. Remove the exterior front door handle.
- Open and pull the exterior front door handle rearward to release and remove.
6. If necessary, remove the exterior front door handle seals. 7. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Reinforcement
DOOR HANDLE REINFORCEMENT - EXTERIOR, FRONT
Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
NOTE: The door glass must be completely raised.
1. Remove the exterior front door handle. 2. Disconnect the door latch carrier.
1 Release the retainer and position the door latch carrier aside.
2 Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement screw.
3. Disconnect the actuating rods.
- If necessary, disconnect the lock cylinder actuating rod from the exterior front door handle
reinforcement.
- Disconnect the exterior front door handle reinforcement actuating rod from the front door latch.
4. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement with the exterior front door handle
reinforcement actuating rod. 5. If necessary, remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement
actuating rod. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair

INTERIOR DOOR HANDLE - FRONT
Exploded View
Part 1
Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6352
Part 2
1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Release the interior front door handle retaining tabs and
remove the interior front door handle.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Front Door Latch: Service and Repair

FRONT DOOR LATCH
Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Position the water shield aside. 3. Remove the exterior front
door handle reinforcement. 4. Remove and discard the 3 front door latch bolts.
5. Disconnect the front door latch electrical connector. 6. Remove the front door latch.
- Slide the front door latch towards the front of the vehicle.
- Remove the front door latch with the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating
cable.
7. If necessary, remove the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating cable. 8.
- Lubricate the front door latch to striker surfaces after installation.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System
Front Door Panel: Service and Repair

DOOR TRIM PANEL - FRONT
1. Remove the door sail panel.
- If equipped, disconnect the power mirror electrical connector.

2. Open and remove the door handle finish panel.
- Pull the door handle outward to fully access the door handle finish panel.
3. Remove the door handle screw.
4. Remove the door inside handle screw. 5. Remove the 3 door trim panel screws. 6. Remove the
door trim panel.
- Pull outward and then upward on the door trim panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
7. Remove the door handle from the door trim panel.
- Press the 2 retaining tabs while pushing the door handle from the door trim panel.
- Remove the door handle from the door trim panel by pulling it back through the door trim panel.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System
Information > Adjustments
Front Door Striker: Adjustments
STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: Before adjusting the door latch striker plate, verify that the door can be closed easily and
fits tightly.
1. Loosen the door latch striker bolts.
2. Reposition the door latch striker plate from side-to-side or up and down as necessary.
3. Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft).
4. Check the adjustment. Repeat the procedure as necessary.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window
Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR

BEFORE 8/13/2010
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched >
Page 6375
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Page 6376
Disclaimer
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front Door Window Exterior
Weatherstrip Deformed
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP
DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010
12/23/10

front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be
due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms -
Exploded View.
2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar

(obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the
center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1)
3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass,
Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View.
102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One

> Page 6381
Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass
Scratched
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door
Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11

BEFORE 8/13/2010
SERVICE PROCEDURE
(Exploded View).
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Scratched > Page 6387
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Disclaimer
Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window
Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
12/23/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
Exploded View.

102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.

Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior
Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 6393
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6394
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair
DOOR GLASS TOP RUN - FRONT
Exploded View
1. Remove the front door window glass.

Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6395
2. Remove the front door interior sail panel.
- If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 front door glass top run bolts.
- To install tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
4. Remove the front door glass top run. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
WINDOW REGULATOR - FRONT DOOR
Exploded View
1. Remove the front door trim panel.

Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6399
2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket.
3. Remove the 3 pushpins and pad assembly.
4. Position the watershield aside. 5. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 6.
Using the window control switch, lower the front door window glass to gain access to the front door
window glass screws. 7. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector. 8. Remove the
2 front door window glass screws.
9. Support the front door window glass in the full up position with tape.
10. Disconnect the front door window motor electrical connector. 11. Remove the front door
window regulator and motor bolt.

Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6400
12. Loosen the 2 front door window regulator and motor bolts.
13. Remove the 2 nuts and the front door window regulator and motor.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Exterior
Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Customer Interest Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not
Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09

bezel.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
501-14.
pinpoint test T.
501-14.
Parts Block

Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Exterior
Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 6411
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
Rear Door Exterior Handle: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0
Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09

bezel.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
501-14.
pinpoint test T.
501-14.
Parts Block

Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 6417
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Rear Door Exterior Handle: By Symptom
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
bezel.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
501-14.
pinpoint test T.
501-14.
Parts Block
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09

MERCURY:
2008-2010 Mariner
bezel.

SERVICE PROCEDURE
501-14.
pinpoint test T.
501-14.
Parts Block
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09

bezel.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
501-14.
pinpoint test T.
501-14.
Parts Block
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.

DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle

EXTERIOR REAR DOOR HANDLE
Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside. 3. Remove the window
channel bolt and position the window channel aside.
1 To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).

4. Remove the exterior rear door handle cover retaining screw from the door handle reinforcement.
5. Remove the exterior rear door handle cover.
1 Pull the exterior rear door handle open.
2 Pivot the rear of the exterior rear door handle cover and remove.
6. Remove the exterior rear door handle.
- Open and pull the exterior rear door handle rearward to release and remove.

Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Reinforcement
DOOR HANDLE REINFORCEMENT - EXTERIOR, REAR
Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
1. Remove the exterior rear door handle.

2. Disconnect the door latch carrier.
1 Release the retainer and position the door latch carrier aside.
2 Remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement screw.
3. Disconnect the exterior rear door handle reinforcement actuating rod from the rear door latch.
4. Remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement with the exterior rear door handle
reinforcement actuating rod. 5. If necessary, remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement
actuating rod. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair

INTERIOR DOOR HANDLE - REAR
Exploded View
Part 1
Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6434
Part 2
1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Release the rear interior door handle retaining tabs and
remove the rear interior door handle from the door trim panel.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair

REAR DOOR LATCH
Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
NOTE: The rear door window glass must be completely raised.
1. Remove rear door trim panel. 2. Position the water shield aside. 3. Remove the exterior rear
door handle reinforcement. 4. Remove and discard the 3 rear door latch bolts.
5. Disconnect the rear door latch electrical connector. 6. Remove the rear door latch.
- Slide the rear door latch towards the front of the vehicle.
- Remove the rear door latch with the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating
cable.
7. If necessary, remove the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating cable.
- Lubricate the rear door latch to striker surfaces after installation.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System
Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair

DOOR TRIM PANEL - REAR
1. Open and remove the door handle finish panel.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System
2. Remove the door handle screw.
3. Remove the door handle pull cup screw. 4. Remove the 3 door trim panel screws. 5. Remove
the door trim panel.
- Pull outward and then upward on the door trim panel.
6. Remove the door handle from the door trim panel.
- Press the 2 retaining tabs while pushing the door handle from the door trim panel.
- Remove the door handle from the door trim panel by pulling it back through the door trim panel.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear
Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11

BEFORE 8/13/2010
SERVICE PROCEDURE
(Exploded View).
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page
6453
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page
6454
Disclaimer
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass
Scratched
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11

BEFORE 8/13/2010
SERVICE PROCEDURE
(Exploded View).
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Disclaimer
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6462
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair

DOOR GLASS TOP RUN - REAR
Exploded View
Part 1
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6463
Part 2
1. Remove the rear door window regulator. 2. Position the rear door window glass to the full down
position. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the rear door exterior sail panel. 4. Remove the interior door
glass weatherstrip. 5. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. 6. Remove the rear door glass
top run bolt.
7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward. 8. Remove the rear door glass top run. 9.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair

WINDOW REGULATOR - REAR DOOR
Exploded View
Part 1
> System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6467
Part 2
1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket.
Using the window control switch, lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the rear door
2 rear door window glass screws.
8. Support the rear door window glass in the full up position with tape. 9. Disconnect the rear door
window motor electrical connector.
10. Remove the rear door window regulator and motor bolt.

> System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6468
11. Loosen the 2 rear door window regulator and motor bolts.
12. Remove the 2 nuts and the rear door window regulator and motor.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Hood Latch: Service and Repair
HOOD LATCH
Exploded View
Removal
1. NOTE: Do not remove the nut.
Loosen the hood latch nut.
2. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the hood latch bolts.
Remove the 2 hood latch bolts.
3. Disconnect the hood latch release cable.
1 Release the cable conduit.
2 Disconnect the cable.
4. Remove the hood latch. 5. If necessary, remove the hood latch release lever.
Installation
1. Connect the hood latch release cable to the hood latch.
1 Connect the cable.
2 Engage the cable conduit.
2. Slide the hood latch down onto the mounting bracket.
3. NOTE: When the hood latch is installed, the latch adjustment must be checked to make sure the
latch is installed and aligned correctly.
Position the hood latch with the alignment marks and install the 2 hood latch bolts. -
4. Tighten the hood latch nut to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component
Hood Latch Release: Service and Repair
HOOD LATCH RELEASE HANDLE
Exploded View
1. Remove the hood latch. 2. Disconnect the 3 hood latch release handle cable guides.
- Note the routing of the hood latch release cable.
3. Remove the hood latch release handle bolt.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component
4. NOTE: The hood latch release handle and cable assembly must be pulled through the cowl
panel into the passenger compartment.
Remove the hood latch release handle and cable assembly. -
Pull the hood latch release cable through the cowl panel.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass >
Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair
WINDOW GLASS - LIFTGATE
1. Open the liftgate window glass. 2. Remove the 2 liftgate window glass nut access covers. 3.
Through the RH access, disconnect the liftgate window glass electrical harness connector. 4.
Disconnect the LH heated window grid wire electrical connector.
5. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Disconnect the 2 liftgate window glass cylinders. 1

Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket.
2 Disconnect the socket from the ball stud.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass >
Remove the 2 liftgate window glass hinge nuts and the liftgate window glass. -
- Transfer components as necessary.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Actuator > Component Information > Locations
View 151-21
Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 6487
C457
C4039
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch >
View 151-21
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch >
C478
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim
Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair
LIFTGATE TRIM PANEL

1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim panel screws. 3. Release the 8 liftgate trim panel
retaining clips.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim
Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6498
4. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Latch
LIFTGATE LATCH
Exploded View
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the liftgate latch electrical connectors. 3. Remove
and discard the 3 liftgate latch bolts.

Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch > Page 6503
4. Remove the liftgate latch.
- Lubricate the liftgate latch to striker surfaces after installation.

Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Window Latch
LIFTGATE WINDOW LATCH

Exploded View
NOTE: Make sure the liftgate window glass is in the raised position.
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the liftgate window latch ajar switch electrical
connector.
3. NOTE: Mark the position of the liftgate window latch prior to removing the liftgate window latch
bolts.
Remove the 2 bolts and the liftgate window latch. -
4. NOTE: The liftgate window latch must be checked to make sure the latch is installed and aligned
correctly.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
TSB 10-5-1
03/29/10


SERVICE PROCEDURE
diagnostics.
Parts Block

100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13412 12
Disclaimer
TSB 10-5-1
03/29/10


SERVICE PROCEDURE
diagnostics.
Parts Block

100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13412 12
Disclaimer
View 151-21
C456
from the liftgate.

from the liftgate.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information >
Service and Repair
COWL PANEL GRILLE

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > License Plate Frame > Component Information >
Service and Repair
License Plate Frame: Service and Repair
LICENSE PLATE HOUSING
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the license plate housing electrical connector. 3.
Remove the license plate housing retaining nuts (4 required). 4. Release the license plate housing
from the push clips and remove the license plate housing from the liftgate. 5. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service
and Repair
Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair
FENDER SPLASH SHIELD
Exploded View
1. Remove the 3 fender splash shield bolts.
2. Remove the 7 fender splash shield pin-type retainers.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service
3. Remove the 6 fender splash shield screws.
4. Remove the fender splash shield. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information >
Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Description and Operation
FRAME ASSEMBLY
Front Subframe
The front subframe is bolted to the body and is used to: -
aid in structural support.
Rear Subframe
The rear subframe is bolted to the body and is used to: -
aid in structural support.
Welding Precautions
The correct equipment and settings must be used when welding mild or high strength steel. Metal
inert gas (MIG) and resistance spot welding are the preferred methods. Surfaces must be clean
and free of foreign materials.
- The correct protective clothing should always be worn.
- Adequate ventilation must be provided to avoid accumulation of poisonous gases.
- A test weld should always be carried out on a test sample.
- Follow equipment manufacturer's prescribed procedures and equipment settings for the type of
weld being used.
- Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery.
- On Hybrid vehicles, depower the high voltage traction battery system. Refer to Hybrid Drive
Systems.
- Disconnect on-vehicle modules and protect them from possible heat damage and electrical
currents when welding.
- Corrosion protection needs to be restored whenever it is necessary to sand or grind through

painted surfaces or Ecoat, or when bare metal repairs are carried out. Refer to Restoring Corrosion
Protection Following Repair.
Underbody misalignment can affect front and rear wheel alignment, the operation of the
suspension parts and drivetrain operation. Window glass cracks, door and window opening
concerns, and air or water leaks at the doors are often caused by incorrectly tightened bolts and
body misalignment.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
Noises > Page 6552
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE

NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Noises > Page 6553
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE

NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6561
Front Subframe: By Symptom
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE

NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10


SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Adjust
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Front Subframe: Description and Operation
FRONT SUBFRAME
The front subframe is bolted to the body and is used to:

Front Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - FRONT
Special Tool(s)
NOTE: Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) shown, all other vehicles similar.

NOTE: Escape and Mariner only.

Escape And Mariner Only
NOTE: Escape Hybrid only.

Escape Hybrid Only
All vehicles
NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of
vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the
same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement
part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during
reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Turn the wheels to the straight ahead
position and remove the key.
Hybrid vehicles 3. Disconnect the high-voltage traction battery. For additional information, refer to
Hybrid Drive Systems. 4. Remove the rear transmission insulator and retainer.
All vehicles 5. Remove the front tires.
6. NOTICE:
- Do not reuse the Constant Velocity (CV) joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and washers or
- Do not reuse the bolts and cap straps for the center U-joint. Install new bolts and cap straps or
NOTE: Index-mark the front driveshaft to the center bearing.
Remove the front driveshaft, if equipped. -
Remove the 6 front driveshaft-to-transfer case bolts and washers. Discard the bolts and washers. -
- Remove the 4 U-joint cap strap bolts and 2 cap straps and remove the front driveshaft. Discard
the U-joint cap strap bolts and cap straps. -
7. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) and the lateral support crossmember.
8. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe (2.3L) or the dual converter Y-pipe (3.0L). 9. Remove the 6
bolts and the scrivet from the LH splash shield and remove the splash shield.
10. Remove the engine support crossmember front insulator bolt.

11. Remove the 2 engine support crossmember bolts.
Hybrid vehicles only 12. Remove the 2 bolts from the lower transmission insulator and retainer
bracket.
All vehicles 13. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember. Discard the nut.
All vehicles except hybrid 14. Remove the rear transaxle support isolator through bolt.

All vehicles 15. Remove the power steering coupler bolt. Discard the bolt.
- To install, tighten to 63Nm (46 lb-ft).
16. Remove the 2 outer tie-rod end nuts. Discard the nuts.
17. Using the Tie-Rod End Remover, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle.
18. NOTE: Use the hex-holding fixture to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing and
Remove the 2 lower stabilizer bar link nuts. Discard the nuts. -
19. Remove the 2 lower control arm ball joint pinch bolt nuts and pinch bolts. Discard the nuts and
the bolts.
20. Using a suitable lift, support the front subframe.
21. NOTE:
- Do not allow the front subframe rear bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing.
- When installing the front subframe rear bolts, make sure both of the front subframe rear bolts are
fully engaged in their cage nuts before tightening to specification.
Loosen the 2 front subframe rear bolts. -
22. Remove the 2 front subframe nuts.
23. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same
time the subframe is lowered.
With an assistant, remove the front subframe.
- Transfer the components as necessary.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame -
Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE

NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6590
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE

NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6592
Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE

NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10


SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Adjust
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
Noises > Page 6606
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE

NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Noises > Page 6607
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE

NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6615
Rear Subframe: By Symptom
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE

NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10


SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Adjust
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Rear Subframe: Description and Operation
REAR SUBFRAME
The rear subframe is bolted to the body and is used to:
Rear Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - REAR
Removal
All vehicles
1. NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance
of vital parts and systems and their failure can
result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if
installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute
design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct
retention of these parts.
With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
Vehicles with all All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 2. Remove the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles
3. Remove the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts. 4. Remove the 4 bolts and position the 4 rear
control arms aside.
5. Remove and discard the exhaust hanger from the subframe.
6. With an assistant, remove the 4 bolts and the rear subframe.
Installation
All vehicles 1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and install the bolts.
- To install, tighten the rear bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).

- To install, tighten the front bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
2. Install a new exhaust hanger on the subframe.
3. NOTE: The vehicle must be at ride height before tightening the bolts.
Position the 4 rear control arms into the subframe. -
4. Install the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts.
Vehicles with AWD 5. Install the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles 6. Tighten the 4 rear control arms bolts.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE

NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE

NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6642
Rear Subframe Mount: By Symptom
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE

NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10


SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
NOTE
NOTE
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Adjust
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Grille: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling
Grille: Customer Interest Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling
TSB 09-26-12
01/04/10
FRONT GRILLE - CHROME PEEL
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Escape Hybrid vehicles may exhibit chrome peel appearance
at the base of the front grille stanchion.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If vehicle exhibits front grille chrome peel at the base of the stanchions, as specified in photo, with
no evidence of impact damage, then replace the affected front grille(s). (Figure 1)
Replace Only The Radiator Grille:
1. Remove the two (2) upper grille bolts. (Figure 2-A)
2. Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two (2) lower inside grille bolts. (Figure 2-B)
3. Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two (2) lower grille speed nuts that attach the grille
to the front bumper cover. (Figure 2-C)
4. Release the three (3) lower grille retainers from the upper bumper cover. (Figure 2-D)

Interest for Grille: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling > Page 6656
6. Install the new radiator grille and attach the three (3) lower grille retainers to the upper bumper
cover by pushing the grille into the upper bumper
cover. Make sure that all three (3) grille retainers make an audible click when attaching to the
upper bumper cover.
7. Hand-tighten the two (2) lower grille speed nuts until the speed nuts are snug.
8. Hand-tighten the two (2) lower inside grille bolts until the bolts are snug.
9. Tighten the two (2) upper grille bolts to 71 lb-in (8 N.m).
Replace Both Grilles Or Bumper Grille Only:
1. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-19 to remove the bumper cover.
2. Refer to WSM, Section 501-08 to remove radiator grille from bumper cover.
3. Place the bumper cover assembly on a clean work bench on top of a fender cover to prevent
scratching of the paint.
4. Push out the six top retainer snap tabs. (Figure 3-A)
5. Remove the passenger side push pin using a flat screwdriver. (Figure 3-B)
6. Position aside the wiring harness.
7. Push out the three (3) lower valance panel retainer tabs. (Figure 3-C)
8. Using end cutting pliers or equivalent, cut off the four (4) retainer snap tabs while being careful
not to damage the outer bumper cover. (Figures 3-D
and 4)
NOTE
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO PRY BUMPER SLOTS OPEN TO RELEASE THE TABS AS THIS WILL
RESULT IN VISIBLE DAMAGE TO THE OUTER BUMPER COVER.
9. Remove and discard old bumper grille from bumper cover.

Interest for Grille: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling > Page 6657
10. Position the new bumper grille on the bumper cover slots and push in to engage the snap tabs.
11. Install the lower push pin.
12. Re-position wiring harness.
13. Install radiator grille to bumper cover, refer to WSM, Section 501-08.
14. Install the bumper cover assembly, refer to WSM section 501-19.
Parts Block
092612A 2008-2009 Escape: 0.3 Hr.
Replace The Radiator Grille Following The Service Procedure (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
092612B 2008-2009 Escape: 0.8 Hr.
Replace The Bumper Grille And The Radiator Grille If Necessary Following The Service Procedure
Includes Time To Remove And Install The Bumper Cover (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
8150 34
Disclaimer
Interest for Grille: > 07-8-5 > Apr > 07 > Body - Wind Noise/Whistle at 45-65 MPH
Grille: Customer Interest Body - Wind Noise/Whistle at 45-65 MPH
TSB 07-8-5
04/30/07
WIND NOISE/WHISTLE - GRILLE
ISSUE Some 2008 Escape vehicles may exhibit a wind noise or whistle sound at highway speeds.
This noise is noticeable at speeds from 45-65 MPH (72-105 Km/h).
SERVICE PROCEDURE
To diagnose, use tape to seal the gap between the hood and the top of the grille. If the noise is
eliminated, use the following service procedure to correct the issue.
1. Acquire two (2) service bolts. These bolts do not have a shoulder like the ones being removed.
2. Open the hood, and remove the two (2) top grille attachment bolts.
3. Use a small round file to remove 3/32" (2 mm) from the front portion of the grille attachment
holes, to allow grille to be pushed further rearwards.
4. After enlarging the holes, insert the new bolts and while pushing backwards on grille, torque the
bolts in a two step sequence. Failure to use a torque wrench may result in damage to the grill.
a. Torque bolts to 53 lb-in (6 N.m).
b. Afler bolts are torqued to 53 lb-in (6 N.m), reset the torque wrench to 62 lb-in (7 N.m), and
continue tightening the bolt until torque wrench clicks.
5. Ensure the grille corners are not touching the headlamps. If grille is touching the headlamp,
move grille forward by a slight amount so that there is approximately 1/32" (1 mm) clearance
between the grille and headlamp. Tighten using steps 4a and b.
6. Test drive the vehicle to verify the whistle has been eliminated. If the whistle is still present,
repeat steps 3-7.
Parts Block

070805A 2008 Escape/Escape 0.6 Hr.
Hybrid: Follow Service Procedure To Adjust Grille Includes Time For Road Test To Diagnose (Do
Not Use With 8200A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE

Interest for Grille: > 07-8-5 > Apr > 07 > Body - Wind Noise/Whistle at 45-65 MPH > Page 6662
8200 42
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Grille: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling
Grille: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling
TSB 09-26-12
01/04/10
FRONT GRILLE - CHROME PEEL
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Escape Hybrid vehicles may exhibit chrome peel appearance
at the base of the front grille stanchion.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If vehicle exhibits front grille chrome peel at the base of the stanchions, as specified in photo, with
no evidence of impact damage, then replace the affected front grille(s). (Figure 1)
Replace Only The Radiator Grille:
1. Remove the two (2) upper grille bolts. (Figure 2-A)
2. Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two (2) lower inside grille bolts. (Figure 2-B)
3. Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two (2) lower grille speed nuts that attach the grille
to the front bumper cover. (Figure 2-C)
4. Release the three (3) lower grille retainers from the upper bumper cover. (Figure 2-D)

Service Bulletins for Grille: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling > Page 6668
6. Install the new radiator grille and attach the three (3) lower grille retainers to the upper bumper
cover by pushing the grille into the upper bumper
cover. Make sure that all three (3) grille retainers make an audible click when attaching to the
upper bumper cover.
7. Hand-tighten the two (2) lower grille speed nuts until the speed nuts are snug.
8. Hand-tighten the two (2) lower inside grille bolts until the bolts are snug.
9. Tighten the two (2) upper grille bolts to 71 lb-in (8 N.m).
Replace Both Grilles Or Bumper Grille Only:
1. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-19 to remove the bumper cover.
2. Refer to WSM, Section 501-08 to remove radiator grille from bumper cover.
3. Place the bumper cover assembly on a clean work bench on top of a fender cover to prevent
scratching of the paint.
4. Push out the six top retainer snap tabs. (Figure 3-A)
5. Remove the passenger side push pin using a flat screwdriver. (Figure 3-B)
6. Position aside the wiring harness.
7. Push out the three (3) lower valance panel retainer tabs. (Figure 3-C)
8. Using end cutting pliers or equivalent, cut off the four (4) retainer snap tabs while being careful
not to damage the outer bumper cover. (Figures 3-D
and 4)
NOTE
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO PRY BUMPER SLOTS OPEN TO RELEASE THE TABS AS THIS WILL
RESULT IN VISIBLE DAMAGE TO THE OUTER BUMPER COVER.
9. Remove and discard old bumper grille from bumper cover.

Service Bulletins for Grille: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling > Page 6669
10. Position the new bumper grille on the bumper cover slots and push in to engage the snap tabs.
11. Install the lower push pin.
12. Re-position wiring harness.
13. Install radiator grille to bumper cover, refer to WSM, Section 501-08.
14. Install the bumper cover assembly, refer to WSM section 501-19.
Parts Block
092612A 2008-2009 Escape: 0.3 Hr.
Replace The Radiator Grille Following The Service Procedure (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
092612B 2008-2009 Escape: 0.8 Hr.
Replace The Bumper Grille And The Radiator Grille If Necessary Following The Service Procedure
Includes Time To Remove And Install The Bumper Cover (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
8150 34
Disclaimer
Service Bulletins for Grille: > 07-8-5 > Apr > 07 > Body - Wind Noise/Whistle at 45-65 MPH
Grille: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Wind Noise/Whistle at 45-65 MPH
TSB 07-8-5
04/30/07
WIND NOISE/WHISTLE - GRILLE
ISSUE Some 2008 Escape vehicles may exhibit a wind noise or whistle sound at highway speeds.
This noise is noticeable at speeds from 45-65 MPH (72-105 Km/h).
SERVICE PROCEDURE
To diagnose, use tape to seal the gap between the hood and the top of the grille. If the noise is
eliminated, use the following service procedure to correct the issue.
1. Acquire two (2) service bolts. These bolts do not have a shoulder like the ones being removed.
2. Open the hood, and remove the two (2) top grille attachment bolts.
3. Use a small round file to remove 3/32" (2 mm) from the front portion of the grille attachment
holes, to allow grille to be pushed further rearwards.
4. After enlarging the holes, insert the new bolts and while pushing backwards on grille, torque the
bolts in a two step sequence. Failure to use a torque wrench may result in damage to the grill.
a. Torque bolts to 53 lb-in (6 N.m).
b. Afler bolts are torqued to 53 lb-in (6 N.m), reset the torque wrench to 62 lb-in (7 N.m), and
continue tightening the bolt until torque wrench clicks.
5. Ensure the grille corners are not touching the headlamps. If grille is touching the headlamp,
move grille forward by a slight amount so that there is approximately 1/32" (1 mm) clearance
between the grille and headlamp. Tighten using steps 4a and b.
6. Test drive the vehicle to verify the whistle has been eliminated. If the whistle is still present,
repeat steps 3-7.
Parts Block

070805A 2008 Escape/Escape 0.6 Hr.
Hybrid: Follow Service Procedure To Adjust Grille Includes Time For Road Test To Diagnose (Do
Not Use With 8200A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE

Service Bulletins for Grille: > 07-8-5 > Apr > 07 > Body - Wind Noise/Whistle at 45-65 MPH > Page 6674
8200 42
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6675
Grille: Service and Repair
RADIATOR GRILLE
1. Remove the front bumper cover. 2. Remove the 2 radiator grille-to-fascia screws.
3. Remove the 2 radiator grille pinch nuts.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6676
4. Release the 3 radiator grille retaining clips and remove the radiator grille from the fascia.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Console: Service and Repair
CONSOLE - FLOOR
Exploded View
Instrument Panel (Part 1)

Repair > Page 6681
Instrument Panel (Part 2)
Repair > Page 6682
Vehicles with a manual transmission

1. Depress the parking brake pedal. 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
All vehicles
3. Position the seats forward and remove the 2 floor console rear bolts.
4. Position the seats rearward.
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
5. Remove the transmission selector lever trim ring.
Vehicles with a manual transmission

Repair > Page 6683
6. Disengage the shifter boot trim ring.
All vehicles
7. Remove the floor console storage bin. 8. Remove the floor console finish panel.
- If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors.
9. Remove the 8 floor console bolts and remove the floor console.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

latches.
impact sensor(s).
the cover.

Repowering > Page 6689
fail to light.
- flash.
scan tool.
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Deactivation
WARNING: -
NOTE: -
from the SPDJB.
latches.
impact sensor(s).
wheel.

Reactivation

clip.
9. CAUTION:
NOTE: -
clips into the I/P.

14. NOTE:
install the cover.
fail to light.
- flash.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Headliner: Service and Repair

HEADLINER
1. Remove the RH and LH A-pillar trim panels. 2. Remove the RH and LH B-pillar trim panels. 3.
Remove the RH and LH C-pillar trim panels. 4. Remove the RH and LH D-pillar trim panels. 5.
Open the overhead console door.
Repair > Page 6701
6. Remove the 2 screws and the overhead console.
7. Remove the LH and RH sun visors.
8. NOTE: Do not fully remove the retaining screws from the sun visor clips.
Remove the LH and RH sun visor clips. -
Partially remove the retaining screws from the sun visor clips.
- Pull downward on the sun visor clips to remove them from the headliner.
9. Remove the interior lamp.
- Gently pull downwards on the outboard ends of the interior lamp assembly.
10. Remove the cargo lamp.
11. Remove the 3 child seat tether anchor covers.
12. Remove the 3 bolts and the child seat tether anchors.

Repair > Page 6702
13. If equipped, remove the screw and the garment hook.
- Open the garment hook screw cover.
- Remove the garment hook screw. -
14. NOTE: When installing the headliner trim ring, it should meet at the rear of the roof opening and
have no gaps or overlaps.
If equipped, remove the headliner trim ring.
15. Remove the 5 headliner pin-type retainers. 16. Remove the headliner. 17. To install, reverse
- Transfer parts as necessary.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Pillar Trim
Trim Panel: Service and Repair Pillar Trim
A-Pillar Trim Panel
A-PILLAR TRIM PANEL
Exploded View
Part 1
Repair > Pillar Trim > Page 6707
Part 2
Removal
1. Position the RH or LH front door weatherstrips aside. 2. Pull inward on the upper A-pillar trim
panel to release the A-pillar trim panel retaining clips.
3. NOTE: Remove the A-pillar tether clip from the A-pillar trim panel. Do not remove the A-pillar
tether clip from the A-pillar unless a new tether
is being installed.
Remove the A-pillar tether clip from the A-pillar trim panel. -
Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the base of the A-pillar tether clip.
- Apply downward pressure on the screwdriver, sliding the A-pillar tether clip base downwards.
4. Remove the A-pillar trim panel.
Installation
1. Install the lower A-pillar trim panel into the instrument panel.
2. WARNING: A new A-pillar trim panel tether must be installed if the tether is damaged or does
not fasten correctly. During a side air
curtain deployment the A-pillar trim panel tether helps prevent the trim from striking the occupant.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
Install the A-pillar tether clip base onto the A-pillar trim panel. -
Position the A-pillar tether clip base into the A-pillar tether holder located on the A-pillar trim panel.
- Slide the A-pillar tether clip base upwards into the A-pillar tether holder until the tether is fully
seated.
3. CAUTION: The A-pillar trim panel tether must be aligned correctly or damage to the tether will
occur.
NOTE: The A-pillar trim panel tether clip, located on the A-pillar, installs into the A-pillar trim panel
tether base, located on the A-pillar trim panel.
Install the A-pillar trim panel onto the A-pillar.
4. Install the RH or LH front door weatherstrips.
C-Pillar Trim Panel
C-PILLAR TRIM PANEL
Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
1. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not
remain in place, install a new cover.
Remove the safety belt guide cover by squeezing the height adjuster buttons and pulling the cover
out at the bottom.
2. Remove the safety belt bolt.
3. Remove the quarter trim panel. 4. Position the rear door weatherstrip aside. 5. Remove the
cover, the bolt and the C-pillar trim panel.

B-Pillar Trim Panel
B-PILLAR TRIM PANEL
Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
Upper
1. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not
remain in place, install a new cover.
Remove the safety belt guide cover by squeezing the height adjuster buttons and pulling the cover
out at the bottom.
2. Remove the safety belt bolt.
3. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside.
4. NOTE: Lower the adjustable safety belt to access the B-pillar trim panel bolt.
Remove the cover, bolt and the upper B-pillar trim panel. -

Lower
5. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers and the front door scuff plate trim panel. 6. Remove the pin-type
retainer and the rear door scuff plate trim panel. 7. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel.
All vehicles
D-Pillar Trim Panel
D-PILLAR TRIM PANEL
Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
1. Remove the quarter trim panel. 2. Remove the D-pillar trim panel. 3. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Trim Panel: Service and Repair Quarter Trim Panel
QUARTER TRIM PANEL
Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
1. Open the rear door scuff plate trim panel access cover and remove the rear door scuff plate trim
panel pin-type retainer. 2. Remove the rear door scuff plate trim panel. 3. Remove the liftgate scuff
plate.
4. Position the liftgate weatherstrip aside. 5. If equipped, remove the cargo net hold-down.
6. NOTE: Insert a non-marring tool between the D-pillar trim panel and rear quarter trim panel to
release the trim panel.
Remove the rear quarter trim panel.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
DOOR LOCK CYLINDER

NOTE: Individual door lock cylinders are repaired by discarding the inoperative door lock cylinder
and building a new door lock cylinder using the appropriate lock repair package. The lock repair
package includes a detailed instruction sheet to build the new door lock cylinder to the current key
code of the vehicle.
1. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement. 2. Remove the door lock cylinder.
1 Release the clips.
2 Remove the door lock cylinder.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-18
C500
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Testing and Inspection
KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD CODE PROGRAMMING
NOTE: Up to 3 codes can be programmed. Once there are 3 programmed codes, any attempt to
program additional codes will be unsuccessful.
1. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code.
2. NOTE: The locks should lock and unlock to indicate programming mode has been entered.
Press the 1/2 button within 5 seconds to activate the programming mode. Holding the 1/2 button for
more than 2 seconds after activation erases the stored customer codes.
3. Within 5 seconds, enter the new 5-digit keypad code. The doors lock and unlock to confirm the
new code is programmed. If the locks do not lock
and unlock, the new code programming has not been successful and the procedure must be
started from the beginning.
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Service and Repair
KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD
1. Remove the LH front door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside. 3. Remove the RKE
keypad retaining clip. 4. Remove the RKE keypad from the door.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information
> Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMING
NOTE:
- This procedure is for programming keyfobs only. Refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems for
integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT) programming.
- All remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitters must be programmed at the same time.
- Do not apply the brake pedal during this sequencing, as doing so ends the sequence and the
transmitters will not be programmed.
1. Electronically unlock the door locks using the door lock control switch. 2. Cycle the ignition
switch from the OFF to the RUN position 8 times in rapid succession (within 10 seconds), with the
eighth turn ending in RUN.
If the module successfully enters program mode, it locks and then unlocks all the doors.
3. NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds after a transmitter has been programmed, the
programming sequence ends (the doors lock and
unlock to confirm that programming is complete).
Within 20 seconds, press any button on the RKE transmitter to be programmed. The doors lock
and then unlock to confirm that each RKE transmitter is programmed. Repeat this step for each
RKE transmitter.
4. Exiting the programming mode is accomplished if one of the following occurs:
- The key transitions to the OFF position.
- 20 seconds have passed since entering programming mode or since the last RKE transmitter was
programmed.
- The maximum number (4) of RKE transmitters have been programmed.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter. If the door locks do not respond for the programmed RKE
transmitter(s), wait several seconds and press the
button again. If the door locks still fail to respond, refer to Locks, Latches and Entry Systems.
(Make sure that no more than the maximum number of RKE transmitters are attempted to be
programmed.)
> Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming > Page 6734
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Autolock and Horn Chirp Programming
AUTOLOCK AND HORN CHIRP PROGRAMMING
Autolock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure
NOTE: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the auto-unlock feature.
lock control switch UNLOCK button once, then the LOCK button once to toggle the autolock feature
ON/OFF. The horn will chirp
once to indicate autolock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long chirp), the
autolock feature has been enabled.
Autolock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped)
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 3.
Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad. 4. Within 5 seconds of
the 7/8 button. 5. Release the 7/8 button, then release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to
indicate autolock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (chirp
followed by a honk), the autolock feature has been enabled.
Autolock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped)
1. To disable/enable the autolock feature, select AUTOLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP control for
the current display mode. 2. Press the RESET control to turn the autolock ON or OFF.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure
NOTE: The auto-unlock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the autolock feature.

lock control switch LOCK button once, then the UNLOCK button once to toggle the auto-unlock
feature ON/OFF. The horn will
chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long
chirp), the auto-unlock feature has been enabled.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped)
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad. 4. Within 5 seconds of
and release the 7/8 button
two times.
5. Release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn
chirps twice (chirp followed by a honk), the
auto-unlock feature has been enabled.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped)
1. To disable/enable the auto-unlock feature, select AUTOUNLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP
control for the current display mode. 2. Press the RESET control to turn the auto-unlock ON or
OFF.
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Stepped Unlock Programming
STEPPED UNLOCK PROGRAMMING
1. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, press the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the
remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter
simultaneously for 4 seconds. -
The turn signals will flash twice to indicate the mode change.
2. Repeat STEP 1 to enable/disable the stepped unlocking feature.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Locations > Right Rear
View 151-20
> Locations > Right Rear > Page 6742
View 151-20
> Diagrams > Door Lock Unit
Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Door Lock Unit
C525
> Diagrams > Door Lock Unit > Page 6745
C609
Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Door Lock Actuator
C704
C804
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Driver Side
View 151-18
Locations > Driver Side > Page 6752
View 151-19
Diagrams > Driver Side
C505
Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 6755
C605
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heated Element: > 10-5-3 > Mar > 10 > Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror
Glass Cracking
Heated Element: Customer Interest Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror Glass Cracking
TSB 10-5-3
03/29/10
EXTERIOR HEATED REAR VIEW MIRROR GLASS CRACK WHEN MIRROR DEFROST IS
POWERED ON-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 03/31/2009
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 03/31/2009 and equipped
with heated exterior rear view mirrors may exhibit a glass thermal stress crack when mirror defrost
is powered on.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace the exterior mirror glass only if there's no evidence of impact damage. (Figure 1) Refer to
Workshop Manual, Section 501-09 for removal and installation.
100503A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.2 Hr.

Mariner: Replace The Exterior Mirror Glass On One Side (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100503B 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Exterior Mirror Glass On Both Sides (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heated Element: > 10-5-3 > Mar > 10 > Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror
Glass Cracking > Page 6767
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K707 01
Disclaimer
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Element: > 10-5-3 > Mar > 10 > Body/Instruments - Exterior
Heated Mirror Glass Cracking
Heated Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror Glass
Cracking
TSB 10-5-3
03/29/10
EXTERIOR HEATED REAR VIEW MIRROR GLASS CRACK WHEN MIRROR DEFROST IS
POWERED ON-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 03/31/2009
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 03/31/2009 and equipped
with heated exterior rear view mirrors may exhibit a glass thermal stress crack when mirror defrost
is powered on.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace the exterior mirror glass only if there's no evidence of impact damage. (Figure 1) Refer to
Workshop Manual, Section 501-09 for removal and installation.
100503A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.2 Hr.

Mariner: Replace The Exterior Mirror Glass On One Side (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100503B 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Exterior Mirror Glass On Both Sides (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Element: > 10-5-3 > Mar > 10 > Body/Instruments - Exterior
Heated Mirror Glass Cracking > Page 6773
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K707 01
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair
Power Mirror Motor: Service and Repair
EXTERIOR MIRROR MOTOR
1. Remove the exterior mirror glass. 2. Remove the exterior mirror motor screw. 3. With a flat-blade
tool, release the 3 exterior mirror motor tabs.
4. Remove the exterior mirror motor.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
6780
C527
6781
6782
6783

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID
> Paint Codes
Paint: Application and ID Paint Codes
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION (VC) CODES
Vehicle Certification (VC) Label Locator
The upper portion of the vehicle certification (VC) label contains the manufacturer's name, the
month and year of manufacture, the certification statement and the VIN. It also includes gross
vehicle weight rating (GVWR). The VC label is located on the left-hand door jamb. The serial
number can also be found on the engine block, transmission and frame.
If a vehicle requires replacement of the VC label and is 4 years old or less, an authorized dealer
must submit the VIN to their respective regional office. The regional office will submit a web form to
the assembly plant for the replacement label. Once the label has been printed, a representative
from the regional office will deliver the label to the dealer and witness installation on the vehicle. If a
vehicle is more than 4 years old and requires a replacement label, the dealer must submit a
request to the Department of Motor Vehicles.
> Paint Codes > Page 6789
Exterior Paint
Exterior paint codes may be listed as a 2-part code. The first set of characters identify the primary
body color. The second set of characters (if applicable) identify the vehicle accent or 2-tone body
color. All colors are base coat/clear coat
Exterior Color Codes -
G2 - Redfire
- G9 - Vista Blue
- LS - Light Ice Blue Metallic
- NH - Light Sage
- NZ - Kiwi Green
- T8 - Tungsten Silver
- T9 - Monterrey/Black Pearl Slate
- UA - Ebony
- YN - Silver Metallic
- YZ - Oxford White
Interior Trim
Interior trim codes are listed as a 2-part code. The first character identifies the interior trim type.
The second character identifies the interior trim color.
Interior Trim Type -
1 - Base cloth seats - Escape
- 2 - High series cloth seats - Escape
- 4 - High series cloth seats - Mariner

- 5 - Leather seats - Escape
- 7 - Leather with suede inserts - Mariner
- 8 - Leather seats - Mariner
Interior Trim Color -
9 - Charcoal
- C - Camel
- S - Stone
Tape/Paint Stripe
Tape and paint stripe codes do not apply.

Paint: Application and ID Paint Code Sticker Location
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION (VC) CODES
Vehicle Certification (VC) Label Locator
The upper portion of the vehicle certification (VC) label contains the manufacturer's name, the
month and year of manufacture, the certification statement and the VIN. It also includes gross
vehicle weight rating (GVWR). The VC label is located on the left-hand door jamb. The serial
number can also be found on the engine block, transmission and frame.
If a vehicle requires replacement of the VC label and is 4 years old or less, an authorized dealer
must submit the VIN to their respective regional office. The regional office will submit a web form to
the assembly plant for the replacement label. Once the label has been printed, a representative
from the regional office will deliver the label to the dealer and witness installation on the vehicle. If a
vehicle is more than 4 years old and requires a replacement label, the dealer must submit a
request to the Department of Motor Vehicles.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Radiator Support > Component Information > Locations
Radiator Support: Locations
Front Structure
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay
View 151-16
Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay > Page 6803
View 151-17
Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver
C3250
Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 6806
C3251
Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver
Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 6809
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair
Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair
ROOF OPENING PANEL MOTOR

Exploded View
Part 1
Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6815
Part 2
1. Close the roof opening panel glass. 2. Remove the headliner. 3. Disconnect the electrical
connectors.
4. NOTE: Anytime a roof opening panel motor is removed, the cables/mechanisms can experience
free-play movement. It is important that the
cables do not move. They are timed to be parallel with each other.
Remove the roof opening panel motor. 1
Remove the 3 roof opening panel motor screws.
2 Remove the roof opening panel motor. -

Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-26
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6819
C912
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6820
Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair
Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair
AIR DEFLECTOR
1. Position the roof opening panel glass to the full OPEN position.
2. CAUTION: Do not damage the air deflector retaining tabs when releasing the air deflector from
the roof opening panel frame.
Release the 2 air deflector retaining tabs from the roof opening panel frame. -
Push the deflector down and towards the RH side to release the LH tab.
- Shift the air deflector to the LH side to release the RH side.
3. Lift the front of the air deflector upwards to release the air deflector wire retainer.
4. Remove the air deflector. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Front Drain Hose
Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Front Drain Hose
ROOF OPENING PANEL FRONT DRAIN HOSE

Exploded View
Part 1
Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Front Drain Hose > Page 6828
Part 2
1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the roof opening panel front drain hose at the front body
pillar.
3. NOTE: The drain hose body attachment can be accessed from under the instrument panel.
Remove the roof opening panel front drain hose. 1
Disconnect the hose from the roof opening panel frame.
2 Remove the roof opening panel front drain hose.

Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Rear Drain Hose
ROOF OPENING PANEL REAR DRAIN HOSE

Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the roof opening panel rear drain hose.
3. Remove the roof opening panel rear drain hose.
1 Disconnect the roof opening panel rear drain hose from the roof opening panel frame.
2 Remove the roof opening panel rear drain hose.

Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair
Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair
ROOF OPENING PANEL FRAME

Exploded View
Part 1
Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6834
Part 2
1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the 4 roof opening panel drain hoses. 3. Release the wire
harness locators. 4. Remove the 8 roof opening panel frame bolts and remove the roof opening
panel frame.

Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass
Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Glass
ROOF OPENING PANEL GLASS

Exploded View
Part 1
Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass > Page 6839
Part 2
1. Open the roof opening panel to the VENT position. 2. Remove the 4 roof opening panel glass
screws and the roof opening panel glass.
- Verify that the roof opening panel is centered and aligned before tightening the bolts.
Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Shield
ROOF OPENING PANEL SHIELD

Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
1. Remove the roof opening panel glass. 2. Remove the 2 roof opening panel drain channel screws
and the drain channel. 3. Remove the roof opening panel shield.
1 Disengage the 4 spring-loaded slide locks.
2 Slide the panel up and forward.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Child Seat > Component Information > Description and Operation
Child Seat: Description and Operation
ATTACHING SAFETY SEATS WITH TETHER STRAPS
Some manufacturers make child safety seats that include a tether strap that goes over the back of
the vehicle seat and attaches to an anchoring point. Other manufacturers offer the tether strap as
an accessory. Contact the manufacturer of the child safety seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
Refer to Child Safety Seat Tether Anchor in the Removal and Installation portion or the Owner's
Literature for usage information.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-16
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page
6849
C353
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-16
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
6853
C352
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
6854
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Seat Back: Removal and Replacement

Seat Backrest - Front
SEAT BACKREST - FRONT
Exploded View


WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE:
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover and side air bag module
and nuts must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary.
1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the recliner handle cover by pulling it forward. 3. Remove the
outboard front seat side cushion shield.
- If removing the outboard passenger seat cushion side shield, remove the screw and slide the
shield forward. -
Release the rear clip and push forward to release the front clip.
- If removing the outboard driver seat side cushion shield, remove the 3 screws. -
If equipped, disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the inboard front seat cushion side shield.
- If driver seat, remove the 2 inboard side shield screws.
- If passenger seat, remove the screw and slide the side shield forward to release the front hook.
5. Remove the wiring harness tie strap and detach the side air bag wiring harness pin-type retainer
from the safety belt buckle pretensioner. 6. Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector
and detach it from the seat track.
- Detach the pin-type retainers and wiring harness from the seat cushion.
7. Remove the bolt and position aside the safety belt buckle pretensioner.
8. If equipped, disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector.
- Access the electrical connector by slightly pulling the wiring harness out from the backrest trim
cover.
9. CAUTION: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air
bag module and the mounting bracket.
Damage to the wire harness may occur.
Disconnect the side air bag electrical connector. -
Route the side air bag wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame.
10. Remove the 4 backrest-to-seat track bolts (power seat) or 3 remaining backrest-to-seat track
bolts (manual seat) and backrest.


Seat Backrest - Rear
SEAT BACKREST - REAR
Exploded View
60/40 Split Bench (Part 1)

Seat Backrest - Rear (Part 1)


Seat Cushion - Rear
Removal
NOTE: The RH rear seat backrest (40 percent) must be removed prior to the LH rear seat backrest
(60 percent).
Both rear seat backrests 1. Position both rear seat cushions forward. 2. Route the safety belt
buckles from the elastic straps. 3. Remove the RH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt.
LH rear seat backrest

4. Remove the center safety belt anchor bolt. 5. Remove the LH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt.
Both rear seat backrests 6. Release and position both rear backrests downward. 7. Remove the 2
pin-type retainers and position the carpet aside.
8. Remove the bolt cover.
9. Remove the RH outboard backrest-to-floor nut, inboard backrest-to-floor nut and inboard
backrest-to-floor bolt.
10. Lift and remove the RH rear seat backrest.
LH rear seat backrest 11. Remove the LH outboard backrest-to-floor nut. 12. Lift and remove the
LH rear seat backrest.
Installation
NOTE: -
The LH rear seat backrest (60 percent) must be installed prior to the RH rear seat backrest (40
percent).
- The seat-to-floor fasteners must be tightened in the sequence described in this procedure.
LH rear seat backrest 1. Position the LH rear seat backrest in the vehicle. 2. Install the LH outboard
backrest-to-floor nut. Do not tighten at this time.
RH rear seat backrest 3. Position the RH rear seat backrest in the vehicle. 4. Install the inboard
backrest-to-floor nut and inboard backrest-to-floor bolt.
5. Install the bolt cover.

6. Install the RH outboard backrest-to-floor nut.

Both rear seat backrests 7. Tighten the LH outboard backrest-to-floor nut.
8. Position the carpet and install the 2 pin-type retainers.
9. Position upward and latch both rear backrests.
10. Install the LH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt.
11. Install the center safety belt anchor bolt.
RH rear seat backrest 12. Install the RH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt.
13. Route the safety belt buckles through the elastic straps. 14. Position both rear seat cushions in
place.
Seat Back: Overhaul

Seat Backrest - Front
SEAT BACKREST - FRONT
Part 1
Part 2
Disassembly
WARNING: -
NOTE: -
If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover and side air bag module
- Driver seat shown, passenger similar.
All seats 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the seat backrest. 3. Remove the head restraint.
- Release the 2 guide locks.
4. Pull outward and remove the 2 head restraint guides.
Seats with lumbar adjust 5. Remove the lumbar knob.
All seats 6. Release the backrest trim cover J-clip.

7. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips
or the hook-and-loop strips may be
torn from the seat backrest foam.
Partially invert the backrest trim cover up to the side air bag. -
8. Release the side air bag module deployment chute J-clip from around the side air bag module.
9. Pull the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips through opening in the backrest foam
pad.
10. Detach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers.
11. Remove the 2 side air bag module nuts and side air bag module. 12. Invert and remove the
backrest trim cover.
13. Remove the backrest foam pad.
Seats with lumbar adjust 14. Remove the 2 screws and position aside the lumbar adjust control.
15. Release the lumbar support from the backrest frame wires and remove.
Assembly
WARNING: -
Before installing the seat side air bag module/deployment chute assembly: -
Inspect the side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material.
- Remove any foreign material from the mounting surfaces of the deployment chute, the seat
backrest frame mounting bracket and the air bag module cavity in the seat backrest foam pad.
- Install new parts if damaged.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which
increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
- Inspect the seat side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material
before installing the seat side air bag module. If any damage is found, install new components. If
any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat
side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
CAUTION: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air
bag module and the mounting bracket. Damage to the wire harness may occur.
Seats with lumbar adjust 1. Install the lumbar support assembly to the backrest frame wires. 2.
Install the lumbar adjust control and 2 screws.
All seats 3. Install the side air bag module and 2 nuts to the backrest frame mounting bracket.
4. Position the side air bag module wiring harness to the backrest frame and attach the retainers.
5. Install the backrest foam pad to the backrest frame. 6. Position and roll the backrest trim cover
down the backrest to the side air bag module.
Feed the side air bag deployment chute and clips back through the opening in the backrest foam
pad.
8. WARNING: If the seat side air bag module deployment chute is not correctly positioned and
closed, the seat side air bag module may not
deploy correctly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module
Install the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips around the side air bag module and
seat backrest frame.
9. Roll the trim cover down the backrest and fasten the hook-and-loop strips.
10. Fasten the backrest J-clip.
Seats with lumbar adjust 11. Install the lumbar control knob.
All seats 12. Install the seat backrest. 13. Install the seat.
Seat Backrest - Rear
SEAT BACKREST - REAR

Part 1
Part 2
Both rear seat backrests
1. Remove the rear seat backrest. 2. Remove the head restraint(s). 3. Remove the 2 screws and
the latch cover. 4. Remove the 2 seat latch release cover screws. 5. Remove the seat latch release
lever.
6. Release the backrest trim cover J-clip.

8. NOTE:
installed.
Squeeze together the tip of each head restraint guide and remove from the backrest frame.
Sixty percent seat backrest
9. Remove the 2 screws and the safety belt shield.
10. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip
or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
from the seat backrest foam pad.
Separate the hook-and-loop strips and remove the seat backrest trim cover.
11. Remove the backrest foam pad from the backrest frame.
Sixty percent seat backrest
12. Release the seat latch cable from the safety belt retractor.
- For installation, make sure the rear safety belt retractor is not in the automatic locking retractor
(ALR) mode after installation.
13. Remove the 2 nuts and the safety belt guide.
14. Remove the rear center safety belt retractor lower nut and the rear center safety belt retractor.
15. Remove the 2 backrest latch bolts and backrest latch.
16. Remove the RH backrest pivot bracket-to-backrest frame bolt and rear seat backrest bracket.
17. Remove the LH backrest pivot bracket-to-backrest frame bolt and rear seat backrest bracket.
18. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
- If 60 percent seat, verify the safety belt retractor operates without excessive effort or binding.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers
Seat Cover: Customer Interest Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers
TSB 09-23-3
11/30/09
CLOTH SEAT STAINS WITH WHITE RING OUTLINE - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/14/2009 -
(EXCLUDES XLS)
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Escape Hybrid vehicles (excludes Mariner) equipped with
Cloth seats (excludes XLS) and built on or before 5/14/2009, may exhibit stains with a white ring
outline around them. An updated seat cover is now available to reduce this specific type of staining.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Inspect the seat cover stain for a white ring outline. (Figure 1)
Customer Interest for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 6886
2. If the white ring stain is present, then replace the seat cover with latest level part. (Figures 2-3)
Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-10
Seating Disassembly and Assembly.
NOTE
ONLY APPLIES TO STAINS WITH WHITE RING OUTLINE. REFER TO WARRANTY AND
POLICY MANUAL FOR ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVER STAINS.

092303A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Seat Cushion Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be
Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303 2008-2009 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Right Front Seat Cushion Cover Includes Time To Reset The
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H,
J, Or K)
092303C 2008-2009 Escape, 1.6 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Front Seat Cushion Covers Includes Time To Reset The Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303D 2008-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace One Front Seat Back Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With
A, B, C, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303E 2008-2009 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Front Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With
A, B, C, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303F 2008-2009 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace One Rear Seat Cushion Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
With D, E, H, J, Or K)
092303G 2008-2009 Escape, 0.4 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Rear Seat Cushion Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
092303H 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Right Rear Seat Back Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
With A, B, C, E, F, G)
092303J 2008-2009 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Left Rear Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
With A, B, C, D, E, F, And G)
092303K 2008-2009 Escape, 1.2 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Rear Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With
A, B, C, D, F, And G)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7862901 D4
Disclaimer
All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers
Seat Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers
TSB 09-23-3
11/30/09
CLOTH SEAT STAINS WITH WHITE RING OUTLINE - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/14/2009 -
(EXCLUDES XLS)
ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Escape Hybrid vehicles (excludes Mariner) equipped with
Cloth seats (excludes XLS) and built on or before 5/14/2009, may exhibit stains with a white ring
outline around them. An updated seat cover is now available to reduce this specific type of staining.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Inspect the seat cover stain for a white ring outline. (Figure 1)
All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page
6895
6896
2. If the white ring stain is present, then replace the seat cover with latest level part. (Figures 2-3)
Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-10
Seating Disassembly and Assembly.
NOTE
ONLY APPLIES TO STAINS WITH WHITE RING OUTLINE. REFER TO WARRANTY AND
POLICY MANUAL FOR ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVER STAINS.

6897
092303A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Seat Cushion Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be
Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303 2008-2009 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Right Front Seat Cushion Cover Includes Time To Reset The
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H,
J, Or K)
092303C 2008-2009 Escape, 1.6 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Front Seat Cushion Covers Includes Time To Reset The Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303D 2008-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace One Front Seat Back Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With
A, B, C, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303E 2008-2009 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Front Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With
A, B, C, F, G, H, J, Or K)
092303F 2008-2009 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace One Rear Seat Cushion Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
092303G 2008-2009 Escape, 0.4 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Rear Seat Cushion Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
092303H 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Right Rear Seat Back Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
6898
With A, B, C, E, F, G)
092303J 2008-2009 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Escape Hybrid: Replace The Left Rear Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed
With A, B, C, D, E, F, And G)
092303K 2008-2009 Escape, 1.2 Hrs.
Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Rear Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With
A, B, C, D, F, And G)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7862901 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat
Backrest Cover - Front
Seat Cover: Service and Repair Seat Backrest Cover - Front

SEAT BACKREST COVER - FRONT
Exploded View

Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6901

WARNING:
NOTE:
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover and side air bag module
- Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
1. Depower the SRS. 2. Release the 2 locking tabs and remove the head restraint.
3. NOTE: The head restraint guides are not interchangeable.
Pull and remove the 2 head restraint guides.
4. If equipped, remove the manual lumbar adjust knob. 5. Release the J-clip at the bottom of the
front seat backrest trim cover.
6. If equipped, disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector and route through the
elastic loop in the backrest trim cover.
from the seat backrest foam.

Partially invert the backrest trim cover up to the side air bag. -
8. Release the side air bag module deployment chute J-clip from around the side air bag module.
Pull the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips through the opening in the backrest
foam pad.
10. Invert and remove the backrest trim cover. 11. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 12.
Repower the SRS.
Seat Cover: Service and Repair Seat Cushion Cover - Front

SEAT CUSHION COVER - FRONT
Exploded View


Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
WARNING:
CAUTION:
- It is necessary to carry out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset when a front
passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover is installed or an OCS system service
kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in system failure and the incorrect operation of the OCS system.
- Do not install a new heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable
separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an occupant
classification sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. Refer to Air
Bag Systems for the OCS removal and installation procedure.
NOTE:
An OCS system service kit has the electrical connector glued to the module, it cannot and should
All seats
1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the front seat cushion.
3. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips
or the hook-and-loop strips may be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
NOTE: If equipped, note heater mat wire harness routing for installation.
Release the J-clips and remove the cushion trim cover. -
Separate the hook-and-loop strips.
4. CAUTION: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover
to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
5. Install the front seat cushion. 6. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do
not prove out the SRS at this time.
Passenger seat
death in a crash.
CAUTION: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset: -
Make sure the voltage to the occupant classification system module (OCSM) is above 8.0 volts and
less than 18.0 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
NOTE: If the first attempt to carry out the OCS system reset is unsuccessful, a second attempt
must be made. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, a new OCS system service kit must be
installed.
Carry out the OCS system reset active command.
Cycle the ignition switch from ON to OFF.
All seats
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an SRS fault is
present, the air bag warning indicator will: -
fail to light.
- flash at a 5Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator may not illuminate until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition
switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to
indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be
diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool.
Seat Cover: Service and Repair Seat Backrest Cover - Rear

SEAT BACKREST COVER - REAR
Exploded View



Seat Cushion - Rear
1. Remove the rear seat backrest. 2. Remove the head restraint(s). 3. Remove the 2 screws and
the latch cover. 4. Remove the 2 seat latch release cover screws. 5. Remove the seat latch release
lever.

6. Release the backrest trim cover J-clip.
8. NOTE:
installed.
Squeeze together the tip of each head restraint guide and remove from the backrest frame.
9. If 60 percent backrest, remove the 2 screws and the safety belt shield.
from the seat backrest foam pad.
Separate the hook-and-loop strips and remove the seat backrest trim cover.
- If 60 percent seat, verify the safety belt retractor operates without excessive effort or binding.
Seat Cover: Service and Repair Seat Cushion Cover - Rear

SEAT CUSHION COVER - REAR
Exploded View



Seat Cushion - Rear
1. Remove the rear seat cushion.
- Position the seat cushion forward.
- Release the locking tab and slide the rear seat cushion outward.
Unzip the cushion trim cover zipper.
3. Invert and remove the cushion trim cover. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Seat Cushion: Removal and Replacement

SEAT CUSHION - FRONT
Exploded View


Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
CAUTION:
- It is necessary to carry out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset when a front
NOTE:
- The passenger seat is equipped with an OCS system and is replaced as an assembly.
All seats
1. Remove the front seat.
Passenger seat
2. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the
kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS
system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: -
To identify between a production OCS system and a OCS system service kit, inspect the OCSM
- If removing a production occupant classification sensor (OCS) system or an OCS system service
kit, refer to the appropriate procedure in Air Bag Systems.
Disconnect the OCS wiring harness. -
For an original equipment OCS system, disconnect the OCSM and pressure sensor electrical
connectors.
- For an OCS system service kit, disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from
the service part OCS electrical connector.
Heated seat
3. If equipped, disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector.
- Access the electrical connector by slightly pulling the wiring harness out from the backrest trim
cover.
4. Disconnect and detach the cushion heater mat electrical connector. 5. Release the locking tab
and remove the heated seat relay from the bracket on the cushion frame.
All seats
6. NOTE: Note wiring harness routing for installation.
Detach all wiring harness pin-type retainers from the seat cushion frame.
7. Remove the 4 front seat track bolts.
8. Remove the front seat cushion. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
10. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this
time.
Passenger Seat
death in a crash.
installed.

All seats
fail to light.
Seat Cushion: Overhaul
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Side
SEAT CUSHION - FRONT, PASSENGER SIDE
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Part 1
Part 2
Disassembly
WARNING: -
Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load
limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the
safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the risk of serious
CAUTION: -
It is necessary to carry out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset when a front
NOTE: -
Occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components (seat wiring harness, seat cushion foam
pad, bladder with pressure sensor and occupant classification system module [OCSM]) are
All seats 1. Remove the passenger front seat. 2. Remove the seat backrest. 3. Remove the safety
belt buckle pretensioner.
- Disconnect and detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors
from the seat track.
- Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer.
- Route the wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame.
Detach the seat harness electrical connector and wiring harness from the seat track.
Heated seat 6. Disconnect and detach the cushion heater mat electrical connector. 7. Release the
locking tab and remove the heated seat relay from the bracket on the cushion frame. 8. Disconnect
the heated seat relay electrical connector.
Seat with an original equipment OCS system
9. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the
kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS
system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a OCS system service kit, inspect the
OCSM electrical connector.
Disconnect the electrical connectors and wiring clips. 1
Disconnect the OCSM electrical connector.
2 Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector. -
Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the cushion frame.
Release the cushion trim cover retainers and remove the cushion trim cover. -
11. Remove the cushion foam pad. 12. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then
slide the pressure off the bracket.
13. CAUTION: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion frame when removing
the rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and the OCSM.
14. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion frame. 15. Feed the
OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion frame opening and remove as an
assembly with the bladder.
Seat with an OCS system service kit 16. Disconnect the electrical connector and wiring clips.
1 Disconnect the seat wire harness OCSM electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2 Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the cushion frame.
Release the cushion trim cover retainers and remove the cushion trim cover. -
18. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure off the bracket.
19. CAUTION: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion frame when removing
the rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCSM from the seat cushion frame.
20. Remove the OCS.
- Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, OCSM and connectors)
through the seat cushion frame opening.
Assembly
All seats 1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
Seat with an original equipment OCS system
2. CAUTION:
- Failure to route the seat occupant classification sensor (OCS) components through the correct
seat cushion support opening can cause component failure.
- While positioning the seat cushion frame and occupant classification sensor (OCS), be careful not
to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Feed the OCS system components (pressure sensor and hose) through the opening in the seat
cushion frame.
3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion frame. 4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS
bladder and seat cushion frame.
Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion frame bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
6. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion frame bracket and install the rivets.
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion frame.
8. CAUTION: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover
to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
Install the cushion trim cover and attach the cushion trim cover retainers to the cushion frame.
9. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion frame and occupant classification sensor (OCS),
be careful not to damage any of the
components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Position the seat cushion to the seat track.
10. Install the 4 seat track bolts.
1 Connect the OCSM electrical connector.
2 Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector. -
Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion frame.
Seat with OCS service kit
12. CAUTION:
- Inspect the occupant classification sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion frame and support
assembly for any foreign objects, before installing the OCS to the seat cushion frame. If any foreign
- Failure to route the seat occupant classification sensor (OCS) components through the correct
seat cushion support opening can cause component failure.
- While positioning the seat cushion frame and occupant classification sensor (OCS), be careful not
to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Feed the OCS system service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, OCSM, wire harness and
connectors) through the opening in the seat cushion
frame.
13. NOTE:
not used.
Install the OCS system components to the seat cushion pan. 1
2 Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion frame bracket. -
The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the RCM.
14. Attach the seat cushion trim cover retainers to the seat cushion frame.
15. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion frame and occupant classification sensor (OCS),
be careful not to damage any of the
components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.

Position the seat track to the seat cushion to the seat track.
16. Install the 4 seat track bolts.
17. NOTE: Do not tie strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose.
- Connect the seat wire harness OCS system electrical connector to the service part OCS system
- Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion frame.
- Tie strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside.
- Tie strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safety aside.
Heated seat 18. Install the heated seat relay to the bracket on the cushion frame. 19. Connect the
heated seat relay electrical connector. 20. Connect the cushion heater mat electrical connector and
attach to the cushion frame.
All seats 21. Attach the seat electrical connector and wiring harness to the seat track. 22. Connect
the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors.
- Route the wiring harness between the seat track and cushion frame.
- Attach the wiring harness pin-type retainer.
23. Install the seat backrest. 24. Install the seat. Do not prove out the SRS at this time.
death in a crash.
installed.

fail to light.
Seat Cushion - Rear
SEAT CUSHION - REAR
1. Remove the rear seat cushion.
- Position the seat cushion forward.
- Release the locking tab and slide the rear seat cushion outward.
Unzip the cushion trim cover zipper.
3. Invert and remove the cushion trim cover. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the cushion pivot upper
link.
5. Remove the 2 cushion hinge floor bracket bolts and cushion support-to-floor bracket.
Seat Cushion - Driver
SEAT CUSHION - DRIVER

Part 1
Part 2
WARNING: -
Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load
limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the
safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the risk of serious
NOTE: -
1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the seat backrest. 3. Remove the safety belt buckle
pretensioner.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector(s).
- Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector.
- If equipped, disconnect the power seat track electrical connector and detach the wiring harness.
5. Remove the 4 bolts and seat track.
6. If equipped, disconnect the cushion heater mat electrical connector.
NOTE: If equipped, note heater mat wire harness routing for installation.
Release the trim cover retainers and remove the cushion trim cover. -
8. Remove the cushion foam pad. 9. Release the locking tab and remove the heated seat relay
from the bracket on the cushion frame.
- Disconnect the relay electrical connector.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Seat Heater: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
been simplified.
Current Flow (1)
Diagrams.
Splices (3)
Component Names (5)

the wire color.
"Symbols".
Power Distribution
Ground Distribution
C904
on the vehicle.
WARNINGS

the procedure.
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Symbols (Part 2)
Symbols (Part 3)
Symbols (Part 4)
Symbols (Part 5)
Seat Heater: Diagnostic Aids
terminal.
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
7 = Seal
1 = Proper crimp
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
6 = Male half
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
signal.
4 = Grounding foil
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
NOTE: -
splice.
wire size
harness.
Seat Heater: Connector Views
C3283
C3284
Seat Heater: Electrical Diagrams
119-1
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated
Seats Relay
View 151-16
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated
Seats Relay > Page 6972
View 151-17
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated
Seat Relay, Driver
C3250
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated
Seat Relay, Driver > Page 6975
C3251
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 6978
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair

SEAT CONTROL SWITCH
Exploded View

> Page 6982
> Page 6983

> Page 6984
> Page 6985
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair
Seat Track: Service and Repair

SEAT TRACK
Exploded View

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
6989
6990

6991
6992
WARNING:
NOTE:
1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the front seat backrest. 3. Remove the safety belt buckle
pretensioner.
Disconnect the electrical connectors, detach the wiring harness from the seat track. -
If driver seat, disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector.
- If equipped, disconnect the power seat motor electrical connector.
- Detach the seat harness electrical connector from the seat track.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Driver Side
View 151-18
Component Information > Locations > Driver Side > Page 6998
View 151-19
Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side
C505
Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 7001
C605
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
View 151-18
C527

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
View 151-16
C352
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
C4039
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component

SEAT CONTROL SWITCH
Exploded View


Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
View 151-26
C912
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch >
View 151-21
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch >
C478
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
TSB 10-5-1
03/29/10


SERVICE PROCEDURE
diagnostics.
Parts Block

100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13412 12
Disclaimer
TSB 10-5-1
03/29/10


SERVICE PROCEDURE
diagnostics.
Parts Block

100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
13412 12
Disclaimer
View 151-21
C456
from the liftgate.

from the liftgate.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Sound Proofing / Insulation: Description and Operation
SOUND DEADENERS AND INSULATORS
WARNING: Always refer to Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) when handling chemicals and wear
protective equipment as directed. Examples may include but are not limited to respirators and
chemically resistant gloves. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
NOTICE:
- Mastic is made of a combustible material and should be removed prior to carrying out welding
procedures to the area. Heat zones from welding near the mastic can cause the mastic material to
burn.
- Corrosion protection must be restored to the area AFTER the mastic material is applied.
Corrosion protection products may be wax based and loss of adhesion may occur.
NOTE:
- To restore the vehicle to design intent, missing or damaged sound deadeners and insulators
should be installed with the correct service replacement component.
- The following illustrations serve as a reference to indicate mastic patch (butyl pad) locations.
Additional insulators and sound deadeners are used beyond those indicated in the illustration.
Sound Deadeners and Insulators
Floor Pan Sound Deadeners
NOTE: To restore the vehicle to design intent, missing or damaged sound deadeners and
insulators should be installed with the correct service replacement component. Sound deadeners in
this illustration all use base part number 99P30A3.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and
Floor Pan Sound Deadeners

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spare Tire Carrier > Component Information > Service and Repair
Spare Tire Carrier: Service and Repair
Spare Tire Carrier
Spare Tire Carrier
Removal
2. NOTE: Do not use air tools to lower the spare wheel and tire assembly.
Using a suitable tool, lower and remove the spare wheel and tire assembly.
3. Remove the shaft retaining pin on the lift assembly. 4. Remove the shaft.
^ Push the shaft rearward from under the vehicle.

5. Remove the 3 lift retaining bolts. 6. Remove the lift assembly from the vehicle underbody.
Installation
1. Install the lift assembly to the vehicle underbody.
^ Align the hook on the back of the lift assembly with the notch in the vehicle underbody.
2. NOTE: Do not tighten the bolts.
Loosely install the 3 lift retaining bolts.
3. Install the shaft.
^ Insert the shaft through the rear bumper cover.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spare Tire Carrier > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
7062
4. Install the shaft retaining pin on the lift assembly. 5. Tighten the 3 lift retaining bolts.
6. Position the spare wheel and tire assembly on the lift.
7. NOTE: Do not use air tools to raise the spare wheel and tire assembly into position.
Using a suitable tool, raise the spare wheel and tire assembly.
8. After raising the spare wheel and tire assembly into position, continue to rotate the shaft using a
suitable tool until the internal clutch in the lift
assembly is overridden at least one time.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and
Repair
COWL PANEL GRILLE

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11

BEFORE 8/13/2010
SERVICE PROCEDURE
(Exploded View).
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7077
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Disclaimer
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec
> 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
12/23/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
Exploded View.

102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.

Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec
> 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 7083
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11

BEFORE 8/13/2010
SERVICE PROCEDURE
(Exploded View).
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7089
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Disclaimer
10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
12/23/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
Exploded View.

102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.

10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 7095
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Exploded View

Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11

BEFORE 8/13/2010
SERVICE PROCEDURE
(Exploded View).
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Disclaimer
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11

BEFORE 8/13/2010
SERVICE PROCEDURE
(Exploded View).
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Disclaimer

Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
top run bolt.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations >
Deactivator Switch
View 151-22
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations >
Deactivator Switch > Page 7122
View 151-22
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams >
Deactivator Switch
C277
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams >
Deactivator Switch > Page 7125
C278
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
7126
Typical BPP Switch
as follows: -
strategy.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
7127
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7134
C122
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
Cruise Control Servo Cable: Service and Repair
SPEED CONTROL CABLE
2.3L
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Page 7138
3.0L
Removal
1. Remove the accelerator cable snow shield. 2. Disconnect the speed control cable from the
throttle lever and accelerator cable bracket. 3. Press the locking tab and rotate the speed control
cable cap to remove.
Page 7139
Installation
2. CAUTION:
actuator pulley.
Page 7140
4. Connect the speed control cable to the throttle lever and accelerator cable bracket. 5. Install the
accelerator cable snow shield.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed
Control Actuator
Removal
Control Actuator > Page 7145
Installation
3. CAUTION:
actuator pulley.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch
View 151-22
Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch > Page 7153
View 151-22
Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch
C277
Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch > Page 7156
C278
Typical BPP Switch
as follows: -
strategy.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control >
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Actuator
Removal
Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Actuator > Page 7166
Installation
3. CAUTION:
actuator pulley.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component
Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Service and Repair
PASSENGER AIR BAG DEACTIVATION (PAD) INDICATOR
NOTE:
- The passenger air bag deactivation indicator is part of the upper I/P center finish panel.
1. Depower the SRS.
2. NOTE: The passenger air bag module is not shown for clarity.
Open and lower the glove compartment door to gain access to the passenger airbag deactivation
(PAD) indicator electrical connector. -
Disconnect the PAD indicator electrical connector.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component
3. Pull out to release the retaining clips and detach the I/P upper center finish panel. 4. To install,
reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the SRS.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Cigarette Lighter: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
been simplified.
Current Flow (1)
Diagrams.
Splices (3)
Component Names (5)

the wire color.
"Symbols".
Power Distribution
Ground Distribution
C904
on the vehicle.
WARNINGS

the procedure.
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Symbols (Part 2)
Symbols (Part 3)
Symbols (Part 4)
Symbols (Part 5)
Cigarette Lighter: Diagnostic Aids
terminal.
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
7 = Seal
1 = Proper crimp
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
6 = Male half
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
signal.
4 = Grounding foil
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
NOTE: -
splice.
wire size
harness.
Cigarette Lighter: Electrical Diagrams
44-1
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Diagrams
C909
Compass: Description and Operation
ELECTRONIC COMPASS
The compass display is contained in the front display interface module (FDIM). For removal and
installation information for the FDIM, refer to Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc. The compass
module is attached to the interior rearview mirror and is replaced separately from the mirror. The
MODE button that allows the driver to operate the calibration and zone setting procedures is
located on the top left of the compass module. The vehicle heading is displayed as a 1 or 2
character display located in the lower left hand side of the FDIM and indicates the current direction
of the vehicle (N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW). The compass continuously recalibrates due to
changes in the magnetic field and remains accurate during most driving conditions. The compass
display is on with the key in the ON or START positions. When the key is first turned to the ON or
START position, there is a momentary delay of approximately 6 seconds before the compass
display illuminates. If the battery saver has been activated and the key is turned to ON or START,
the momentary delay before the compass display illuminates is approximately 3 seconds. The
compass display will turn off as soon as the key is turned to the OFF or ACC positions.
Compass Accuracy
Driving near power lines, or driving in the area of large iron or steel structures can temporarily
change the compass heading. If the compass remains inaccurate after driving near such objects,
calibrate the compass.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that varies slightly from the
northerly direction on maps. This variation is 4 degrees between the adjacent zones and becomes
noticeable as the vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting eliminates the error.
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Compass: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
damage.
5. NOTE: The vehicle communication module (VCM) prove-out confirms power and ground from
PCM.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the front display interface
module (FDIM) and the instrument cluster. 9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to
DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic
Control Module). See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7199
Compass: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
B1318-B2477 / U0155
U2050-U2051
B1317-B2477 / U2013
Symptom Chart
Compass: Pinpoint Tests
Test A: The Compass Is Inoperative
PINPOINT TEST A: THE COMPASS IS INOPERATIVE
Normal Operation
The compass display (located in the front display interface module [FDIM]) receives battery voltage
from the smart junction box (SJB) fuse 14 (10A) through circuit SBP14 (BN/RD). Ground for the
compass display (FDIM) is supplied through circuit GD114 (BK/BU). The compass module (located
on the interior rear view mirror) provides vehicle directional inputs to the instrument cluster, which
sends the compass information to the FDIM over the medium speed controller area network
(MS-CAN). The FDIM will display the compass direction according to the information that has been
provided by the compass module to the instrument cluster.
B2097 (Compass Module Failure) - sets when the instrument cluster attempts a self-test of the
compass module and its associated circuits and a failure results.
U0155 (Lost Communication With Instrument Panel Cluster [IC] Control Module) - sets when the
FDIM does not receive any network communication messages over the MS-CAN network between
the instrument cluster and the FDIM.
U2013 (Compass Module is Not Responding) - sets when the instrument cluster does not receive
any communications from the compass module.

- Fuses
- Compass module
- FDIM (compass display)
A1-A3
A3-A6
A6-A8
A9
Test B: The Compass Is Inaccurate
PINPOINT TEST B: THE COMPASS IS INACCURATE
Normal Operation
The compass display (located in the front display interface module [FDIM]) receives battery voltage
from the smart junction box (SJB) fuse 14 (10A) through circuit SBP14 (BN/RD). Ground for the
compass display (FDIM) is supplied through circuit GD114 (BK/BU). The compass module (located
on the interior rear view mirror) provides vehicle directional inputs to the instrument cluster, which
sends the compass information to the FDIM over the medium speed controller area network
(MS-CAN). The FDIM will display the compass direction according to the information that has been
provided by the compass module to the instrument cluster.
- Magnetized vehicle
- Compass zone setting
- Compass calibration
- Compass module
B1-B2
B2 Continued
Adjustments > Compass Zone Adjustment
Compass: Adjustments Compass Zone Adjustment
COMPASS ZONE ADJUSTMENT
1. Refer to the compass calibration zone map to select the correct compass zone setting for the
geographic location of the vehicle. See: Compass
Calibration
2. With the key in the ON position, press and hold the MODE button (for approximately 5 seconds)
until the display shows the current zone setting.
Release the MODE button.
3. NOTE: After approximately 5 seconds, the compass display will exit the zone setting mode after
the button has been released.
Before the zone setting mode turns off (within 5 seconds), momentarily press and release the
MODE button to increase the zone increment by one. Set the zone display number to match the
vehicle geographical location on the compass calibration zone map.
4. Release the switch for 5 seconds to exit the zone setting mode.
Adjustments > Compass Zone Adjustment > Page 7208
Compass: Adjustments Vehicle Demagnetizing
VEHICLE DEMAGNETIZING
CAUTION: During demagnetizing, the demagnetizer coil pulls toward the vehicle. Place a cloth
over the vehicle roof to protect the vehicle surface if contact occurs. Make sure the cloth covers the
front third and the entire width of the roof.
NOTE:
- The demagnetizing process requires the use of a demagnetizing coil commonly used by television
repair technicians to demagnetize television tubes.
- To demagnetize, use a constant circular motion over the vehicle roof. Do not turn off the
demagnetizer while sweeping the vehicle roof to prevent remagnetizing ferrous materials contained
in the vehicle.
- During the demagnetizing process, make sure the phenolic surface of the tool (the side opposite
the handle) is closest to the vehicle surface.
1. Demagnetize the front third of the vehicle roof.
1 Turn on the demagnetizer at least 1 m (3 ft) away from the vehicle.
2 Holding the demagnetizer no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) from the vehicle roof and starting on the
passenger side, demagnetize the front third of the vehicle roof closest to the windshield using a
constant circular motion. Keep the circle radius within 30 cm (12 in) while sweeping across the
entire surface of the vehicle roof closest to the windshield. Continue the circular motion 4 times.
3 After the fourth pass and without stopping, move the demagnetizer at least 1 m (3 ft) away from
the vehicle.
4 Turn the demagnetizer off.
2. Carry out the compass zone adjustment procedure. See: Compass Zone Adjustment 3. Carry
out the compass calibration adjustment procedure. See: Compass Calibration
Adjustments > Compass Zone Adjustment > Page 7209
Compass: Adjustments Compass Calibration
COMPASS CALIBRATION
1. NOTE: For optimum calibration, drive to an open, level location away from large metallic objects
or structures. Switch off all non-essential
electrical accessories (heated rear window, heater fan, A/C, map lamps, and wipers) and make
sure all doors are closed.
Start the vehicle.
2. NOTE:
- It is not possible to exit the CAL mode unless the vehicle is driven in circles.
- While holding the MODE button down, the compass display will first enter the ZONE setting mode
(after 5 seconds) and then after another 5 seconds (10 seconds total), the compass display will
enter the CAL mode.
Press and hold (for approximately 10 seconds) the MODE button until CAL appears in the display,
then release the MODE button.
3. NOTE: If the CAL indicator does not turn off after the vehicle is driven in a circle at least 5 times,
repeat the procedure.
Drive the vehicle slowly at less than 5 km/h (3 mph) in a continuous circle until CAL disappears
from the display and the compass heading is shown.
4. If the CAL message does not turn off within 5 circles (and the procedure has been repeated at
least once), install a new compass module (attached
to the interior rearview mirror).

Adjustments > Page 7210
Special Tool(s)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

latches.
impact sensor(s).
the cover.

and Repowering > Page 7216
fail to light.
- flash.
scan tool.
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Deactivation
WARNING: -
NOTE: -
from the SPDJB.
latches.
impact sensor(s).
wheel.

Reactivation

clip.
9. CAUTION:
NOTE: -
clips into the I/P.

14. NOTE:
install the cover.
fail to light.
- flash.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-21
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information >
C479
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
View 151-13
C269
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Description and Operation
INFORMATION AND MESSAGE CENTER
The message center is a fixed format vacuum fluorescent display, integrated into the instrument
cluster. The message center functions are controlled by the message center switches. The
message center displays important vehicle information by constantly monitoring different vehicle
systems. The message center informs the driver of vehicle operations and notifies the driver of
potential vehicle problems by displaying a warning message pertaining to the system in which a
fault has been detected.
The message center provides the following features:
- Information displays
- Setup displays
- System check messages
- System warning messages
The message center information can be selected through a set of 3 buttons:
- INFO
- SETUP
- RESET
Information Displays
The information displays are non-timed modes. The selected mode remains on until the driver
presses a message center button to change the mode or it is overridden by another mode.
The information (INFO button) display modes are: -
Odometer
- Trip odometer A or B
- Distance to empty (DTE)
- Average fuel economy
- Instantaneous fuel economy
- Electrical energy available (Hybrid only)
- Blank display
Setup Displays
The setup (SETUP button) displays are timed modes and terminate after a finite interval. As part of
the setup menu, the message center has the capability to configure items such as units (English or
metric), autolamp delay, to enable/disable a variety of options such as autolock and auto-unlock, or
to carry out calibrations/settings on items such as oil life.
On configurable items such as autolock and auto-unlock, the message center indicates the
appropriate selection (ON/OFF) by bracketing the selection. For example, if the driver selects the
autolock feature on, the message would display as follows: AUTOLOCK [ON] OFF. If the driver
selects the autolock off, the message would display as follows: AUTOLOCK AID ON [OFF].
The setup display modes are: -
Reset to English (if set in another language)
- System check
- Oil life reset/oil life starting value
- Units English/metric
- Autolamp delay in seconds (if equipped)
- Autolock on/off (if equipped)
- Auto-unlock on/off (if equipped)
- Language
Oil Life and Oil Life Start Value
The oil life is displayed in percent and is preset to a maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500
miles) or 180 days. The oil life start value is used to increase or decrease the starting point of the
oil life. The value can be changed back to the maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles)
if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by 10% increments down to 10%.
System Check
The system check provides a check of all the monitored systems on the vehicle. The system check
scrolls through each of the monitored systems and provides a visual indication to report out the
status of each system. The message center displays OK for approximately 2 seconds if the system
check does not detect a fault in the system and displays a warning message for approximately 2
seconds if the system check detects a fault in the system. Press the RESET button to scroll
through the system check messages.
The system check display modes are: -
Oil life status
- Electrical drive status (Hybrid only)

- Brake system status
- Liftgate/liftgate glass status
- DTE/Fuel level status
System Warning Messages
The system warning messages alert the operator to possible problems or malfunctions in the
vehicle operating systems. The message center displays the last selected feature if there are no
additional warning messages. Once a warning message has been displayed, the message must be
acknowledged to allow full functionality of the message center. Press the RESET to acknowledge
and clear the warning message. The warning messages are divided into 3 basic categories: -
Cannot be cleared until the condition is corrected.
- Reappears 10 minutes from pressing the RESET button.
- Reappears if the condition clears then reoccurs within the same ignition ON-OFF cycle.
The warning messages that cannot be reset are: -
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
- PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
- REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR
- REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR
The warning messages that reoccur after 10 minutes are: -
XXX MILES (KM) TO EMPTY FUEL LEVEL LOW
- STOP SAFELY NOW (Hybrid only)
- HIGH ENGINE TEMPERATURE (Hybrid only)
- HIGH MOTOR TEMPERATURE (Hybrid only)
- PARK BRAKE ENGAGED
When a condition exists, the warning messages that are displayed whenever the ignition switch is
turned from the OFF position to the ON position are: -
LIFTGATE/GLASS AJAR
- SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
- LOW BRAKE FLUID
- REGEN BRAKES DISABLED (Hybrid only)
- TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT
- LOW TIRE PRESSURE
- TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT
- OIL CHANGE REQUIRED

- XXX% OIL LIFE/CHANGE OIL SOON
The message center displays warning messages that indicate a system state during repair
procedures related to the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS). The displayed messages are as
follows: -
TRAIN LF TIRE
- TRAIN RF TIRE
- TRAIN LR TIRE
- TRAIN RR TIRE
- TRAIN SPARE TIRE
- TRAINING COMPLETE
- TIRES NOT TRAINED

Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
damage.
PCM.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the instrument cluster. 9. If
the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to Body
Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic
Control Module). See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Information

and Message Center
The message center is an integral part of the instrument cluster that receives and acts upon much
of the same information that is input and used to operate the instrument cluster gauges,
informational indicators, and warning indicators. The message center, located in the center of the
instrument cluster is a vacuum fluorescent 2-line display. The message center electronic functions
use both hardwired, and the controller area network (CAN) circuitry to transmit and receive
information.
Whenever conditions are present that require a warning message, the message center replaces
the last selected display with the new warning display. Once the message is reset or cleared, the
message center returns to the last selected display. If multiple warnings are present, the message
center displays each warning for approximately 4 seconds. Warning messages are also generally
associated with other observable instrument cluster indications. For example, when the LH front
door is opened, the message center displays the message DRIVER DOOR AJAR along with the
door ajar warning indicator. This allows the message center to be a more informative supplement
to the instrument cluster gauges and indicators.
It is very important to understand:
- where the input (command) originates.
- all the information (messages) necessary in order for a feature to operate.
- which module(s) receive(s) the input or command message.
- if the module that received the input (message) controls the output of the feature, or if it outputs a
message over the CAN to another module.
- which module controls the output of the feature.

Instrument Cluster Messages
NOTE: Whenever a message is suspected as missing, confirmed by a missing message DTC, it is

important to look for other symptoms that may also be present in the instrument cluster and
throughout the vehicle. Once a DTC is set in the instrument cluster, it may be helpful to review the
complete message list available in Information Bus (Module Communications Network) to see what
other modules also rely on the same message and run the self-test for those modules. If the
message is missing from other modules, the same DTC may also be set in those modules.
Confirmation of missing messages common to multiple modules may indicate that the originating
module is the source of the concern or the communication network may be experiencing some
problems.
The instrument cluster uses input messages from other modules to control the gauges,
informational indicators, warning indicators and message center displays over the communication
networks. If a required message is missing or invalid for less than 5 seconds, the gauge or
indicator that requires the message remains at the last commanded state based upon the last
known good message. For example, if the message is missing the driver door ajar off status for
less than 5 seconds and the door ajar indicator was ON, the indicator remains in the ON state until
the next good message is received. If the message remains missing or invalid for greater than 5
seconds, the instrument cluster sets a U-code diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and the output
becomes a default action for the indicator or gauge. Each indicator or gauge utilizes a different
default strategy depending on the nature of the indication. Refer to Instrument Cluster for further
descriptions of the default action specific to each indicator or gauge. If the messaged input to the
cluster returns at any time, the normal function of the gauge or indicator resumes.
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures


Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Pinpoint Tests
Test A: The Message Center Is Not Operating Correctly
PINPOINT TEST A: THE MESSAGE CENTER IS NOT OPERATING CORRECTLY
Normal Operation
The message center is located in the center of the instrument cluster between the tachometer and
the speedometer in the vacuum fluorescent display area. The message center is integral to the
instrument cluster and uses the same voltage supply as the instrument cluster. The RUN/START
voltage is supplied to the instrument cluster on circuit CBP29 (WH/VT) and the keep alive B+
voltage is received on circuit SBP26 (YE/RD). The instrument cluster logic ground is through circuit
GD112 (BK/GN) and the bulb ground is through circuit GD114 (BK/BU). The message center
functionality is controlled through the message center switch, which is hardwired to the instrument
cluster through input circuit CMC29 (GN/VT) and return circuit VMC29 (YE).
A1-A3
Test B: The Message Center Switch Does Not Operate Correctly

PINPOINT TEST B: THE MESSAGE CENTER SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
Normal Operation
The message center functionality is controlled through the message center switch, which is
hardwired to the instrument cluster through input circuit CMC29 (GN/VT) and return circuit VMC29
(YE). There are 3 message center switch buttons with each button operating a switch that uses
different resistance values. The instrument cluster sends out a reference voltage to the message
center switch on the input circuit and monitors the voltage drop when a message center switch
button is pressed. The voltage drop will vary depending upon the resistance of each button,
providing a specific indication to the instrument cluster which switch is pressed.
DTC B1206 (EIC Switch-1 Assembly Circuit Open) - is a continuous and on-demand DTC that sets
when the instrument cluster detects an open on the message center switch input, circuit CMC29
(GN/VT).
DTC B1208 (EIC Switch-1 Assembly Circuit Short to Ground) - is a continuous and on-demand
DTC that sets when the instrument cluster detects a short to ground on the message center switch
input, circuit CMC29 (GN/VT).

- Message center switch
B1-B3
B4-B7
Test C: The STOP SAFELY NOW Warning Is Inoperative/Always On
PINPOINT TEST C: THE STOP SAFELY NOW WARNING IS INOPERATIVE/ALWAYS ON
Normal Operation
The stop safely now display informs the driver that there is a problem with the Hybrid electrical
system and that an impending vehicle shut down is about to occur. The instrument cluster receives
the hazard input from a message over the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN)
communication bus from the powertrain control module (PCM), the transmission control module
(TCM) and the traction battery control module (TBCM).
NOTE: The instrument cluster turns on both the hazard warning indicator in the instrument cluster
and displays the stop safely now warning simultaneously when a problem or fault has been
detected in any of the 3 modules (PCM, TCM or TBCM).
If the hazard status message is missing from the PCM or if the data is deemed invalid by the
instrument cluster for more than 5 seconds, the instrument cluster sets DTC U0100 in continuous
memory. If the hazard status message is missing from the TCM or if the data is deemed invalid by
the instrument cluster for more than 5 seconds, the instrument cluster sets DTC U0101 in
continuous memory. If the hazard status message is missing from the TBCM or if the data is
deemed invalid by the instrument cluster for more than 5 seconds, the instrument cluster sets DTC
U0111 in continuous memory.
If any one of the 3 messages are missing with the other two valid, the instrument cluster defaults
the STOP SAFELY NOW warning to the last observable state (on or off). If all 3 messages are
missing and the instrument cluster does not see an ignition switch transition into RUN/START, the
instrument cluster defaults the STOP SAFELY NOW warning to the last observable state (on or
off).
- PCM concern
- TCM concern
- TBCM concern
C1-C2
C3-C7
Test D: The REGEN BREAKING DISABLED Message Is Inoperative/Always On
PINPOINT TEST D: THE REGEN BRAKING DISABLED MESSAGE IS INOPERATIVE/ALWAYS

ON
Normal Operation
The instrument cluster receives the regenerative brake disabled status from the powertrain control
module (PCM) over the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN) communication bus. If the
regenerative braking system is disabled, the PCM sends a command to the instrument cluster to
display the regenerative braking disabled message.
If the regenerative braking message is missing, the instrument cluster sets DTC U0100 in
continuous memory and the regenerative braking disabled message remains in the last indication
mode (on or off). If the regen braking message is deemed invalid by the instrument cluster, the
instrument cluster defaults the regenerative braking disabled message off.

- PCM concern
D1-D3
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Message Center Configuration
Oil Life Reset
NOTE: -
new oil life %.
Component Information > Service and Repair > Message Center Configuration > Page 7249
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Message Center Switch
MESSAGE CENTER SWITCH
All vehicles
1. Remove the LH instrument panel trim panel.
Hybrid vehicles
2. Remove the jump start switch screw and position the jump start switch aside.
All vehicles
3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the message center switch.

Special Tool(s)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator >
Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation
CHECK FUEL CAP INDICATOR
The check fuel cap indicator is a communications network message sent by the PCM. The PCM
sends the message to illuminate the lamp when the strategy determines there is a concern in the
EVAP system due to the fuel filler cap or capless fuel tank filler pipe not being sealed correctly.
This would be detected by the inability to pull vacuum in the fuel tank, after a fueling event.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component

tank fill levels.
FUEL PUMP MODULE

Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
WARNING:
injury.
couplings.
arm and the filter.
NOTE: -
spillage.
the FP module.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
and Repowering
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
WARNING: -
NOTE: -

latches.
impact sensor(s).
the cover.

fail to light.
- flash.
scan tool.
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Deactivation
WARNING: -
NOTE: -
from the SPDJB.
latches.
impact sensor(s).
wheel.

Reactivation

clip.
9. CAUTION:
NOTE: -
clips into the I/P.

14. NOTE:
install the cover.
fail to light.
- flash.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument
Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel
Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08

082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Control Module: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status
Status
TSB 08-19-2
09/29/08

SERVICE PROCEDURE
(DLC).
b. ID the vehicle.
12651D4)
Control Module: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status > Page 7289
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08

082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status
TSB 08-19-2
09/29/08

SERVICE PROCEDURE
(DLC).
b. ID the vehicle.
12651D4)
Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status > Page 7299
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component
illuminate.
SJB.
malfunctioning. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and

PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and
GO to Symptom Chart. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator >
Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Message Center Configuration
Oil Life Reset
NOTE: -
new oil life %.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component
concern is present.
- For all MIL concerns, go to Symptom Charts. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
DTC P1000 is set.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component
Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
Oil Life
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center. USE ONLY
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change ( approximately 7,500 miles (
12,000 km ) or 12 months ) perform the following:
1. Press and release the SETUP control to display "OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW".
2. Press and hold the RESET control for 2 seconds and release. Oil life is set to 100% and "OIL
LIFE SET TO 100%" is displayed. 3. While "OIL LIFE SET TO 100%" is displayed, if a lower oil life
is start value is desired , press and release the RESET control to reduce the start
value. Each press of the RESET control reduces the value by 10 percent.
Note: Oil life start value of 100% equals 7,500 miles ( 12,000 km ) or 12 months. For example,
setting oil life start value to 60% sets the oil life start value to 4,500 miles ( 7,200 km ) and 108
days.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
View 151-6
View 151-8
C103

Material
switch.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles
Outside Temperature Display: Customer Interest Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit
To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08

082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display -
Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius
Outside Temperature Display: All Technical Service Bulletins Temperature Display - Toggles From
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08

082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Outside Temperature Display: > 09-19-15 > Oct >
09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09

SERVICE PROCEDURE
ignition key.
Parts Block
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 7338
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 7344
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Outside Temperature Display: Description and Operation
EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
The external temperature is displayed when the EXT button is pressed. The external temperature
display will update at various rates depending on whether or not the vehicle is at normal operating
temperature and if the vehicle has been driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for greater than 90
seconds. The display update rate can be as low as 0.5°C (1°F) every 20 minutes.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator >
C4015
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
View 151-22
C2015
indicator switch.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument
Panel Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08

082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Panel Control Module: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status
Status
TSB 08-19-2
09/29/08

SERVICE PROCEDURE
(DLC).
b. ID the vehicle.
12651D4)
Panel Control Module: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status > Page 7367
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius
TSB 08-23-12
11/24/08

082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status
TSB 08-19-2
09/29/08

SERVICE PROCEDURE
(DLC).
b. ID the vehicle.
12651D4)
for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status > Page
7377
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10849 04
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer > Component
Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Description and Operation
seconds.
Belt-Minder(R)

Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component
Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation
seconds.
Belt-Minder(R)

Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Door Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-21
Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7388
C479
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation

Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7392
tank fill levels.
FUEL PUMP MODULE

Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
WARNING:
injury.
couplings.
arm and the filter.
NOTE: -
spillage.
the FP module.

Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-22
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7401
C2015
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7402
indicator switch.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information >
Adjustments

Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information >
Adjustments > Page 7406
unlocked.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure
Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
illuminate.
SJB.

Procedures
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Training
Special Tool(s)
the valve stem.
Page 7415

successful.
Page 7416
Activation
Special Tool(s)
pressure sensor.
times.
Chart
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Disassembly
accordingly.
instructed.
Assembly
installation.

Cradle
Material
Disassembly
accordingly.
base part number.
the worm gear.
and prying up.
Assembly
valve stem.
of the wheel.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T >
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp
Sensor
View 151-13
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp
Sensor > Page 7433
View 151-13
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp
Sensor
C287
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp
Sensor > Page 7436
C286
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7437
LIGHT SENSOR

Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 7442
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
View 151-10
Locations > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 7447
View 151-11
Locations > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 7448
View 151-12
Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
C167
Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 7451
C169

Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Brake Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
been simplified.
Current Flow (1)
Diagrams.
Splices (3)
and Instructions > Page 7457
Component Names (5)

the wire color.
"Symbols".
Power Distribution
Ground Distribution
C904
on the vehicle.
WARNINGS

the procedure.
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Symbols (Part 2)
Symbols (Part 3)
Symbols (Part 4)
Symbols (Part 5)
Brake Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
terminal.
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
7 = Seal
1 = Proper crimp
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
6 = Male half
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
signal.
4 = Grounding foil
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
NOTE: -
splice.
wire size
harness.
Brake Lamp: Connector Views
C4032
C4035
Brake Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
90-1
90-2
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Brake Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
damage.
NOTE: -
Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position.
- Make sure the multifunction switch is in the LOW BEAM position.
powertrain control module (PCM).
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the smart junction box
(SJB). 9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs,
refer to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic
The smart junction box (SJB) monitors the input from the stoplamp switch. When the brake pedal is
applied, voltage is routed to the SJB and the high mounted stoplamp. The SJB then supplies
voltage to the stoplamps.
Field-Effect Transistor (FET) Protection
The SJB utilizes a FET protective circuit strategy for many of its outputs (for example, the
short circuits) and are shut down (turns off the voltage or ground provided by the module) when a
fault is
detected. A continuous DTC is stored at that time for the fault. The circuit will then reset after a
customer demand of the function (switching the component on, battery saver being energized).
When an excessive circuit load occurs several times, the module shuts down the output until a
repair procedure is carried out. At the same time, the continuous DTC that was stored on the first
failure will not clear by a command to clear the continuous DTCs. The module will not allow this
code to be cleared or the circuit restored to normal operation until a successful on-demand self-test
proves that the fault has been repaired. After the on-demand self-test has successfully completed
(no on-demand DTCs present), the continuous DTC will have been cleared and the circuit function
will return.
Each circuit has three predefined levels of short circuit tolerance established in the module based
on each circuits' capability. When the first or second level is reached, the continuous DTC
associated with the circuit sets along with DTC B106E. These DTCs may be cleared using the
Clear DTC operation on the scan tool as long as the fault itself has been corrected. If any of the
circuits are shorted past the third level, then B106F and B1342 set along with the associated
continuous DTC. This DTC cannot be cleared and the module must be replaced.
The SJB FET protected output circuits for the stoplamp system are for the LH rear stop/turn lamp
output and the RH rear stop/turn lamp output circuits.
B1485-B2047
Symptom Chart
Brake Lamp: Pinpoint Tests
Test H: All The Stoplamps Are Inoperative
PINPOINT TEST H: ALL THE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
Normal Operation
The stoplamp switch is supplied voltage through circuit SBP02 (YE/RD) from the smart junction box
(SJB). When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage back to the smart
junction box (SJB) and the high mounted stoplamp through circuit CCB08 (VT/WH). The SJB
provides voltage to the rear lamps when it receives input from the stoplamp switch indicating that
the brake pedal is applied.
- Fuse
- Stoplamp switch
- SJB
H1
H1-H3
H4
Test I: One Or More Stoplamps Are Inoperative
PINPOINT TEST I: ONE OR MORE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
Normal Operation
When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage to the smart junction box
(SJB) and the high mounted stoplamp through circuit CCB08 (VT/WH). When the SJB detects the
brake pedal is applied, the SJB provides voltage to the LH and RH rear stoplamps through circuits
CLS18 (GY/BN) and CLS19 (VT/OG), respectively. If equipped with trailer tow, voltage is also
routed to the LH and RH trailer tow stop/turn relays. Ground for the LH and RH rear stoplamps is
provided through circuit GD149 (BK/GY). Ground for the high mounted stoplamp is provided
through circuit GD183 (BK/WH).
DTC B2044 (Left Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Short to Ground) - is a continuous and on-demand DTC
that sets when the SJB detects a short to ground on the LH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply
circuit.
DTC B2045 (Left Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects an open on the LH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit.
DTC B2046 (Right Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Short to Ground) - is a continuous and on-demand DTC
that sets when the SJB detects a short to ground on the RH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply
circuit.
DTC B2047 (Right Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects an open on the RH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit.
- High mounted stoplamp
- Bulb holder
- SJB
I1-I2
I2-I5
I5-I8
I8-I10
I10-I11
Test J: The Stoplamps Are On Continuously
PINPOINT TEST J: THE STOPLAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY
Normal Operation
When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage to the smart junction box
(SJB), the high mounted stoplamp, the PCM and the speed control actuator through circuit CCB08
(VT/WH). When the SJB detects the brake pedal applied, the SJB provides voltage to the LH and
RH rear stoplamps through circuits CLS18 (GY/BN) and CLS19 (VT/OG), respectively. If equipped
with trailer tow, voltage is also supplied to the respective trailer tow stop/turn relay.
DTC B1485 (Brake Pedal Input Short to Battery) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects a short to voltage from the stoplamp switch input circuit.
DTC B2045 (Left Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects a short to voltage on the LH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit.
DTC B2047 (Right Rear Stoplamp Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects a short to voltage on the RH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit.
- Stoplamp switch
- Speed control actuator
- PCM
- SJB
J1-J7
J8-J9
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page
7488
Special Tool(s)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-22
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7492
C278
Typical BPP Switch
as follows:
STOPLAMP SWITCH

Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams
Cargo Lamp: Diagrams
C926A
C926B
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams
C475
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Courtesy Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
been simplified.
Current Flow (1)
Diagrams.
Splices (3)
Component Names (5)

the wire color.
"Symbols".
Power Distribution
Ground Distribution
C904
on the vehicle.
WARNINGS

the procedure.
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Symbols (Part 2)
Symbols (Part 3)
Symbols (Part 4)
Symbols (Part 5)
Courtesy Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
terminal.
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
7 = Seal
1 = Proper crimp
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
6 = Male half
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
signal.
4 = Grounding foil
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
NOTE: -
splice.
wire size
harness.
Courtesy Lamp: Connector Views
C918
C931
Courtesy Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
89-1
89-2
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Courtesy Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
damage.
NOTE: Make sure the interior lamp switches are in the DOOR position.
- Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network), No Power to the Scan Tool, to
PCM.
7. Carry out the network test:
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB. 9. If the DTCs
retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to Body Control
Systems (Multifunction Electronic
The smart junction box (SJB) supplies voltage to the interior lighting system. The interior lighting
system illuminates the courtesy lamps while a vehicle door is ajar, and the vehicle speed is less
than 5 km/h (3 mph). The SJB controls all interior lighting functions and timing by monitoring inputs
from the door ajar switches, the dimmer switch, and the vehicle speed.
Interior Mode
The interior mode feature allows the user to manually control the interior lamps independent of the
ignition position. The interior lights turn on when
the dimmer switch is rotated to the top (dome) detent. The interior lights are activated by other
interior lighting features when the dimmer switch is positioned in the dimming control range. The
courtesy lights are kept off when the dimmer switch is rotated to the bottom (dome) detent.
Interior Lighting Delay
The interior lighting delay feature provides temporary illumination of the courtesy lamps after the
doors are opened and then closed. The interior lighting delay feature keeps the courtesy lamps on
for a period of 25 seconds. If during the 25-second delay time the SJB detects that the ignition has
been turned to RUN, ACC, START, or if the vehicle is locked using the remote keyless entry (RKE)
transmitter, the courtesy lamp illumination is discontinued.
Illuminated Entry
The illuminated entry requests the courtesy lamps to illuminate when the ignition is OFF and the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed. The illuminated entry requests the courtesy lamps off
after 25 seconds have elapsed, the ignition is switched to ON, or when the RKE transmitter LOCK
button is pressed.
Illuminated Exit
The illuminated exit requests the courtesy lamps illuminate for 25 seconds when all doors are
closed and the ignition key is removed from the ignition lock cylinder. The illuminated exit
deactivates when any door becomes ajar, the ignition key is inserted into the ignition lock cylinder,
or 25 seconds have elapsed.
Theater Lighting
The theater lighting feature ramps-up the courtesy lamps over 0.7 second when courtesy lamp
activation is requested. The theater lighting feature ramps-down the courtesy lamps over 1.7
seconds when interior lighting deactivation is requested by any feature other than the panic alarm
or the battery saver.
Interior Lamp Arbitrator
The interior lamp arbitrator (located in the SJB) chooses between the interior lighting, the interior
mode, the interior lighting delay, the illuminated entry, the illuminated exit, the battery saver, and
the alarm flash processing to determine which feature has precedence of activating and
deactivating the interior lamps.
The features are prioritized as follows: -
Alarm flash processing
- Battery saver
- Interior mode
- Interior lighting
- Interior light delay
- Illuminated entry
- Illuminated exit
Battery Saver
The battery saver is internal to the SJB and provides automatic shut-off of the demand lamps
(cargo lamp, vanity lamps, map lamps) and courtesy lamps after a time-out period in order to save
battery voltage. A timer in the SJB is started when the ignition is turned to the OFF position. When
the time-out period for the lamps has elapsed, the voltage is automatically shut off to the lamps by
the battery saver. While the battery saver has voltage disabled, if the ignition is turned to any
position other than OFF, the key is removed from the ignition cylinder, the dome lamp switch is
turned to the ON position, any door becomes ajar, any button, except the LOCK button, of the RKE
transmitter is pressed, or a valid entry code is entered on the keypad, the battery saver restores
voltage and starts the timer again.
NOTE: Time out is 1 minute if the vehicle has less than 80 km (50 miles).
The battery saver time-outs are as follows: -
Courtesy lamps = 10 minutes
- Demand lamps = 10 minutes
Field-Effect Transistor (FET) Protection
The SJB utilizes a FET protective circuit strategy for many of its outputs (for example, the
short circuits) and are shut down (turns off the voltage or ground provided by the module) when a
fault is detected. A continuous DTC is stored at that time for the fault. The circuit then resets after a
customer demand of the function (switching the component on, battery saver being energized).
When an excessive circuit load occurs several times, the module shuts down the output until a
repair procedure is carried out. At the same time, the continuous DTC that was stored on the first
failure will not clear by a command to clear the continuous DTCs. The module will not allow this
code to be cleared or the circuit restored to normal until a successful on-demand self-test proves
that the fault has been repaired. After the on-demand self-test has successfully completed (no
on-demand DTCs present), the continuous DTC will have been cleared and the circuit function
returns.
Each circuit has three predefined levels of short circuit tolerance established in the module based
on each circuits' capability. When the first or second level is reached, the continuous DTC
associated with the circuit sets along with DTC B106E. These DTCs may be cleared using the
Clear DTC operation on the scan tool as long as the fault itself has been corrected. If any of the
circuits are shorted past the third level, then B106F sets along with the associated continuous DTC.
This DTC cannot be cleared and the module must be replaced.
The SJB FET protected output circuit for the interior lighting system is the interior lamp output
circuit.
Courtesy Lamp: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
B2A35-B2077
B2A36
Symptom Chart
Courtesy Lamp: Pinpoint Tests
Test A: The Courtesy Lamps Are Inoperative
PINPOINT TEST A: THE COURTESY LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
Normal Operation
Power is supplied to the courtesy lamps through the smart junction box (SJB) fuse 9 (15A), which
supplies voltage to the courtesy lamps solid-state relay in the SJB. When any door is opened, the
ajar switch opens, signaling the SJB. The SJB monitors the ajar circuits, and based on the ajar
status, the SJB energizes the solid-state relay supplying voltage to the courtesy lamps on circuit
VLN33 (GY/VT). The SJB also monitors the dome defeat output through circuit CLN27 (WH/BN). A
short to ground on circuit CLN27 (WH/BN) will cause the courtesy lamps to be inoperative. Ground
for the courtesy lamps is supplied through circuit GD182 (BK/GY).
DTC B2A35 (Courtesy Lighting Output Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the
SJB detects an open from the courtesy lighting circuit.
DTC B2A36 (Courtesy Lighting Output Circuit Short to Ground) - is a continuous and on-demand
DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to ground from the courtesy lighting circuit.
- Fuse
- Dimmer switch
- SJB
A1-A3
A3-A5
A6-A7
Test B: An Individual Courtesy Lamp Is Inoperative
PINPOINT TEST B: AN INDIVIDUAL COURTESY LAMP IS INOPERATIVE
Normal Operation
Circuit VLN33 (GY/VT) provides voltage to each demand lamp when activated. The demand lamps
are grounded through circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The battery saver function of the smart junction box
(SJB) deactivates the voltage to the demand lamps after time-out.
- Lamp assembly
B1
B1-B2
Test C: The Courtesy Lamps Stay On Continuously
PINPOINT TEST C: THE COURTESY LAMPS STAY ON CONTINUOUSLY
Normal Operation
When any door, liftgate, or liftgate glass is opened, the ajar switch opens the circuit to the smart
junction box (SJB). The smart junction box (SJB) monitors the dimmer switch status on circuit
CLN17 (BN) to determine if the courtesy lamps are requested. The SJB monitors the door ajar and
dimmer switch input circuits, and based on the status, the SJB supplies voltage to the courtesy
lamps on circuit VLN33 (GY/VT).
DTC B1320 (Driver Door Ajar Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
an open from the LH front door ajar circuit.
DTC B1328 (Passenger Door Ajar Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects an open from the RH front door ajar circuit.
DTC B1336 (Door Ajar RR Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects
an open from the RH rear door ajar circuit.
DTC B1572 (Door Ajar LR Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects an
open from the LH rear door ajar circuit.
DTC B1688 (Lamp Dome Input Circuit Short to Ground) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the
SJB detects a short to ground from the dimmer switch circuit.
DTC B2077 (Liftgate Ajar Switch Circuit Failure) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects an open from the liftgate glass or the liftgate ajar circuit.
DTC B2A35 (Courtesy Lighting Output Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the
SJB detects a short to voltage from the courtesy lamp circuit.
- Dimmer switch
- Door ajar switch (part of door latch)
- Liftgate ajar switch (part of liftgate latch)
- Liftgate glass ajar switch (part of liftgate window latch)
- SJB
C1-C4
C4-C8
C8-C10
C10-C12
C12-C13
Test D: The Courtesy Lamps Do Not Turn On With One Door Open
PINPOINT TEST D: THE COURTESY LAMPS DO NOT TURN ON WITH ONE DOOR OPEN
Normal Operation
When any door is opened, the ajar switch opens the circuit to the smart junction box (SJB). The
SJB monitors the ajar circuits, and based on the ajar status, the SJB supplies voltage to the
courtesy lamps on circuit VLN33 (GY/VT).
- Door ajar switch (part of door latch)
- SJB
D1-D5
Test E: The Courtesy Lamps Do Not Turn On With The Liftgate Or The Liftgate Glass Open
PINPOINT TEST E: THE COURTESY LAMPS DO NOT TURN ON WITH THE LIFTGATE OR THE
LIFTGATE GLASS OPEN
Normal Operation
When the liftgate or the liftgate glass is opened, the ajar switch opens the circuit to the smart
junction box (SJB). The SJB monitors the ajar circuits, and based on the ajar status, the SJB
supplies voltage to the courtesy lamps on circuit VLN33 (GY/VT).
- Liftgate ajar switch (part of the liftgate latch)
- Liftgate glass ajar switch (part of the liftgate glass latch)
- SJB
E1
E2-E3
Test F: The Courtesy Lamps Are Inoperative - From The Dimmer Switch
PINPOINT TEST F: THE COURTESY LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - FROM THE DIMMER
SWITCH
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) monitors the dimmer switch status on circuit CLN17 (BN) to
determine if the courtesy lamps are requested. Based on the dimmer switch status, the SJB
supplies voltage to the courtesy lamps through circuit VLN33 (GY/VT).
- Dimmer switch
- SJB
F1
F2-F4
F4-F5
Test G: The Demand Lamps Are Inoperative
PINPOINT TEST G: THE DEMAND LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) supplies voltage to the demand lamps on circuit CLN09 (YE/GN).
The demand lamps are grounded through circuit GD182 (BK/GY).
- Fuse
- SJB
G1
G1-G3
Test H: An Individual Demand Lamp Is Inoperative
PINPOINT TEST H: AN INDIVIDUAL DEMAND LAMP IS INOPERATIVE
Normal Operation
Circuit CLN09 (YE/GN) provides voltage to each demand lamp when the battery saver relay is
activated. The demand lamps are grounded through circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The battery saver
function of the smart junction box (SJB) deactivates the voltage to the demand lamps after
time-out.
- Lamp assembly
H1-H2
Test I: The Battery Saver Does Not Deactivate After Time-Out
PINPOINT TEST I: THE BATTERY SAVER DOES NOT DEACTIVATE AFTER TIME-OUT
Normal Operation
The smart junction box (SJB) provides a battery saver function. The battery saver function provides
automatic shutoff of the interior lamps (demand lamps and glove compartment lamp) after a
predetermined time has elapsed in order to save battery power.

- SJB
I1-I2
Test J: The Illuminated Entry Is Inoperative When Using The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Transmitter/Keypad
PINPOINT TEST J: THE ILLUMINATED ENTRY IS INOPERATIVE WHEN USING THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) TRANSMITTER/KEYPAD
Normal Operation
The illuminated entry provides courtesy lighting whenever the smart junction box (SJB) receives a
lamps on/doors unlock request from the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter. The SJB provides
the voltage and ground circuits for the courtesy/map lamps.
- RKE transmitter
- SJB
J1-J2
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page
7545
Special Tool(s)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Daytime Running Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
been simplified.
Current Flow (1)
Diagrams.
Splices (3)
Component Names (5)

the wire color.
"Symbols".
Power Distribution
Ground Distribution
C904
on the vehicle.
WARNINGS

the procedure.
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Symbols (Part 2)
Symbols (Part 3)
Symbols (Part 4)
Symbols (Part 5)
Daytime Running Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
terminal.
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
7 = Seal
1 = Proper crimp
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
6 = Male half
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
signal.
4 = Grounding foil
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
NOTE: -
splice.
wire size
harness.
Daytime Running Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
97-1
97-2
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Daytime Running Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
1. Verify the customer concern. 2. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is
found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step.
NOTE: -
Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position.
- Make sure the multifunction switch is in the LOW BEAM position.
powertrain control module (PCM).
7. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the powertrain control
module (PCM), the smart junction box (SJB), and the
instrument cluster.
8. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, refer to Computers and Control Systems or
Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic
Control Module).
NOTE: When installing a new smart junction box (SJB), it must be configured for this feature, if
originally equipped. Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network).
The SJB controls the DRL by using various inputs to determine whether or not the DRL should be
illuminated. These inputs include:
- Ignition switch position
- Headlamp switch position
- Headlamps on or off
- Transmission gear selection (automatic transmission)
- Parking brake applied or released (manual transmission)
When the DRL is active, the SJB provides a pulse-width modulated (PWM) voltage to the low beam
headlamps. This illuminates the headlamps at a reduced intensity.
> Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7567
Symptom Chart
> Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7568
Daytime Running Lamp: Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST AB: THE DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL) ARE INOPERATIVE
Normal Operation
When the ignition switch is in the RUN position, the headlamps are not on (from the autolamp
system or manual control from the headlamp switch), the transaxle is not in PARK (P) (automatic
transaxle) or the parking brake is not applied (manual transaxle), the smart junction switch (SJB)
provides a pulse-width modulated (PWM) voltage to the low beam headlamps. This illuminates the
headlamps at a reduced intensity.
- Exterior lighting system input/output
- Ignition switch input
- Transaxle gear input (automatic transaxle)
- Parking brake switch input (manual transaxle)
- SJB
AB1-AB3
AB4-AB6
> Page 7569
Daytime Running Lamp: Adjustments
AUTOLAMPS TIME DELAY ADJUSTMENT
NOTE:
- The time delay can be programmed through the instrument cluster message center using the
message center buttons (if equipped) or using the following steps.
- Steps 2 through 5 must be carried out within a 10-second period.
1. Start with the ignition switch off and the headlamp switch in the AUTOLAMPS ON position. 2.
Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position. 3. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. 4.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. 5. Place the headlamp switch in the AUTOLAMPS ON
position. The exterior lamps turn on at this point. 6. Wait the desired amount of time and place the
headlamp switch in the OFF position (maximum of 3 minutes). The exterior lamps turn off and the
autolamp time delay is now set.

> Page 7570
Special Tool(s)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-21
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7574
C479
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
FOG LAMP BULB
Mariner
Escape
WARNING: The bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the glass envelope is
scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass
envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: The fog lamp bulb should not be removed from the fog lamp until just before a new bulb
is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect fog lamp bulb
performance. Contaminants may enter the fog lamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector.
Never turn on the fog lamps with the bulb removed.
NOTE: Make sure the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position.
All vehicles
Escape
2. Remove the 4 fender splash shield bolts.
3. Remove the 4 fender splash shield pin-type retainers.
- Position the fender splash shield aside.
4. Disconnect the fog lamp electrical connector. 5. Squeeze both tabs on the fog lamp bulb
simultaneously and remove it from the fog lamp.
Mariner
6. Rotate the fog lamp bulb approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove.
All vehicles

Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component
Information > Application and ID
Hazard Warning Flasher: Application and ID
The flasher function for this vehicle is provided by the Smart Junction Box (SJB).
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair
HEADLAMP BULB
WARNING: The bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the glass envelope is
scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass
envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: The headlamp bulb should not be removed from the headlamp until just before a new
bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect headlamp bulb
performance. Contaminants may enter the headlamp where they can settle on the lens and
reflector. Never turn on the headlamps with the bulb removed.
NOTE: Make sure the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position.
1. Disconnect the headlamp bulb electrical connector. 2. Rotate the headlamp bulb one-eighth turn
counterclockwise and remove the headlamp bulb. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-13
View 151-28
Diagrams > Multifunction Switch
C202
Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 7595
C2065

Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-13
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7602
C205
Page 7603
Page 7604
HEADLAMP SWITCH

Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-28
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
License Plate Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
been simplified.
Current Flow (1)
Diagrams.
Splices (3)
Component Names (5)

the wire color.
"Symbols".
Power Distribution
Ground Distribution
C904
on the vehicle.
WARNINGS

the procedure.
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Symbols (Part 2)
Symbols (Part 3)
Symbols (Part 4)
Symbols (Part 5)
License Plate Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
terminal.
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
7 = Seal
1 = Proper crimp
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
6 = Male half
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
signal.
4 = Grounding foil
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
NOTE: -
splice.
wire size
harness.
License Plate Lamp: Connector Views
C452
C462
License Plate Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
92-1
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Marker Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
been simplified.
Current Flow (1)
Diagrams.
Splices (3)
Component Names (5)

the wire color.
"Symbols".
Power Distribution
Ground Distribution
C904
on the vehicle.
WARNINGS

the procedure.
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Symbols (Part 2)
Symbols (Part 3)
Symbols (Part 4)
Symbols (Part 5)
Marker Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
terminal.
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
7 = Seal
1 = Proper crimp
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
6 = Male half
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
signal.
4 = Grounding foil
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
NOTE: -
splice.
wire size
harness.
Marker Lamp: Connector Views
C151
C161
Marker Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
92-1
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7650
Marker Lamp: Service and Repair
SIDE LAMP/FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB
Side Lamp (Escape)

Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb (Escape)
Front turn signal lamp
1. Disconnect the front turn signal lamp electrical connector. 2. Rotate the front turn signal lamp
bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove from the headlamp
assembly.
- Separate the bulb from the bulb holder.
Side lamp
3. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 4. Remove the 4 fender splash shield bolts.

5. Remove the 4 fender splash shield pin-type retainers. 6. Remove the screw and position the
fender splash shield aside. 7. Rotate the side lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn
counterclockwise and remove from the headlamp assembly.
8. Remove the side lamp bulb from the bulb holder.
Front turn signal lamp or side lamp

Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 7657
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay >
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay >
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Left Turn Relay
Component Information > Locations > Left Turn Relay > Page 7671
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Turn Relay
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Turn Relay > Page 7674
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor
View 151-13
Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor > Page 7680
View 151-13
Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor
C287
Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor > Page 7683
C286
LIGHT SENSOR

Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
View 151-10
View 151-11
View 151-12
Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
C167
Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 7693
C169

Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
View 151-22
C278
Typical BPP Switch
as follows:
STOPLAMP SWITCH

Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component
View 151-21
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component
C479
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
View 151-13
View 151-28
Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch
C202
Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 7711
C2065

Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
View 151-13
C205
HEADLAMP SWITCH

Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component
View 151-28
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
View 151-13
View 151-28
C202

Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Tail Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
been simplified.
Current Flow (1)
Diagrams.
Splices (3)
Component Names (5)

the wire color.
"Symbols".
Power Distribution
Ground Distribution
C904
on the vehicle.
WARNINGS

the procedure.
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Symbols (Part 2)
Symbols (Part 3)
Symbols (Part 4)
Symbols (Part 5)
Tail Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
terminal.
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
7 = Seal
1 = Proper crimp
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
6 = Male half
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
signal.
4 = Grounding foil
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
NOTE: -
splice.
wire size
harness.
Tail Lamp: Connector Views
C1023
C1043
C4032
C4035
Tail Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
92-1
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
been simplified.
Current Flow (1)
Diagrams.
Splices (3)
Component Names (5)

the wire color.
"Symbols".
Power Distribution
Ground Distribution
C904
on the vehicle.
WARNINGS

the procedure.
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Symbols (Part 2)
Symbols (Part 3)
Symbols (Part 4)
Symbols (Part 5)
Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids
terminal.
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
7 = Seal
1 = Proper crimp
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
6 = Male half
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
signal.
4 = Grounding foil
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
NOTE: -
splice.
wire size
harness.
Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams
95-1
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
The trailer lamps are supplied power by the trailer tow park lamp relay, the LH trailer tow stop/turn
relay and the RH trailer tow stop/turn relay and are energized to correspond with the exterior
lighting functions of the vehicle. A common ground is provided to the trailer tow connector for the
trailer lamps.
1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating
correctly. If not, refer to the appropriate pinpoint test. 3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of
electrical damage.
Electrical -
8 (20A) (trailer tow parking lamps)
- 14 (15A) (trailer tow stop/turn relays)
- Trailer tow stop/turn relays
- Trailer
4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom
Symptom Chart
Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests
Test X: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - All
PINPOINT TEST X: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - ALL
Normal Operation
The trailer tow connector receives ground through circuit RAT08 (WH) for all of the trailer lamps.
- Trailer
X1
Test Y: The Individual Trailer Lamp Is Inoperative - Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
PINPOINT TEST Y: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMP IS INOPERATIVE - TRAILER STOP/TURN

LAMP
Normal Operation
The battery junction box (BJB) fuse 14 (15A) supplies voltage to the LH and RH trailer tow
stop/turn relays. The trailer tow stop/turn relay coils are grounded through circuit GD120 (BK/GN).
The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage from circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the
- Fuse
- Trailer
Y1-Y2
Y3-Y4
Y5
Test Z: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - Trailer Parking Lamps
PINPOINT TEST Z: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - TRAILER PARKING LAMPS
Normal Operation
vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil is grounded through
circuit GD120 (BK/GN). The battery junction box (BJB) fuse 8 (20A) supplies voltage to the trailer
tow parking lamp relay switch side. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, the
voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN).
- Fuse
- Trailer
Z1
Z1-Z4
Z4-Z5
Tests AA: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously
PINPOINT TEST AA: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY
Normal Operation - Trailer Tow Turn/Stoplamp
The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the
Normal Operation - Trailer Tow Parking

vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, voltage
is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN).
- Trailer tow relay
- Trailer
AA1-AA2
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page
7783
Special Tool(s)
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Application
and ID
Turn Signal Flasher: Application and ID
The flasher function for this vehicle is provided by the Smart Junction Box (SJB).
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component
Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair
SIDE LAMP/FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB
Side Lamp (Escape)

Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb (Escape)
Front turn signal lamp
1. Disconnect the front turn signal lamp electrical connector. 2. Rotate the front turn signal lamp
bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove from the headlamp
assembly.
- Separate the bulb from the bulb holder.
Side lamp
3. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 4. Remove the 4 fender splash shield bolts.

5. Remove the 4 fender splash shield pin-type retainers. 6. Remove the screw and position the
fender splash shield aside. 7. Rotate the side lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn
counterclockwise and remove from the headlamp assembly.
8. Remove the side lamp bulb from the bulb holder.
Front turn signal lamp or side lamp

Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Left Turn Relay
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Left Turn Relay > Page 7798
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Left Turn Relay
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Left Turn Relay > Page 7801
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-13
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7805
View 151-28
Page 7806
C202
Page 7807

Page 7808
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Vanity Mirror Lamp,
Left
C907
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Vanity Mirror Lamp,
Left > Page 7813
C906
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch
View 151-20
View 151-20
View 151-19
View 151-18
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch
C504A
C504B
C604
C701
C801
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch
NOTE:
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations >
Driver Side Front
View 151-18
Driver Side Front > Page 7849
View 151-19
View 151-20
View 151-20
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Driver Side Front
C524
C608
C703
C803
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Window Adjust Switch
View 151-20
> Window Adjust Switch > Page 7861
View 151-20
View 151-19
View 151-18
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window Adjust Switch
C504A
> Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 7866
C504B
C604
C701
C801
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch
and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 7871
and Inspection > Page 7874
NOTE:
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11

BEFORE 8/13/2010
SERVICE PROCEDURE
(Exploded View).
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7885
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Disclaimer
Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
12/23/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
Exploded View.

102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.

Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page
7891
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11

BEFORE 8/13/2010
SERVICE PROCEDURE
(Exploded View).
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Page 7897
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Page 7898
Disclaimer
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
12/23/10

SERVICE PROCEDURE
Exploded View.

102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.

> Page 7903
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7904
Exploded View

Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component
Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair
WINDOW GLASS - LIFTGATE
1. Open the liftgate window glass. 2. Remove the 2 liftgate window glass nut access covers. 3.
Through the RH access, disconnect the liftgate window glass electrical harness connector. 4.
Disconnect the LH heated window grid wire electrical connector.
Disconnect the 2 liftgate window glass cylinders. 1

Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket.
2 Disconnect the socket from the ball stud.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component
Remove the 2 liftgate window glass hinge nuts and the liftgate window glass. -

Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair
WINDOW GLASS - REAR QUARTER

Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Material
Material
Removal
WARNING: -
Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
- Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have pointed or sharp edges.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
LH rear quarter window glass 1. If equipped, remove the auxiliary climate control housing. 2. If
equipped, remove the bolt and the auxiliary climate control upper housing bracket.
All rear quarter window glass 3. Remove the headliner.
4. NOTE:
- Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool when cutting.
- Locating pins need to be cut through in order to remove the rear quarter window glass. The new
quarter window glass will be equipped with new locating pins.
Using the special tool, cut the urethane adhesive from the quarter window glass starting at the top
center and working toward the bottom corners and remove the rear quarter window glass.
5. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld.
Installation
All rear quarter window glass
WARNING: Do not drive vehicle until the urethane seal has cured. Follow urethane manufacturer's
curing directions. Inadequate or incorrect curing of the urethane seal will adversely affect glass
retention. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
1. Dry fit the rear quarter window glass, making alignment marks with tape or non-staining grease
pencil.
2. WARNING: Repair any corrosion found on the pinch weld. The pinch weld is a structural
component of the vehicle. Corrosion left
unrepaired may reduce the structural integrity of the vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
NOTE: Do not scratch the pinch weld area. For minor scratches or exposed metal on the pinch
weld, see manufacturer's recommendations.
Trim the remaining urethane adhesive on the pinch weld to the specification. -
The existing urethane adhesive surface should be smooth and free of cuts and contamination.
3. Clean the inside of the rear quarter window glass surface with glass cleaner, making sure the
ceramic coated area is clean.
4. CAUTION: If installing a LH rear quarter window on the Escape Hybrid, do not apply urethane
glass prep to the polycarbonate vent of
the window assembly.
NOTE: -
Be sure to use the same brand and cure-rate products for the adhesive and primer. Do not mix
different brands of urethane and primer. Refer to the Material Chart.
- Sika uses the same black primer for the glass and pinch weld area.
If installing a new rear window glass, apply urethane glass primer according to manufacturer's
instructions. Allow at least 6 minutes to dry.
5. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.

6. NOTE:
- Use caution when applying urethane adhesive. Apply to the outside edges of locating pins on the
glass surface.
- Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane with less
effort and a continuous bead.
Apply a bead of urethane adhesive starting at the bottom and work around to the sides of the rear
quarter window glass to specification.
7. Install the rear quarter window glass, aligning it to the marks previously made.
8. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before testing for air or
water leaks.
After the urethane has cured, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where needed.
9. If necessary, remove excess urethane adhesive from the exterior surface of the quarter window
glass.
10. Install the headliner.
LH quarter window glass 11. If equipped, install the auxiliary climate control upper housing bracket
and the bolt. 12. If equipped, install the auxiliary climate control housing.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11

BEFORE 8/13/2010
SERVICE PROCEDURE
(Exploded View).
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Disclaimer
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11

BEFORE 8/13/2010
SERVICE PROCEDURE
(Exploded View).
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched >
Page 7932
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched >
Page 7933
Disclaimer

Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
top run bolt.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
WINDOW REGULATOR - FRONT DOOR
Exploded View
1. Remove the front door trim panel.

2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket.
3. Remove the 3 pushpins and pad assembly.
Using the window control switch, lower the front door window glass to gain access to the front door
2 front door window glass screws.
9. Support the front door window glass in the full up position with tape.
10. Disconnect the front door window motor electrical connector. 11. Remove the front door
window regulator and motor bolt.

12. Loosen the 2 front door window regulator and motor bolts.
13. Remove the 2 nuts and the front door window regulator and motor.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair

WINDOW REGULATOR - REAR DOOR
Exploded View
Part 1
Part 2
1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket.
Using the window control switch, lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the rear door
2 rear door window glass screws.
8. Support the rear door window glass in the full up position with tape. 9. Disconnect the rear door
window motor electrical connector.
10. Remove the rear door window regulator and motor bolt.

11. Loosen the 2 rear door window regulator and motor bolts.
12. Remove the 2 nuts and the rear door window regulator and motor.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Windshield: Procedures
GLASS RESEAL - WINDSHIELD
Material
Material
1. Remove the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. 2. Remove the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings.
3. Open the front overhead console door, remove the 2 screws and the overhead console.
- If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips.
5. Partially lower the front portion of the headliner and block with a suitable material. 6. Remove the
cowl panel grille. 7. Clean the interior and exterior of the windshield glass surface with glass
cleaner. 8. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.
9. NOTE:
- Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane with less
effort and a continuous bead.
- Make sure all gaps in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one continuous bead.
Apply urethane adhesive over the top of the existing urethane adhesive. -
Apply the urethane adhesive to the top and sides of the windshield from the interior of the vehicle.
- Apply the urethane adhesive to the bottom of the windshield from the exterior of the vehicle.
10. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before testing for air or
water leaks.
After the urethane has cured, check the windshield seal for air or water leaks through the urethane
adhesive bead and add urethane adhesive as necessary.
11. Install the cowl panel grille. 12. Position the front portion of the headliner. 13. Install the LH and
RH sun visors and visor clips.
- If equipped, connect the electrical connectors.

> Page 7951
14. Position the overhead console and install the 2 overhead console screws.
- If equipped, connect the electrical connector.
15. Install the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings. 16. Install the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels.
> Page 7952
Windshield: Removal and Replacement
WINDSHIELD GLASS
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Material
Material
> Page 7953
Removal
WARNING: -
Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
- Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have pointed or sharp edges.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
1. Remove the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. 2. Remove the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings.
3. Open the front overhead console door, remove the 2 screws and the overhead console.
- If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the interior rear view mirror. 5. Remove the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips.
6. Partially lower the front portion of the headliner and block with a suitable material. 7. Remove the
cowl panel grille. 8. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the
pinch weld.
> Page 7954
9. NOTE: Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool when cutting.
Using the special tool, cut the urethane adhesive from the windshield glass starting at the top
center and working toward the bottom corners.
10. Using the special tool, distance the windshield glass from the body.
11. Using the special tool, cut the remaining urethane adhesive and remove the windshield glass.
12. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld.
Installation
WARNING: Do not drive vehicle until the urethane seal has cured. Follow urethane manufacturer's
curing directions. Inadequate or incorrect curing of the urethane seal will adversely affect glass
retention. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
CAUTION: Open the windows to prevent the windshield glass from being pushed out by air
pressure if the doors are closed.
1. Dry fit the windshield glass, making alignment marks with tape or a non-staining grease pencil.
2. WARNING: Repair any corrosion found on the pinch weld. The pinch weld is a structural
component of the vehicle. Corrosion left
unrepaired may reduce the structural integrity of the vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
NOTE: Do not scratch the pinch weld area. For minor scratches or exposed metal on the pinch
weld, see manufacturer's recommendations.
Trim the remaining urethane adhesive on the pinch weld to within the specification. -
The existing urethane adhesive surface should be smooth and free of cuts and contamination.
> Page 7955
3. If reinstalling the original windshield glass, remove the excess urethane adhesive and the
windshield moulding. 4. Clean the inside of the windshield glass surface with glass cleaner making
sure the ceramic-coated area is clean.
5. NOTE:
- Be sure to use the same brand and cure-rate products for the adhesive and primer. Do not mix
different brands of urethane and primer. Refer to the Material Chart.
- Sika uses the same black primer for the glass and pinch weld area.
If installing a new windshield glass, apply urethane glass primer according to manufacturer's
instructions. Allow at least 6 minutes to dry.
6. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.
7. NOTE: Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane
with less effort and a continuous bead.
Apply urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld.
Make sure that all gaps in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one continuous bead starting
and ending at the bottom of the windshield near the center.
8. Install the windshield glass, aligning it to the marks previously made.
9. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before testing for air and
water leaks.
After the urethane adhesive has cured, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where
needed.
10. If necessary, remove excess urethane adhesive from the exterior surface of the windshield
glass. 11. Install the cowl panel grille. 12. Reposition the front portion of the headliner. 13. Install
the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips.
- If equipped, connect the electrical connectors.
14. Install the interior rear view mirror. 15. Position the overhead console and install the 2 overhead
console screws.
- If equipped, connect the electrical connector.
16. Install the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings. 17. Install the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Check Valve, Washer > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Check Valve: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid
Onto Hood
Check Valve: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
TSB 10-13-1
07/19/10
WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking
washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse
washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included
in the kit.
Parts Block
101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K605 07
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Check Valve, Washer > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Check Valve: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer
Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
Check Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto
Hood
TSB 10-13-1
07/19/10
SERVICE PROCEDURE
in the kit.
Parts Block
101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K605 07
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-13
View 151-28
C202
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
View 151-13
View 151-28
C202
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair
WASHER HOSE REPAIR
NOTE: This procedure may be carried out on rubber hoses only. If a plastic washer hose is leaking,
a new washer hose must be installed.
1. Locate and verify the leaking washer hose. 2. Cut the hose cleanly and remove the damaged
portion of the washer hose.
3. Install a windshield washer hose adapter between the cut ends of the hose.
4. NOTE: In difficult cases, clamping may be required.
Install a segment of 6.4 mm (0.25 in) ID black rubber hose over the ends of the washer hose and
clamp both ends of the rubber hose using spring clamps.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7989
C1397
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Washer Pump
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Washer Pump
WASHER PUMP
Exploded View
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the RH front fender splash
shield. 3. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector.
4. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical
advice. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the connector, do not use hand tools to remove/install the
washer pump hose.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
washer pump removal.
Disconnect the washer pump hoses. -
Gently twist the lock ring until the ring has rotated approximately 90 degrees.
- The hose should slide easily out of the connection.
- To install, make sure the hoses are fully seated and locked into place.
and Repair > Washer Pump > Page 7994
5. CAUTION: Do not leave the lock ring in the disassembled position. This will weaken the ring and
may prevent it from correctly locking
in place when reassembled, resulting in a leak.
Rotate the lock ring back to the original location.
6. CAUTION: When installing a new washer pump, be careful not to damage the rubber grommet.
Remove the washer pump.
7. CAUTION: Do not operate the washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir.
Failure to follow these instructions may
result in premature pump failure.
Fill the windshield washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid.

Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Washer Pump and Reservoir
WASHER PUMP AND RESERVOIR
Exploded View
washer pump hose.
removal.
6. Remove the 2 windshield washer reservoir bolts and the windshield washer reservoir.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair
WASHER PUMP AND RESERVOIR
Exploded View
washer pump hose.
removal.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service
6. Remove the 2 windshield washer reservoir bolts and the windshield washer reservoir.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 >
Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak
Fluid Onto Hood
TSB 10-13-1
07/19/10
SERVICE PROCEDURE
in the kit.
Parts Block
101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K605 07
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 >
Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Washer
Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
TSB 10-13-1
07/19/10
SERVICE PROCEDURE
in the kit.
Parts Block
101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K605 07
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-13
> Page 8017
View 151-28
> Page 8018
C202
> Page 8019
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Arm: > 09-8-8 > May > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear Windshield
Wiper Arm: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear Windshield
TSB 09-8-8
05/04/09
WINDSHIELD WIPER PERFORMANCE - BUILT BEFORE 4/1/2008

ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles, built before 4/1/2008, may exhibit windshield
wiper performance issues, such as smearing/streaking, near the middle of the blade during 2nd
half of travel. A new wiper arm has been released to improve wiper performance.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Inspect part number on vehicle wiper arm(s). (Figure 1)
2. If part number starts with 8L84-, then replace both windshield wiper arm(s) and blade(s) per
Workshop Manual, Section 501-16. If the part number
starts with 9L84-, then this procedure does not apply and the vehicle is already equipped with the
latest parts.
NOTE
WIPER BLADES ARE NOT COVERED UNDER WARRANTY BEYOND THE FIRST 12 MONTHS
IN SERVICE.
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Arm: > 09-8-8 > May > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear Windshield >
Page 8028
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace Both Wiper Arms And Blades (Do Not Use With 17526A,
17528A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17527 07
Disclaimer
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Arm: > 07-23-16 > Nov > 07 > Wipers/Washers - Wiper Chatter or Noise
Wiper Arm: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Wiper Chatter or Noise
TSB 07-23-16
11/26/07
WINDSHIELD WIPER CHATTER/NOISE - BUILT ONLY ON 4/14/2007
FORD: 2008 Escape
ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles built only on 4/14/2007 may exhibit a windshield
wiper chatter or noise when the blades reverse at the top of their travel.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace the wiper arm, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-16.
NOTE
IT SHOULD NOT BE NECESSARY TO REPLACE BOTH OF THE WIPER ARMS. THE

CONCERN IS TYPICALLY EXHIBITED ON ONLY ONE.
072316A 2008 Escape, Mariner Built 0.3 Hr.
On 4/14/2007: Replace One Or Both Windshield Wiper Arm(s) (Do Not Use With 17526A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17526 42
Disclaimer
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Arm: > 09-8-8 > May > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear
Windshield
Wiper Arm: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear Windshield
TSB 09-8-8
05/04/09
WINDSHIELD WIPER PERFORMANCE - BUILT BEFORE 4/1/2008

ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles, built before 4/1/2008, may exhibit windshield
wiper performance issues, such as smearing/streaking, near the middle of the blade during 2nd
half of travel. A new wiper arm has been released to improve wiper performance.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Inspect part number on vehicle wiper arm(s). (Figure 1)
2. If part number starts with 8L84-, then replace both windshield wiper arm(s) and blade(s) per
Workshop Manual, Section 501-16. If the part number
starts with 9L84-, then this procedure does not apply and the vehicle is already equipped with the
latest parts.
NOTE
WIPER BLADES ARE NOT COVERED UNDER WARRANTY BEYOND THE FIRST 12 MONTHS
IN SERVICE.
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Arm: > 09-8-8 > May > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear
Windshield > Page 8038
Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace Both Wiper Arms And Blades (Do Not Use With 17526A,
17528A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17527 07
Disclaimer
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Arm: > 07-23-16 > Nov > 07 > Wipers/Washers - Wiper Chatter or Noise
Wiper Arm: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Wiper Chatter or Noise
TSB 07-23-16
11/26/07
WINDSHIELD WIPER CHATTER/NOISE - BUILT ONLY ON 4/14/2007
FORD: 2008 Escape
ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles built only on 4/14/2007 may exhibit a windshield
wiper chatter or noise when the blades reverse at the top of their travel.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Replace the wiper arm, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-16.
NOTE
IT SHOULD NOT BE NECESSARY TO REPLACE BOTH OF THE WIPER ARMS. THE

CONCERN IS TYPICALLY EXHIBITED ON ONLY ONE.
072316A 2008 Escape, Mariner Built 0.3 Hr.
On 4/14/2007: Replace One Or Both Windshield Wiper Arm(s) (Do Not Use With 17526A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17526 42
Disclaimer
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Wiper
Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield
Wiper Arm: Adjustments Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield
WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT - WINDSHIELD
1. Cycle and park the windshield wipers. 2. Verify that the RH and LH wiper blades are located at
the specified position.
3. NOTE: Make sure there is no mechanical binding in the linkage preventing the wiper arms from
returning to the fully parked position.
If not within specification, remove the nuts and the windshield wiper pivot arms and reposition them
to the correct locations. -

Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Wiper
Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield > Page 8045
Wiper Arm: Adjustments Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Rear
WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT - REAR
1. Cycle and park the rear window wiper. 2. Verify that the rear window wiper blade is located at
the specified position.
3. If not within specification, remove the rear window wiper pivot arm and reposition it to the correct
location.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper
WIPER PIVOT ARM - WINDSHIELD WIPER
Exploded View

Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper > Page 8048
1. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
Remove the 2 wiper pivot arm nuts. -
2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft
WIPER MOUNTING ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT
Exploded View
1. Remove the cowl panel grille.

2. Remove the 3 windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly bolts and the windshield
wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly.
3. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the wiper motor
assembly. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear
WIPER PIVOT ARM - REAR
Exploded View
1. Open the wiper pivot arm cover.
2. Remove the pivot arm nut.

3. Remove the wiper pivot arm. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair
Wiper Blade: Service and Repair
WIPER BLADE - REAR
Exploded View
Removal
CAUTION: -
Lifting the wiper arm beyond its maximum angle may result in damage to the wiper arm or the
wiper arm heel.
- Allowing the wiper arm to contact the glass may result in damage to the glass.
1. Hold the wiper arm with one hand close to the wiper arm and wiper blade pivot joint and lift the
arm to its maximum angle. 2. Hold the primary structure of the wiper blade with the other hand
close to the wiper arm and wiper blade pivot joint. 3. Tightly grip and push on the wiper arm and
wiper blade joint from beneath and separate the blade from the arm.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Page 8056
Installation
1. Attach the new wiper blade on the wiper arm and press it into place until a snap is heard.
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Windshield
Wiper Motor
View 151-2
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Windshield
Wiper Motor > Page 8061
View 151-21
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Windshield
Wiper Motor
C125
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Windshield
Wiper Motor > Page 8064
C476
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Wiper Motor - Windshield
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor - Windshield
WIPER MOTOR - WINDSHIELD
Exploded View

Wiper Motor - Windshield > Page 8067
NOTE: A new wiper motor assembly comes with the linkage arm installed.
1. Remove the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft.
2. CAUTION: Do not remove the wiper motor linkage arm from the wiper motor assembly. If the
arm is removed, the wiper arms may not
park in the correct location.
Separate the wiper motor linkage arm from the wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. -
Use a suitable tool at the location shown to separate the wiper linkage arm from the wiper
mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly.
3. Remove the 3 bolts and the wiper motor.

Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor - Rear Window
WIPER MOTOR - REAR WINDOW
Exploded View
1. Remove the rear pivot arm. 2. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut cover. 3. Remove the rear
wiper motor shaft nut.
- To install, manually finger-tighten the nut, then tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).

4. Open the liftgate window. 5. Remove the rear wiper motor cover trim panel.
6. Remove the rear wiper motor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the 2 rear window wiper motor nuts. -

3 Remove the rear window wiper motor.

Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-13
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8073
View 151-28
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8074
C202

Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual v6 3 0l 2008

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual v6 3 0l 2008

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual v6 3 0l 2008

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Factory Workshop Manual

Engine and year

Please navigate through the PDF using the options

This manual was submitted by

SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES

MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer

ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.

normal WSM Diagnostics.

WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only

SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES

MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer

ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.

normal WSM Diagnostics.

WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only

Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair

PARKING AID MODULE

Removal and Installation

Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair

Removal and Installation

^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-inch).

^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft).

4. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module.

^ To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-inch).

5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Configure the ABS module.

AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CLUTCH RELAY (A/CCR)

FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape

MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner

OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME

082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.

BASIC PART NO. CODE

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER / MESSAGE CENTER - AUTOLOCK / AUTOUNLOCK / AUTOLAMP

FORD: 2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape

MERCURY: 2008 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner

ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.

c. Select the toolbox.

d. Select Module Programming.

e. Select Programmable Parameters.

f. Select Power Door Locks.

g. Select Enable for each Autolock / Autounlock selection.

OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME

081902A 2008 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.

BASIC PART NO. CODE

FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape

MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner

OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME

082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr.

BASIC PART NO. CODE

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER / MESSAGE CENTER - AUTOLOCK / AUTOUNLOCK / AUTOLAMP

FORD: 2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape

MERCURY: 2008 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner

ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.

c. Select the toolbox.

d. Select Module Programming.

e. Select Programmable Parameters.

f. Select Power Door Locks.

g. Select Enable for each Autolock / Autounlock selection.

OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME

081902A 2008 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr.